COMPETITION MANUAL 16th EDITION

Nippers • Juniors • Seniors • MastersCOMPETITION MANUAL 16th EDITION

February, 2020

Preface: Page i (2020 Edition - DRAFT)

Lifesaving South Africa

COMPETITION MANUAL

Nippers, Juniors, Seniors and Masters 16th EDITION

February, 2020

This manual has been produced by Lifesaving South Africa (LSA). This manual deals with all aspects of LSA competitions. All references to masculine gender should be read as applying to male and female, boys and girls. All references made in this manual to the term “LSA”, shall imply the “next level (authority) of LSA” - e.g. National, Provincial, District, Regional, Branch or Club in that order also referred to as “lifesaving authority”. Note: The original (source) document for this manual is the electronic version located on the websites of LSA (www.lifesaving.co.za). The electronic version is the authorised reference document and is maintained in terms of all authorised amendments. LSA may issue bulletins in accordance with its constitution to supplement this written publication. Bulletins will also be available on LSA’s website.

Issued by Lifesaving South Africa

16th Edition - Issued February 2020 © Copyright: 2019 Lifesaving South Africa

With effect from 1st February 2020

Preface: Page ii (2020 Edition - DRAFT)

Copyright This manual is copyright. Apart from any fair dealing for the purposes of private study, research, criticism, or review, as permitted under the Copyright Act, no part may be reproduced by any process without written permission of Lifesaving South Africa (LSA). In any discrepancy between the Official LSA electronic version of the LSA Competition Manual and any print editions, the most recent Official LSA electronic version is deemed to be the definitive text. Trademarks Trademarks of the International Life Saving Federation are: World Water Safety ™, Oceanman ™ and Oceanwoman ™, ILS Logo ™, ILS Flag ™, ILS Song ™, Rescue Series ™, Lifesaving World Championships ™, World Conference on Drowning Prevention TM, Red over Yellow TM. Note: A trademark application for “Ocean M” is currently being sought.

Enquiries should be addressed to:

The General Manager Lifesaving South Africa 35 Livingstone Road DURBAN 4001 SOUTH AFRICA Telephone: 031-312 9251 Facsimile: 031-312 5612/086 615 9716 E-Mail: [email protected] or e-mail: [email protected]

mailto:[email protected]

Preface: Page iii (2020 Edition - DRAFT)

INTRODUCTION This Manual is issued by LSA under its constitution. It is made for the proper advancement, encouragement, management and administration of lifesaving competitions in South Africa. It is to be interpreted in accordance with the constitution of LSA. In the event of any inconsistency between this manual and the LSA constitution the LSA constitution takes precedence. This manual binds the members of LSA as defined under the LSA constitution. The members of LSA acknowledge and agree that: 1. They are bound by, and will comply with, the constitution and regulations (including this manual) of

LSA. 2. This manual is made in the mutual and collective benefit of LSA, its members and lifesaving. It aims

to ensure a safe and fair system or framework within which lifesaving competitions are to be regulated and conducted in South Africa.

3. This manual is not made for any anti-competitive purpose and in particular not for the purpose of deterring or preventing a member from competing in any LSA Activity.

4. Lifesaving can be inherently dangerous. Serious accidents can and often do happen which may result in property damage, physical injury and even death. All members are assumed to have voluntarily read and understood this warning and accept and assume the inherent risks in lifesaving.

5. Except where provided or required by law and cannot be excluded, it is a term of LSA membership or entry to competition (if accepted) that LSA is absolved from all liability however arising from injury or damage however caused (whether fatal or otherwise) arising out of membership and/or participation in any LSA activity. For the purposes of this introduction “LSA Activity” means any competition or other activity authorised or recognised by LSA.

6. In consideration of LSA accepting an application for entry to competition the member:

• Releases and will release LSA from all claims that they may have or may have had but for this release arising from or in connection with participation in any LSA Activity.

• Indemnifies and will keep indemnified LSA to the extent permitted by law in respect of any claim by any person including but not only another member arising as a result of or in connection with participation in any LSA competition.

7. “Claim” means and includes any action, suit, proceeding, claim, demand, damage, penalty, cost or expense however arising including but not limited to negligence but does not include a claim against LSA under any right expressly conferred by the LSA constitution.

8. Only members of LSA as defined under the LSA constitution or other persons duly recognised by LSA may compete or participate (including officiating) in a LSA activity.

9. No member of LSA as defined under the LSA constitution shall take part or be involved in any way, in a lifesaving competition and/or related activity unless that competition or activity is authorised, licensed or otherwise sanctioned by LSA and written permission to take part has been obtained from LSA.

It is imperative this manual is read and fully understood by Competition Organisers, Officials, Technical Officials, Referees, Team Managers, Coaches and Competitors. This manual contains all the latest changes of the rules and regulations from LSA with regard to competition required for Technical Officials, Coaches and Competitors when taking part in LSA competition. Lifesaving competition is intended for bona-fide lifesavers who have demonstrated a commitment to lifesaving - they are fore-mostly Lifesavers first, Competitors second. LSA considers it unethical and conduct unbecoming to recruit competitors for only their high-performance athletic ability whose lifesaving credentials are tenuous or merely convenient for purposes of competition.

Craig van Rooyen LSA Director: Sport 15th January, 2020

Preface: Page iv (2020 Edition - DRAFT)

ACKNOWLEDGEMENT The International Lifesaving Federation (ILS) Competition Manual (2019 Edition – October 2019), the New Zealand Surf lifesaving Surf Sport Competition Manual (October 2019) and the Australian Surf Lifesaving Surf Sports Manual (36th Edition – August 2019) have given guidance in compiling this Competition Manual. In particular, LSA acknowledges the following persons for their significant contributions to the 16th edition (February 2020) of this manual: Handbook Revision Sub-Committee: Jelle Meintsma Convenor John Coyne Allen Pembroke Graham Lewis Annelie Lourens Marna Pieterse Lesley Lunn (drawings)

Preface: Page v (2020 Edition - DRAFT)

PREFACE TO THE SIXTEENTH EDITION LSA reviews the Competition Manual on a regular basis to keep pace with changes implemented by ILS and other lifesaving federations. Each edition of the Competition Manual benefits from the learning at the various competitions and championships. In this revised edition (February 2020) of the competition manual the following overall changes are made: Format The LSA Management Board decided that there should be one Competition Manual, i.e. Surf, Pool and Ocean combined as one manual. Furthermore, it was agreed by the Rules and Technical Committee that the section in “Duties of the Officials” and “Competition Administration” should be part of the Manual. This new Manual is an edit, re-wording of sections and removing duplications. No major changes have been made to the rules, except where there have been minor changes as in the ILS Competition Manual and the inclusion of new events, such as the ‘M’ course Iron Man/Woman and Taplin. The structure is:

Section 1: Competition Safety Section 2: General Competitive Conditions Section 3: Competition Entry Requirements Section 4: Surf Competition Section 5: Pool Competition Section 6: Open Water Competition Section 7: SERC Competition Section 8: Protests, Appeals and Discipline Section 9: Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures Section 10: National and Inter-Provincial Championships Section 11: Officials and their Duties Section 12: Competition Administration APPENDIX

Section 1: Competition Safety The changes are:

1. Inclusion of a section of Use of Personal Protective Equipment. 2. Inclusion and review of the Nipper Safety Officers at a Nipper Competition. 3. Inclusion of “Authority for Suspension/Relocation/Cancellation of Competition” check list. 4. Inclusion of a “Surf Contingency Options - Major Competition Event Prioritisation Table”. 5. Inclusion of a “Pool Risk Assessment Worksheet”.

Section 2: General Competitive Conditions Review of the entire section, removing all the Surf General Competitive Conditions and make it relevant to Pool and Surf combined. The sections applicable to Surf only or Pool only have been moved to the Pool Section and Surf Section. The other changes are:

1. Moved the section on Nipper Safety: “Safety Officers and Safety at Nipper Competitions” to Section 1: Competition Safety.

2. Reviewed section on Dual Membership. 3. Reviewed section on International Transfers and International Teams competing at our National

Championships. 4. Section of Trans Gender Policy. 5. Use of Helmets, Vest, Headgear, Stinger Suits and Personal Floatation Device. 6. Included a section on “Special Circumstances” for limited competition eligibility. 7. New section on use of Body Tape.

Section 3: Competition Entry Requirements New section compiled from General Competitive Condition (Section 2) and National Championships (Section 10). No changes, except:

1. Life members who have obtained life membership through service (patrols) and are younger than 24 years, are not required to do their Annual Re-Test.

Preface: Page vi (2020 Edition - DRAFT)

2. Introduction of a new age group for Masters – 75 year +. Section 4 Surf Competition

1. Rewrite of section to include General Competitive Condition applicable to Surf Competitions 2. Inclusion of the protests and appeal for flags 3. General: Clarification that using the swimming buoys in swimming events and swimming legs of

events to drag across the course is not permitted. 4. The start procedures have been reworded. 5. Clarification of the use of electronic equipment to assist with event judging. 6. Clarification of the seeding process and replacement of withdrawn competitors or teams. 7. Amendment of allowable protest and appeal processes for beach flag event eliminations. 8. The default lap distance for the Beach Run and Beach Run Relay be 500 m or 1 km dependent on

beach conditions. 9. The Beach Run Relay has been changed from a 2 x 1 km event to a 3 x 1 km event 10. Revised Masters Ski Relay course 11. Revised Masters Board Relay course. 12. Addition of the Ocean M event. 13. Addition of the eliminator format for the Oceanman, Oceanwoman and Ocean M events. 14. Revised Masters Oceanman/Oceanwoman Relay course 15. Addition of the Ocean M Lifesaver Relay event.

Section 5: Pool Competition 1. Rewrite of section to include general condition applicable to Pool Competitions 2. Clarification that the use of body tape for preventative, medical or therapeutic/kineso purposes is

allowed at the discretion of the Chief Referee as long as it does not provide a competitive advantage to improve grip, grasp, or propulsuion.

3. Clarification that the Chief Referee may permit the re-run/re-throw of a race due to equipment failure provided by the Organising Committee or because of interference. The re-run/re-throw time shall be the official time.

4. Clarification that no protest or appeal is permitted by a competitor/team/handler if they are not in attendance for the start for the start of race or are improperly attired.

5. The manikin carry rules have been amended to remove the disqualification for carrying the manikin on an angle towards the pool bottom or face down.

6. The manikin towing rules have been amended to remove the disqualification for a manikin rotating within the rescue tube providing the head remains above the water. Note: The line of the rescue tube must still be fully extended by the time the top of the manikin’s head passes the 10 m line

7. The requirement to secure the manikin under both arms at the 5m mark has been modified to securing the manikin within 10 m mark.

8. Amendments to the Line Throw event include: a. It is clarified that the victim can slide their hand anywhere along the bar but must be

grasping the bar when touching the line with any part of their body and when grasping the line.

b. It is clarified that throwers must keep at least one foot wholly within the inside edge of the throw zone, either on the ground or in the air above the throw zone. Any part of the thrower’s feet may cross over the front of the “pool edge” of the throw zone without penalty.

9. Specific amendments to the Manikin Relay include: a. The mid pool changeover line has been to 5 metres. b. Clarification that competitors not involved in a change must stay clear of an exchange.

10. Specific amendments to the Medley Relay include: a. The victim must be in contact with the rescue tube before passing the 10 m line. b. The victim may grip the main body of the rescue tube or clip but not the rope

11. Specific amendments to the Pool Lifesaver Relay include: a. The exchange between the second and third competitor. b. The exchange between the third and fourth competitor.

12. Disqualification Codes have been updated to reflect changes to the pool event rules.

Preface: Page vii (2020 Edition - DRAFT)

Section 6: Open Water Events Rewrite of section to include general condition applicable to Pool Competitions. Including some new

events.

Section 7: SERC No change Section 8: Protests. Appeals and Discipline

1. Defining official start of a competition. 2. Cannot protest against another team. 3. Beach Flags events, a protest against an elimination must be lodged within 5 minutes or before

the next run through of an event begins. No Appeal is permitted on the elimination. 4. Defining format of screen for use of video in protest/appeal

Section 9: Facilities, Equipment Standards and Specification

1. Allowing the 3.2 m Board for use in U/11 and U/12 Nippers Section 10: National and Inter-Provincial Championships Review of the entire section to include Surf, Pool, Open Water and SERC. Also the inclusion of the Inter-Provincial Championships rules, point score and events. The other changes are:

1. Deletion of Pool and Surf Interclub Grand Aggregate. 2. Inclusion of the 3 x 1 km Beach Run Relay in Junior and Senior. 3. Change Masters 2 x 1 km Beach Run Relay to 3 x 1 km. 4. Deletion of Board Rescue in Masters.

Section 11: Officials and their Duties A new section on Duties of Technical Officials.

Section 12: Competition Administration A new section on Competition Administration Appendices Section updated

Preface: Page viii (2020 Edition - DRAFT)

ABBREVIATIONS USED

ARRO Area Risk and Response Officer

DNF Did Not Finish

DQ Disqualified

FIBA International Basket Ball Association

GPS Global Position System

ILS International Lifesaving Federation

IOC International Olympic Committee

IRB Inshore Rescue Boat

JLA Junior Lifeguard Award

LA Lifeguard Award

Lifesaving Authority Province, District, Region, Branch, Club or Kindred Organisation

LTPD Long Term Participation Development Programme

LOC Local Organising Committee

LSA Lifesaving South Africa

PPE Personal Protective Equipment

PFD Personal Flotation Devices

QC Qualifying Certificate

RT Rescue Tube

RTB Rescue Torpedo Buoy

SC Sport Committee

SASCOC South African Sport and Olympic Committee

SCO Start and Change-over Line

SERC Simulated Emergency Response Competition

TO Technical Official

TUE Therapeutic Use Exemption

U/9 Under 9 Nipper

U/10 Under 10 Nipper





U/15 Under 15 Junior



WADA World Anti-Doping Agency

Preface: Page ix (2020 Edition - DRAFT)

GLOSSARY OF TERMS LIFESAVING SPORT: An athletic activity involving physical effort and skill in which an individual, team or crew competes against others. The activity can be recreational or competitive, is capable of achieving a result, and is governed by a set of rules issued by Lifesaving South Africa in conjunction with the International Life Saving Federation.

DISCIPLINE: A discipline is a branch of a sport comprising one or more events. Lifesaving Sport is composed of the following disciplines: Surf, Pool, Simulated Emergency Response and Surf Boats.

COMPETITION: A competition is composed of a programme of events. For example, a surf competition may be made up of 10 events. A championship is a type of competition.

EVENT: An event is a series of races with the same prescribed set of rules and conditions (e.g., facility, equipment, distance and style). In Lifesaving Sport, the pool discipline features swimming and throwing events (e.g., Obstacle Swim). The Surf discipline features, running, swimming and craft events (e.g., Beach Flags).

RACE: A race is a single contest of speed in which the winner is determined by time or place. For example, a single heat of multiple heats is a race; the A-final is a race.

HEATS: Heats are a preliminary set of races which eliminate competitors and in which the winners advance to a next round, quarter final, semifinal or final race.

ROUND: A round is a set of heats of the same event. For example, “This round included 8 heats.”

FINAL: The final is the final race of the fastest qualifying competitors.

A-FINAL: An A-final is a race of the 1st to 8th fastest qualifying competitors to determine the 1st through 8th places.

B-FINAL: A B-final is a race of the 9th to 16th fastest qualifying competitors to determine the 9th through 16th places.

TIME-FINALS: Time-finals are a set of races of the same event where there are no qualifying heats. Event winners are determined by time.

Preface: Page x (2020 Edition - DRAFT)

TABLE OF CONTENT

Section 1 Competition Safety

Section 2 General Competitive Conditions

Section 3 Competition Entry Requirements

Section 4 Surf Competition

Section 5 Pool Competition

Section 6 Open Water Competition

Section 7 SERC Competition

Section 8 Protests, Appeals and Discipline

Section 9 Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures

Section 10 National and Inter-Provincial Championships

Section 11 Officials and their Duties

Section 12 Competition Administration

APPENDICES

Section 1 – Competition Safety

Section 1: Page 1 (2020 Manual - DRAFT)

SECTION 1: COMPETITION SAFETY - INDEX

1.1

PRELIMINARY …………………………………………………………………..…..

2

1.2 SAFETY AT SPORT AND RECREATION EVENTS ACT (ACT No. 2 OF

2010) ……………………………………………………………………….………....

3

1.3 COMPETITION SAFETY ………………………………………………………...... 3

1.4 SAFETY AND RESCUE PLAN ………………………………………………..…. 3

1.5 COMPETITION SAFETY ASSESSMENT ……………………………..………... 4

1.6 USE OF PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE) …………..……….. 5

1.7 COMPETITION CONTINGENCY PLAN ……………………………..………….. 4

1.7.1 Potential Threats ………………………………………………………… 5

. 1.7.2 Weather Forecasting …………………………………….……………… 5

1.7.3 The Chain of Command and Decision Making …………..…………… 5

1.7.4 Alternative Locations – Contingencies ………………….…………….. 5

1.7.5 Aim and Principles of Relocation …………………………………..…... 6

1.7.6 Outline Plan ………………………………………………………….…... 6

1.7.7 Reconnaissance of Alternative Locations and Assessment of

Conditions ………………………………………………………………...

6

1.7.8 Relocation Timings and Early Warning ……………………………..… 6

1.7.9 Key Officials required at the Alternative Location ……………….…… 6

1.7.10 Movement of Competition Officials ……………………………….…… 6

1.7.11 Movement of Safety and Rescue Personnel and Equipment …….… 6

1.7.12 Movement of Administration and Competition/Championship

Equipment ……………………………………………….……………….. 6

1.7.13 Movement of Competitors and their Equipment …………………….... 7

1.7.14 Action in the event of Death or Serious Injury ……………………..…. 7

1.7.15 Provision of Counselling Services ………………………….…………. 7

1.8 THUNDERSTORMS AND LIGHTNING ………………………………..……….. 7

1.9 LSA MEMBERS’ HEALTH ………………………………………………………… 7

1.10 NO RELIANCE …………………………………………………………...…………. 8

Appendix A Sample Surf Event Safety Guide Worksheet …...................................... 9

Appendix B Sample Chief Referee Pre-Competition Checklist ……………..……..…. 11

Appendix C Sample Disaster Plan – Major Incident ……………………….………..…. 12

Appendix D Authority for Suspension/ Relocation/Cancellation of Competition … 14

Appendix E Surf/Open Water Contingency Options - Major Competition Event

Prioritisation Table …………………………………………………………... 15

Appendix F Pool Risk Assessment Worksheet …………………………….…………... 16



SECTION 1: COMPETITION SAFETY 1.1 PRELIMINARY The provision of a safe environment at all LSA competitions is paramount. Prior to the commencement of any competition the Competition Committee must be satisfied that all competition and non-competition arrangements provide the necessary safety for competitors, officials and other personnel involved at the competition. The Competition Committee must also be satisfied that the conditions are satisfactory for competition to proceed. Tests may be undertaken to assist in these assessment processes. An Event Safety Guide Sheet and Chief Referee Pre-Competition Checklist may be used to assist in the assessment processes (refer Appendices A and B in this section for samples). Should, at any stage prior to or during competition, there is a credible basis for concluding there is an unreasonable risk of serious injury occurring, the Chief Referee shall suspend all or parts of the competition. The Competition Committee will meet and, shall then decide whether to postpone, cancel or relocate all or parts of the competition. In addition, where required, LSA has the authority to seek assessment of the physical and psychological fitness of any competitor or official and ensure through the Chief Referee to the Competition Committee that an unfit competitor or official does not compete or officiate for the well-being and safety of others involved in a competition. Lifesavers compete in LSA competitions to demonstrate their physical and mental skills. Event officials and organizers conduct competitions to support and encourage competing lifesavers to demonstrate their lifesaving skills and organizational efficiency, whilst qualified patrolling lifesavers and support personnel, actively display their prowess as the lifesaving authority in that competition. At all competitions, the organising group conducting the competition shall provide sufficient and properly equipped and qualified water safety personnel (at each venue) as required by the appropriate lifesaving authority. The provision of rescue craft and communication network is essential at all competitions. No event shall commence unless a viable means of rescuing an unconscious person from water is in place, i.e. a crewed IRB or a crewed jet ski is on the water in the competition area. If an emergency arises during a competition, correct control and procedures shall be maintained under the direction of the Chief Referee or Safety Officer. Further, for events involving Nippers the requirements of LSA, the following shall apply:

• One Safety Lifeguard Officer to five participants; or • One Safety Lifeguard to 10 participants where low risk conditions are determined by completion

of an Event Safety Guide Sheet.

This decision will be made by the Safety Officer and Chief Referee.

Notes 1. A low risk condition is generally described as surf conditions under one meter, however, other

surf and environmental conditions should also be factored into an assessment. 2. The requirement for a crewed IRB or a crewed jet ski detailed above counts as two water safety

personnel. 3. Safety Lifeguard must have an LA (Surf or Open Water) or JLA (Surf or Open Water) award,

with a valid Annual Retest, and must wear a red/yellow duty skull cap for identification. The Safety Lifeguard who is a holder of a JLA (Surf or Open Water) should be the holder of a JLA award for at least 1 year.

4. Safety Lifeguards must carry at least a Rescue Torpedo Buoy (RTB) or Rescue Tube (R/T). If an emergency arises during a competition, correct command and control shall be maintained under the direction of the Safety Officer or the Chief Referee (if a dedicated Safety Officer is not appointed). During an emergency, any member of LSA entering the water or handling any rescue equipment must only do so at the direction of the Safety and Emergency Management Coordinator or delegate and/or under the direction of the Police or emergency authority.



1.2 SAFETY AT SPORT AND RECREATION EVENTS ACT (ACT No. 2 OF 2010) Organisers of lifesaving competitions and sporting events should take note of the Safety at Sport and Recreation Events Act and comply with all the requirements set out in the act. That includes:

1. The preparation of a Safety Plan 2. Appointment of a Safety Officer 3. Liaison with South African Police Services 4. Liaison with other Safety and Security organisations, such as the local authority, emergency

service, etc. 5. Comply with other acts, such as the Occupational Health and Safety Act, etc.

1.3 COMPETITION SAFETY The provision of safe competitions is essential and a priority in competition planning. The host organising committee is responsible for the provision of adequate resources to ensure the safety of those involved with the competition. The host organising committee shall appoint a Safety Officer who is responsible for ensuring that all competition facilities and environments are safe for use, and that the appropriate safety plan, equipment, craft, procedures and emergency personnel are in place to ensure the safety of competitors, officials and spectators, etc. The Safety Officer is a member of the Organising Committee and the Competition Committee. No competition shall be sanctioned by LSA until the LSA Sport Director is satisfied that the competition facilities are safe, and that the appropriate safety and emergency plan, equipment, procedures and personnel are in place. No water event shall be conducted until the Chief Referee has assessed the surf conditions and reported to the Competition Committee. Only the Competition Committee has the authority to cancel, reschedule, or relocate the competition or event. The Chief Referee or the appointed coordinator of emergency services (as named in the safety and emergency plan) shall assume control of emergencies arising during competition. Note: It is necessary for a common language to be spoken between the Chief Referee and the coordinator of emergency services. 1.4 SAFETY AND EMERGENCY PLAN The host organising committee shall prepare a safety and emergency plan to ensure:

• The venue(s) are fit and proper for the purposes of competition. • The general safety of competitors, competition personnel and spectators. • The personnel and procedures are in place in case of minor or major emergencies involving

injury to or illness of competitors, technical officials, competition personnel or spectators.

A safety and rescue plan relevant to the scope of the competition being conducted is essential to the sound planning process. The plan should ensure appropriate procedures are in place if an emergency occurs during a competition. The contents of a plan should include the following sections.

1. Objective The objective of the plan is to:

1. Outline the facilities that will be utilised during the event. 2. Identify those persons within the authority to initiate the plan. 3. Outline command and control functions. 4. State the activation methods for internal and external agencies and services.

2. Implementation Proper command and control needs to be maintained in an emergency or major incident. It is essential that the instructions outlined in the plan are widely communicated and that the personnel who have the authority to activate the plan are identified. In this regard, the key persons usually are the Chief Referee, the Safety Officer and the Competition Organiser or the Event Manager.



3. First Aid Sites Dependent on the size of the competition and the number of participants, the extent of the emergency care facilities required including the number, location and type of first aid sites will need to be identified. The scope may include a central base, a medical centre, remote sites and roving patrols as well as the equipment required and the number of personnel and their appropriate skills. 4. Medical Facilities Any available medical (surgical) facilities, on and off the event site, need to be identified. This should include the location and contact details of the nearest medical centre and hospital. 5. Water Safety The Water Safety Coordinator(s) and safety personnel (including IRB’s/Jet Skis crews) need to be appointed and operate as per their position description. In addition, liaison and rescue protocols need to be identified and promulgated. 6. Emergency Vehicle(s) At events where there are many competitors, or the site is spread over a long distance, an emergency vehicle should be available in case of the need to transport patients off the beach and/or rescue teams to an incident site. The protocols for operation of the vehicle need to be identified. 7. Major Incidents Dependent on the size of the competition, and the risks involved, the preparation of disaster plans is appropriate. A sample disaster plan for a major incident is contained in Appendix C of this Section. 8. Emergency Services The available emergency services and their tasking protocols should be identified for:

1. Ambulance 2. Police 3. Rescue Helicopter 4. Peer Support

9. Logistics As necessary, relevant logistical information for deployment of the emergency services teams should be identified including:

1. Personnel 2. Deployment of personnel 3. Dress standards and appearance 4. Access to arenas 5. Equipment 6. Communications 7. Vehicle access 8. Alternative venue(s)

1.5 COMPETITION SAFETY ASSESSMENT Before any LSA competition is conducted, the Safety Officer or his delegate should assess the prevailing and expected conditions. Assessments may be undertaken at any time before and during competition. The Safety Officer should also assess the non-competition aspects including occupational health and safety matters. Assessments may be undertaken at any time before and during competition. Should an assessment indicate that part, or all of the competition, not be conducted because of adverse weather conditions, or another threat, a decision will be required from the Competition Committee on whether to postpone, cancel or relocate all or parts of the competition. The Competition Committee shall consist of a minimum of the following persons: the Chief Referee and his Deputy, Chairman of the Local Organising Committee, Event Manager, the Safety Officer and where applicable, the Director of Sport or his delegate.



The major threat for the conduct of competition relates to the advent of adverse weather conditions, either before or during the competition. Adverse weather can create extremes in heat or cold, storms, dangerous ocean and aquatic conditions or swell and associated dangers for competitors. Secondary natural threats are considered less likely, although man-made disasters, such as pollution of the surf, open water, pool or beach should not be discounted. The sample Event Safety Guide Worksheet (Appendix A in this section) or a competition safety assessment designed for a particular event may assist in the assessment process.

1.6 USE OF PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT (PPE)

1. LSA may mandate the use of LSA approved Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) including high visibility vests, lifejackets and/or helmets in its competitions.

2. Usage of PPE shall either be optional in some events or compulsory, dependent on the event or age categories e.g. high visibility vests in water events.

3. When mandated competitors must wear the prescribed PPE in events and warm up/down etc. or they shall not be permitted to participate at the competition.

4. Detailed usage of PPE is contained in Section 2 and/or other relevant discipline sections of this Manual.

1.7 COMPETITION CONTINGENCY PLAN If the Competition Committee decides to postpone, cancel or relocate all or parts of the competition a clear and simple Contingency Plan should be implemented within the maximum of 1 hour of the decision, failing which the competition will be cancelled. The following is a suggested format for establishing a Contingency Plan for lifesaving competitions. Note: The contingency options for rescheduling of events at major LSA Championships is reproduced in

Appendix E. 1.7.1 Potential Threats.

• Adverse weather and/or surf conditions • Disasters • Non-competition matters

1.7.2 Weather Forecasting Weather forecasts, including advice on available light, will be used by the Competition Committee to assist in the decision making. As the weather develops, more regular bulletins and information needs to be obtained depending on the situation. Subject to the size of the competition, and risk factors present, weather monitoring should commence approximately one week prior to the start of the competition. If the competition extends beyond one day, the Competition Committee should obtain weather forecasts each morning and evening. 1.7.3 The Chain of Command and Decision Making The Safety and Emergency Committee shall determine the response to hazards as they occur, or otherwise as required and provide safety advice to the Competition Committee. The sole responsibility for suspension, cancellation, postponement or relocation of part or all of the competition rests with the Competition Committee. The decision to enact the Contingency Plan is the responsibility of the Competition Committee. The Safety and Emergency Committee is solely responsible to the Competition Committee for implementing recommendations concerning competition safety. 1.7.4 Alternative Locations – Contingencies

1. Alternative similar location(s) 2. Emergency locations – protected water

1.7.5 Aim and Principles of Relocation Relocation means relocation of all personnel (competitors and officials) and equipment (including water safety and first aid) necessary to conduct the relevant competition(s). It does not necessarily mean back of beach items such as stands or signage.



The aim of relocating to an alternative venue is to ensure that the competition may be safely conducted within the timeframe set down. If water conditions prevent water-based competition, and the beach itself is unaffected, then only water events may need to be relocated. 1.7.6 Outline Plan There are four primary options:

1. Complete relocation of the competition. 2. Partial relocation, where only those events considered unsafe will be relocated. 3. Postponement of part, or all, of the competition to a later date. 4. Cancellation of part, or all, of the competition.

1.7.7 Reconnaissance of Alternative Locations and Assessment of Conditions The conduct of the reconnaissance is the responsibility of the Competition Committee. The Reconnaissance Group may consist of the Competition Organiser, Event Manager and his Deputy, the Chief Referee, Deputy Chief Referee and the appropriate Sectional Referee, Safety Officer where possible, who will jointly assess the situation and report to the Competition Committee for decision. 1.7.8 Relocation Timings and Early Warning The decision to relocate should be made as early as possible, preferably on the day before. The following individuals and authorities are to be advised as soon as possible of the decision to relocate, the events to be moved and outline timings to commence operations at the alternative site (those responsible for notification listed in brackets):

1. Team Managers, all Referees and Officials – (Chief Referee) 2. Water Safety, First Aid, Communications, Lifeguard Services, Ambulance – (Safety Officer) 3. Administration Officer, TV, Sponsors, Commentators, Media, Club at Alternative Location,

Catering, Council and other Authorities, Commentators with scripted message – (Logistics Officer/Event Manager)

4. Maximum use is to be made of the public address system as well as face to face briefings, sms’es and electronic mail, as soon as the decision is made.

1.7.9 Key Officials required at the Alternative Location Once the Competition Committee has made the decision to move either the whole, or part of the competition, it is the responsibility of the Competition Organiser, Safety Officer and Chief Referee to determine the movement of officials. Planning is essential because the competition may need to be conducted in two locations simultaneously. The exact number of officials and support staff required at the alternative locations will be determined at the time and will be dependent upon the number of events to be relocated. The appointed Chief Referee (at the alternative location) is responsible for the set-up of the competition at the alternative location. 1.7.10 Movement of Competition Officials If the entire competition is to be moved, the Technical Officials, as a group, are to be moved as quickly as possible. Transport operators or other sources may need to be on standby to transport the Technical Officials. 1.7.11 Movement of Safety and Rescue Personnel and Equipment The relocation of Emergency Services is the responsibility of the Safety Officer. The Safety Officer will arrange transportation of the personnel and their equipment. 1.7.12 Movement of Administration and Competition/Championship Equipment Movement of the administration and competition equipment is the responsibility of the Logistics Officer/Event Manager and the Equipment Coordinator. 1.7.13 Movement of Competitors and their Equipment Movement of all competitors and their equipment is the responsibility of the competitors. Details of public transport arrangements from the competition site to the alternative location may be advised over the public address system and/or via information on a notice board.



1.7.14 Action in the event of Death or Serious Injury In the event of death or serious injury to a competitor or spectator during the period of the competition the Chief Referee is responsible for any immediate decision to suspend or postpone competition. The Safety Officer is responsible to the Chief Referee for handling the situation. Once the situation is assessed, the Chief Referee shall make recommendations to the Competition Committee. 1.7.15 Provision of Counselling Services The Safety Officer is responsible for the contact and provision of initial counselling support. 1.8 THUNDERSTORMS AND LIGHTNING If there is lightning activity within approximately 10km of the competition area (to estimate the distance from a thunderstorm, count from the number of seconds between a flash of lightning and the next clap of thunder, and divide this number by 3 to get the number of kilometres) and thunder less than 30 seconds after a lightning flash indicates people are at risk, and if this occurs, all lifesaving activities in the water (both open air pool or at open water venue, should be stopped immediately and all competitors and officials should exit the water and everyone (competitors, officials, including spectators should immediately vacate the venue and locate to a solid building, like a clubhouse. If there is no building nearby, people should seek shelter inside a motor vehicle (note: not in the back of a Bakkie/ Light Delivery Vehicle). If available, the Safety Officer or the Chief Referee should make use of a Lightning detector to monitor possible lighting threat. All activities can be resumed approximately 30 minutes after the storm has moved on. Note: Each time lightning is observed, or thunder heard the 30-minute clock should be reset. 1.9 LSA MEMBERS’ HEALTH Competitors and all Technical Officials should realise the importance of fitness to undertake their respective activities and should seek expert advice on all aspects of their health. Competitors and Technical Officials who suffer illness should consult their own doctor for advice on whether to continue participation and training if they are in any doubt. This applies specially to fevers and diarrhoea and injuries can also be aggravated. Often a coach will recognise early symptoms of any over training symptoms and prescribe an alternate program. LSA has adopted the Drug Free Sport South Africa Institute policy, which is in general, very similar to the policy of the International Olympic Committee (IOC) and International Lifesaving Federation (ILS). The medical advice to all members is to avoid all so-called performance enhancing drugs and to be careful of taking any medication at all in the weeks leading up to an event. Before and during training and during competition, an individual’s level of hydration, availability of glucose, and body temperature, are important considerations. It is possible that medical teams may be required to deal with cases of hyperthermia (overheating) and hypothermia (subnormal body temperature). The general rule is to be aware of these potential problems and take suitable precautions. Technical Officials are often at the same risk as competitors. Competitors and Technical Officials alike need to ensure they lead a lifestyle conducive to their best performance. Competitors and Technical Officials should realise the importance of fitness but should seek expert advice on correct training programs. Illness or injury from exercise occurs more often from training than actual competition and the competitor should seek advice on how to minimise injuries. Endurance events require special consideration in many areas and have been well covered in various reports and circulars, etc. Competitors’ education is vital for the safe conduct of these events, especially when some or all competitors are juniors or novices. Generally, Technical Officials are more at risk in terms of exposure to UV rays from the sun than competitors. It is strongly recommended that Technical Officials take care when officiating in the open. It is recommended that a suitable sunscreen lotion (at least a SPF 20+) is applied regularly, especially if the



Technical Official is in a boat. In addition, it is recommended Technical Officials wear a wide brimmed hat and long sleeved shirt and take in enough fluid to avoid dehydration. Medical advice for competitors and Technical Officials is updated regularly by way of circulars that are sent to all clubs and are available from LSA. 1.10 NO RELIANCE The contents of this Section 1 is intended as a generalised summary only and should not be used or relied upon as a substitute for professional risk management safety advice. Members are also reminded to refer to the Introduction to this manual. It is imperative this manual is read and fully understood by competition organisers, Technical Officials, Team Managers, coaches and competitors.



APPENDIX A SAMPLE SURF EVENT SAFETY GUIDE WORKSHEET

In applying the worksheet event organisers must focus on safety in a way that does not cause them to have or question conflicting views as to whether competition should continue. Event Officials must suspend competition whenever there is a credible basis for concluding there is an unreasonable risk of serious injury to competitors occurring. EVENT: ...................................................................................................................................................... DATE: ............................................................................................................................ ……………………

1. Scope & Context

Event √ Yes √ No

Age Groups √ Yes √ No

Boat U/9 to U/14 (Nippers)

Bodyboard/ Board/ Ski U/15 to U/19 (Juniors)

Swim Open (Seniors)

Rescue Tube Masters

Beach Events Qualified/Unqualified Participants

Beach Run Other Other (e.g. Endurance

Format)

Other Details: Including reference to Appendix E:

Other Details Including reference to Appendix E:

2. Hazard Identification & Assessment

Adverse Effects on Safety √ Yes √ No Adverse Effects on Safety √ Yes √ No

Surf/Open Water Conditions Geographic

Swell Size Shore Conditions

Wave Type Headland, Groynes, etc.

Depth of Water Seaweed/Debris

Tides/Currents Other:

Time between Sets

Other:

If yes, what is the potential harm? If yes, what is the potential harm?

3. Climate √ Yes √ No 4. Other √ Yes √ No

Weather Blue Bottles/Marine Stingers

Wind Other Marine Life

Air Temp.

Water Temp. Other:

Wind Chill

Available Light

Other:

If yes, what is the potential harm? If yes, what is the potential harm?

5. Risk Treatments

Emergency/Safety Services

√ Yes √ No Other Options

√ Yes √ No

Water Safety Continue/Commence/Delay Event

IRBs Consult with Team Managers

Patrols Modify Selected Event

Medical Change of Venue – Selected Events

First Aid Cancellation of Selected Events



Communications Cancellation – Total

Access to Emergency Services

Other Options:

6. Trigger Point Indicator Reported Significance

Event not conforming to timetable

Review of Action Plan

Minor Equipment Damage

Major Equipment Damage

Loss or Destruction of equipment

Injury – Minor

Injury – Major

Death of Competitor/Official/Spectator

ACTION(S) TAKEN

COMMENTS

Note: Specific competition safety assessment applications have also been developed and are available through LSA. Remember: The provision of a safe environment at all LSA competitions is paramount. I, ...................................................................... ………………………….. (Print Name & Position) am satisfied that this Event Safety Guide document has been accurately completed and that it correctly reflects the assessment at the time it was undertaken Signature: …………………………………………………………………….. Date/Time: ............................................................................. …………...



APPENDIX B

SAMPLE CHIEF REFEREE PRE-COMPETITION CHECKLIST Prior to the start of competition, the Chief Referee should be satisfied that the following have been completed: EVENT: .................................................................................................. DATE: ....................................................................................................

√ Yes √ No

Sufficient, properly equipped and qualified water safety personnel have been provided

A safety and rescue plan relevant to the scope of competition being conducted has been prepared

A contingency plan is in place

The prevailing and expected conditions have been assessed

The non-competition aspects of the competition have been assessed

Has any assessment determined that competition should not be conducted (in full or part)?

If yes, has the Competition Committee been notified?

What was the decision of the Competition Committee? □Postpone □Cancel □Relocate

Has the contingency plan been implemented?

All relevant parties have been briefed

The surf conditions are satisfactory for competition to commence

I, ......................................................................................... (Print Name) am satisfied that all competition and non-competition arrangements provide the necessary safety for competitors, Officials and other personnel involved in competition. Signature: .............................................................................................. Date/Time: ..............................................................................................



APPENDIX C SAMPLE DISASTER PLAN – MAJOR INCIDENT

(a) Initial Action - Ascertain Details:

• Location • Nature of incident • Extent of incident – how serious? • Number of possible injured • Is there anyone in charge as yet? • Commence Log: • Time/Date/Place • Identity of informant • Location of informant

Notify:

• Safety and Emergency Coordinator (SEMC) • Police • Ambulance (as appropriate) • Surf Rescue Command • Safety Coordinator • Medical Officer • Chief Referee • Competition Organiser • Media Liaison • Transport • First aid, medical equipment and relevant personnel to site.

(b) At the Scene: • Continue Log • Ensure no further danger • Cordon off scene • Set outer perimeter – consider crowd control • Set up command post • Set up triage and casualty area • Consider – set up morgue in fully enclosed tent • Arrange escorts for relatives and minor low priority patients to first aid base • Set up helicopter landing area 250 metres from site • Arrange emergency vehicle access • Coordinate search for victims with Police • Media Liaison to arrange media area

(c) At the First Aid Area: • Commence Log • Appoint/Confirm Officer in Charge • Accept patients with minor injuries • Arrange area for relatives • Arrange trauma and grief counselling • Transport emergency care, stock and equipment to primary site as required • Ensure adequate stocks of first aid supplies • All requests for information (including media) to command post • Arrange refreshments • In the case of alleged criminal activity, all injuries and First Aid treatments must be fully

documented. (d) Personnel Required at Command Post:

• Safety Coordinator • Medical Officer • Competition Organiser • Media Liaison Officer • Police Coordinator • Ambulance Coordinator • Log Keeper

(e) At Completion:



Debrief: • Arrange venue away from activities and interruptions

• Ensure police and ambulance coordinators in attendance • Arrange refreshments • Ensure all personnel are accounted for • Conduct debrief – LSA/Police/Ambulance • Take notes • Take contact details of all major participants in search • Ensure someone from LSA is present to thank members • Arrange any on-going search/assistance • Clean up • Ensure all equipment is accounted for • Clean equipment

• Replenish supplies

• Arrange trauma and grief counselling for competitors/officials/members



APPENDIX D

AUTHORITY FOR SUSPENSION/RELOCATION/CANCELLATION OF COMPETITION

The following table outlines the various roles and authorities that may lead to suspension, relocation and/or cancellation for competition safety reasons.

Role Level of Authority Scope of Authority

Competition Committee Suspend Initiate Contingency Plan Cancellation

Event

Safety & Emergency Committee Suspend Event/Area

Competition Committee Chair Suspend Event/Area

Chief Referee Suspend Event/Area

Safety Officer Suspend Event/Area

Workplace Health and Safety Adviser Suspend Event/Area

LSA or Delegated Representative Suspend Event/Area

Area Referee Suspend Area

Sectional Referee Suspend Area

Area Risk and Response Officer (ARRO) Suspend Area

Other Officials

Report safety matters immediately to the Chief Referee or their delegate or to the SEMC or ARRO. Suspend in the event of a catastrophic event and immediately report.

Area

Note: Refer also to Sections 11: Competition Administration and Section 9: Officials and their Duties for position descriptions.



APPENDIX E

SURF/OPEN WATER CONTINGENCY OPTIONS - MAJOR COMPETITION EVENT PRIORITISATION TABLE

In the event of a competition being affected by implementation of contingency plans, a decision to delete events may be required. Provided that competition can proceed safely, the table below is a suggested priority matrix with preference being given to open events then decreasing ages to youth and simultaneously increasing master’s ages.

Priority Event Rationale

A Surf Swim Race Board Race Ski Race Ironman/woman or M Course Beach Sprint Beach Flags Taplin Relay or M Relay Surf Boats Beach Relay Run/Swim/Run

Core individual events High media interest Allows competitors from smaller clubs without teams to compete Generally easy to marshal and simple to run Generally easy to marshal and simple to run Premier Team event. Showcases the strength of a club across a broad range of discipline

B(1) Board Relay Ski Relay Surf Swim Teams

Core Team events

B(2)

Double Ski

Core Team events Craft that can result in heightened risk management issues in larger surf conditions

C Board Rescue Rescue Tube Rescue

All Rescue style of events Length of time to complete events from heats through to finals is large

D Lifesaver Relay 2 km Swim

Both these events could be regarded as a duplication (i.e. similar in nature) of the Surf Swim Race and Taplin Relay



APPENDIX F

POOL RISK ASSESSMENT WORKSHEET

Refer in general to the processes identified in this Section. In addition, prior to commencement of competition, the Chief Referee(s), the Host Organising Committee Chair and the Safety Officer should jointly undertake a risk assessment of the venue using the following checklist. POOL RISK ASSESSMENT WORKSHEET VENUE: ……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. EVENT: …………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. DATE:……………………………………………………………………………………………………………… ASSESSOR’S NAME: …………………………………………………………………………………………….

Safety Considerations Check Comments /

Corrective Action Check

General Conditions of Hire – sighted and signed

Venue - general structure and surface safety

Pool dimensions correct

Depths signs visible and correct

Non slip pool concourse

Event course(s) correctly set

Competition area clearly defined

Pool equipment (e.g. lane ropes, overhead flags) safe and correctly fitted

Rescue equipment available

First Aid equipment and room/area set up with readily identifiable first aiders

Incident Report Forms available

Emergency Services Coordinator promoted and identifiable

Patrol/Lifeguard Service available

Sun Protection considerations in place

Water Conditions (quality and temperature)

PA with safe electrical connections

Emergency telephone available and working

Officials Communication system(s) operational

Officials, correct numbers and readily identifiable

Officials, uniforms and refreshments

Officials, trained and induction completed

Current Insurance Policies

Competitor Entry Forms submitted

Competition Gear and Equipment safety check completed

Sufficient spectator viewing areas

Allowance for spectator and competitor traffic flow

Emergency Action Plan in place

Emergency Services access

Review, apply and control measures:

Note: In the event of a pool rescue competition being disrupted for any reason, the implementation of contingency plans may be required including the prioritisation of events to be conducted and/or deleted. The Competition Committee shall determine how best to manage the event going forward and to communicate with participants.

Section 2 – General Competitive Conditions


SECTION 2: GENERAL COMPETITIVE CONDITIONS - INDEX

2.1

LIFESAVING COMPETITIONS ………………………………………………….

3

2.1.1 Sprit of the Rules …………………………………………………… 3

2.1.2 Unbecoming Behaviour ……………………………………………. 3

2.1.3 Team Management and competitors responsibilities Racism & Discrimination …………………………………………... 3

2.1.4 Team Management and competitors responsibilities ………..... 3

2.1.5 Disqualifications ………………………………………………….. 3

2.1.6 General Competitive Conditions ………………………………….. 4

2.1.7 Competition Courses ………………………………………………. 5

2.2 CODE OF CONDUCT ……………………………………………………………. 5

2.2.1 LSA ………………………………………………………………….. 5

2.2.2 LSA Technical Officials Code of Conduct ……………………….. 5

2.2.3 Competitors Code of Conduct ………………………………........ 5

2.2.4 Team Managers and Coaches Code of Conduct …………........ 6

2.2.5 Supporters and Spectators Code of Conduct ………………...... 6

2.2.6 Serious Discipline Offence ………………………………………... 6

2.3 PERFORMING A RESCUE DURING COMPETITION ……………………….. 6

2.4 NIPPER COMPETITIONS ……………………………………………………….. 6

2.5 TRANSGENDER ATHLETE POLICY …………………………………………. 7

2.6 COMPETITORS WITH PERMANENT DISABILITIES ………………………. 8

2.7 VIDEO RECORDING DEVICES …………………………………………..…… 8

2.7.2 Mounted on craft: ………………………………………………… 8

2.7.2 Attached to competitors …………………………………………. 8

2.8 COMMUNICATION DEVICES IN COMPETITION ………………………… 8

2.9 GPS DEVICES IN COMPETITIONS …………………………………………. 8

2.10 COMPETITION ATTIRE ……………………………………………………… 8

2.10.1 Swimwear ………………………………………………………… 9

2.10.2 Protective clothing ……………………………………………….. 9

2,10.3 Flotation vests and helmets ……………………………………... 9

2.10.4 Competition skull caps and helmets …………………………… 9

2.10.5 Vests ………………………………………………………………. 10

2.10.6 Lifejackets and Personal Flotation Devices (PFDs) …………. 10

2.10.7 Eyewear ………………………………………………………….. 10

2.10.8 Footwear ………………………………………………………….. 10

2.10.9 Wetsuits …………………………………………………………… 10

2.10.10 Marine Singer Suits ………………………………………………. 10

2.10.11 Use of Body Tape ……………………………………………….. 11

2.10.12 Colours ……………………………………………………………. 11

2.10.13 Identification ……………………………………………………… 12



SECTION 2: GENERAL COMPETITIVE CONDITIONS - INDEX

2.11

SPONSORSHIPS ………………………………………………………………

11

2.11.1 General …………………………………………………………… 11

2.11.2 Team Sponsorship ……………………………………………… 11

2.11.3 Body Tattoos and Body Paint ………………………………….. 12

2.11.4 Event Sponsorship ……………………………………………… 12

2.11.5 Individual Sponsorship ………………………………………….. 12

2.11.6 Craft and Equipment ……………………………………………. 12

2.12 SCRUTINEERING …………………………………………………………….. 12

2.13 DEFINITION OF AN EVENT …………………………………………………. 13

2.13.1 General …………………………………………………………… 13

2.13.2 Individual Events Individual Events ………………………………………………… 13

2.13.3 Team Events ……………………………………………………... 13

2.14 SUBSTITUTION OF COMPETITORS ………………………………………. 13

2.15 BREACH OF RULES ………………………………………………………….. 14

2.16 ABUSE/INAPPROPRIATE BEHAVIOUR …………………………………... 15

2.17 COMPETING UNFAIRLY ……………………………………………………... 15

2.18 LUCK OF PREVAILING CONDITIONS ……………………………………... 15

2.19 START AND COMPLETION OF A COMPETITION ……………………… 15

2.20 APPOINTMENT OF MANAGER AND CHAPERON ………………………. 16

2.21 RESPONSIBILITIES OF COMPETITORS, TEAM MANAGERS AND

CHAPERONS AT LIFESAVING COMPETITIONS …………………………

16

2.22 MEDIA STATEMENTS ………………………………………………………... 16

2.23 THEFT …………………………………………………………………………… 16

2.24 DRUG POLICY ………………………………………………………………… 16

2.25 PERMITS TO GO ON TOURS ……………………………………………….. 17



SECTION 2: GENERAL COMPETITIVE CONDITIONS

2.1 LIFESAVING COMPETITIONS LSA conducts lifesaving competitions to improve members' performance during rescue activities. It assists members to improve their human movement, mental skills and fitness levels, whilst promoting recruitment and retention through participation, demonstration, publicity, motivation and involvement. Lifesaving competitions conducted by LSA are across a wide range of ages commencing from eight years, to seventy plus and involving single discipline and multi-discipline events. Single-discipline events and multi-discipline contests are now regular events on LSA's competition calendar. All LSA competitions must be authorised and controlled by accredited LSA Technical Officials. This manual and any other supplementary competition regulations or circulars are subject to the constitution of LSA. LSA may issue additional regulations or circulars for specific events. In such cases, this manual should be read in conjunction with these publications and be considered complementary to each other. Various provisions of the LSA constitution contain references to competition matters and these shall apply in all cases. No member of LSA shall compete or take part, nor shall an affiliated Club, Branch, District or Province be involved in any way, in any lifesaving competition, event and/or related display involving LSA owned equipment or intellectual property, unless that competition, event or display is licensed or sanctioned by LSA and prior written permission to compete or take part has been obtained from LSA. All LSA members shall be subject to LSA policy on drugs which enhance human performances and the penalties prescribed therein. LSA subscribes to the rules as set out by the World Anti-Doping Agency (WADA), the International Lifesaving Federation (ILS) and Drug Free Sport South Africa. Except where specifically stated, reference to the male gender covers both male and female members of LSA of all ages. 2.1.1 Spirit of the Rules Competitors should enter lifesaving competition at all times in the spirit of the rules, avoiding all unfair advantage. Disqualification and/or disciplinary action will occur for one or more of the infringements.

2.1.2 Unbecoming Behaviour Competitors, Team Managers, Team Officials and supporters are to conduct themselves at all times during competition in a professional and responsible manner as well as at any other related activities (i.e. social functions, accommodation venues, etc.). Unbecoming conduct is a serious offence and will be dealt with accordingly. 2.1.3 Racism & Discrimination Willful discrimination and racism in lifesaving sport is unacceptable and will not be tolerated and will lead to subsequent disciplinary action being instituted. 2.1.4 Team Management and competitors responsibilities Team Management and competitors are responsible for being familiar with the competition schedule, and with the rules and procedures governing events. 2.1.5 Disqualifications Competitors should enter lifesaving competition at all times in the spirit of the rules, avoiding all unfair advantage. Disqualification and/or disciplinary action will occur for one or more of the following infringements:

1. Impersonation of a competitor or Technical Official.



2. Abuse of Technical Officials or other competitors in and out the competition or marshalling area.

3. Jostling, obstructing or handling another competitor(s) or team(s). 4. Competing without entry or for another club without clearance or transfer. 5. Competing without membership, award, proficiency or duty hour obligation eligibility. 6. To defeat or attempt to defeat the ballot or draw for events or positions. 7. Competing twice in the same individual event or competing twice in the same event in

different teams. 8. Using equipment in competition not meeting LSA specifications. 9. Purposely interfering with a course to gain an advantage. 10. Receiving physical or other outside assistance (except other than verbal or

directional) specifically excluded by the rules of the event. 11. Competing contrary to the specific directives of the chief referee or designated official. 12. Any unfair practice or attempt to gain unfair advantage. 13. Unbecoming behaviour in competition. 14. Racism and discrimination either directly or indirectly in events. 15. Using foul language at other competitors during events 16. Where a lifesaving authority has two or more teams, or individuals in an event and a

deliberate foul occurs, all its teams or individuals will be disqualified from that event if any of the relevant lifesaving authorities, competitors or teams gains a decided advantage from such a foul.

17. If a competitor is assisted or helped by a Safety Officer, patrol lifeguard, rescue squad member, manager, coach or other person during an event.

18. If a competitor wilfully dislodges competition equipment. 19. If a competitor is showing disrespect to other competitors, Technical Officials or to the

competition. 20. A competitor or team absent from the start of an event. 21. Swimming/skull caps not securely fastened under the chin of competitors, at the start

of each race. 22. Competitors in the craft leg of multi discipline events who pass through the swimming

buoys on their craft will be disqualified. 23. Handlers proceeding beyond knee depth in surf and open water events and not

wearing the high visibility vest and club swimming/skull.

This above summary highlights the most important lifesaving competition disqualifications but in no way purports to cover every item pertaining to lifesaving competition requirements regulated or controlled by LSA. 2.1.6 General Competitive Conditions

1. When Not Competing: Competitors and officials must leave the designated competition area when not competing or officiating. The competition area may be defined as the section of the beach encompassed by a line or fence, or a direct line to the water from the extreme ends of a line or fence or other designated areas as specified by the Chief Referee.

2. Use of Wax or similar substances in Craft Events: The use of wax or similar substances to assist the competitor in maintaining the grip on or contact with boards or surf skis or paddles is permitted in surf events.

3. Craft through Swimming Buoys: Competitors in craft events, excluding multi discipline events, may pass through the swimming buoys on their craft on the understanding that they are solely responsible if the buoys offer an impediment to their progress.

4. Wearing of Swimming/Skull Caps and Use of Artificial Aids: Competitors must wear their lifesaving authority’s team swimming/skull caps in all events. A competitor shall not be disqualified if the swimming/skull cap is lost after the start of a race provided that officials can identify that the competitor correctly completed the event.

5. Artificial Aids: Unless specifically provided for, no artificial enhancements to propulsion may be used in competition (e.g., hand webs, armbands, etc.).



2.1.7 Competition Courses 1. Buoys: The use of colour-coded buoys and flags is recommended to guide

competitors accurately through the required courses. 2. Buoy Distances: Buoy distances shall be measured from the depth of knee-depth

water at low tide mark. However, distances may vary depending upon beach and tidal conditions and safety factors. Adjustment of the buoys may be necessary during the competition if they move out of alignment.

3. Course Distances: All courses shall be measured, set, and aligned to the Chief Referee’s satisfaction ensuring as far as possible that all lanes have fair and equal conditions.

4. Course Set-Up: The Competition Committee and Chief Referee may authorize adjustments to course set-ups to ensure the safety, fair judging and efficient running of the event (e.g., distances, number of lanes or buoys, number of competitors per race). If heats have commenced, the course should not be changed until all heats in the event have been concluded so as not to change course for later heats. Any course changes must be communicated to competitors prior to the start of the race (e.g., at the team managers briefing, in the marshalling area, or at the start).

5. Protests against Course: Protests against the course will only be accepted prior to the start of each event or race.

6. Marshalling of Events: Competitors will not be permitted to commence in an event if they have not previously “ticked off” with the marshal and / or are late reporting to the marshalling area. To assist the organizers in determining how many heats may be required, events may be marshaled the day before or at the start of the day the event is scheduled.

7. Starts and False Starts: Start decisions by the Starter or Chief Referee (or Chief Referee’s designate) are not subject to protest or appeal. A race “start” not called by either the starter or check starter as a “false start” is regarded as a legitimate start and no protest and/or appeal will be entertained.

8. Finish Decisions: Judges’ order-of-finish decisions are not subject to protest or appeal.

2.2 CODE OF CONDUCT

2.2.1 LSA will: 1. Promote and encourage fair play and sportsmanship through its members. 2. Having regard to Par. 2.1 above impress upon competitors, coaches, Technical

Officials, and administrators the need to maintain the highest standards of sportsmanship in lifesaving sport.

3. Ensure that its rules are fair, clearly understood by competitors, coaches, Technical Officials, and administrators, and properly enforced.

4. Make every effort to ensure that its rules are applied consistently and impartially. 5. Treat all members equally with respect, regardless of gender, race or physical

characteristics. 2.2.2 LSA Technical Officials Code of Conduct:

1. Abide by the rules and the spirit of the competition. 2. Be honest, fair, and ethical in dealing with others. 3. Be professional in appearance, action, and language. 4. Resolve conflicts fairly and promptly through established procedures. 5. Maintain strict impartiality. 6. Maintain a safe environment for others. 7. Be respectful and considerate of others. 8. Be a positive role model.

2.2.3 Competitors Code of Conduct: 1. Abide by the rules and the spirit of the competition. 2. Accept the decisions of Chief Referees and Technical Officials without question or

complaint, however decision may be subject to protest or appeal (other than starts).



Ccompetitors’ who consider they have been disadvantaged or have been subjected to a breach of the rules may protest to the Chief Referee.

3. Never consider cheating and in particular, not attempt to improve their individual performance by the use of drugs or other enhancing substances.

4. Exercise reasonable self-control at all times. 5. Accept success and failure, victory and defeat, with grace and magnanimity. 6. Treat their fellow competitors, team members, Technical Officials, coaches with respect,

both in and outside the competition arena.

2.2.4 Team Managers and Coaches Code of Conduct: 1. Insist that competitors understand and abide by the principles of fair play. 2. Never countenance the use of drugs or enhancing substances by competitors. 3. Never employ methods or practices that could involve risks, however slight, to the long-

term health or physical development of their competitors. 4. Not attempt to manipulate the rules in order to take advantage for their competitors or

their opponents. 5. Respect the regulations and authority of LSA and not attempt to avoid or circumvent these

regulations. 6. Recognize the special role that they have to play in the establishment of standards by

setting a good example of sportsmanship at all times. 7. Respect the rights of other teams and never deliberately act in a manner intended to be to

the detriment of another team. 8. Respect the rights of competitors, coaches and Technical Officials and not exploit or

deliberately act in a manner detrimental to them. 9. Not endeavor to influence the result of a competition by any action not strictly within the

rules and regulations, or within the fundamental precepts of fair play. 2.2.5 Supporters and Spectators Code of Conduct:

1. Respect the authority and regulations of LSA and not attempt to avoid or circumvent them.

2. Accept the authority of Chief Referees and Technical Officials to make decisions. 3. Abide by the spirit of the competitions. 4. Exercise reasonable self-control at all times. 5. Be respectful and considerate in interactions with others. 6. Acknowledge the performance of all involved in the competition with grace and

magnanimity. 2.2.6 Serious Discipline Offence

1. If a competitor or team commits what could be a serious discipline offence, they should immediately contact the Competition Committee and detail the circumstances. Failure to report a possible violation is itself an offence against LSA rules.

2. Allegations of a serious discipline offence shall be referred to the Disciplinary Committee. 3. If the Chief Referee disqualifies a competitor or team for a serious offence in lifesaving

competition, the Chief Referee may also choose to make a report to the Disciplinary Committee which may decide to apply a further penalty against the competitor or team and its members.

2.3 PERFORMING A RESCUE DURING COMPETITION In events, up to the final, should a competitor be disadvantaged due to performing a rescue during that event, and have his or her chances of qualifying through to the next round disadvantaged, the competitor may be allowed to proceed through to the next round, providing that he can be accommodated. However, should the rescue take place during the final, it will be subject to the Chief Referee’s discretion, but generally unless the race is stopped, the race result will stand.



2.4 NIPPER COMPETITIONS Managers and coaches should not force nippers to enter events against their will, if the nipper does not have the confidence or if the nipper is not physically capable to enter the event. Managers should also ensure that the nippers are competent and capable to complete the events they have been entered. The Chief Referee will have the right to withdraw a nipper at the start of an event in cases where the sea conditions are not considered suitable or during an event if in his opinion it is unsafe or if it is perceived that the nipper is not capable of completing the event.

2.5 TRANSGENDER ATHLETE POLICY Amongst its constitutional objects, the LSA seeks to at all times act in the interests of the members and lifesaving; and formulate or adopt and implement appropriate policies, including in relation to sexual harassment, equal opportunity, equity, drugs in sport, health, safety, youth, open and master programmes, infectious diseases and such other matters as arise from time to time as issues to be addressed in lifesaving. LSA also has an interest in encouraging participation and ensuring competitive lifesaving activities are conducted on a fair and equal basis. In addition, the LSA considers that in order to meet these objects a policy is required regarding the treatment by Members of transgender athletes wishing to compete and has developed this Policy in response. Therefore, the LSA adopts the (International Olympic Committee) IOC Trans Gender Guidelines as follows: IOC Transgender guidelines:

1. Since the 2003 Stockholm Consensus on Sex Reassignment in Sports, there has been a growing recognition of the importance of autonomy of gender identity in society, as reflected in the laws of many jurisdictions worldwide.

2. There are also, however, jurisdictions where autonomy of gender identity is not recognised in law at all.

3. It is necessary to ensure insofar as possible that trans-athletes are not excluded from the opportunity to participate in sporting competition.

4. The overriding sporting objective is and remains the guarantee of fair competition. Restrictions on participation are appropriate to the extent that they are necessary and proportionate to the achievement of that objective.

5. To require surgical anatomical changes as a pre-condition to participation is not necessary to preserve fair competition and may be inconsistent with developing legislation and notions of human rights.

6. Nothing in these guidelines is intended to undermine in any way the requirement to comply with the World Anti-Doping Code and the WADA International Standards.

7. These guidelines are a living document and will be subject to review in light of any scientific or medical developments.

Guidelines The IOC agreed the following guidelines to be taken into account by International Sport Federations when determining eligibility to compete in male and female competition:

1. Those who transition from female to male are eligible to compete in the male category without restriction.

2. Those who transition from male to female are eligible to compete in the female category under the following conditions:

• The athlete has declared that her gender identity is female. The declaration cannot be changed, for sporting purposes, for a minimum of four years.

• The athlete must demonstrate that her total testosterone level in serum has been below 10 nmol/L for at least 12 months prior to her first competition (with the requirement for any longer period to be based on a confidential case-by-case evaluation, considering whether or not 12 months is a sufficient length of time to minimize any advantage in women’s competition).



• The athlete's total testosterone level in serum must remain below 10 nmol/L throughout the period of desired eligibility to compete in the female category.

• Compliance with these conditions may be monitored by testing. In the event of non-compliance, the athlete’s eligibility for female competition will be suspended for 12 months.

2.6 COMPETITORS WITH PERMANENT DISABILITIES Upon application to the Competition Committee at an event, an allowance may be considered for a competitor with a permanent limiting disability, but only if there is no disadvantage to other competitors in the event. The decision of the Competition Committee shall be final and shall not be subject to protest. Notes:

1. This section is not to assist competitors who have suffered a temporary injury. The section is intended to assist members with a permanent limiting disability to participate in LSA competition.

2. This section is also not intended in the normal course to assist competitors with, say, replacement knees or hips and/or muscle and/or joint injuries and/or dilapidations etc. by allowing runners in events. Such competitors must accept that their capacity may be limited by life events but does not qualify for allowances.

3. It is clarified that an undertaking by a team or individual not to overtake or simply maintain their relative place in a race is not regarded as eliminating a disadvantage to other competitors in the event.

2.7 VIDEO RECORDING DEVICES 2.7.1 Mounted on craft: Video cameras may be mounted on boards, surf skis and surf boats (except nipper boards) as long as such devices conform to the requirements specified in Section 9: Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures. Note: Any video camera attached to a LSA rescue board used for competition must be placed in a similar position as described for boards. 2.7.2 Attached to competitors: With the exception of surf boat sweeps, video cameras may not be worn or otherwise attached to a competitor from start to finish of a race. 2.8 COMMUNICATION DEVICES IN COMPETITION Competitors in a race are not permitted to use electronic communication devices (either attached to a craft, equipment or to their person) from the beginning to the completion of the race. 2.9 GPS DEVICES IN COMPETITIONS Competitors are not permitted to use any Global Position System (GPS) devices (either attached to a craft or to their person) from the commencement of, to the completion of a race. 2.10 COMPETITION ATTIRE Competitors shall wear costumes, clothing or dress approved by LSA. A competitor shall not be permitted to take part in any competition if, in the opinion of the Chief Referee, the competitor is not properly attired. For standards related to competition attire, see Section 9: Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures. 2.10.1 Swimwear: The Chief Referee has the authority to exclude any competitor whose swimwear does not comply with the following:

1. The swimsuits worn by competitors shall comply with the LSA swimsuit standard defined in Section 9: Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures,

2. Be in good moral taste and not carry any symbol which may be considered offensive. 3. Comply with the commercial identification policy. Both male and female competitors may

wear "modesty" swimwear made of a textile woven fabric under their swimsuit, provided that no competitive advantage is gained. Any modesty swimwear shall be restricted to the short style for men and the two-piece style top and/or bottom for women.



4. Upon application for religious and/or cultural reasons, LSA shall consider the wearing of (non-body shaping) textile swimwear that covers a greater part of the body provided that such swimwear does not provide a competitive advantage.

2.10.2 Protective clothing: Except for swimmers in pool, open water and surf events, other protective clothing (e.g., shorts, vests, t-shirts, etc.) may be worn by competitors in both individual and team events unless otherwise prescribed by these rules or the event organising authority. Vests, t-shirts and shorts, long leg tights and/or leg stockings are only permitted to be worn in the pool line throw event and in non-swimming surf events or non-swimming legs of team events.

2.10.3 Flotation vests and helmets: May be worn in board, surf ski, surf boat events and in non-swimming legs of the Ironman/Woman and Ocean M individual and relay events. In surfboat events the sweep and oarsman may wear apparel (including wetsuit and booties) as conditions warrant. The specifications for wetsuits shall not apply.

2.10.4 Competition skull caps and helmets

1. Competition skull caps and/or helmets must be worn at the start of a race by competitors in all events to assist with safety, identification and judging of competitors.

2. All competitors from the same team shall wear identical skull caps and/or helmets in each event. Competitor names on skull caps/helmets are permitted. Handlers must wear a cap to assist in event judging and lane allocations.

3. In surf and open water events, skull caps – securely fastened under the chin – must be worn on the competitors’ heads at the start of each event and at the start of each leg in team events.

4. In pool events and in the Simulated Emergency Response Competition, skull caps or rubber or silicone caps must be worn on competitors’ heads at the start of each event and at the start of each leg in team events.

5. Competitors may also wear rubber or silicone caps under skull caps in surf and open water competition.

6. The wearing of aquatic safety helmets is optional in craft events unless specified otherwise. In surf boat event: all rowers and sweeps must wear an approved aquatic safety helmet unless advised otherwise by competition officials. For helmet standards, see Section 9: Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures

7. In all surf boat, board, and surf ski events, competitors may wear safety helmets on the same conditions as swim skull caps. Helmets must be presented in team colours and design.

8. A competitor/team shall not be disqualified if the skull cap or helmet is inadvertently displaced or lost after the start of an event, provided that officials can identify that the competitor correctly completed the course/race.

Note: Competitors should continue to wear their identifying skull caps (to assist in accurate recording of placings) until the official in charge of the finish advises skull caps may be removed.

2.10.5 Vests: Competitors in pool events are not required to wear distinctive high-visibility vests unless otherwise determined by competition organisers. For safety and identification, competitors and handlers entering surf and open water competition or training beyond knee depth shall be required to wear distinctive high-visibility vests as determined by the LSA competition organiser. Handlers will be warned if they do not wear high visibility vests in such circumstances. High-visibility vests are mandatory in events staged in surf or open water. In surf and open events, the vests worn by swimmers must be high-visibility, sleeveless singlets extending from the neck to the midriff region. Competitors who are not swimming (e.g., paddlers, handlers) are permitted to wear different style high-visibility vests (e.g., sleeved rash vests). These vests must be worn over the top of swimwear and, where relevant, personal flotation devices, protective clothing, and/or wet suits. Competitors may also be required to wear



distinctive coloured vests or bibs to assist with judging of finishes. Such vests or bibs will be supplied by LSA. Even when LSA competition organisers supply high-visibility vests, competitors may be permitted to wear their own vests only if:

• The vest colour is the same as that prescribed by the organisers. • The vests meet the requirements of LSA competition sponsorship requirements. • The vests are approved by the LSA competition management committee.

Should organisers prescribe a different coloured vest to be worn in different events or areas, or by different genders to assist with safety, identification and or/judging, they will be supplied by LSA. In such circumstances, club or team high visibility vests do not need to be worn under the prescribed coloured vest. 2.10.6 Lifejackets and Personal Flotation Devices (PFDs): Personal Flotation Devices may be worn in board, surf ski, and surf boat events, and in non-swimming legs of the Ironman/woman and Ocean M individual and relay events. For PFD standards, see Section 9 – Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures 2.10.7 Eyewear: Swim goggles may be worn except in Simulated Emergency Response Competition. Sunglasses or optical glasses may be worn in all events provided that any eye protection or optical glasses worn must be suitably designed for that event. No Eyewear permitted in flags, 2.10.8 Footwear

1. Competitors shall not wear footwear in competition events unless otherwise specified in the event description or at the discretion of the Chief Referee based on conditions.

2. Manikin handlers may wear footwear in pool events. 3. Competitors may wear footwear in the 1 km and 2 km Beach Runs and 3 x 1 km Beach

Run Relay. 2.10.9 Wetsuits

1. Wetsuits shall be permitted in surf events only in water temperature of less than 16 degrees Celsius. The Chief Referee may authorise the wearing of wetsuits dependent upon weather, water or other marine conditions. In such circumstances it is recommended that wetsuits be worn by competitors in water events or where there is a risk of immersion.

2. The Chief Referee in consultation with the Safety Officer and Competition Committee may allow the wearing of wetsuits in water temperatures greater than 16 degrees Celsius particularly where weather and/or wind chill factors are considered a risk for participant hypothermia. In such circumstances it is recommended that wetsuits be worn by competitors in water events or where there is a risk of immersion.

3. Competitors may not wear more than one wet suit or marine stinger suit. 4. Wetsuits must be worn in water temperatures of less than 13 degrees Celsius. 5. Wetsuits may be worn by surf boat sweeps in any conditions. 6. No events with swimming shall take place in water temperature less than 13 degrees

Celsius. 7. Wetsuits must conform to LSA standards outlined in Section 9: Facilities, Equipment

Standards and Scrutineering Procedures 2.10.10 Marine Singer Suits: The Chief Referee may authorise the wearing of marine stinger suits dependent upon marine conditions. In such circumstances it is recommended that marine stinger wetsuits be worn by competitors in water events where there is a risk of injury. Marine Stinger Suits are to be approved by the organising authority for a competition. 2.10.11 Use of Body Tape: Body tape used for preventative, medical, therapeutic or kinesiology purposes is allowed at the discretion of the Chief Referee as long as it does not provide a competitive advantage to improve grip, grasping, or propulsion.



Note: The above means that, in general, tapes on the body (including limbs but not extremities) may be acceptable. Further, in general tape is not permitted: - on multiple fingers (two or more fingers taped together) as they may aid swimming and/or grip: and - on a single finger, if it improves equipment grasping and manikin carry.

2.10.12 Colours: Lifesaving authority colours are considered to be those registered with LSA as their swimming/skull cap colours. 2.10.13 Identification: Where a lifesaving authority enters more than one team in an event the competitors in each team shall either all wear:

1. Skull caps with distinguishing numbers or letters, or 2. Distinguishing numbers or letters marked on their upper arms, or 3. Rash shirts/vests with distinguishing colours or distinguishing numbers or letters.

Notes:

1. In events such as surf boat, double ski or board rescue races the rule shall not apply if the team can be identified because of the craft they are using.

2. If competitors are required to wear distinctive coloured vests this shall not be an option for team identification.

2.11 SPONSORSHIPS 2.11.1 General: LSA shall from time to time issue regulations or other guidelines that shall apply to sponsorship identification in relation to general display, dress, association equipment, competitor’s apparel and equipment. The Chief Scrutineer, Chief Referee or Marshal may order the removal or covering of any sign writing, logos, or corporate identification on either clothing, craft or equipment which is deemed not in "good taste", or which is in commercial conflict to the naming rights sponsors of LSA or the competition. This includes body tattoos and body paint. Refusal to comply with any directive for removal or the covering of such items shall result in the competitor, clothing, craft or equipment being totally banned from the competition area. 2.11.2 Team Sponsorship: Teams may be allowed to wear branded apparel (sponsored clothing - skull caps, costumes, rash vests) subject to certain conditions in competition. The conditions are:

1. All sponsorships must have been approved by LSA. The sponsorship cannot be in conflict with an LSA national sponsor. Applications must be made in writing with a sketch/drawing of proposed branded apparel.

2. The event sponsor or naming right sponsor for the event must give their consent, which needs to be obtained in writing prior to the event/competition for teams to wear the branded clothing. In the event that the team is in conflict with the event sponsor or naming right sponsor and they refuse to allow branded clothing to be worn, the branded apparel cannot be worn and competitors will not be permitted to compete in the branded apparel.

The advertising in terms of sign writing, logos, etc. on the branded apparel is subject to the following sizes: Swimming/Skull Caps: Lettering or a logo is permitted on the cap not more than 75 mm

square or radius of 40 mm on both sides. Rash Vests: Lettering or logo is permitted on both the front and back, width/length of not

more than 300 mm and height of not more than 100 mm. Costume: Lettering or logo is permitted on both the front and back of not higher than 50

mm and 150 mm long on one side. Wet Suit: As Rash vests. Craft: As Par. 2.11.6 (below)



Notwithstanding the aforementioned, sponsor/s of teams may not display other signs, banners, flags or other identification within close proximity, for example - on the spectator stands, on arena fencing, umbrellas etc. to the competition area. 2.11.3 Body Tattoos and Body Paint: Sponsors body tattoos and body paint may be shown only once on the body and the body tattoo or paint may not exceed 150 mm by 50 mm. 2.11.4 Event Sponsorship: LSA retains the right to all competitions and the appointment of any naming right sponsor. Should the event naming right sponsor provide vests or other competition apparel for the event, then a team and/or individual will be required to wear the sponsor’s apparel – if there is an ethnic or moral objection to the sponsors clothing, subject to the Chief Referee or the LSA Director: Sport approval, the competitor will be exempt here from and must compete in their unbranded Lifesaving Authority’s apparel. 2.11.5 Individual Sponsorship: Individual competitors may display logos, name/s of their individual sponsors on their costume and/or clothing and craft, however this is subject to the approval of their team and LSA and where applicable the event sponsor or naming right sponsor. The same conditions apply as team sponsorships. The advertising in terms of sign writing, logos, etc. on the branded apparel is subject to the following regulations: Swimming/Skull Caps: No individual branding is permitted. Rash Vests: Lettering or logo is permitted on both the front and back and on both sleeves of

not bigger than 50 mm square. Costume: Lettering or logo is permitted on the front and back of not bigger than 50 mm

square. Wet Suit: As rash vests. Craft: As Par. 2.11.6 (below) 2.11.6 Craft and Equipment: Teams are permitted to have their craft and equipment (boards, bodyboards, surf skis, rescue boards, boats, RTB’s, etc.) branded, i.e. have their sponsor’s logo on the craft or equipment, subject to the same restrictions as apparel - not in conflict with the naming right sponsor or LSA national sponsors. The Chief Scrutineer, Chief Referee or Marshal may order the removal or covering of any sign writing, logos, or corporate identification on either craft or equipment which is deemed not in "good taste", or which is in commercial conflict to the naming rights sponsors of LSA or the competition. Competitors may display the logo of his/her individual sponsor on his/her craft subject to the same conditions as for teams. 2.12 SCRUTINEERING Scrutineering of craft and/or equipment may be conducted at any time before, during and after use in LSA competitions. Scrutineering is to ensure that all craft and/or equipment used in an LSA competition complies with and is operating, and otherwise, in accordance with the current specifications approved by LSA as set out in Section 9 - Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures. Penalties for craft and/or equipment not meeting LSA specifications may include removal of the craft and/or equipment from the competition, disqualification from the event, and/or other penalties deemed appropriate by LSA. A competitor may protest the decision in the manner prescribed in Section 8: Protests, Appeals and Discipline.



2.13 DEFINITION OF AN EVENT 2.13.1 General: To facilitate the conduct of competitions, the various sections, disciplines and events may be considered to be related.

1. “Sections” are areas in which competition events are conducted e.g. ski section, boat section, swim section, age group section, gender sections, etc.

2. “Disciplines” are types of events and/or equipment used in LSA competition e.g. ski, board, boat rowing, swim, beach sprinting, beach running, beach flags, Taplin relay, iron person, Ocean M, board rescue.

3. “Events” are the disciplines conducted in different age and/or grades and/or gender categories e.g. open male ski race, U/15 female beach flags, boat race etc.

4. A “Race” is a round of an event and includes heats, rounds, quarter and semi-finals or final of an event.

For an event to be held the minimum number of competitors/teams must present themselves on the starting line:

1. Junior and Senior: It requires a minimum of 3 competitors or teams to constitute an event. If less than 3 competitors/teams enter or report, then the Chief Referee has the authority to combine the event/heat with the next age group up, i.e. competitors will have to compete in the next age group or the event will not be held.

2. Masters: One competitor or team are required to constitute an event. However, different age groups and gender events may be run concurrently (while maintaining their individual age groups).

2.13.2 Individual Events: An individual event shall be contested by a single competitor subject to the minimum number of competitors presenting themselves on the start line for an event to be held. An individual may be assisted by handlers (e.g. ironman, ski race, etc.) There can be no substitution of individuals in an event or between rounds. If a competitor is disqualified for breach or rules etc., they lose all standing in the event. 2.13.3 Team Events: A team event is contested by more than one team from the same club or lifesaving authority who may either complete an event or race together as a discrete unit (e.g. boat race, etc.) or separately (e.g. relay events, board rescue, etc.). Team members may be substituted between rounds (as per Par. 2.14) but there shall be no substitution of competitors while a race is being conducted. If one or more competitor is disqualified for a breach or rules, etc. the entire team shall lose all standing in the event being contested. Note: For the purposes of LSA's Anti-Doping Policy and for the avoidance of doubt the above

definitions for “individual events” and “team events” are the same as the definitions of "Individual Sport" and "Team Sport" captured in LSA's Anti-Doping Policy.

In all events designated as team events the “team” shall consist of members of the same lifesaving authority (i.e. Club, Branch or Province) who must fulfil all LSA entry requirements. In specific team events (like relays, taplin, etc.), under certain conditions a competitor may compete in another age group. The restrictions are:

1. Junior competition: Only Juniors may enter Junior team events. 2. Senior competition: Juniors (U/17, U/18 and U/19) and Masters may enter in

Senior/Open events; however they must have been pre-entered in the Senior/Open competition.

Note: Members are reminded that they must compete under their own name and are not

permitted to compete in the same event in different teams. 2.14 SUBSTITUTION OF COMPETITORS In individual events there can be no substitution. Competitors shall compete in heats/rounds as drawn. In events where two or more persons comprise a team, substitution is permitted providing:



1. The team names must be submitted with each team entry. 2. Members substituted in each team must be suitably qualified members of the same

lifesaving authority. 3. Such members’ names shall be entered elsewhere on the entry form, or if not on the

entry form their registration must be verified by the production, by a responsible Team Official, of the relevant record of registration or in such manner as is acceptable to the Chief Referee and all entry conditions satisfied.

4. Any member may be substituted into or out of any event in accordance with the provisions of this Manual (e.g. ages, qualifications, etc.)

5. A competitor, who has previously competed in a team event in one team at a competition, cannot be substituted into another team competing in the same event at the same competition (except handlers). Quarters, semis and finals are deemed to be the “same event”.

6. The dead line for substitutions is 15 minutes before the start of the first event of any day. The only exception to this rule will be for medical reasons and upon the submission of a medical certificate submitted to and accepted by the Chief Referee.

7. If an event is carried over from the previous day and the heats or a previous round have already taken place no member of the teams may be substituted in the next round.

Note:

1. If one of the team members suffers a temporary injury, no substitution is permitted. For example by allowing a runner in event, i.e. in the taplin relay. Such competitor must accept that their capacity may be limited by life events but does not qualify for any allowances.

2. At the South African Championships and competitions where the “Event Carnival Management System” is used, the deadline allowed for substitutions and changes to teams can be made before 06h00 on the day of the competition. No substitutions and changes to teams will be permitted after 06h00 and the only exception to this rule will be for medical reasons and upon the submission of a medical certificate submitted to and accepted by the Chief Referee.

2.15 BREACH OF RULES The rules in this manual are made in the best interests of lifesaving, competition and competitors. The purpose of the rules is to establish and maintain a safe and fair enviroment in which competition can be conducted. Competitors must adhere to the courses and are bound by the rules set out in this Manual for the conduct of various events. Where a competitor fails to adhere to prescribed course or breaches or fails to follow a rule in this manual they may be penalised or disqualified by the Chief Referee or relevant Technical Officials at their discretion. Any alleged breach of any rule in this Competition Manual shall be reported in the first instance by a Technical Official to the Chief Referee or Sectional Referee or the Starter (relating to the starting of events only) who shall investigate the circumstances and make a decision. In the event of a Rule infringement a competitor or team may be disqualified by the Chief Referee or Sectional Referee or the Starter (relating to the starting of events only) or otherwise penalised as determined by the Chief Referee, Appeals Committee and/or the Competition Committee. Competitors who consider they have been disadvantaged or have been subjected to a breach of the rules may protest to the Chief Referee in the manner prescribed in Section 8: Protests, Appeals and Discipline. Protests or appeals arising from decisions of a Technical Official or the Chief Referee under these rules will be determined in the manner provided for in Section 8: Protests, Appeals and Discipline. LSA may also, in its absolute discretion, investigate and take action on any matter of “competing unfairly” prior to, during or following the completion of competition.



2.16 ABUSE/INAPPROPRIATE BEHAVIOUR Any LSA member or competitor who abuses a Technical Official, LSA member of member of the public or another competitor at a LSA competition or event may be excluded or disqualified from that competition or an event at the discretion of the Chief Referee. Additional penalties may also be imposed by the Disciplinary Committee. For the purposes of this rule “abuse” includes making direct or implied threats or behaving in an inappropriate manner, using excessive/foul language, acts of racism, verbal or physical assault as determined by the Chief Referee and/or relevant Technical Officials in their absolute discretion. Total disqualification from an event and/or penalties as determined by LSA may be imposed on any member abusing a Technical Official or another competitor/s or teams at a LSA competition. Any action by a competitor which could bring the event or LSA into public scrutiny can be considered as bringing disrepute to the event and the Chief Referee may disqualify that competitor(s) from taking any further part in the competition and also refer the matter to LSA for further sanction depending on the severity of the misdemeanour. Note: LSA is committed to ensuring that every person involved in the movement is treated with respect and dignity and protected from discrimination, harassment and abuse.

2.17 COMPETING UNFAIRLY A competitor or team will be disqualified if a competitor, team or handler is deemed to have competed or acted unfairly. For the purpose of this rule “competing unfairly” or whether a competitor or team has “competed unfairly” will be determined by the Chief Referee and/or relevant Technical Officials in their absolute discretion. Examples of “competing unfairly” include:

1. Impersonating another competitor. 2. Attempting to defeat the ballot or draw for events or positions. 3. Competing twice in the same individual event. 4. Competing twice in the same event in different teams. 5. Purposely interfering with a course to gain an advantage. 6. Jostling or obstructing another competitor or handler so as to impede his progress. 7. Receiving physical or material outside assistance (other than verbal or other directions

except where specifically excluded by the rules of the event). 2.18 LUCK OF PREVAILING CONDITIONS Competitors acknowledge and agree that:

1. In lifesaving competitions the conduct of and participation in such competitions can and will be effected by the prevailing conditions.

2. There is often an element of the “luck of the prevailing conditions” in entering and competing in lifesaving competitions.

3. A protest and appeal on an incident is not available to them when the incident is caused by the prevailing conditions after the start of the race.

4. The Chief Referee and/or relevant Technical Official(s) have absolute discretion as to whether an incident has been caused by the luck of the competition or the prevailing conditions.

2.19 START AND COMPLETION OF A COMPETITION The Official start of a competition is when a bulletin or circular is issued calling for entries to a competition. The official completion time of a competition is twenty (20) minutes after the completion of the final event at the competition. However, matters currently in progress (i.e. protests or appeals or matters of “competing unfairly”) shall continue to final resolution, the result of which shall be considered as being within the official completion time.



2.20 APPOINTMENT OF MANAGER AND CHAPERON Every lifesaving authority will appoint a Manager to manage and control the team of competitors. The Manager shall be responsible and accountable for the team behaviour at the competition and all activities related to the competition (i.e. social functions, accommodation venues, travel to and from the competition, etc.). If there are female team member/s the lifesaving authority must appoint a Chaperon who will be responsible for the female member/s welfare. The Chaperon is accountable to the Manager. If the Team Manager is a woman, she can also be appointed to the Chaperon position. 2.21 RESPONSIBILITIES OF COMPETITORS, TEAM MANAGERS AND CHAPERONS AT

LIFESAVING COMPETITIONS It is the responsibility of the competitor, Manager and Chaperon to ensure that:

1. All competitors and teams must register prior to competing. 2. The team management and competitors to be familiar with the event schedule and

rules and regulations governing particular events. 3. Competitors must report promptly to the designated marshalling area and register

before the start of each event. 4. Competitors will not be permitted to commence an event if they are late reporting to

the marshalling area. 5. A competitor/team who is absent from an event or arrives after marshalling has

finished, shall be disqualified from the event and will not be eligible for any points in that particular heat, semi-final or final, from which disqualification took place.

6. Competitors should enter competition at all times in the spirit of the rules, avoiding all unfair advantage.

2.22 MEDIA STATEMENTS Lifesaving authorities shall be permitted to promote an event/competition, however, no competitor, Team Manager, Official or spokesperson for a lifesaving authority or a member of lifesaving authority shall make media statements which could bring LSA, the competition or event, where applicable the sponsor, or Technical Officials into controversy. Such statements shall be deemed to be a breach of LSA protocol and may be dealt with accordingly. Complaints regarding the organisation of the competition or event, or any other matter, should be directed through the appropriate LSA channels, and will be dealt with by the responsible section, or officers. Such official complaints will be acknowledged. 2.23 THEFT Any person/s found stealing signage, bunting or any equipment owned or used by LSA, their sponsors, lifesaving authorities or competitors will be immediately reported to the South African Police Services and that person/s will be brought before the LSA Disciplinary Committee. An automatic disqualification of the person/s from the competition will occur if any competitor is found guilty of theft. 2.24 DRUG POLICY LSA subscribes to the rules as set out by the World Anti-Doping Agency (WADA), the International Lifesaving Federation (ILS) and Drug Free Sport South Africa. LSA shall have the right to conduct drug tests on any of the competitors, at random, at any of the competitions, trials, events, championships, out of competition testing, displays and/or demonstration, which fall under LSA jurisdiction, and should a competitor be found to have used a banned drug, they would immediately be referred to a Disciplinary Committee. Any competitor who refuses to undertake a drug-test will be deemed to have failed the drug test and be referred to the Disciplinary Committee. The table of banned substances will be as laid down by the WADA from time to time. All drug testing will be carried out under the supervision of Drug Free Sport South Africa or other designated WADA agency.



Information regarding anti-doping, the ILS Anti-Doping Rules and WADA Revised Prohibited List can be viewed at: http://www.ilsf.org/lifesaving-sport/rules/anti-doping Refer to Appendix 13 for the LSA TUE application form. A violation of the Anti-Doping Rules leads to disqualification of an athlete's individual results including forfeiture of points, medals and prizes in individual events. In a team event, if a member of a team violates the Anti-Doping Rules, the entire team shall be disqualified from that event with the attendant loss of points, medals and prizes. For purposes of doping control, the following definitions shall apply:

1. Individual events: An individual event shall be contested by a single competitor. An individual may be assisted by handlers (e.g., Ironman/Ironwoman, Super Lifesaver). There can be no substitution of individuals in an event or between rounds. If a competitor is disqualified for a breach of the rules, doping offence, etc., the competitor loses all standing in the event being contested.

2. Team events: A team event is contested by more than one competitor from the same club or lifesaving unit who complete an event or race together as a discrete unit (e.g., SERC) or separately (e.g., relay events). Team members may be substituted between rounds, but there shall be no substitution of competitors while a race is being conducted. If one or more competitors are disqualified for a breach of the rules, doping offence, etc., the entire team loses all standing in the event being contested.

3. Team medal count or point score: To recognise overall winning teams at a competition a medal count tally (based on individual and team event first placings, etc.) or a point score may be conducted. The organising authority shall advise the basis details of any team medal count or point score. If one or more competitors are disqualified for a breach of the rules, doping offence, etc. in an individual or team event, then no medals or points are awarded to those particular competitors or teams for the events the team or individual is disqualified. The team may retain standing in the overall medal count or point score.

Note: The definitions above for “individual events” and “team events” are the same as the definitions of “individual sport” and “team sport” used in the Anti-Doping Rules. The term “crew” has the same meaning an effect as “team” in relation to LS competition. 2.25 PERMITS TO GO ON TOURS All demonstrations and tours by lifesaving authorities must be submitted for sanction to LSA. A full itinerary of such contemplated tours as well as any correspondence must be submitted to LSA for consideration in the first instance. In addition it is also a LSA policy that under no circumstances may nippers compete or be a member of a team that competes in a lifesaving competition, and/or related display or an international competition involving the use of lifesaving equipment of the type/types of a similar nature to those conducted by LSA outside the South African borders. This policy does not apply to competitors competing in the ILS Lifesaving World Championships (National Teams or Interclub Teams) and/or ILS Lifesaving World Youth Championships (National Teams or Interclub Teams), Interclub Surf Boat Championships, Interclub IRB Championships, or any additional event at the ILS Lifesaving World Championships.

http://www.ilsf.org/lifesaving-sport/rules/anti-doping

Section 3 – Competition Entry Requirements


SECTION 3: COMPETITION ENTRY REQUIREMENTS - INDEX

3.1 GENERAL ……………………………………………………………………………………… 2

3.2 DUTY OBLIGATION AND EXEMPTION POLICY …………………………………………... 2

3.3 ANNUAL RETEST …………………………………………………………………………..….. 2

3.4 COMPETITION ELIGIBILITY …………………………………………………………………. 3

3.4.1 Membership ……………………………………………………………………… 3

3.4.2 Dual Membership ………………………………………………………………… 3

3.4.3 International Lifesaving Competitors …………………………………………… 3

3.4.3.1 Non-South African Citizen Competing for their own Life Saving Club ……… 4

3.4.3.2 Non-South African Citizen Competing for a South African Lifesaving club … 4

3.4.4 Competitive Transfers/Clearance ……………………………………………… 4

3.4.5 Transfer and Clearance …………………………………………………………. 4

3.4.6 International Competitive Transfers and Competition ………………………… 5

3.5 ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS, COMPETITION SEASON, AGES AND CATEGORIES 5

3.5.1 Competition Season ……………………………………………………………... 5

3.5.2 Determining Age Group …………………………………………………………. 5

3.5.3 Women/Men only events ……………………………………………………….. 6

3.5.4 Awards ……………………………………………………………………………. 6

3.5.5 Reciprocity of Awards ……………………………………………………………. 10

3.6 MASTERS - AGE AND GENDER GROUPS ………………………………………………... 10

3.6.1 General ……………………………………………………………………………. 10

3.6.2 Masters Team Events …………………………………………………………… 10



SECTION 3: COMPETITION ENTRY REQUIREMENTS 3.1 GENERAL Every competitor wanting to enter an LSA Championship or a competition sanctioned by LSA is required to be a registered member of a lifesaving authority, holder of the appropriate award and will have to fulfil the annual retest and the minimum duty requirements.

3.2 DUTY OBLIGATION AND EXEMPTION POLICY All members of LSA from the age of 14 years and competing in U/15 and above age are bound by LSA Duty Obligation and Exemption Policy. However, under no circumstances shall competitors be granted duty or club duty exemptions solely for competition reasons. Members may do duty for all clubs they are members of and if wishing to perform duties whilst away from their primary club must obtain permission from their Duty Captain prior to performing duty for any other club. All sanctioned voluntary duty hours may be calculated into the minimum duty requirement for competition.

Every competitor who enters a LSA Championships or a competition sanctioned by LSA will have to do minimum of 20 duty hours in the preceding year of the SA Championships. The “preceding year” is defined as the year from 1st February to the 31st January before the SA Championships. The following persons will be exempted from the duty requirements:

1. Any competitor over the age of 25 years. 2. Any competitor who is a life member of their club (life membership must have been

obtained through a minimum of 10 years, from date of obtaining LA, of duty/patrol service). Life membership must have been proposed and approved at the club’s annual general meeting or special general meeting. Minutes must be available for confirmation of Life Membership if so requested.

3. Any competitor who obtained their LA or JLA in the preceding year of the championships.

4. Any member who has not participated in any lifesaving activities for a relevant minimum period of 1 (one) year and providing such member’s name appears on the relevant Club Monthly Report as “Members Left” and subsequently as “Members Joining” such member will be granted dispensation for not having done the required duty hours.

3.3 ANNUAL RETEST

1. All competitors, except life-member (as defined in par. 3.2 above), masters and nippers, who are bound by LSA Duty Obligation and Exemption Policy, require to have a current LA retest to enter a competition sanctioned by LSA that must be renewed annually or a current JLA if under 16 years of age.

2. A current retest conducted within 12 months from the date of the last retest undertaken, 3. Entrants who have completed their retest after the expiry of the 12-month period from

their last retest are classed as late entries. These will be subject to the late entry penalty fee.

4. No late retests for competitors will be accepted after the closing date of 30 days prior to the start of the championships and 7 days prior to inter regional championships for the inter-regional competitors.

5. Late retests submitted after the closing date may be accepted in exceptional circumstances by written application to the LSA Director: Sport, for consideration and then only after having first been endorsed by the Regional/ Provincial Chief Examiner. These entries will be subject to an additional late entry penalty.

Note: A retest is required 12 months after the award has been taken.



3.4 COMPETITION ELIGIBILITY 3.4.1 Membership All competitors in lifesaving competitions held under the jurisdiction of LSA (including ILS competitions) shall be registered members and current financial members of clubs in good standing with their Clubs, Districts, Provinces and LSA. Clubs can load any new members onto the LSA Data Base found at: http://www.lifesavingsa.org.za/Default. If clubs do not have access to this site please contact the Head Office at: [email protected] or telephone: 031 312 9251. Any member wishing to compete in a LSA competition or event must:

a) Be registered on the LSA Membership Data Base. b) Complete the prescribed entry form. c) Be the holder of the appropriate award. d) Be proficient as prescribed for that particular award. e) Qualify under the necessary age category. f) Not be in default with LSA or a lifesaving authority in relation to their service, financial,

discipline and duty/patrol obligations.

3.4.2 Dual Membership a) A member may be admitted as a member to more than one club or lifesaving authority

during the currency of any lifesaving competition season. b) Members who hold dual membership are eligible to participate in all the relevant

internal club activities in the same season. c) Competing member shall not participate in any inter-club competition as a

representative of more than one club during any one competition season, i.e. the individual must choose the club which they will compete for, irrespective of the discipline Surf, Open Water, Pool or SERC or location of the competition.

d) A competitor can only represent a Branch or Provincial Team of the Branch or Provincial Team location of their competitive club.

e) Their registered membership on the LSA Membership Data Base will reflect their primary membership as the club they choose to compete for.

f) The competing member who wishes to transfer their competitive rights is required to apply for the transfer prior to competing for the new club

g) Notwithstanding the International Competitive Transfers and Competition (detailed in this Manual), members may belong to a Life Saving Club in both South Africa and another ILS member federation and choose to compete for both clubs (except at the same competition) provided they meet the award, proficiency, duty and membership requirements and all other obligations relevant to the country and club for which they wish to compete.

Note: Members with dual LSA and another ILS member federation club membership may, as a matter of protocol, advise their Branch/Province/National authority before competing for their alternate club.

Any ILS ruling in respect to competitive transfers and world championships events must be complied with. 3.4.3 International Lifesaving Competitors 3.4.3.1 Non-South African Citizen Competing for their own Life Saving Club:

LSA competitions are open to any International Life Saving members who meet the following criteria in full. Failure to comply fully with the following criteria prevents International Life Saving members from registering and competing in LSA events.

http://www.lifesavingsa.org.za/Default




Have their national lifesaving federation or similar (Branch, State, District, and Region) send a clearance letter verifying the following: a) All international competitors/teams must be member(s) of an (ILS) affiliated club.

b) All international competitors/teams must hold their organizations retest (refreshed and

current) equivalent qualification to the specific type of competition they wish to enter.

c) International competitors are required to contact the LSA Director of Sport at least two

working days prior to close of registrations to be allocated an Entry System username and

password.

International Lifesavers who wish to enter the LSA competitions or the South African national championships can only enter as a representative of their club and must compete in their registered clubs skull cap and colours. LSA National Championships are inter-club championships and international competitors must enter for their club and only club teams can enter team events (i.e. team members must all be from the same club). International competitors/teams will be awarded the championship medal for any appropriate placing achieved in events. A duplicate medal will be awarded to the first member of a South African team or individual competitor next finishing the event.

3.4.3.2 Non-South African Citizen Competing for a South African Lifesaving club:

A non- South African citizen who wishes to compete for a South African club is required to: a) Be a member of a South African lifesaving authority for at least 2 months and must have

resided in South Africa uninterrupted for at least 2 months immediately prior to competing.

b) Be the holder of the appropriate award as prescribed in the General and Specific Rules

detailed below.

c) Complete all clearances and transfers requirements as detailed in the regulations of LSA

and the overseas life saving authority that the member has left from.

d) Confirmed to have performed at least 50% of the hours of duty a LSA competitor needs

to perform in terms of the LSA Duty Obligation and Exemption Policy, at their South

African club, prior to competing at the South African Championships. The duties need

to be completed in South Africa in the 2 month period once registered for membership

of the club.

e) LSA recognises that some federations have comparable standards to LSA and any

member who complies with the relative award and/or proficiency requirements of that

Nation will have these awards recognised in South Africa. For a list of comparable

Nations recognised please contact LSA.

3.4.4 Competitive Transfers/Clearance A competitor must have obtained a transfer/clearance certificate from his transferring club/federation before competing for his new club. 3.4.5 Transfer and Clearance A member who desires to join another club and wishes to resign from his current club may do so under the following conditions:

a) The member desiring the transfer shall obtain the prescribed duplicate clearance form (refer Appendix 6) and after entering all the relevant details, lodge the original transfer form with the “losing” club and the duplicate with LSA. Club clearances are not to be unreasonably withheld if the member is in good standing i.e. patrols/duties are up to date and no financial liability and/or discipline exists.

b) The “ losing” club or its executive shall within 14 days of receiving the original form, endorse or reject the application and after recording its decision on the application form, immediately forward the original with the club’s decision to LSA for record purposes.



c) If the “losing” club approves the application the club shall record the approval on the original and return the same to LSA. The original shall be retained by LSA.

d) If the “losing” club rejects the application, they must record the reason for this and the application shall be considered at the next meeting of the provincial, district, regional or branch meeting for a decision. The decision shall be recorded on the original and returned to LSA. The member and the “losing” club shall also be advised of the lifesaving authority’s decision in writing.

e) The “losing” club or member has a right of appeal to LSA. Application for appeal must be made in writing and submitted to LSA Director: Sport.

f) If LSA does not receive a decision or the original form from the “losing” club within 14 days of receipt of the duplicate form, the application shall be considered at the next meeting of the lifesaving authority for a decision. The member and the “losing” club shall also be advised in writing of the decision of the lifesaving authority in writing.

g) Transfer of membership shall automatically take effect from the date the application is approved by the "losing" club, or in the case where there is an appeal, at the date of the lifesaving authority or LSA decision.

h) Members are permitted one transfer per competitive year i.e. being from 1st October in one year to 30th September the following year.

i) An exception to this will be bona fide resignation or relocation because of employment/study/family commitments. Such transfers will be subject to the consideration and approval by the LSA Director: Sport.

j) Any ILS ruling in respect to competitive transfers and world championships events must be complied with.

The above rule regarding “transfers/clearance” is applicable to Nippers, Juniors, Seniors and Masters members. 3.4.6 International Competitive Transfers and Competition Competitors must apply to transfer to a foreign club. For this transfer to succeed, competitors require approval from their club/branch/province and National Federation. Notes:

1. The arrangements for transfers are as per the Transfer and Clearance section. 2. Should an LSA member comply with this international competitive transfer and

compete for an overseas club in an ILS event or ILS member event they shall be deemed by LSA to have transferred their competitive rights to that overseas ILS member club.

3.5 ENTRANCE REQUIREMENTS, COMPETITION SEASON, AGES AND CATEGORIES 3.5.1 Competition Season The competition season shall run from 1st October in one year to 30th September the following year. 3.5.2 Determining Age Group For the purpose of determining an age group, all competitors must have a common birth date calculated as at midnight on 30th September each calendar year, i.e. the age at midnight on 30th September designates the competitor’s age category for competition. a) The minimum age for a Nipper to compete is 8 years old (the age is determined as the

age on birth date calculated as at midnight on 30th September that year) and provided the Nipper holds a Level 1 Award.

b) Nippers are not allowed to compete in more than one age category, however in specific team events (like relays, Taplin, etc.); under certain conditions a nipper may compete in an older age group. The restrictions in team events are: one younger competitor may be brought up to fill up a team in an older age group, but under NO circumstances will competitors be able to compete in a younger age group. The moving of a competitor to an older age group is only permitted upon special written application to



the Chief Referee and only if all competitors of the older age group have been used in that particular event. Only one nipper can be moved up for a particular event.

c) If a member turns 14 years of age, they may attempt their Junior Lifeguard Award. The member may participate as either a U/14 (nipper) or as a U/15 (junior) competitor, however he may only compete in one age group.

d) Junior competitors are only allowed to compete in the individual events in their own respective junior age category as listed in the Surf, Pool and Open Water tables listed below. However, the U/17, U/18 and U/19 may compete in the senior (open) age group, but the U/17 and U/18 may not compete in the U/19 age group and the U/15’s can only compete in their own age group category.

e) Junior competitors (U/15, U/17 and U/19) may form part of a combined age junior team for team events as specified per event.

f) In the event of an injury to an entered U/15, U/17, U/19 or open competitor in a relay team, on the day of competition and subject to written application for the Chief Referee’s approval; an U/15, U/17, U/19 competitor may be granted dispensation to complete the relay team in an older age group. All competitors from the older age group must be used before any application for dispensation can be made.

g) Members shall be eligible to contest Master’s events provided they are aged 30 years and above and are proficient LSA Award holders i.e. Lifeguard Award (LA) or Surf Proficiency Award (SPA) relative to Surf, Pool or Open Water respectively.

3.5.3 Women/Men only events Male and female only events may be conducted in designated competition categories. Male and female competitors shall be eligible to contest such events as per current LSA rules. However, no event shall be conducted at a competition which excludes gender, i.e. if only one event is to be conducted it shall be designated as open to both male and female competitors and shall be termed a “mixed” event. Notes:

1. The criteria for the above competition categories and provisions may vary from time to time. These variations will be notified by the way of LSA Circulars.

2. Some LSA events may be designated as open to both male and female competitors. 3. Some LSA team events may be designated as Mixed and may contain a specified or

non-specified number(s) of male and female competitors in each team.

3.5.4 Awards In order to compete, competitors depending on the age group, require a minimum award. Notes:

1. Any member attaining his award after the closing date for entries is excluded from participating in the competition.

2. Masters – do not require retest and duty hours if competing in a Masters age group competition only.

The categories, age, age groups and participation in individual and team events per section is set out in the tables below:



SURF COMPETITION

CATEGORY

AGE AGE GROUP & ENTRANCE

REQUIREMENTS INDIVIDUAL EVENTS TEAM EVENTS

Nippers

8 years Under 9 Boys and Girls. Level 1 (Surf or Open Water)

Yes - Competes in the U/9 Competes in the U/9 & U/10 combined team events only.

9 years Under 10 Boys and Girls. Level 1(Surf or Open Water)










Juniors

14 years Under 15 Male and Female Junior Lifeguard Award (Surf or Open Water)

Yes. Competes in the U/15. Cannot compete in Senior/Open events

Competes in the U/15, U/17 & U/19 combined team events only (Junior). Cannot compete in Senior/Open team events

15 years Under 16 Male and Female Junior Lifeguard Award (Surf or Open Water)

No. Competes as U/17. Cannot compete in Senior/Open events


16 years Under 17 Male and Female Lifeguard Award (Surf or Open Water)

Yes. Competes in the U/17 Can compete in Senior/Open events but not in U/19 age group

Competes in the U/15, U/17 & U/19 combined team events only (Junior). Can compete in Senior/Open events


No. Competes as U/19 Can compete in Senior/Open events



Yes. Competes in the U/19. Can compete in Senior/Open events


Seniors/ Open

19 years and over

19 years and over Male and Female. Lifeguard Award (Surf or Open Water)

Yes. Competes in the Senior/Open age group.

Competes in Senior/Open Team events

Masters 30 years and over

30 years and over Male and Female. Lifeguard Award (Surf or Open Water) only or Qualifying Certificate for Beach Events only. The boat sweep does not need to be a master, but must be a LA holder

Yes – competes in the relevant Masters age group. If a Master competitor would like to compete in the Senior/Open Age Group, they will not be required to have a valid Annual Retest nor duty hours, but would need to complete an Indemnity & Registration Form prior to the Championships

Competes in the relevant Masters age group. If a Master competitor would like to compete in the Senior/Open Age Group, they will not be required to have a valid Annual Retest nor duty hours, but would need to complete an Indemnity & Registration Form prior to the Championships



POOL COMPETITION

CATEGORY



Nippers

8 years Under 9 Boys and Girls. Level 1 (Surf, Open Water or Pool)


9 years Under 10 Boys and Girls. Level 1 (Pool)










Juniors

14 years Under 15 Male and Female. JLA (Surf, Open Water or Pool)



15 years Under 16 Male and Female JLA (Surf, Open Water or Pool)

No. Competes in the U/17. Cannot compete in Senior/Open events


16 years Under 17 Male and Female LA (Surf, Open Water or Pool)









Seniors/Open

19 years and over

19 years and over Male and Female LA (Surf, Open Water or Pool)

Yes. Competes in the Senior/Open age group.

Competes in Senior/Open Team events


30 years and over Male and Female LA (Surf, Open Water or Pool)

Yes – competes in the relevant age group. If a Master competitor would like to compete in the Senior/Open Age Group, they will not be required to have a valid Annual Retest nor duty hours, but would need to complete an Indemnity & Registration Form prior to the Championships

Competes in the relevant age group. If a Master competitor would like to compete in the Senior/Open Age Group, they will not be required to have a valid Annual Retest nor duty hours, but would need to complete an Indemnity & Registration Form prior to the Championships



OPEN WATER COMPETITION

CATEGORY



Nippers

8 years Under 9 Boys and Girls Level 1 (Surf or Open Water)












Juniors

14 years Under 15 Male and Female JLA (Surf or Open Water) and valid Annual Retest

Yes. Competes in the U/15. Cannot compete in Senior events


15 years Under 16 Male and Female JLA (Surf or Open Water) and valid Annual Retest

No. Competes in the U/17. Cannot compete in Senior events


16 years Under 17 Male and Female LA (Surf or Open Water) and valid Annual Retest









Seniors/Open

19 years and over

19 years and over Male and Female. LA (Surf or Open Water) and valid Annual Retest

Yes. Competes in the Senior/Open age group. Competes in Senior/Open Team

events


30 years and over Male and Female LA (Surf or Open Water) and valid Annual Retest or Qualifying Certificate for beach events only.

Yes – competes in the relevant age group. If a Master competitor would like to compete in the Senior/Open Age Group, they will not be required to have a valid Annual Retest nor duty hours, but would need to complete an Indemnity & Registration Form prior to the Championships

Competes in the relevant age group. If a Master competitor would like to compete in the Senior/Open Age Group, they will not be required to have a valid Annual Retest nor duty hours, but would need to complete an Indemnity & Registration Form prior to the Championships



3.5.5 Reciprocity of Awards A holder of a Nipper (Surf) Award or JLA (Surf) or LA (Surf) may enter the respective Pool events at Pool Championships and holder of a Nipper (Open Water) or JLA (Open Water) or LA (Open Water) may enter Surf and Beach events at the respective Surf championships. Pool Awards, i.e. Nipper (Pool) Award or JLA (Pool) or LA (Pool) are only valid for pool competition. A holder of a Qualifying Certificate may only enter Masters Beach Events. The equivalent award per age group is set out in the table below:

CATEGORY AGE GROUP SURF AWARD STILLWATER AWARD

Nippers

Under 9 Level 1 (Surf) Level 1 (Open Water)

Under 10 Level 1 (Surf) Level 1(Open Water)





Juniors

Under 15 JLA (Surf) JLA (Open Water)

Under 16 JLA (Surf) JLA (Open Water)

Under 17 LA (Surf) with valid retest LA (Open Water) with valid retest



Seniors 19 and over LA (Surf) with valid retest LA (Open Water) with valid retest

Masters 30 and over LA (Surf) LA (Open Water)

3.6 MASTERS - AGE AND GENDER GROUPS 3.6.1 General Masters competition is conducted in male and female categories. A competitor who is the holder of a Lifeguard Award shall be eligible to contest in a master’s competition after attaining the age of 30 years. The age qualification is taken at the 30th September each calendar year: i.e. the age at midnight on 30th September limits the competitor to the age group listed below. Competitors are to have their age marked on both upper arms in Surf and Open Water events. Masters who have obtained the Qualifying Certificate (QC) may enter master’s beach events only. The arm of the competitor to be marked as "QC" on the day of competition. The age group of individual masters competition are as follows: 30-34 years, 35-39 years, 40-44 years, 45-49 years, 50-54 years, 55-59 years, 60-64 years, 65-69, 70-74 and 75+ years and over. 3.6.2 Masters Team Events The age categories for master’s team events are as follows: In events, with the exception of surf boat races and double ski races, the events will be held for the following age categories - where the aggregate ages (as at the 30th September prior to the season on which the day of the competition is held) total the following:

a) 3 Competitors: Taplin Relay, Beach Relay, 3 x 1 km. Beach Run Relay: 110-129 years, 130-149 years, 150-169 years, 170 years and plus.

b) 2 Competitors: Double Ski races the age category is determined by the age of the younger competitor. Male and female compete in the same event together and the age categories are as follows: 30-34 years, 35-39 years, 40-44 years, 45-49 years, 50-54 years, 55-59 years, 60-64 years, 65-69 years, 70-74 years and 75 years and over.

The age categories for surf boats are calculated using the aggregate ages (as at the 30th September prior to the season on which the day of the competition is held) of the four rowers in the crew and does not include the sweep. The sweep does not need to be a master



competitor but must have an LA. The age categories are as follows: 120 years and plus and 180 years and plus. Notes:

1. In individual events Masters may only compete in their own Masters age group. 2. Masters are permitted to compete in only one team age category in each event

discipline conducted at a competition. Further, Masters Teams are permitted to compete only in their own team/crew age category in which their team qualify by way of ages unless there are insufficient starters. In such cases the team may compete in the next youngest team age category. Where a team event consisting of two competitors is conducted (e.g. double ski), the age of the younger competitor shall determine the age category; additionally, where an event with three or more competitors is conducted the combined ages of the team members shall apply.

3. In team events where a combined age is stated it is the age of each individual, as at the 30th September prior to the season in which the competition is held, added together – i.e. if a competitor turns 40 years of age during the competition season, 39 is the age used to reach combined age total (as at the 30th September prior to the season on which the day of the competition is held).

4. Masters competitors may not compete in more than one age category. 5. Masters competitors may enter a Championship as individual members of a club and

may participate in individual and team events. In team events, the team may not be made up of competitors from multiple clubs


SECTION 4: SURF COMPETITION - INDEX

4.1 EVENTS ………………………………………………………………………….. 3

4.2 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF SURF COMPETITION …………………….. 3

4.2.1 Arena Layout ……………………………………………………… 4

4.2.2 Buoy Colours ……………………………………………………… 4

4.2.3 Buoy Distances …………………………………………………… 4

4.2.4 Flag Colours ………………………………………………………. 5

4.2.5 Setting of Competition Courses ………………………………… 5

4.2.6 Hazardous Conditions …………………………………………… 5

4.2.7 Assignment of Positions ………………………………………… 5

4.2.8 Draws ……………………………………………………………… 5

4.2.9 Competitor Limitations …………………………………………... 6

4.2.10 Eliminations ……………………………………………………….. 7

4.2.11 Time Limits for Surf Events ……………………………………… 7

4.2.12 Reporting and Starting Times ……………………………………. 8

4.2.13 Marshalling ………………………………………………………... 8

4.2.14 Starting of Events ………………………………………………… 9

4.2.15 Racing Patient Events …………………………………………… 10

4.2.16 Change-Over (Tagging) in Relay Events ………………………. 10

4.2.17 Completion of Courses ………………………………………….. 11

4.1.18 Finish of Events …………………………………………………... 11

4.2.19 Dead Heats ……………………………………………………….. 12

4.2.20 “Disqualifications" and “Did Not Finish” Classifications ………. 12

4.2.21 Handler …………………………………………………………….. 12

4.3 SWIMMING EVENTS …………………………………………………………. 12

4.3.1 Rescue Tube Rescue Race …………………………………….. 12

4.3.2 Rescue Tube Race ………………………………………………. 15

4.3.4 Reel Alarm Race …………………………………………………. 16

4.3.4 Surf Swim Race ………………………………………………….. 19

4.3.5 Surf Swim Relay Race …………………………………………… 21

4.3.6 Surf Swim Team Race …………………………………………… 23

4.3.6 Run/Swim/Run Race …………………………………………….. 24

4.3.7 Run/Swim/Run Relay Race …………………………………… 25

4.4 CRAFT EVENTS ………………………………………………………………. 26

4.4.1 General Conditions of Craft Events …………………………….. 26

4.4.2 Single Ski Races ………………………………………………….. 27

4.4.3 Double Ski Races …………………………………………………. 29

4.4.4 Juniors/ Seniors and Masters Board Race ………………….. 30

4.4.5 Nippers Board Race ………………………………………… 31

4.4.6 Bodyboard Race …………………………………………………. 32


SECTION 4: SURF COMPETITION - INDEX

4.4.7 Board/Single Ski Relay Race …………………………………… 32

4.4.8 Nippers Board and Bodyboard Relay Race ……………………. 35

4.5 BEACH EVENTS ………………………………………………………………. 37

4.5.1 Beach Sprint ………………………………………………………. 37

4.5.2 Beach Relay ……………………………………………………….. 40

4.5.3 Beach Flags ……………………………………………………… 42

4.5.4 Beach Run ………………………………………………………… 46

4.5.5 3 x 1 Km. Beach Run Relay …………………………………….. 48

4.6 MULTI-DISCIPLINE EVENTS ………………………………………………… 50

4.6.1 General Conditions ……………………………………………….. 52

4.6.2 Board Rescue Race ……………………………………………… 51

4.6.3 Iron Man / Woman Race ………………………………………… 53

4.6.4 Iron Nipper Race………………………………………………….. 54

4.6.5 Taplin Relay Race (Juniors, Seniors and Masters)…………… 55

4.6.6 Taplin Relay Race Variations …………………………………… 57

4.6.7 Taplin Relay Race (Nippers) ……………………………………. 57

4.6.8 Ocean M Race .……………………………….......……………… 58

4.6.9 Ocean M Lifesaver Relay Race ………………………………… 62

4.6.10 Oceanman/Oceanwoman Eliminator Variation Race ………… 63

4.6.11 Olympic Mixed Ocean Lifesaver Relay Race …………………. 64

4.7 SURF BOAT EVENTS …………………………………………………………. 64


4.7.2 Competition Area …………………………………………………. 65

4.7.3 The Course ………………………………………………………… 65

4.7.4 Pre-Start …………………………………………………………… 67

4.7.5 The Start …………………………………………………………… 68

4.7.6 The Seaward Journey ……………………………………………. 68

4.7.7 The Turn …………………………………………………………… 70

4.7.8 The Return Journey ………………………………………………. 70

4.7.9 The Finish ………………………………………………………….. 70

4.7.10 Racing Format ……………………………………………………. 71

4.7.11 Round Robin Racing ……………………………………………… 71

4.7.12 Penalties and Disqualification …………………………………… 72


SECTION 4: SURF COMPETITION

4.1 EVENTS The following events are described in this section:

Section 4.3: Swim Events Rescue Tube Rescue Race Rescue Tube Race Reel Alarm Race Surf Swim Race Surf Swim Relay Race Run/Swim/Run Run/Swim/Run Relay Race

Section 4.4: Craft Events Single Ski Race Single Ski Relay Race Double Ski Race Board Race (Junior/Senior/Masters) Board Relay Race Nipper Board Race Nipper Bodyboard Race Nipper Bodyboard Relay Race Nipper Board Relay Race

Section 4.5: Beach Events Beach Sprint Beach Relay Beach Flags Beach Run 3 x 1 km Beach Run Relay

Section 4.6: Multi-Disciplinary Events Iron Man/Woman Race Iron Nipper Race Board Rescue Race Taplin Relay (Junior/Senior/Masters) Race Nipper Taplin Relay Race “M” Course Oceanman/Oceanwoman Race “M” Course Ocean Lifesaver Relay Race Oceanman/Oceanwoman Eliminator Variation

Race Olympic Mixed Ocean Lifesaver Relay Race

Section 4.7: Surf Boat

4.2 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF SURF COMPETITION

Team management and competitors are responsible for being familiar with the competition schedule, and with the rules and procedures governing events.

a) Competitors may not be permitted to commence in an event if they are late reporting to the marshalling area. To assist the organizers in determining how many heats may be required, events may be marshalled the day before or at the start of the day the event is scheduled.

b) A competitor or team absent from the start of an event shall be disqualified. c) Unless specifically provided for, no artificial enhancements to propulsion may be used in

competition (e.g., hand webs, arm bands). d) The use of wax or similar substances to assist the competitor in maintaining the grip on or

contact with boards or surf skis or paddles is permitted in surf events. e) Body tape used for preventative, medical, therapeutic or kinesiology purposes is allowed at

the discretion of the Chief Referee as long as it does not provide a competitive advantage. f) Video cameras may be mounted on boards and surf skis as long as such devices conform

to the requirements specified in Section 9: Facilities, and Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures. Video cameras may not be worn by or otherwise attached to a competitor from start to finish of a race.

g) Competitors must wear their club or national team swim caps in all events. Skull caps, securely fastened under the chin, must be worn on competitors’ heads at the start of each race.

h) A competitor shall not be disqualified if the cap is lost after the start of a race provided that officials can identify that the competitor correctly completed the event.

i) Competition courses: Protests against the course will only be accepted prior to the start of each event or race.

j) All courses shall be measured, set, and aligned to the Chief Referee’s satisfaction ensuring as far as possible that all lanes have fair and equal conditions.


k) The Chief Referee may authorize adjustments to course set-ups to ensure the safety, fair judging and efficient running of the event (e.g., distances, number of lanes or buoys, number of competitors per race). Any course changes must be communicated to competitors prior to the start of the race (e.g., at the team managers briefing, in the marshalling area, or at the start).

l) The use of colour-coded buoys and flags is recommended to guide competitors accurately through the required courses.

m) Buoy distances shall be measured from the end of knee-depth water at low tide mark. However, distances may vary depending upon beach conditions and safety factors. Adjustment of the buoys may be necessary during the competition if they move out of alignment.

n) Competitors in craft events may pass through the swimming buoys on their craft on the understanding that they are solely responsible if the buoys offer an impediment to their progress (not permissible in Ironman/woman and Taplin Relay Races).

o) Competitors and officials must leave the designated competition area when not competing or officiating. The competition area may be defined as the section of the beach encompassed by a line or fence, or a direct line to the water from the extreme ends of a line or fence or other designated areas as specified by the Chief Referee.

p) Start decisions by the Starter or Chief Referee (or Chief Referee’s designate) are not subject to protest or appeal.

q) Luck of prevailing conditions: No protest or appeal will be entertained when an incident is caused by the prevailing conditions (see Section 2: General Conditions, par. 2.18 Luck of Prevailing Conditions)

4.2.1 Arena Layout Every effort will be made by the Chief Referee to ensure that all courses are as fair as possible, given prevailing conditions. The Chief Referee may alter courses to allow for successful completion of the competition and his decisions in this regard will then become the prescribed course and not subject to challenge by a lifesaving authority or competitors.

At various times colours of turning buoys or flags may be different to those stated in this manual. Any changes will be well communicated by the Chief Referee respectively.

4.2.2 Buoy Colours The colours of the buoys shall be in the following order, from left to right, facing the water: The buoys must be 5 m apart.

1. Red/Yellow: red and yellow is half/half 2. Black 3. Green/White: green has a vertical white stripe in the middle 4. Red 5. Blue/White: blue has a white vertical stripe in the middle 6. Yellow 7. White/Black: white has a vertical black stripe in the middle 8. Orange 9. Green/Yellow: green and yellow is half/half

The ski and board buoys shall be orange in colour.

In nipper competitions, the colour of the swim turning buoys is determined by the Chief Referee and dependent on the number of arenas used at the championships.

4.2.3 Buoy Distances The distance the buoys are moored at, is measured from knee depth water at the low-tide mark. The distances are set out in each section per event. Distances may vary depending upon conditions and safety factors. Consideration should be given when setting all courses to ensure that all draws have fair and equal conditions. Conditions shall be set and aligned to the Chief Referee’s satisfaction provided that protests may be accepted on the course prior to the start of each event or round. Adjustments of the course may be necessary during the competition.


In the event that it is necessary to lay special turning buoys for surf swimming events – for example if there is a need to shorten the course, then not less than two buoys shall be laid (a minimum distance of 10 m apart). The colour of these buoys is at the Chief Referees discretion and competitors will be advised accordingly.

4.2.4 Flag Colours The start shall be “flagless” and the flags indicating the finish shall be “red” and all turning flags shall be "orange".

4.2.5 Setting of Competition Courses When setting courses, consideration must be given to ensure that, as far as possible, all competitors have fair and equal conditions. All distances for both beach and water events should be measured.

Buoy distances shall normally be measured from the end of knee depth water at the low tide mark (taking into account varying conditions such as sandbars, exclusion of holes and rips, surf conditions, prevailing winds and safety factors).

The setting of beach positions, start lines, turning and finish flags and judging stands shall take into account sand, surf and water conditions and prevailing winds to ensure that, as far as possible, a fair and equal course for all competitors is established.

Courses may be adjusted at any time during competition to address safety, account for significant tidal, sea and beach condition changes and maintain compliance and course fairness.

Prior to commencement of each race the Chief Referee or Sectional Referee shall check courses to ensure compliance with the rules of the event and this section.

Note: Protests may only be accepted on a competition course prior to the start of an event or a race.

4.2.6 Hazardous Conditions The Organizing Committee, in consultation with the Chief Referee, has the authority to cancel or reschedule an event or final. If cancellation should occur, even after the conducting of some heats, etc., then no points from that event will be credited to any competitor or team in the overall point score. The decision to cancel an event by the Chief Referee is not subject to challenge by a competitor, Team Manager or other lifesaving authority.

If the cancellation of the competition occurs due to hazardous surf conditions, lightning/thunder storms or insufficient beach is available due to tidal change, extreme windy weather conditions, even after the conducting of some heats - if not more than 75% of the beach and or surf events have been contested, no “Grand Aggregate Point” score or “Competitor of the Championships” can be awarded.

4.2.7 Assignment of Positions The number 1 position shall always be on the left (facing the water) for all starts other than events run parallel to the water (on shore) when the number 1 position shall always be nearest the water. These number 1 positions do not change irrespective of the direction of the event

4.2.8 Draws The initial draw for heats and beach positions may be conducted at the discretion of the Chief Referee. Draws for positions in “next” rounds, quarters, semis and finals to be drawn under the direction of the Chief Referee by a nominated Technical Official, usually the Chief Judge. The number of heats, quarter final, semifinals and so on is determined by the draw tables set out in the appendix. The method used for the draw will be as follows:

a) The Chief Referee will be responsible for all draws for quarters, semis and finals where heats have taken place.


b) The Chief Judge will furnish the Recorders with a draw sheet or the draw sheets at the back of this manual may be used, one sheet for a 16 competitor round and one for a 8 team round (refer appendix) .

c) Prior to the start of each new event, the Chief Judge informs the relevant Recorders of the draw column number chosen at random at the Chief Judge’s discretion alternating between events (for the sake of this explanation presume there are 2 heats of 16 with 8 competitors going through to a final of 16).

d) At the conclusion of each heat, the Recorder will write down the names of the first 8 competitors in Heat 1 in their finishing positions from 1 to 8 on the Recorder’s pads and the same for Heat 2 recording the first 8 competitors in positions from 9 to 16 then in front of each name circled in pen the number that corresponds to that finishing number on the draw sheet from the Chief Judges’ specified pre-drawn column. The circled number will be the competitors draw for the next round.

e) To be duly signed off by the Chief Judge if agreed such process was carried out correctly. A copy thereof to be forwarded to the Check Starter to correctly place each competitor in the correct position for the next round. The draw number must be indicated at the bottom of each record sheet.

It will be the responsibility of the Chief Referee to submit a new draw sheet for the competition or to use the pre-drawn sheets found at the back of this competition manual. Should there be insufficient nominations for heats; draws for positions for finals may be conducted at the discretion of the Chief Referee.

Should there be insufficient nominations for heats, draws for beach positions in semi-finals or finals may be conducted by LSA or nominated officials and supplied to clubs.

Vacancies created by the disqualification of a competitor or team shall only be filled by the next place getter participating in the same race.

Vacancies created in qualifying to further rounds of an event due to the withdrawal of a competitor or team shall only be filled by the next place getter who participated in the same race.

4.2.9 Competitor Limitations The Chief Referee or Sectional Referee shall decide whether events shall be conducted in heats, rounds, quarter-finals, semi-finals or straight out finals. Only the Chief Referee may authorize changes to these maximum numbers with due consideration for effective judging, environmental conditions, safety considerations and fairness for all competitors.

EVENT NUMBERS / EVENT

3 x 1 km Beach Run Relay Numbers condition dependent

Beach Flags 16 Competitors in heats / 8 in final

Beach Relay 10 teams of 4 Competitors in heats/ 8 in final

Beach Run Numbers condition dependent

Beach Sprint 10 Competitors in heats/ 8 in final

Board Race 16 Competitors

Board Rescue Race 9 teams of 2 Competitors in heats/ 8 in final

Board/ Single Ski Relay Race 16 teams of 3 Competitors

Double Ski Race 16 teams of 2 Competitors

Iron Man & Woman Race 16 Competitors

M Course Ocean Lifesaver Relay Race 16 teams of 4 competitors

M Course Oceanman/ Oceanwoman Race 16 competitors

Nipper Bodyboard Race 32 Competitors in heats / 16 in final

Nipper Bodyboard Relay Race 32 Teams of 4 competitors in heats /16 in final



Oceanman/Oceanwoman Eliminator Variation Race

16 Competitors

Olympic Mixed Ocean Lifesaver Relay 16 Teams of 4 competitors

Reel Alarm Race 5 Teams

Rescue Tube Race 9 Competitors/ 8 in final

Rescue Tube Rescue Race 9 Teams of 4 competitors in heats/ 8 in final

Run/Swim/Run Race 32 Competitors

Run/Swim/Run Relay Race 32 Teams of 3 competitors

Single Ski Race 16 Competitors

Surf Boat Race 6 Boats

Surf Swim Race 32 Competitors

Taplin Relay Race 16 teams of 4 competitors

Note: All events not stating “Nippers” will also apply to Nippers events where applicable.

4.2.10 Eliminations To assist with the fair conduct of competition if there is an even number of competitors in a heat at least half the competitors who correctly complete the course should progress to the next round of the event (e.g. if there are 16 starters in a race at least 8 who correctly compete the course should qualify for the next round of the event). If there uneven number of competitors in a heat at least half the competitors less one who correctly complete the course should progress to the next round of the event (e.g. if there are 7 starters in a race at least 3 who correctly complete the course should qualify for the next round of the event). For beach flag events refer to par. 4.5.3 of this section.

Note: Technical Officials should be mindful of confirmed entries when determining the number of heats/rounds required to conduct an event through to a final and also to, as far as practicable, have an equal number of competitors in each heat/round.

The Chief Referee may change the number of competitors in remaining heats, after one or more have been run, if safety conditions warrant, providing that the number going through to the next round/heat, quarter, semi or final do not compromise the number of qualifiers from earlier heats.

4.2.11 Time Limits for Surf Events The time limit for each event shall be as set out in the table below:

EVENT TIME LIMIT (in

minutes)

3 x 1 km. Beach Run Relay 20

Beach Run 15

Board Race 15

Board Relay/ Single Ski Relay Race 20

Board Rescue Race 15

Double Ski Race 15

Iron Man/Woman & Taplin Relay Race 20

Iron Nipper & Nipper Taplin Relay Race 20

M Course Ocean Lifesaver Relay Race 20

M Course Oceanman/ Oceanwoman Race 20

Nipper Board Race 10

Nipper Bodyboard Relay Race 20

Oceanman/Oceanwoman Eliminator Variation Race

20

Olympic Mixed Ocean Lifesaver Relay Race 20

Reel Alarm Race 15

Rescue Tube Race 15

Rescue Tube Rescue Race 15

Run/Swim/Run Race 15


EVENT TIME LIMIT (in

minutes)

Run/Swim/Run Relay Race 15

Single Ski, Double Ski & Board Race 10

Surf Boat Race 15

Surf Swim Race 15

Note: All events not stating “Nippers” will also apply to Nipper events where applicable.

No water events to start 1½ hours before sunset.

When warranted the time limit for an event may be extended by 5 minutes by the Chief Referee after consulting with the appropriate Sectional Referee. Such extension to the time limit shall be advised to competitors and Technical Officials prior to the commencement of the event. It is considered that an event has been finished when all the competitors have completed the event, or the event has been aborted (withdrawn) or when the time limit has expired.

The Chief Referee may declare an event finished if sufficient competitors or teams have completed the event, without D/Q’s, prior to the time limit expiring or when the number of competitors required for subsequent rounds have qualified by completing the race without disqualification, should time become of the essence to complete the competition.

In events requiring patients, any patient arriving at his buoy more than 5 minutes after the arrival of the first patient, or failing to reach his buoy within 10 minutes, will render his team disqualified.

Where practicable, disqualifications due to the time limit being exceeded shall be advised to the competitor by the Chief Referee or Sectional Referee or the Course Judge.

4.2.12 Reporting and Starting Times Competitors shall advise their intention to start or withdraw by reporting to the Marshal prior to the start of the event, to be marked off on the draw sheet. Competitors or teams qualifying for subsequent heats/rounds, who wish to withdraw, must advise the Marshal prior to the next draw being conducted. Competitors or teams may be subject to a fine if they withdraw.

Each competitor is responsible and shall ascertain the starting time to gain knowledge of conditions governing the particular event/s. Competitors shall be prompt in reporting to the Marshal before the start of each event. Competitors will not be allowed to commence in an event if they are late in reporting to the Marshal.

4.2.13 Marshalling Competitors shall be marshalled, registered and entries checked by the Marshal, allocated in heats and positioned according to the draw.

Failure of competitors to present themselves properly attired and complete with satisfactory equipment when called by the Marshal, may render them liable to disqualification. These competitors shall be reported to the Chief Referee. It is the obligation of the competitors to be on the starting line once marshalled and provided further that competitors warming up after the start of the first heat do not interfere in any way with the conduct of any aspect of the competition.

4.2.14 Starting of Events Prior to the start a Marshall shall:

a) Place competitors in the order as drawn for all heats and or finals. b) Accompany competitors and their required equipment to the starting area and ensure

that competitors are positioned in proper order.

Prior to the start of each race, designated Technical Officials shall: a) Check that all Technical Officials are in position. b) Check that Competitors have swim wear and skull caps for a legal start. c) Check that equipment and course markers are in position.


A Technical Official shall signal the Starter that the competitors are under the starter’s control.The process of starting events should commence with a signal or command that indicates “Take Your Marks” followed by a signal or command that indicates “Set” and then followed by a start signal or command that indicates “Go”. If, for any reason, the Starter has to speak to any competitor after either command prior to the start signal or command, the start process shall be recommenced.

If, for any reason, the Starter is not satisfied that all is ready for the start to proceed after competitors are “Take your Marks”, the Starter shall order all competitors to withdraw from their marks, and recommence the start. While the Starter makes every attempt to affect a fair start, the decision to “Go” on the start signal rests with the competitor or team. If there is no recall by the Starter, Check Starter or Chief Referee, no protest or appeal shall be allowed on the start.

Notes: 1. The duty of the Starter and Check Starter is to ensure a fair start. If the Starter or Check

Starter decides that a start is not fair, for any reason, including technical or equipment fault, the competitors shall be called back and start again. Competitors shall be disqualified if they “commence a forward starting motion” prior to the starting signal. Involuntary movement by itself is not a disqualification. Anticipating the starting signal and commencing a starting motion is a disqualification.

2. The Starter and Check Starter use their discretion in determining whether a competitor – or more than one competitor – has commenced a starting motion. Commonly, the early starting motion of one competitor causes movement by other competitors. Such movements are not a DQ of the other competitors.

The Starter shall: a) Have sole jurisdiction over the competitors from the time of the start signal or command

until the race has started. b) Position himself or herself so as to have full visual control over all competitors during

the start. c) Ensure that the start for all races is consistent and fair. d) Disqualify competitors for false starts (or in beach flags, eliminate competitors).

Whilst every endeavour should be made by the Starter to effect an even start the decision to “go” on the start signal entering the water in swim, craft and multi-discipline events rests with the competitor or team providing there is no interference to other competitors. The competitor entering the water in second or subsequent legs (in multi-disciplinary events) shall be deemed to be at fault if the progress of a competitor coming from the water is impeded. If there is no recall by the Starter or the Check Starter(s) or the Chief or Sectional Referee, no protest shall be allowed on the start. The Starter’s or Check Starter’s decisions on starts are not subject to protest or appeal. Start lines may be established in the following manner and competitors must cross the start line to commence their race:

a) A designated line marked by a cord between two poles and/or with flags. b) A designated line drawn on the sand between two poles. c) A line of sight between two poles or straight line in the water (e.g. ski start), or as

determined by the Starter or the Check Starter. In events where a cord is used competitors’ toes shall be on or behind the line but parts of the body may overhang the line.

In events where a line is drawn (e.g. Beach Sprint), toes and fingers shall be on or behind the line.

In board events where a cord is used, and the board is held by the competitor, a part of the craft may be over the line but must be at right angles to the line or at an angle to accommodate prevailing conditions. In events where a board is placed on the beach it shall be placed flat on the beach (i.e.


no mounds underneath the board) at 90 degrees and with the nose of the board on the shoreward side of the start or change-over line.

In boat and/or ski events, where a line of sight is used, the bow of the craft shall be on or behind the line, and at 90 degrees to the line or at an angle to accommodate the prevailing conditions.

The first competitor to leave their position on the starting line mark after the command “Take Your Marks” and before the signal to commence shall be considered to have made a starting break infringement and a false start declared.

The first competitor who breaks shall be disqualified except in beach flag events where that competitor shall be eliminated. If one competitor false starts, others may follow. Any competitor who follows is not deemed to have false started.

False Start – One Start Rule shall apply to all events. Note: Irrespective of whether a false start occurred, if in the opinion of the Starter or the Check Starter, the start was not fair because of a technical defect or other matter not caused by competitors the Starter must recall the competitors and recommence the starting process.

4.2.15 Racing Patient Events In all events with a racing patient (such as rescue tube rescue), should weather conditions warrant, the Chief Referee may allow any team members participating in that heat, semi-final or final, to take up any position anywhere within the confines of the arena to observe the patients progress and arrival at the buoys and advise his team members accordingly.

4.2.16 Change-Over (Tagging) in Relay Events Unless otherwise provided (e.g. beach relay) in relay events change-over shall be effected by a competitor "tagging" the next team member. Tagging is defined as when the incoming competitor, using either hand, visibly touches the on-going competitor either on the hand or any other part of the body. The on-going or outgoing competitor shall be positioned with his feet on or behind the change-over line.

In taplin, board, bodyboard and ski relay events competitors must commence the leg of the event from the (correct) position as allocated by the Marshall or Check Starter. If a competitor does not comply with this, the team will be disqualified.

4.2.17 Completion of Courses Competitors/teams must compete fairly and adhere to the courses and the rules as detailed in this Manual or Entry Conditions Circular/s or as directed by the relevant official for the conduct of various events. Where available, electronic equipment (including video) may be utilised to assist the judging process.

If a competitor/team misses a turning buoy or turning flag they may, without penalty, alter their direction and return by their most direct route to correct the course error and continue to the finish of the event.

In events where it is required to cross a line to finish, should a competitor or team not correctly cross the finish line as prescribed in the relevant section for that event, they may recover and correctly re-cross the finish line to record their placing.

Once a competitor has been judged to have correctly crossed the finish line, they will be deemed to have completed that race. As such, a competitor will then not be permitted to then re-enter the course to correct any previous race errors.

Where a competitor fails to correctly complete the prescribed course, compete fairly or in any other way breaches or fails to follow a rule in this manual they may be penalised or disqualified by the


Chief Referee or Sectional Referee at their discretion.

4.2.18 Finish of Events All events shall be judged visually or with the use of electronic equipment. Placing shall be decided by Finish Judges. Ties (dead heats) shall be declared as such. Finish Judges shall be positioned to ensure a clear view of the finish line. Where appropriate Finish Judges shall be placed in elevated positions.

Judge 1 selects finishers 1 and 2; Judge 2 selects finishers 2 and 3; and so on, with Judges primarily responsible for their corresponding number (that is, Judge 1 is primarily responsible for finisher 1, as well as noting who finished second).

At the Chief Judge’s signal, placing discs shall be issued and/or names recorded. Where available, Finish Judges may use video/electronic equipment to assist them. Video playback is for use by appointed officials only.

In events such as skis and surf boats (wet finishes), competitors/teams/crews are deemed to have finished when any part of the craft crosses the finish line, and competitor(s) are in contact with the craft and other equipment, such as paddles, oars, etc. are retained as required by the event rules.

In events where competitors are required to cross a finish line, the finish is judged on the chest of the competitor when crossing the finish line. They must cross the line on their feet in an upright position, i.e. not falling or diving across the line and if failing to do so correctly, competitors may recover and correctly re-cross the finish line to record their placing. Competitors not correctly crossing the finishing line shall be marked as not finished, any competitor marked as not finished (i.e. “Did Not Finish”/“DNF”) will not be eligible for any placing or points. Competitor must be notified as for disqualification.

The Chief Referee or Sectional Referee may declare an event “finished” if sufficient competitors or teams have successfully completed the heat or event, without disqualifications, prior to the time limit for the event having expired, should time become the essence to complete the competition.

The Chief Referee may authorize the wearing of electronic finish tags to aid the judging and recording of races. Competitors must place tags as directed (e.g., around a specified ankle or wrist or placed on a designated part of their craft/surf boat). The result of such races shall then be determined by the order of the finish of the tags across the finish line. In the event of failure of the electronic tags, all placings in a race shall be visually judged using normal methods.

4.2.19 Dead Heats In the event of a dead heat the following shall apply:

a) In finals, unless otherwise provided, a dead heat shall be declared as such and trophy allocation shall be as decided by the Chief Referee.

b) Qualifying dead heat competitors in preliminary heats, quarter finals or semi-finals shall be entitled to compete in the next round or final unless otherwise provided.

4.2.20 “Disqualifications" and “Did Not Finish” Classifications Competitors or teams may be disqualified from an event or from the entire competition. Where a competitor is disqualified for any reason, in a heat or a final, the place he or she would have held shall be awarded to the competitor who finished next and all lower placing Competitors shall be advanced one place.

Where a competitor is disqualified for any reason, the event results shall include a place or time for the competitor.

a) Did not finish (DNF): Where a competitor crosses the finish line but does not finish an event for any reason, in a heat or a final, the place he or she would have held shall be awarded to the competitor who finished next and all lower placing competitors shall be


advanced one place. Where a competitor does not finish an event, the event results shall not include a place or time for the competitor.

b) Disqualification from competition (D/Q): Examples of behaviour which may result in disqualification of individuals or teams from the competition, include:

1. Refusing to fulfil the conditions of entry. 2. Breach of the LSA code of conduct. 3. The impersonation or use of unauthorised competitors. 4. Activities resulting in wilful damage to the venue sites, accommodation sites or the

property of others. 5. Abuse of officials. 6. Acts of discrimination and racism. 7. Sexual harassment of competitors.

c) Disqualification from events (D/Q): Examples of behaviour, which may result in disqualification of individuals or teams from an event, include:

1. Being absent at the start of an event. 2. Infraction of the “General Competitive Conditions” for events or infraction of event

rules. 3. Competitors shall be notified of their disqualification from an event by the Chief

Referee or appropriate Technical Officials, at the completion of the race. Competitors shall not leave the designated competition area until dismissed by the Chief Referee.

d) If an error by a Technical Official follows a fault by a competitor, the fault by the competitor may be expunged at the Chief Referee’s discretion.

4.2.21 Handler In certain events, especially Ironman/woman and iron nipper and relay races, a handler shall not be deemed to be a competitor but shall be required to:

a) Be a member of the same team as the competitor and be entered at the competition. (Exemption may be given by the Chief Referee for a member of another team to be a handler provided that the handler is entered at the competition). In nipper competitions the team manager or coach may be considered to be a handler

b) Wear a competition skull cap and shall be required to wear a distinctive high visibility vest as determined by LSA (or the relevant Event Organizer) if entering the water beyond knee depth.

c) Comply with all instructions of the Technical Officials. d) Make every effort to ensure that they, or the equipment that they are handling, does not

impede another competitor, otherwise their competitor may be subject to disqualification. e) Hold the surf ski in a floating position as per the diagram or as directed by officials. f) Make every effort to ensure that they and the equipment they are handling do not impede

other competitors (otherwise disqualification of the competitor may result).

4.3 SWIMMING EVENTS

Swimming ability is a prime factor in competative lifesaving. Rescue tube races are in fact "simulated" rescues, with swimming buoys substituting for patients. Surf swim races are straight-out tests of ability and encourage members to keep fit for their patrol work.

4.3.1 Rescue Tube Rescue Race

1. The Course The course layout shall be as per the diagram. The start/finish line shall be positioned 5 m from the water’s edge. A further 5 m shore wards from the start/finish line a set of beach markers 5 m apart and corresponding in colour to and lined up with each swimming buoy shall be positioned.

2. Procedure a) The event shall consist of four competitors in each team – a patient (racing), rescue tube

swimmer and two rescuers i.e. carry/drag party.


b) Competitors in the rescue tube rescue race event shall assemble in the marshaling area and when entries have been checked and buoy colours allocated, teams (i.e. all four competitors) shall then file into the competition area and proceed to their allotted position on the start/finish line as follows: the racing patient stands on the start/finish line, the rescue tube swimmer stands in the allocated position on the shoreward side of the start line. The rescuers stand immediately in front of their allotted buoy markers facing the sea and on the shoreward side of the start/finish line. The rescue tube swimmer may hold or don the rescue tube, and may hold the swim fins in his or her hands. Fins may not be worn prior to crossing the start line.

c) On the starting signal the “racing” patients enter the water taking advantage of surf conditions, swim to their allotted buoy. On reaching their allotted buoy, the patient shall place their forearm over the top of the buoy and then signal their arrival by raising the other arm to a vertical position whilst remaining in contact with the buoy. The said signal, subject to all conditions being fulfilled, shall be the determining factor in judging the patients arrival at their buoy. The patient must then retire to the seaward side of the swimming buoy and await arrival of the rescue tube swimmer.

Notes: 1. Should a patient swim to a wrong buoy and signal the team shall be disqualified. 2. Should the patient swim to the wrong buoy and then correct himself and then

proceed to the correct buoy, before signaling, the team shall not be disqualified. 3. The swimming buoy is described as the buoy only and does not include any

attaching ropes or straps. d) The rescue tube swimmer shall await the patient’s signal and must start from the correct

allocated position on the shoreward side of the start line and may have their toes on or behind the start line. The rescue tube swimmer may wear the rescue tube neck strap (harness) and hold the rescue tube and swim fins in their hands or place them on the sand on the shoreward side of the start/finish line. The wearing of the swim fin/s prior to the starting signal is not permitted.

e) The swim fins and rescue tube shall comply with the specifications as set out in Section 9: Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures.

f) On the patient’s arrival signal, the rescue tube swimmer crosses the start/finish line, dons the rescue tube harness (if not already being worn) and swim fins at their own discretion and swims seaward to make the rescue of their patient. The rescue tube swimmer swims to the left hand side of the designated buoy (viewed from the beach) to the awaiting patient on the seaward side of the buoy. Note: The team shall not be disqualified if the rescue tube swimmer crosses the start line and then resumes the correct position to correctly await the arrival signal from their patient.

g) The rescue tube swimmer and/or the patient secure the rescue tube around the patient’s body and under both arms and clipped to an O-ring. The patient may assist with the securing and clipping of the rescue tube. The patient and rescue tube swimmer must remain behind the buoy line during the ‘clip in’ process. With the patient clipped into the rescue tube, the rescue tube swimmer continues (clockwise) around the buoy towing the patient to the beach.

h) Rescue tubes must be donned correctly, either with the loop over one shoulder, or over the shoulder and across the chest – at the competitor’s discretion. The rescue tube must be towed behind the rescue tube swimmer with the line fully extended; no knots are permitted to shorten the tow line. However in the “surf” zone, in some instances, the line may not be fully extended and the patient may not necessary be “behind” the rescue tube swimmer, this is permitted.

i) The rescuers may move from their allotted positions once the rescue tube swimmer has commenced swimming but must return to their position behind the start/finish line before the tow commences. At their own discretion, they may then cross the start/finish line and enter the water, and assist the rescue tube swimmer to bring the patient back to the beach.

Note: The rescuers shall not be penalized if they cross the start/finish line before the rescue tube swimmer has started to tow the patient back to the beach and provided that they come back across the start/finish line before assisting in the carry/drag of the patient.

j) The patient is permitted to assist by kicking and sculling with arms under the surface, but must not swim with an out-of-water arm recovery. The patient must not be towed on their


stomach. Only the rescue tube swimmer is permitted to use swim fins. Rescuers and patients shall not use any equipment or swim fins. Rescuers will simply assist with the rescue.

k) On return to the beach the rescuers must drag or carry the patient to the finish line. The finish is judged on the chest of the first team member of the rescuers crossing the finish line in an upright position on their feet (the rescue tube need not be attached to the patient). The patient is not permitted to assist the carrying party at any time by walking or running, but the patient may assist by lifting the legs during the carry. Rescuers should continue to drag or carry the patient well past the finish line to assist with judging of other teams in the event.

Notes: 1. Rescue tube swimmers and the two rescuers, who have previously crossed over the start

line (for whatever reason), must return to the shoreward side of the start line prior to beginning their leg of the event.

2. At the start, rescue tube swimmers may place the rescue tubes and swim fins on the shoreward side of the start/finish line or may hold their swim fins and rescue tubes in their hands. The rescue tube harness may be worn.

3. Rescue tubes must be donned correctly, either worn with the harness across or over one shoulder with either with the loop over one shoulder, or over the shoulder and across the chest – at the competitor’s discretion. The rescue tube must be towed behind the rescue tube swimmer with the line fully extended; no knots are permitted to shorten the tow line. However in the “surf” zone, in some instances, the line may not be fully extended and the patient may not necessary be “behind” the rescue tube swimmer, this is permitted.

4. The patient may assist the rescue tube swimmer in securing the rescue tube. Either may clip-in the rescue tube, but the patient must be clipped into the tube behind the buoy line.

5. Rescue tube swimmers must tow the victim with the tube secured around the body and under both arms and clipped in an O-ring.

6. The patient must not be towed on the stomach. 7. During the tow, the patient may assist by kicking and sculling with the arms under the

surface, but must not swim with an out-of-water arm recovery stroke. 8. At no time, may the patient assist by walking or running. 9. Only the rescue tube swimmer may use the swim fins. Rescuers and patients shall not use

any equipment or swim fins.

3. Judging

Finish Judges shall be positioned at each end of the finishing line at least 5 m from the flagged markers and in line with each other. A Sea Judge (Course Judge) shall be positioned in line with the buoys 5 m from the Red/Yellow or Green/Yellow buoys, so to have a clear line of sight of all swim buoys as shown in the diagram. Note: Infringements recorded during the event observed by any of the Technical Officials shall be reported to the Chief Referee who shall adjudicate on the infringement with the Technical Officials concerned. A Sea Judge observing an infringement shall report to the Chief Referee as soon as practical and prior to the race result being signed off.


4.3.2 Rescue Tube Race

1. Event Description

a) Rescue tubes and fins are placed on the beach, approximately 10 m from the water’s edge in line with the competitor’s designated buoy marker.

b) Competitors take their positions on the starting line approximately 5 m from the water’s edge. On the starting signal, competitors race up the beach to obtain their rescue tubes and fins, and donning the equipment at their discretion, enter the water and swim toward and around (the left side, viewed from the beach) their designated buoy to return to the beach and cross the finish line.

c) The finish is judged on the chest of the competitor crossing the finish line in an upright position in possession of both fins and with the rescue tube strap over the shoulder.

Notes: 1. At the start, the rescue tube and fins must be positioned at competitors’ discretion at and on

the seaward side of the competitors’ designated beach marker. 2. Rescue tubes must be worn with the harness across or over one shoulder with either with the

loop over one shoulder, or over the shoulder and across the chest – at the competitor’s discretion. The rescue tube must be towed behind the rescue tube swimmer with the line fully extended; no knots are permitted to shorten the tow line. However in the “surf” zone, in some instances, the line may not be fully extended and the patient may not necessary be “behind” the rescue tube swimmer, this is permitted.

2. The Course The Rescue Tube Race shall be conducted under the general rules of the Rescue Tube Rescue Race. The course shall be the same as the Rescue Tube Rescue Race as shown in the following diagram.


To ensure fair starts and finishes, alignment of the start line and finish line to the buoys may be altered at the discretion of the Chief Referee, depending on the prevailing sea conditions.

3. Judging An in-boat Judge shall be positioned in line with the buoys as shown in the diagram. Finish Judges shall be positioned at each end of the finish line at least 5 m from the flag pole and in line with each flag pole. 4. Equipment Rescue tube: See Section 9: Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures.

4.3.3 Reel Alarm Race 1. Event

The event shall consist of six competitors in each team – a patient (non-racing), beltman and three linesmen (two – of whom will also act as rescuers) and a reelsman. The event is a traditional rescue of a patient using a reel and line and is restricted to 5 teams per heat/final.

2. The Course

The course is as per the diagram. A start and finish line is drawn 5 m from the water’s edge with end boundary markers on either side. A further 10 m shoreward from the start/finish line a set of beach markers 5 m apart and corresponding in colour to and lined up with each swimming buoy shall be positioned. The team’s reel, after being carried in from the marshalling area, shall be positioned so that the team’s marker peg is against the reels rear spreader bar.


3. Procedure a) The competitors in the reel alarm event shall assemble in the marshalling area and when

entries have been checked and buoy colours allocated, the teams shall file into the competition area and proceed to their allotted position, placing the reel so that the team’s beach marker peg is against the reels rear spreader. Patients will be dispatched either by the Starter or Check Starter.

b) Each beltman may arrange the belt as desired on the reel drum. The beltmen take up positions on the starting/finish line. The linemen and reelsmen sit flat on the sand 1 m behind their reel. Provided the linesmen and reelsmen sit flat on the sand, they may face any direction they like. The interpretation of flat is both cheeks of the buttocks touching the sand

c) At the starting signal, beltmen standing fast facing reels, the linesmen and reelsmen race to their reels and carry them to the beltmen on the start/finish line. Reels must be placed so that any part of the reel is on the start/finish line. The beltmen don their belts and enter the water directly in front of their reels and aim their swim directly towards their respective patients and buoys. The beltmen must enter the water to knee depth directly in front of their respective beach position, before moving across to the left or right to take advantage of the prevailing sea conditions without impeding any other team. Beltmen deliberately crossing another team’s line will be stopped from taking further part in the race.

d) Linemen shall follow their respective beltmen to the water to pay out the line. They may go into the water as far as they wish. The team is immediately disqualified if the line breaks during any part of the race.

e) The patients shall be in a position distinctly touching or holding their respective allocated buoys opposite their team’s respective beach position as drawn and they shall take up position on the seaward side of the buoys. The swimming buoy is described as the buoy only and does not include any attaching ropes or straps.

f) Only on making contact with the beltman, may the patient move to the landward side of


the buoys. Patients must not try to swim or draw the buoys towards the beach while waiting for their beltmen. They must wait quite passively. A time limit has been set because the competition must not lag, and patients are instructed not to dawdle when swimming out to their buoys but to hurry in order to get the event started. Patients must arrive within 5 minutes after the arrival of the first patient.

g) On securing the patient at the buoy, the beltman shall signal. The beltmen may signal in any way they like. The linesmen must not pull or haul in any way but with their hands and arms. Reelsman may reel in as he likes. Any stepping movement by the linesmen, forward; backward or sideways whilst hauling in the beltman and patient, shall not be deemed a disqualifying factor. Line over-winds shall not be deemed a disqualifying factor.

h) The linemen and reelman then haul the beltman and patient to the beach. They may not haul the line by taking hold of it and running, walking or moving back with it in hand. The patient and beltman must remain on their backs throughout the haul to the beach. The beltman must be in contact with the patient until secured by the carry/drag party. Notes: 1. A signal from anybody other than the reel alarm team will NOT be allowed to signify

the beltman’s arrival at the patient. Only a team member of the reel alarm Team competing in the event may utilise any position within the confines of the competition arena to observe the beltman’s progress.

2. In the event of the line being exhausted during the pay-out, the reelman shall move down the beach and inform two of the linemen and return immediately to control the reel. The two linemen shall obtain another reel from outside the arena and bring it into position (position means the reel must be on the start/finish Line when paying out recommences). It shall be permissible for the belt to be removed from the second (new) reel, before this is brought into the competition arena. The two lines must be joined by using either a reef knot or fisherman’s knot.

i) On return to the beach, any two of the three linesmen must carry/drag the patient across the finish line. The finish is judged on the chest of the first team member of the carrying party crossing the start/finish line in an upright position on their feet. The patient is not permitted to assist the carrying party by walking or running.

j) The two linesmen should continue to drag or carry the patient well past the finish line to assist with judging of other teams in the event. The 1st team to fulfil these conditions will be deemed the winner. Teams must then immediately make their way to behind their respective reels without interfering with teams still competing in the event. Any part of the reel must be on the finish line at the end of the race.

k) The winners shall be the team which fulfils all conditions and with line and belt intact first carries their patient past its respective reel between the adjacent reels on either side. The end teams may each finish between their respective reels and the adjacent reels on the one side, or the respective end boundary marker on the other side. Any part of the reel must be on the finish line at the end of the race.

l) The teams shall remove their reels in an orderly manner at the direction of the Technical Officials. Notes: 1. In junior competition, if only 5 junior competitors in total are entered by a club, a senior

may be used as a patient only. 2. Attention is drawn to General Conditions of this Manual viz. “Members should enter

the competition in the spirit of the rules avoiding all unfair advantage”. Refer Section 2: General Competitive Conditions, par. 2.1.

3. Disqualifications

a) All applicable paragraphs under General Conditions. Section 2: General Competitive Conditions and par. 4.2 of this section.

b) If the reels are not placed so that any part is on the starting line at the start of the race. c) If the line breaks during any part of the race. d) If a beltman deliberately crosses another team’s line he will be disqualified and will be

stopped from taking further part in the race. e) If the linesmen haul the line in by taking hold of it and running, walking or moving back

with it.


f) If the patient and beltman do not remain on their backs while being hauled in. g) If any part of the reel is not on the finish line at the end of the race.

4.3.4 Surf Swim Race

1. The Course The course shall be as detailed in the diagram. In the event that it is necessary to lay special turning buoys for surf swimming events, then not less than two buoys shall be laid (a minimum distance of 10 m apart).

The buoy distances are as follow:

AGE GROUP DISTANCE

Nipper

U/9 & U/10 60 m

U/11 & U/12 60 m

U/13 & U/14 80 m

Junior

U/15 120 m

U/17 120 m

U/19 120 m

Senior Senior 120 m

Masters All Masters age groups 120 m

2. Procedure

a) Competitors in swimming events shall assemble in the marshalling area and, when names are checked and placed in drawn order, the competitors shall file into the competition area in order as directed.

b) At the given signal the competitors shall commence from the start line, enter the water without impeding any other competitors in the event, swim to and around the buoys, and return to shore and finish between the two red finish flags.

c) Competitors may be positioned after the finish in either of the following ways:

• On a straight line drawn at approximately a 30 degree angle from the finishing line and up the beach.

• On a series of lines 10 m behind and at right angles to the finishing line and 5 m apart.



4.3.5 SURF SWIM RELAY RACE 1. The Course The course shall be as detailed in the diagram below. In the event that it is necessary to lay special turning buoys for surf swimming events, then not less than two buoys shall be laid (a minimum distance of 10 m apart).

2. General Conditions Teams shall consist of 3 competitors.

3. The Finish Where competitors are required to cross a finish line, and fail to do so correctly, competitors may recover and correctly re-cross the finish line to record their placing. The placing will be the re-crossed finish line position. 4. Procedure a) Surf swim relay race shall be conducted under Section 2: General Competitive Conditions

and par. 4.2 General Conditions of Surf Competition of this section. b) Competitors must obey the Starter’s or Check Starter’s directions at the start.


c) First Competitor: Competitors for the first leg of the relay shall be started and swim around the swim buoys. Having completed the course, the first competitor sprint round the two orange turning flags to tag the second competitor on the designated changeover line.

d) Second Competitor: The second competitor completes the same course and tags the third competitor on the designated changeover line.

e) Third Competitor: The third competitor completes the same course, rounds one orange turning flag, passes the other orange turning flag on the shoreward side, and finishes between the finish flags.

f) Competitors must commence their leg of the event from the correct allotted position. g) The first and third competitor in each team commence from the team’s drawn starting

position. However, the drawn starting position is reversed for the second competitor in each team. For example, in a 32 - teams race in which a team has drawn position: the first competitor commences from position 1; the second competitor commences from position 32; the third competitor commences from position 1. Lane markers, no’s 1, 4, 8, 12, 16, and so on, should be placed on the start/change over line to indicate the lane positions.

h) Competitors are not permitted to interfere with other competitors or deliberately impede their progress.

1st & 3rd Competitor’s starting position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ..32

2nd Competitor’s starting position 32

31

30

29

28

27

26

25

…1


NIPPERS SURF SWIM RELAY RACE

4.3.6 Surf Swim Teams Race

a) The course and distances will be as described in Surf Swim and Nipper Surf Swim Races. b) Teams shall consist of four members who shall be marshalled as a team i.e. four members,

one behind the other facing the water's edge in their drawn positions. The next team shall be lined up beside the first team, and so on. When all teams are assembled, a direction shall be given to face the competition area. On the direction of an official, the line nearest the water's edge shall file onto the competition area followed by the second, third and fourth lines. This procedure spreads competitors from each team evenly over the starting line.

c) All members of a team must swim to and around the buoys, return to shore and finish between the two green finish flags. Points are allotted as follows – 1 for 1st, 2 for 2nd, 3 for 3rd and 4 for 4th. The team scoring the least number of points shall be declared the winner. In Surf Swim Teams races should two or more teams be allotted equal points, the team whose full complement of members first completes the course shall be awarded the higher placing.

d) All competitors who finish shall be recorded as they are placed and the points will be calculated. Should any teams be disqualified or a team fail to complete the course, then the surf teams finish places shall be reallocated and points then re-calculated.


e) When Surf and Surf Swim Teams Races are combined, swimmers not in teams shall be eliminated from the point’s allotment for the purpose of determining the Surf Swim Teams race result.

Note: A competition organising authority may, by way of entry circulars, vary the number of team members, age groups or gender competing within a Surf Teams Race event.

4.3.7 Run/Swim/Run Race

1. Event description From the start line, competitors run past the turning flag at the water’s edge and enter the water to swim out to and around the string of nine (9) coloured buoys for Junior and Senior and around the two swim buoys in Nippers. Competitors swim back to the beach and again run past the turning flag to the finish line.

2. The course (The start/finish line may be either from the left or right depending on environmental conditions) As shown in the following diagram, the course shall be laid out from the left so that competitors run the course from the start/finish line to a turning marker with an orange flag at the water’s edge keeping the turning marker and flag on the left shoulder, enter the water and swim a swim leg and on returning to the water’s edge run from the turning marker and flag to the finish indicated by two red flags spaced approximately 5 m apart.

Note: In the diagram the turning marker/flag is on the left shoulder on the way out and the right shoulder on the way back.

The buoy distances for the swim leg are as follow:

AGE GROUP DISTANCE

Nipper

U/9 & U/10 60 m

U/11 & U/12 60 m

U/13 & U/14 80 m

Junior

U/15 120 m

U/17 120 m

U/19 120 m

Senior Senior 120 m


The distance for the run legs are as follow (note: distance is for each leg):

AGE GROUP DISTANCE

Nipper

U/9 & U/10 50 m

U/11 & U/12 60 m

U/13 & U/14 70 m

Junior

U/15 90 m

U/17 90 m

U/19 90 m

Senior Senior 90 m


3. Judging Competitors may not grab and or dislodge the turning marker/flag positioned at the water’s edge and must finish on their feet in an upright position. The finish is judged on the competitor’s chest crossing the finish line. Technical Officials shall be placed to observe the conduct of the event as well as determine competitors’ placing at the finish line.

The Judge in boat is positioned in line with the string of nine (9) coloured buoys so as not to hinder/obstruct competitors rounding the red/yellow and green/yellow buoys but to allow clear observation of any likely infringement of the rules by competitors rounding and or swimming along the line of coloured buoys.


4. Disqualification In addition to the General Conditions. Section 2: General Competitive Conditions and par. 4.2 of this section, failure to complete the course as defined and described above shall result in disqualification.

4.3.8 Run/Swim/Run Relay Race

1. General Conditions The run/swim/relay race event shall be conducted under General Conditions. Section 2: General Competitive Conditions and par. 4.2 of this section. Teams will consist of three competitors – a swimmer and two runners.

2. Event description From the start line, the first competitor run to the change-over line and tags the swimmer, who is standing on the line at the water’s edge. The swimmer (2nd competitor) enters the water to swim out to and around the string of nine (9) coloured buoys. Competitors swim back to the beach and tags the 2nd runner (3rd competitors) who runs to the finish line.

3. The course (The start/finish line may be either from the left or right depending on environmental conditions) As shown in the following diagram, the course shall be laid out from the left so that competitors run the course as set out below from the start/finish line to the change-over line, demarcated with two orange flags at the water’s edge keeping, The swimmer enters the water and swim the swim leg and on returning to the water’s edge tags the 3rd competitor who should be standing on the change-over line, who then runs to the start/finish line indicated by two red flags spaced approximately 40 m apart.

Note: In the diagram the turning marker/flag is on the left shoulder on the way out and the right shoulder on the way back.


The buoy distances for the swim leg and run legs are as set out in the run/swim/run race above (par. 4.2.3 of this section) the distance for the run legs are as set out above (note: distance is for each leg):

4. Judging Competitors must tag the next competitor as set out in par. 4.16 of this section. Competitors may not grab and or dislodge the turning marker/flag positioned at the water’s edge and must finish on their feet in an upright position. The finish is judged on the competitor’s chest crossing the finish line. Technical Officials shall be placed to observe the conduct of the event as well as determine competitors’ placing at the finish line.

The Judge-in-Boat is positioned in line with the string of nine (9) coloured buoys so as not to hinder/obstruct competitors rounding the red/yellow and green/yellow buoys but to allow clear observation of any likely infringement of the rules by competitors rounding and or swimming along the line of coloured buoys.

5. Disqualification In addition to the General Conditions. Section 2: General Competitive Conditions and par. 4.2 of this section.

4.4 CRAFT EVENTS

4.4.1 General Conditions of Craft Events a) The rules contained in this section shall apply to single ski, double ski, and board and

bodyboard races. b) No artificial means of propulsion may be used in board and bodyboard races, i.e. hand


webs, swim fins, etc. c) The use of wax or similar substances to assist the competitor in maintaining the grip on or

contact with boards and bodyboard or surf skis or paddles is permitted. d) Competitors may not sit in their single or double skis before the start signal. e) In board, bodyboard, single ski and double ski competitors may pass through the swimming

buoys on their craft. Should impediment occur as a result, the onus is on the competitor that chose that direction and no protest/appeal will be entertained.

f) Craft must be in accordance to the specifications as set out in Section 9: Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures, and the Chief Referee may request competitor/s to submit their craft for scrutineering before, during or after the competition. All craft must display a decal stating that the craft has been manufactured according to LSA specifications. Failure to display such a decal will disqualify the craft from the competition.

g) Skis (single and double) must be numbered as specified in Section 9: Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures. The numbers used must be placed on all faces of the craft. When two or more craft have the same number, the incorrect user of the duplicate numbered craft will be disqualified.

h) In events where competitors are required to cross a finish line, and fail to do so correctly, competitors may recover and correctly re-cross the finish line to record their placing. The placing will be the re-crossed finish line position.

i) Starts and finishes for ski events may be wet or dry depending on the prevailing conditions as determined by the Chief Referee.

j) Replacing craft (board, bodyboard, single ski or double ski) or paddles are permitted during an event provided such replacement is effected before the competitor rounds the last course buoy.

k) Club or team members shall be permitted to assist in replacing equipment, but only to the extent of placing replacement equipment at the water's edge. It is the responsibility of the club or team members to ensure that any abandoned or damaged equipment does not cause any interference to another team or competitor in the race.

l) In board, ski, and bodyboard relay races, a member of the competitor’s club/team may assist the competitors. With the Chief Referee’s approval, a non-team member may act as handler provided he or she is a member of the same club/region and is registered to participate at the championship in some capacity and is wearing the approved club’s skull cap on the head and properly fastened under the chin.

4.4.2 Single Ski Races

1. The Course a) The course shall be as detailed in the diagram. b) For single ski events three orange buoys, equal in size to a 50 litre drum shall be used. Two

orange buoys should be placed about 75 m apart, 250 m measured from knee deep water at low tide and a third buoy is placed midway between these turning buoys (called the “apex” buoy). The apex buoy should be approximately 50 m seaward from the turning buoys and with the two buoys should form a triangle.

c) The centre of the start line is to be in line with the first turning buoy but may vary at the discretion of the Sectional Referee or Chief Referee. The finish line for the single ski events shall be between two red finish flags. The centre of this line is to be relative to the third turning buoy or allowing for prevailing surf or weather conditions.


2. Procedure a) Competitors steady their single skis in line in knee-deep water about 1.5 m apart. b) Competitors must obey directions from the Starter or Check Starter concerning single

ski alignment at the start. Any competitor who disregards the Starter or Check Starters directions may be disqualified.

Note: If conditions are such that the starter cannot provide a fair start a dry start is to be effected (see below, par. 3)

c) On the starting signal from the Starter, the single ski shall be paddled around all the craft buoys and return to the finish line. The finish is judged when any part of the single ski crosses the finish line being ridden, gripped, or carried by the competitor.

d) Competitors may lose contact and control of their single ski without disqualification. e) To complete the race a competitor must have (or have regained) his single ski and

cross the finishing line between the two red finish flags from the seaward side whilst maintaining contact with his single ski.

f) Competitor must finish with his single ski and paddle. Note: If conditions are such, the Technical Officials cannot conduct a fair finish; the Chief

Referee may decide that a “dry finish” be conducted. See Par. 4 below. g) If a competitor deliberately impedes the progress of another competitor he may be

disqualified.


3. Dry Start a) If conditions are such that the Starter cannot provide a fair start a dry start shall be

used. b) For a dry start, competitors, with their skis and paddles line up in their drawn

position between two start markers approximately 5 m from the water’s edge (as per board race).

c) At the Starters signal the competitors will carry their craft to the water and proceed to the turning markers at their own discretion.

4 . Dry Finish

a) The dry finish line shall be situated on the beach approximately 15 m from the water’s edge. It shall be 20 m in length and marked at each end by a pole.

b) Competitors must paddle their skis around the last course buoy and shall not be disqualified if they lose contact with or control of their craft or paddle after the last course buoy on the return.

c) Competitors need not finish with craft or paddle. d) The finish is judged on the competitor’s chest crossing the finish line. Competitors

must finish on their feet in an upright position. e) A member of the competitor’s team assists with the removal of the competitor’s

craft and paddle from the course. With the Chief Referee’s approval, a non-team member may act as handler provided he or she is a member of a lifesaving authority, and is registered to participate at the championships in some capacity.

f) Handlers shall: 1. Wear their team’s skull cap. 2. Wear a distinctive high-visibility vest as required by competition organisers

if entering the water beyond knee depth. 3. Make every effort to ensure that they and the equipment they are handling

do not impede other competitors (otherwise disqualification of the competitor will result).

4. Comply with all instructions of the Technical Officials. 4.4.3 Double Ski Races

1. The Course a) The course shall be as detailed in the diagram and is similar to the single ski

course, except that the apex buoy is moored approximately 100 m seaward from the surf ski turning buoys.

b) The finish line for the double ski event shall be between the two finish flags. The centre of this line is to be relative to the third turning buoy or allowing for the prevailing surf or weather conditions.

2. Procedure a) The start shall be affected by having double skis afloat and in line, with each team

holding the double ski ready to start. A Check Starter should be positioned in the water and shall signal when the competitors are in line and ready to start. Any team who disregards the Starter or Check Starters directions may be disqualified. The distance between double skis at the start should be 1.5 m. Competitors may not sit in their double ski before the start signal.

Note: If conditions are such that a fair start and finish cannot be provided or conducted a dry start and finish are to be effected. (Refer par. 3 and 4 above).

b) On the starting signal from the Starter, the double ski shall be paddled around all the double ski buoys and return to the finish line. The finish is judged when any part of the double ski crosses the finish line being ridden, gripped, or carried by the competitors. Double ski competitors may lose contact and control of their double ski without disqualification.

c) To complete the race the competitors must have (or have regained) their double ski and cross the finishing line from the seaward side whilst maintaining contact with the double ski.

d) Both competitors must finish in contact with their double ski and at least one


competitor must be in possession of a paddle. e) If a competitor deliberately impedes the progress of another team the competitors in

the offending team will be disqualified. 3. Dry Start and Finish

The dry start and finish for the double ski will be the same as for the single ski, except both competitors must cross the finish line.

4.4.4 Juniors/ Seniors and Masters Board Race 1. The Course

a) The course(s) shall be as detailed in the diagram. b) Two orange buoys, equal in size to a 50 liter drum shall be used and be placed

about 75 m apart 200 m measured from knee deep water. A third buoy is placed midway between these turning buoys (called the “apex” buoy). The apex buoy should be approximately 16 m seaward from the turning buoys and with the two buoys should form a triangle.

c) The centre of the start line is to be in line with the first turning buoy but may vary at the discretion of the Chief Referee.

d) The finish line for board events shall be between two red flags. The centre of this line is to be relative to the third turning buoy allowing for the prevailing surf and weather conditions.

2. Procedure

a) The start shall be affected by having each competitor standing on or behind the start line with their boards at a right angle to the start line.

b) The distance between boards at the start should be 1.5 m. On the starting signal from the Starter, the competitors shall enter the water with their boards and paddle around their respective board buoys and return to the beach.

c) Competitors may lose contact and control of their board without disqualification. If a competitor deliberately impedes the progress of another competitor he may be disqualified.

d) To complete the race, a competitor must have (or have regained) his board and cross the finish line from the seaward side whilst maintaining contact with his board.

e) The finish is judged on the chest of the competitor crossing the finish line on his feet while being in control of the board.


4.4.5 Nippers Board Race

Only the U/11, U/12, U/13 and U/14 may enter the nipper board and nippers board relay races. The U/11, U/12, U/13 and U/14 age groups may use the standard board (3.2 m board), as used

in junior, senior and master competition as specified in Section 9: Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures. These age group may also use other nipper boards as specified in Section 9: Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures: nipper hard board and nipper soft board specifications.

1. The Course

a. The course(s) shall be as detailed in the diagram. Buoy colours to the Chief Referee discretion.

b. The turning buoys are moored 60 m measured from knee deep water at low tide for U/11 and U/12 age group and 80 m measured from knee deep water at low tide or U/13 and U/14 age group.

c. The centre of the start line is to be in line with the first turning buoy 5 m from the water’s edge but may vary at the discretion of the Chief Referee.

d. The centre of the finish line is to be in line with the last turning buoy 5 m from the water’s edge. The finish for board events shall be between two red finishing flags. The centre of this line is to be relative to the last turning buoy allowing for the prevailing surf and weather conditions.

2. Procedure a) The start shall be affected by having each competitor standing on or behind the start

line with their boards at a right angle to the start line. b) Nippers may use boards as per specifications. c) The distance between boards at the start should be 1.5 m. On the starting signal

from the Starter, the competitors shall enter the water with their boards and paddle around their respective board buoys and return to the beach.

d) Competitors may lose contact and control of their board without disqualification. If a


competitor deliberately impedes the progress of another competitor he may be disqualified.

e) To complete the race, a competitor must have (or have regained) his board and cross the finish line from the seaward side whilst maintaining contact with his board.

f) The finish is judged on the chest of the competitor crossing the finish line on his feet while being in control of the board.

4.4.6 Bodyboard Race

The bodyboard is only for the U/9, U/10, U/11 and U/12 age groups only.

1. The Course Competitors will go around the 60 m buoys which are measured from knee deep water, as per diagram.

2. Procedure The procedure is as per board race.

4.4.7 Board/Single Ski Relay Race

1. General Conditions a) Board and single ski relay events shall be conducted under General Conditions of the

board and single ski events. (Refer par. 4.4.1 above). b) Teams shall consist of 3 competitors. Team members may use the same craft.

2. Control of Craft A competitor must paddle his single ski (including paddle) or board, around the last course turning buoy and shall not be disqualified if he loses control or contact with his craft after the last course turning buoy on the return journey. A competitor can lose control or contact with his craft on the way out provided he regains the craft and rounds the last course turning buoy in contact with the craft and completes the course.


3. The Finish In events where competitors are required to cross a finish line, and fail to do so correctly, competitors may recover and correctly re-cross the finish line to record their placing. The placing will be the re-crossed finish line position.

4. The Course a) For seniors and juniors the course will be around the craft buoys as defined for board

and single ski races. b) The course shall be as detailed in the diagram.

5. Procedure

i) Competitors must obey the Starter’s or Check Starter’s directions concerning craft alignment at the start.

j) First Competitor: Competitors for the first leg of the relay shall be started as in the respective discipline and paddle around the designated buoys. Having completed the course, the first competitor may leave his or her craft (and paddle) at the water’s edge, sprint round the two orange turning flags to tag the second competitor on the designated changeover line.

k) Second Competitor: The second competitor completes the same course and tags the third competitor on the designated changeover line.

l) Third Competitor: The third competitor completes the same course, rounds one orange turning flag, passes the other orange turning flag on the shoreward side, and finishes between the two red finish flags.

m) Competitors in the board and single ski relay events must commence their leg of the event from the correct allotted position.

n) The first and third competitor in each team commence from the team’s drawn starting position. However, the drawn starting position is reversed for the second competitor in each team. For example, in a 16-competitor race in which a team has drawn position 1: the first competitor commences from position 1; the second competitor commences from position 16; the third competitor commences from position 1. Lane markers, no’s 1, 4, 8, 12 and 16 should be placed on the start/change over line to indicate the lane positions.

o) Competitors are not permitted to hold or otherwise interfere with other competitors craft or deliberately impede their progress.

6. Dry Start If conditions are such for the single ski relay that the Starter cannot provide a fair start a dry start may be used, as described in the single ski event.

1st & 3rd Competitor’s starting position

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ...16

2nd Competitor’s starting position

16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 …1



4.4.8 Nippers Board and Bodyboard Relay Race

The U/9 and U/10 compete as a team in the U/10 category and use a bodyboard – therefore the bodyboard relay is only for the U/10 age group. The U/11 and U/12 compete in a team in the U/12 board relay category and the U/13 and U/14 compete as a team in the U/14 board relay category and use the board only, therefore the board relay is only for the U/12 and U/14 age groups.

1. General Conditions a) Board and bodyboard relay events shall be conducted under General Conditions of the

board and bodyboard events. b) Teams shall consist of 3 competitors. Team members may use the same craft.

2. Control of Craft Competitors must be in contact with the bodyboard or board up to and including the last course buoy. Competitors shall not be disqualified if they lose contact with the craft on the return journey from the buoys. Competitors may lose contact on the way out without penalty provided they regain the craft and round the last turning buoy of each leg in contact with the craft and complete the course.


3. The Finish In events where competitors are required to cross a finish line, and fail to do so correctly, competitors may recover and correctly re-cross the finish line to record their placing. The placing will be the re-crossed finish line position.

4. The Course The course(s) shall be as detailed in the diagram.

5. Procedure a) Competitors must obey the Starter’s or Check Starter’s directions concerning craft

alignment at the start. b) First Competitor: Competitors for the first leg of the relay shall be started as in the

respective discipline and paddle around the buoys. Having completed the course, the first competitor may leave his or her craft at the water’s edge, sprint round the two orange turning flags to tag the second competitor on the designated start changeover line.

c) Second Competitor: The second competitor completes the same course and tags the third competitor on the designated start changeover line.

d) Third Competitor: The third competitor completes the same course, rounds one orange turning flag, passes the other orange turning flag on the shoreward side, and finishes between the two red finish flags.

e) Competitors in the board and bodyboard relay events must commence their leg of the event from the correct allotted position.

f) The first and third competitor in each team commence from the team’s drawn starting position. However, the drawn starting position is reversed for the second competitor in each team. For example, in a 16-competitor race in which a team has drawn position 1: the first competitor commences from position 1; the second competitor commences from position 16; the third competitor commences from position 1. Lane markers, no’s 1, 4, 8, 12 and 16 should be placed on the start/change over line to indicate the lane positions.

1st & 3rd competitor’s starting position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ...16

2nd competitor’s starting position 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 …1

g) Competitors are not permitted to hold or otherwise interfere with other competitors’ craft

or deliberately impede their progress.


4.5 BEACH EVENTS

4.5.1 Beach Sprint

1. The Course a) As shown in the following diagram, the beach sprint course shall be for the different age

groups as set out in the table below. The distance is from the start line to the finish line. A “marshalling line” is drawn 5 m behind the start line. A run-off area of at least 20 m is provided at finish end.

b) The course shall be rectangular and “squared” to ensure that all competitors run the same distance, and it shall be designated by four distinctly coloured poles, 2 m high.


c) Running lanes separated by coloured ropes shall be laid on the beach to assist runners in keeping a straight course. The lanes shall be laid 1.8 m in width where possible with a minimum width of 1.5 m.

AGE GROUP DISTANCE

Nippers U/9 & U/10 50 m



Juniors and Seniors 90 m

Masters 70 m


d) Ten lanes are desirable, but a minimum of 8 lanes is required for this event. Competitors must remain in their own lane throughout the course.

e) Numbered pegs identifying running lanes shall be placed before the starting mark and beyond the finishing line.

f) A marshalling line shall be made a minimum of 5 m to the rear and parallel to the starting mark and designated by poles 2 m high.

2. Procedure a) Competitors take their positions as drawn in their allotted lanes. b) At the starting signal, competitors race the course to the finish line. c) The finish is judged on the competitor’s chest (only) crossing the finish line.

Competitors must finish the event on their feet in an upright position. d) Any competitor who crosses into the lane on either side of them may be disqualified.

3. The Draw

a) There shall be a preliminary draw for positions in the heats, at the discretion of the Chief Referee, competitors shall be lined up behind one another in those draws in a “snake”’/line like formation.

b) If 10 lanes have been laid and depending on the number of competitors the first 10 competitors will form the first heat.

c) After each run-off in turn the competitors qualifying to the next run-off will be placed according to their finishing position from 1 to 5 (for the sake of this explanation 50%) and take up a position at the end of the “snake”/line and the next required number of competitors at the beginning of such “snake”/line will be placed on the starting line.

Notes: 1. The same principle applies if there are less than 10 lanes provided, for example 8

lanes. 2. It may occur that some competitors may contest more run-offs than other

competitors. The Technical Officials will endeavor to be as fair as possible so that all competitors have the same number of run-offs, but that is not always possible.

d) 50% of the competitors will qualify per run-off and will proceed through to the next round. This will continue until the exact number of competitor’s remains for a semi-final, usually 16.

e) At the discretion of the Chief Referee a break may be taken to form semi-finals at a later time on the program or the process may continue, but only the correct number of competitors may qualify per semi-final until exactly 8 competitors remain forming the final which should be held at a later time on the programme

f) The names and club of each competitor will be recorded. A new draw for positions will take place for the final.

4. The Start

a) No artificial starting blocks are permitted, but competitors may create holes and/or hillocks of sand to aid their start.

b) Competitors are not permitted to use any material other than sand to aid the start. c) Competitors are permitted to flatten or level the sand in their lane. d) The Starter is in complete control of the start. e) A Check Starter may be appointed. When appointed the Check Starter shall have the

authority to assist the Starter by calling breaks using a whistle. f) Both the Starter and the Check Starter shall be positioned at the start line each side of

the sprint track with the Starter on the seaward side and the Check Starter on the shoreward side 5 m towards the finishing line. This may be reversed depending on wind conditions.

g) On the words of command from the Starter "On your marks", the competitors shall move forward from the marshalling line and assume a comfortable steady position on


the starting mark. If a competitor disregards the Starter’s command and delays the start by taking an unnecessary long time he/she may be disqualified.

h) On the command "Set" the competitors shall assume a steady posture in the "set" position on the starting mark. If a competitor disregards the Starter’s command and delays the start by taking an unnecessary long time they will be disqualified.

i) Any competitor not stationary after the “Set” command prior to the start signal will be disqualified. An involuntary muscle movement/twitch whilst remaining stationary is not a movement and consequently not a disqualification.

j) These commands shall be followed by a pistol shot or whistle blast. k) If, for any reason, the Starter has to speak to any competitor after either command, he

shall order all competitors to stand up and, the start shall be recommenced. l) Breaking: False Starts: if a competitor leaves his mark with hand or foot after the word

"Set", but before the start is given, it shall be considered a break and the competitor will be disqualified.

m) If in the opinion of the Starter or the Check Starter the start was not fair because of a technical defect or other matter not caused by competitors the Starter must recall the competitors and recommence the starting process.

5. The Finish Competitors are required to cross a finish line, and if failing to do so correctly, competitors may recover and correctly re-cross the finish line to record their placing. The competitor will be allocated the placing on the re-crossing of the finish line.

After the finish, all competitors must return to the finish line in their lane, so they can be advised of their finishing position by the Finish Judges. Competitors may not remove their caps until they have been released by the Finish Judges and their names and order of placing has been recorded by the Recorder.

6. Judging a) The finishing order of the competitors shall be determined by the alignment of the

competitors’ chests with the finishing "line”. b) Different coloured lane vests may be required to be worn by competitors as an aid for

judges. Such vests will be supplied by LSA. c) Lane Judges shall be appointed to ensure the competitors run the course as described. d) Finish Judges decide on the order of placings. The competitors shall be placed in the

order in which any part of their chest crosses the finish line. Competitors must cross the finish line on their feet in an upright position.

e) The Chief Referee or his appointee, shall position himself to maintain overall supervision. 4.5.2 Beach Relay

1. The Course The course shall be as detailed in the diagram as for beach sprints with “run off “ at both ends and TO video stands positioned at start line and finish line and changeover lines.

2. The Draw a) There shall be a preliminary draw for positions in the heats, at the discretion of the

Chief Referee, teams shall be lined up behind one another in those draws in a “snake”’/line like formation.

b) If 10 lanes have been laid and depending on number of teams the first 10 teams will form the first heat.

c) After each run-off in turn the teams qualifying to the next run-off will be placed according to their finishing position from 1 to 5 (for the sake of this explanation 50%) and take up a position at the end of the “snake”/line and the next required number of teams at the beginning of such “snake”/line will be placed on the starting line.


Notes: 1. It may occur that some teams may contest more run-offs than other teams. The Technical

Officials will endeavor to be as fair as possible so that all teams have the same number of run-offs, but that is not always possible.

2. The same principle applies if there are less than 10 lanes provided, for example 8 lanes.

d) 50% of the teams will qualify per run-off and will proceed through to the next round. This will continue until the exact number of teams remains for a semi-final, usually 16.

e) At the discretion of the Chief Referee a break may be taken to form semi-finals at a later time on the program or the process may continue, but only the correct number of teams may qualify per semi-final until exactly 8 teams remain forming the final which should be held at a later time on the programme.

3. Procedure

a) Teams of four competitors (three in masters) compete in baton relay fashion over the course.

b) To start, two (one and two members in masters) competitors take positions in their allotted lane at each end of the course.

c) After the start each competitor completes a leg of the course with a baton held in either hand and passes the baton at the conclusion of the first, second, and third legs to the next runner.

d) All competitors shall finish their leg of the event on their feet and in an upright position. e) Competitors are not permitted to interfere with the progress of other competitors.

4. Equipment Refer to Section 9: Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures for specifications for the batons.

5. The Start The starting conditions shall be as for the beach sprint with the first runner of the team taking the mark.

6. Baton changeovers The baton shall be exchanged in the following manner:

a) The competitor coming in to exchange the baton must carry the baton to the change-over line. The baton may not be thrown to the next competitor.

b) Competitors receiving the baton on the first, second, and third exchange can be moving while taking the baton, but will be disqualified if any part of the body or hands cross the front line before taking possession of the baton.

c) If a baton is dropped during the exchange, the receiver must recover the baton (ensuring that there is no interference to other competitors) and continue the race.

d) If a baton is dropped at any other stage, the competitor may recover the baton (providing that there is no interference to other competitors) and continue the race.

7. Judging/Change-Over

a) In general, judging shall be as for the beach sprint with the Chief Referee, Course Judges, and the Finish Judges assuming similar duties in regards to the start and finish.

b) Course Judges shall be appointed to check the changeover lines for infringements at each end during the changeovers.

c) Different coloured lane vests may be required to be worn by competitors as an aid for judges. Such vests will be supplied by LSA.

d) Any infringements observed by the Course Judges shall be reported to the Sectional Referee or Chief Judge in the case of the changeovers.

8. The Finish The fourth competitor (third in masters) is required to cross a finish line and if failing to do so correctly, may recover and correctly re-cross the finish line to record their placing. The competitor will be allocated the placing on the re-crossing of the finish line.


After the finish, all competitors must return to the finish line in their lane, so they can be advised of their finishing position by the Finish Judges. Competitors may not remove their caps until they have been released by the Finish Judges and their names and order of placing has been recorded by the Recorder.

The team names and club of each competitor will be recorded. A new draw for positions will take place for the final.

4.5.3 Beach Flags

1. The course a) As shown in the following diagrams, the course shall be approximately as set out in the

table, from the start line to the batons, and wide enough to provide for a minimum spacing of 1.5 m between each of 16 competitors.

Notes: 1. For heats the Chief Referee will determine how many competitors be eliminated per

round, 1, 2 or 3. Subject to the number, the spacing between the batons will change (see diagram).

2. For the final, to get the finalist to have the final run-offs in the middle of the flag track, the number 1 position is in the middle of the track (see diagram)

b) The start line shall be designated at each end by poles, 2 m high. c) Batons shall be positioned in line parallel to the start line, and so that a “perpendicular

line” between any two adjacent competitors shall pass approximately through the base of the baton. In other words, batons are aligned on the baton line equidistant between adjacent competitors.

d) The beach flags arena should be free of debris, and if the sand surface is hard, it should be raked to make it safer before and throughout the competition.


2. The Draw a) For the heats there shall be a preliminary draw for positions. At the discretion of the

Chief Referee the competitors shall be lined up behind one another in those draws in a “snake”’/line like formation.

b) The first 16 competitors will form the first heat. c) After each run-through in turn the competitors qualifying (that is competitors with

batons) will proceed to the next run-through will be placed according to the numbered baton obtained take up a position at the end of the “snake”/line and the next required number of competitors at the beginning of such “snake”/line will be placed on the starting line.

d) In heats the Chief Referee shall determine whether one, two or three competitors are to be eliminated in each run-through. In semifinals and finals, no more than one competitor can be eliminated in any run-through.

e) If heats are conducted in beach flag events a minimum of four competitors must progress from each heat into each subsequent round of the event unless there is a disqualification or elimination of more than one competitor in the last run-through of the round.

f) In the event of elimination during the start in the heats, the next competitor in the “snake”/line will be placed on the start line. In the semi-finals or final – refer to par. 7, below.

g) At the discretion of the Chief Referee a break may be taken to form semi-finals at a later time on the program or the process may continue, but only the correct amount of competitors may qualify per semi-final until exactly 8 competitors remain forming a final which should it be held at a later time on the program.

h) The names and club of each competitor will be recorded. A new draw for positions will take place for the final.

Note: It may occur that some competitors may contest more run-offs than other competitors. The Technical Officials will endeavor to be as fair as possible so that all competitors have the same number of run-offs, but that is not always possible.

3. Event description

a) From a prone starting position on the beach, competitors rise, turn and race to obtain a baton (beach flag) placed upright in the sand, with approximately ¾ above the sand, approximately 20 m away (and 15 m for nippers and masters). Since there are always fewer batons than competitors, those who fail to obtain a baton are eliminated.

b) Competitors take their allotted positions, a minimum of 1.5 m apart at the start line. Competitors lie face down with their toes on the start line with heels together, hands on top of each other with fingertips to wrists and with the head up. Elbows should be 90 degrees to the body’s midline and hips and stomach must be in contact with the sand. The body’s midline should be 90 degrees to the start line. Competitors may level, flatten, and compress their starting area but no scooping of the sand or digging, or digging in of the feet is permitted.

4. Start procedure Beach flags start procedure is different from the procedure described in par 4.2.14 Starting of Events. For beach flags, the start is as follows, prior to the start, a Marshall shall:

a) Place competitors in the order as drawn for the run-through. b) Accompany competitors to the starting area to ensure they are positioned in proper

drawn order.

The Sectional Referee shall: a) Check that all Technical Officials, Judges and equipment are in position. b) Signal the Starter that the competitors are under the Starter’s control.


AGE GROUP DISTANCE

Nippers – all age groups 15 m

Juniors and Seniors 20 m

Masters 15 m

Note: The Starter shall be positioned behind the competitors and to either side of the flags track out of view of the competitors. The Check Starter shall be positioned on either side of the flags track but opposite to the Starter so as to be able to look along the line of heads of the competitors lying in the prone position for observing a false start.

5. The start Competitors take their allotted positions, a minimum of 1.5 m apart at the start line.


When directed by the Starter, competitors shall lie face down with their toes on the start line, heels or any part of the feet together, hands on top of each other with finger tips to wrists and with the head up. Elbows should be extended 90 degrees to the body’s midline and hips and stomach must be in contact with the sand. The body’s mid-line should be 90 degrees to the start line. Competitors may level, flatten, and compress their starting area but no scooping or digging of the sand is permitted.

Notes: 1. When flattening or compressing the sand a competitor is not permitted to create mounds or

unreasonably alter the incline of the sand to assist their start. 2. Competitors are permitted to dig their toes into the sand at the start line by digging with their

hands or feet before lying on the sand or with their feet after lying on the sand. 3. Competitors should not unreasonably delay the conduct of the event in preparing their start

area and must comply with the direction of officials.

On the Starter’s “Competitors Ready” command, competitors shall assume the starting position as described. On the Starter’s “Heads Down” command, competitors immediately and without delay – shall place their chins on their hands.

After a deliberate pause of 2 – 4 seconds and when all competitors are stationary, the Starter shall signal the start with a sharp whistle blast. At the start signal, competitors shall rise to their feet turn-about and race to obtain a baton.

6. Starting infringements The following behaviours are starting infringements in beach flags:

a) Failure to comply with the Starter’s commands within a reasonable time. b) Lifting any part of the body from the sand, or commencing any starting motion after the

Starter’s “Heads Down” command and prior to the start signal of a sharp whistle blast. c) In the heats (if the “snake” elimination process is not used), semi or final if one or more

competitor(s) are disqualified or eliminated the remaining competitors will move up their places and batons shall be realigned with no re-draw for positions. If one or more competitors are disqualified or eliminated in the heats (if the “snake” elimination process is used), the competitor(s) next in the line (“snake”) will be called up to replace the eliminated competitor(s). The run-through shall continue with the current starting infringement in force until a fair start is affected.

7. Run-offs in Semi Final and Finals a) A run-off between the competitors involved shall be called if two or more competitors hold

the same baton, and Technical Officials cannot determine which competitor’s hand grasped the baton first – regardless of the hand position on the baton.

b) Likewise, a run-off between the competitors involved shall be called if a baton is “lost” in the sand.

c) If it is apparent that a baton has been “lost” in the sand, the Finish Judge shall signal (by whistle or verbally) that the baton is “lost”. A run-off will then take place between all competitors involved in the search for the baton.

d) In the heats if the “snake/line” process of elimination is used, in the case of two or three competitors holding the same baton or if the baton is lost – all the affected competitors will proceed through to the next run-off.

8. Equipment

Beach Flags (Batons): Refer Section 9: Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures

9. Judging a) The Sectional Referee or his appointee nominee shall be positioned to maintain overall

supervision.


b) The Starter and Check Starter shall be placed at either end of the starting line to observe any starting infringements.

c) Course Judges shall be placed on either side and at each end of the course to observe run-throughs and participation infringements.

d) In beach flags events a verbal protest against an elimination must be lodged immediately before the next run through (should it be the last run the time for a verbal protest is 2 minutes) of an event begins (whichever occurs first). If a beach flag elimination protest occurs the Chief Referee will immediately consider the protest without delay before proceeding with the event. There will be no appeal permitted on beach flag elimination protest decisions of the Chief Referee.

Note: A Chief Referee is authorised to refer a beach flag elimination protest directly to an on-beach Jury of Appeals representative for decision on the basis of the processes and timings detailed above. No paperwork is required nor is a fee payable if this occurs.

e) Finish Judges shall be positioned a few metres behind the line of batons, to reclaim the baton from successful competitors and to set up the batons for the next run- through.

10. Elimination and disqualification Each run-through or run-off shall be judged as a separate round of this event. An infringement in one round shall not be carried over and counted against a competitor in a subsequent round.

a) A competitor who commits a starting infringement or who impedes the progress of another competitor will be eliminated (not disqualified).

b) A competitor eliminated from the event shall retain the point score and/or placing as at the time in the event. However, a competitor disqualified from the event shall lose all standing from the event.

c) In addition to the General Conditions. Section 2: General Competitive Conditions and par. 4.2 of this section, the following behaviour shall result in disqualification:

• Failure to complete the event as described and defined.

• Picking up or blocking more than one baton.

11. Impedance Impedance is defined as the use of “hands, arms, feet or legs to impede another competitor’s progress”.

a) A competitor may otherwise use his or her body to improve his or her position in obtaining a baton. A competitor may negotiate the shoulder and or body in front of an opponent, but may not use hands, arms, feet or legs to obtain or remain in this position.

b) If a competitor legally obtains this front position and maintains normal running action, the competitor behind is obliged to go around the competitor in front.

c) A competitor may cross over in front of a slower competitor. d) If two or more competitors are guilty of impedance, the competitor who first used hands,

arms, feet or legs will be eliminated. e) Notwithstanding the impedance clauses, if it is deemed that the competitor has breached

the LSA Code of Conduct and/or competed unfairly (Section 2: General Competitive Conditions), the competitors involved will be disqualified.

f) In addition to the General Rules in Section 2: General Competitive Conditions the following behavior shall result in disqualification:

• Picking up or blocking more than one baton – e.g., deliberately lying on a baton or covering a baton from sight.

• Failure to complete the event as described and defined.

4.5.4 Beach Run

1. Event description Competitors race the set distance for their age group on the beach in four legs or as instructed by the Chief Referee, as follows:

a) The rules regarding the start shall be as detailed in the par 4.2.14 Starting of Events.


b) On the starting signal, competitors race along the left side of the lane to round (clockwise or right hand in) the turning pole, a quarter of the set distance, and return toward the starting pole.

c) Competitors round this pole (clockwise or right hand in), proceed back down the beach to round the turning pole as before, and then race back to cross the finish line.

d) Jostling or obstructing another competitor so as to impede his or her progress is not permitted.

e) Technical Officials shall be placed to observe the conduct of the event as well as determine competitors’ place on crossing the finish line.

f) The finish is judged on the competitor’s chest crossing the finish line. g) Competitors must finish on their feet in an upright position.

The distances for the different age groups are set out in the table.

2. The course The course for the beach run will be as detailed in the diagram and, where practical, be run in soft sand. The Chief Referee may set an alternate course on beaches with more or restricted room.

a) The start line shall be designated by a line in the sand or a brightly coloured synthetic cord stretched between two poles.

b) The finish line shall between two red flags placed approximately five metres apart and on the shoreward side of the start/turn line. The Chief Referee shall determine the length of the start/turn marker.

c) Running lanes: The course shall be divided into two lanes parallel to the waterline. The lane furthest from the water shall be for legs running outwards from the start/finish lines (legs one and three). The lanes shall be divided by coloured tape, bunting, or other appropriate material.

d) A turn around pole (orange flag) situated at the age group determined distance from the start at the end of the lane divider shall designate the turning point. Competitors round these poles (clockwise or right hand in) or as otherwise directed by the Chief Referee, proceed back down the beach to round the turning poles (if course requires this) and then race back to cross the finish line.

e) Alternative course: For beaches with restricted room or difficult conditions, an alternate course can be set out.

AGE GROUP DISTANCE LEG

DISTANCE

Nippers: U/9 & U/10 800 m 200 m

Nippers: U/11 & U/12 1000 m 250 m

Nippers U/13 & U/14 1200 m 300 m

Juniors: U/15 1400 m 350 m

Juniors: U/17 1600 m 400 m

Juniors: U/19 1800 m 450 m

Seniors 2000 m 500 m

Masters: 30 – 59 years 2000 m 500 m

Masters: 60+ years 1000 m 250 m

3. Equipment and Apparel

Shorts and shirts, which comply with team uniform requirements, may be worn at the competitors’ discretion. Footwear is optional.

4. Judging a) The Chief Referee shall be positioned at one side of the course to maintain overall

supervision.


b) Check Starter shall be positioned about 5 m away, in line, and on either side of the starting line. If a competitor leaves his mark with hand or foot after the word "Set", but before the start is given, it shall be considered a break and the competitor may be disqualified.

c) Breaking: False Starts: if a competitor leaves his mark with hand or foot after the word "Set", but before the start is given, it shall be considered a break and the competitor may be disqualified.

d) Course Judges may be appointed to ensure the competitors run the course without interference to other competitors.

e) A Technical Official shall be positioned at each turn-around pole to ensure no unnecessary jostling or interference occurs.

f) Finish Judges shall decide on the order of placings. g) Deliberately jostling or obstructing another competitor so as to impede his or her progress

is not permitted.

4.5.5 3 x 1 Km. Beach Run Relay

1. Event description Three competitors race a set distance (see schedule below) each on the beach in legs as follows:

a) On the starting signal, competitors race along the left side of the lane to round the turning poles (clockwise or right hand in) and return to the turning flags. The first competitor rounds the first turning flag (clockwise or right hand in) to tag the second competitor who is waiting in the changeover zone between the first and second turning flags in a position as directed by the relevant official. The tag must take place after the first turning flag and before the second competitor rounds the second the turning flags.

b) The second competitor completes the same course as described above.


c) The third competitor completes the same course as described above before crossing the finish line.

d) Deliberately jostling or obstructing another competitor so as to impede his or her progress is not permitted.

e) Judges shall be placed to observe the conduct of the event as well as determine competitors’ place at the finish line.

f) The finish is judged on the competitor’s chest crossing the finish line. Competitors must finish on their feet in an upright position.

2. The course The course (see diagram) shall be laid out on the beach (on soft sand where practical) parallel to the water’s edge in two lanes. The Chief Referee may set an alternate course on beaches with restricted room.

The start line shall be designated by a line in the sand or a brightly coloured synthetic cord stretched between two poles. The finish line shall be marked by two poles with red flags. The Chief Referee shall determine the length of the start and finish lines.

Running lanes: The course shall be divided into two lanes parallel to the waterline. The lanes may be divided by coloured cones/witches hats, tape, bunting, or other appropriate material.

Turning poles situated a set distance from the start at the end of the lane divider shall designate the turning point.

AGE GROUP DISTANCE

PER RUNNER

LEG DISTANCE

Nippers: U/9 & U/10 400 m 200 m

Nippers: U/11 & U/12 500 m 250 m

Nippers U/13 & U/14 600 m 300 m

Juniors: U/15 700 m 350 m



Seniors 1 000 m 500 m

Masters: 30 – 59 years 1 000 m 500 m

Masters: 60+ years 800 m 400 m

3. Equipment and apparel

See Section 2 of the Competition Manual – Shorts and shirts, which comply with team uniform requirements, may be worn at the competitors’ discretion. Footwear is optional.

4. Judging a) The Chief Referee shall be positioned at one side of the course to maintain overall

supervision. b) Break Judges shall be positioned about 5 m away, in line, and on either side of the

starting line. If a break occurs, the Break Judges shall report the competitors to the Starter who shall issue a warning.

c) Course Judges may be appointed to ensure the competitors run the course without interference to other competitors.

d) A Judge shall be positioned at the turning poles to ensure no unnecessary jostling or interference occurs.

e) Finish Judges shall select placings.

5. Disqualification In addition to the Section 2: General Competitive Conditions and par. 4.2 of this section and those outlined above, the following behavior shall result in disqualification; failure to complete the course as defined and described.


4.6 MULTI-DISCIPLINE EVENTS

4.6.1 General Conditions Events where more than one discipline is performed are termed “multi-discipline events” and include ironman/woman, Ocean M and taplin relay and board rescue. Different disciplines in each particular event are referred to as "legs" of that event.

Conditions of racing of each leg are as generally required for the individual conditions of that discipline with differences as detailed in this section. In ironman/woman and taplin relay events the competitors on the craft legs may not pass through the swim buoys.

1. Order of Legs One ballot shall be taken at the commencement of each competition or day of the competition, in competitions stretching over more than one day, a new draw shall be done per day to determine the order for the swim, board or ski legs (for juniors, seniors or masters).

In juniors, seniors and masters taplin relay the run leg will always be last. If the result of the ballot requires the ski leg to be the first leg, competitors will start that leg as a typical "in water start".

The order of legs in the nipper taplin events shall be fixed, it will be – run, swim, and bodyboard (for U/9 & U/10 combined) and run, swim, board (for U/11 & U/12 combined and U/13 & U/14 combined).

The order of legs in the iron nippers events shall be fixed, it will be – run, swim, board and a sprint. Note that iron nipper is only for the U/13 & U/14 age group. There is no iron nipper in the U/9, U/10, U/11 and U/12 age groups.


2. Starting Positions Competitors or teams must commence craft legs from the correct allotted beach positions. The starting positions are reversed for the board and surf ski legs. For example, in a 16-competitor race in which a competitor has drawn position 1: the competitor commences the initial craft leg from position 1 but commences the other craft leg from position 16.



3. The Finish In events where competitors are required to cross a finish line, and fail to do so correctly, competitors may recover and correctly re-cross the finish line to record their placing.

4. Handler Competitors may be assisted by a handler, who is not considered to be a competitor, but shall:

a) Be a member of the same lifesaving authority as the competitor (exemption may be given by the Chief Referee for a member of another lifesaving authority to be a handler provided that the handler is entered at the competition).

b) Wear a registered skull cap. c) Wear a distinctive high-visibility vest as required by competition organizers if entering the

water beyond knee depth. d) Make every effort to ensure that he and his craft do not impede another competitor;

otherwise his competitor may be subject to disqualification. e) In the ski leg, he may hold the ski in a floating position as per the diagram or as directed

by the relevant Technical Official. f) Comply with all instructions of the officials.

5. Replacing of Skis, Paddles, Boards and Bodyboards Equipment may be replaced during an event. The handler or team or club members shall be permitted to assist in replacing equipment, but only to the extent of placing replacement equipment at the start and change-over line (SCO line). Handlers, team or club members may remove damaged or abandoned equipment. It is the responsibility of the handler, team/club members to ensure that any abandoned or damaged equipment does not cause any interference to another team or competitor in the race.

6. Control of Craft Competitors must be in contact with the ski, board or bodyboard up to and including the last course buoy. Competitors shall not be disqualified if they lose contact with the craft on the return journey from the buoys. Competitors may lose contact on the way out without penalty provided they regain the craft and round the last turning buoy of each leg in contact with the craft and complete the course.

7. Shortening of Course In the event that it is necessary to lay special turning buoys for surf swimming events – for example if there is a need to shorten the course, then not less than two buoys shall be laid (a minimum distance of 10 m apart).

4.6.2 Board Rescue Race 1. General Conditions

a) This event shall be conducted over a course which shall include a swim leg and a board leg.

b) Team composition - teams shall comprise a racing patient and a board rescuer. c) Losing control of patient and/or board – the rescuer and patient may lose contact with the

board on the return journey. However, both the rescuer and patient must be in contact with the board when crossing the finish line.

2. The Course The course is as detailed in the diagram.


3. Procedure The swim section is conducted from the start line to the swimming buoys. The board section is conducted from the start line to the seaward side of the swimming buoys, pick up patient and return to the finishing line on the beach. The rescuer may not start before the patient has signalled arrival at the buoy.

Turning of buoys - the board shall be paddled around the allotted buoy right hand in or as directed by the Chief Referee. The race is concluded when the patient and rescuer have correctly completed the course, both in contact with the board and cross the finish line between the red finish flags.

4. The Finish The finish is judged on the chest of the first competitor i.e. patient or rescuer of each team to cross the finish line on their feet in an upright position with both rescuer and patient in contact with the board.

Note: The swimming buoy is described as the buoy only and does not include any attaching ropes or straps.

Both competitors (the patient and rescuer) shall take up their position on the start line in their allotted position 5 m in front of their allotted beach marker. On the starting signal, each patient (from the allotted position) shall enter the water and swim to their allotted buoy.

On reaching his allotted buoy, the patient shall place his forearm over the top of the buoy and then signal his arrival by raising his other arm to a vertical position whilst remaining in contact with the buoy.

The said signal, subject to all conditions being fulfilled, shall be the determining factor in judging providing that should a competitor swim to a wrong buoy and signal he will be disqualified. The patients will then retire to the seaward side of the swimming buoys.The board rescuer may not start before the patient signals arrival. The board rescuer may cross the start/changeover line for any reason and will not be disqualified provided he or she then resumes the correct start position to await the patient’s arrival signal.

a) On receiving this signal the rescuer shall enter the water from his allotted position and paddle to and around the allotted buoy.

b) The rescuer shall turn the buoy from left to the right (clockwise) unless otherwise directed by the Chief Referee.

c) The patient shall make contact with any part of the board on the seaward side of the swimming buoy.

d) The patient may place himself on either the front or rear of the board and may assist the rescuer by paddling the board on the return journey to the beach.

e) The finish is judged on the chest of the first competitor of the team (i.e. patient or rescuer) crossing the start/finish line on their feet, with both the rescuer and patient being in control and in contact with the board.

f) Competitors are not permitted to hold or interfere with other competitors boards or deliberately impede their progress.


4.6.3 Iron Man / Woman Race

1. General Conditions Legs: This event shall be conducted over a course which shall include a swim leg, a board leg, a ski leg, and finish with a beach run leg. Control of Craft: A competitor must paddle his ski (including paddle) and/or board and be in contact with the craft up to and including the last course buoy. Competitors shall not be disqualified if they lose contact with the craft on the return journey from the buoys. Competitors may lose contact on the way out without penalty provided they regain the craft and round the last turning buoy of each leg in contact with the craft and complete the course.

2. The Course The course shall be as detailed in the diagram.

3. The Procedure For the purpose of this description the ballot will be board, ski and swim and the course direction is right hand in.

a) Board Course: The board leg is conducted from the SCO Line, around the swimming buoys and two board buoys return to the beach and around the two turning flags and passing between the SCO poles.

b) Ski Course: The ski leg is conducted with the skis starting from the floating position as per the diagram, around the swimming buoys and three ski buoys, return to the beach and around the two turning flags and passing between the SCO poles.

c) Swim Course: The swim leg is conducted from the SCO Line, around the swimming buoys and returning to the beach.

d) Beach Run Course and Finish: The race will be concluded when a competitor completes all legs. To finish a competitor rounds one turning flag passes the other turning flag on the shoreward side and finishes between the two finish flags.


Note: The turning flags are to be rounded clockwise, i.e. right hand in.

The competitor shall cover all legs of the course as laid down in the diagram.

4.6.4 Iron Nipper Race

General Conditions as set out in the Iron Man/ Woman must be adhered to.

1. General Conditions Legs: This event shall be conducted over a course which shall include a swim leg, a board leg and finish with a beach run leg. Control of craft: Competitors must be in contact with the board up to and including the last course buoy. Competitors shall not be disqualified if they lose contact with the craft on the return journey from the buoys. Competitors may lose contact on the way out without penalty provided they regain the craft and round the last turning buoy of each leg in contact with the craft and complete the course. Entry: Only U/13 and U/14 nippers will be allowed to enter this event.

2. The Course The course shall be as detailed in the diagram. Competitors will go around the two craft buoys moored 80 m measured from knee deep water for all the legs.


3. The Procedure Swim and Board Course: The course direction is right hand in. Both are conducted from the start line, around the craft buoys, returning to the beach, around the two turning flags and passing between the SCO lines. Beach Run Course and Finish: The race will be concluded when a competitor completes all legs. To finish a competitor rounds one turning flag passes the other turning flag on the shoreward side and finishes between the two finish flags.

Note: The turning flags are to be rounded clockwise in the same direction as the buoys for each leg.

4.6.5 Taplin Relay Race (Juniors, Seniors and Masters) 1. General Conditions

a) Team Composition: Teams shall comprise 4 competitors (1 swimmer, 1 board paddler, 1 ski paddler and 1 runner). For masters a team shall comprise of 3 competitors only, there will be no runner.

b) Placing of Equipment: Items of equipment shall be placed adjacent to the respective starting discipline areas of the various craft by team members.

c) Legs: This event shall be conducted over a course which shall include a swim leg, a board leg, a ski leg, and finish with a beach run leg.


2. The Course The course shall be as detailed in the taplin relay race diagram.

3. Procedure a) On the starting signal the swimmer shall enter the water round the swimming buoys and

return to the beach, round the two turning flags and tag the board paddler, who shall be waiting, with his board, with his feet on or on the shoreward side of the SCO line.

b) The board paddler will then round the board course and return to the beach, round the two turning flags and tag the ski paddler, who shall be waiting at approximately knee depth water standing next to the ski with paddles.

c) The ski paddler will then round the ski course and return to the shore to tag the runner waiting at the water’s edge. The location of the tag is at the discretion of the team provided it occurs after the last course buoy has been rounded and before the first beach turning flag.

d) As the beach run leg is always the last leg the runner shall remain at the water’s edge no deeper than knee deep until tagged by the swimmer. The runner then rounds one turning flag, right hand in and passes on the shoreward side of the other turning flag, and continuing to the finish between the two finish flags.

Removal of craft from the competition course during the event is only permitted by handlers authorized by the Chief Referee and provided they do not impede the progress of other competitors. Competitors in the taplin relay events must commence their leg of the event from the (correct) position as allotted by the Check Starter. If the competitor does not comply with this the teams shall be disqualified.


4.6.6 Taplin Relay Variations

1. Eight Person Taplin Relay As per the taplin relay but with two swimmers, two board paddlers, two ski paddlers and 2 runners.

4.6.7 Taplin Relay Race (Nippers)

1. General Conditions Team Composition - Teams shall comprise 3 competitors (1 swimmer, 1 bodyboard paddler and 1 runner) for the U/9 and U/10 combined and 3 competitors (1 swimmer, 1 board paddler and 1 runner) for the U/11 and U/12 combined and U/13 and U/14 combined.

Placing of Equipment- Items of equipment shall be placed adjacent to the respective starting areas of the various craft by team members.

2. The Course The course shall be as detailed in the taplin relay diagram.

3. Procedure a) The sequence of legs in nippers, the draw is always 400 m beach run, surf swim, body

board (for U/9 and U/10 combined) and 400 m beach run, surf swim, board (for the U/11 and U/12 combined and U/13 and U/14 combined) and the course direction is right hand in. the start will be 400 m along the beach from the designated turn flag.

b) On the starting signal the runner will run to and round the designated turning flag depending on the direction of the run and tag the swimmer, who shall be waiting with his feet on the shoreward side of the SCO line.

c) Swimmer shall enter the water round the two turning buoys (for U/9 and U/10 combined and U/11 and U/12 combined)) and round the two buoys (for the U/13 and U/14 combined) and return to the beach, round the two turning flags and tag the bodyboard paddler (for U/9 and U/10 combined) or board paddler (for U/11 and U/12 combined and U/13 and U/14 combined) who shall be waiting, with his board, with his feet on or on the shoreward side of the SCO line.

d) The bodyboard paddler (for U/9 and U/10 combined) will round the two turning buoys and return to the beach, round the first turning flag pass the other turning flag on the shoreward side and continues to the finish between the two red finish flags.

e) The board paddler (for U/11 and U/12 combined) will round the two turning buoys and return to the beach, round the first turning flag pass the other turning flag on the shoreward side and continues to the finish between the two red finish flags. The board paddler (for the U/13 and U/14 combined) will round the two buoys and return to the beach, round the first turning flag pass the other turning flag on the shoreward side and continues to the finish between the two red finish flags.

f) Removal of craft from the competition course during the event is only permitted by a team member/handler or other person(s) authorised by the Chief Referee and provided they do not impede the progress of other competitors.

g) Competitors in the taplin relay events must commence their leg of the event from the (correct) position as allotted by the Check Starter. If the competitor does not comply with this the teams may be disqualified.


4.6.8 Ocean M 1. Event description Competitors cover a 1.64 km (approx.) in-water course that includes a swim leg, a board leg, a surf ski leg, and a beach run finish.

Except for the differences noted in this section, the conditions of racing of each leg are as generally required for the individual conditions of that discipline including the rules governing the component disciplines.

The sequence of legs shall be swim, board and ski.

2. Starting positions Competitors must commence the swim leg from their drawn position of the start line and the board leg. The starting positions are reversed after the board leg for the surf ski leg i.e. in a 24-competitor race in which a competitor has drawn position 1: the competitor commences the swim and board legs from position 1 but commences the ski leg from position 24.

Competitor’s Swim leg starting position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ...24

Competitor’s Board leg starting position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ...24

Competitor’s Ski Leg starting position 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 …1

3. Craft Management/Handling


At some competitions (such as Olympic type promotional events) handlers shall not be permitted into the competition arena. In such circumstances competitors or skilled officials (as nominated by Event Organisers) shall place boards at the start/changeover line in drawn order and the skis (and paddles) placed behind the boards in drawn (reverse) order. There will be an approximate 1 m space between each board and each ski so that competitors are not impeded by craft. Following competitor use the equipment will then be managed in the arena by the designated officials.

4. Personal Handlers If permitted by the organising body a member of the competitor’s team may assist the competitor with craft management. With the Chief Referee’s approval, non-team members may act as handlers, provided they are registered in the competition in some capacity.

Personal Handlers shall: a) Wear a competition cap. b) Wear a distinctive high-visibility vest as required by competition organizers if entering the

water beyond knee depth. c) Hold the surf ski in a floating position as per the diagram or as directed by officials. d) Make every effort to ensure that they and the equipment they are handling do not impede

other competitors (otherwise disqualification of the competitor may result). e) Comply with all instructions of the officials.

5. The course Buoys shall be laid out for the swim, board, and surf ski legs as indicated in the following diagram. To ensure fair starts and finishes, alignment of the start line and finish line to the buoys may be altered at the discretion of the Chief Referee, depending on the prevailing sea conditions. To encourage spectator, public, media and sponsor interest special audio and visuals may also be utilised including changeover and finish Arches, large in-water turning buoys, special on-beach turning markers/flags and on-beach grandstands.

6. Buoy distances The swimming buoys shall be positioned approximately 90 m from the water’s edge and 50 m apart.

The board leg buoys and surf ski leg buoys shall be positioned approximately 50 m and 100 m respectively behind the swimming buoys. The board leg buoys should be approximately 55 m apart and the surf ski buoys approximately 60 m apart, with the surf ski buoys having additional small marker buoy approximately 1 m “apex” buoy to the return side of the ski buoys to assist with ski turns.

7. Markers A large turning marker (or two flags approximately 1 m apart) is to be placed in the center of the beach at approximately knee depth water to the designate beach turning point at the half way of each leg of the race. In the event that there is no shallow water the marker shall be placed at the water’s edge.

Two further beach markers approximately 35 m apart are to be placed on the beach directly behind the turning markers to form a semi-circular run track to the finish/change line.

8. Finish/Change line The finish/change line is designated by a finish arch or twin flags placed 5 m apart and in the center of the arena and approximately 20 m (tide dependent) from the water’s edge. If a finish arch is erected the judging line shall be delineated by two flags on the incoming side of the arch.

Note: For the Ocean M Lifesaver Relay event the finish/change line shall also be the changeover line for team members in the event.


8. Start line The start line shall be approximately 30 m in length, centered on the swimming buoy number 1 approximately 10 m from the water’s edge, and may be marked by poles at either end. Other than the initial starting swim leg competitors are not required to cross through the start line for the board and ski legs of the event.

Note: Boards and skis are to be placed where directed at the start line prior to the commencement of the race.

9. Swim course The swim leg is conducted from the start line, around the first swimming buoy from left to right, return to the beach to round the turning marker(s) from right to left, then proceed around the second swimming buoy from left to right and return to the beach, past the first beach marker, through the finish/change arch and past the second beach marker to commence the board leg.

10. Board course The board leg is conducted from the pick-up of the board on the beach, past swim buoy 1 on the outside (i.e. the paddler stays to the left of the swim buoy 1 and around the first board buoy from left to right, return to the beach passing swim buoy 1 on the outside (i.e. the paddler stays to the left of the swim buoy 1. The turning marker is then rounded from right to left, and the board is paddled past swim buoy 2 on the outside (i.e. the paddler stays to the left of the swim buoy 2 and around the second board buoy from left to right, return to the beach passing swim buoy 2 on the outside (i.e. the paddler stays to the left of the swim buoy 2) to return to the beach, past the first beach marker, through the finish/change arch and past the second beach marker to commence the ski leg.

11. Surf ski course The ski leg is conducted from the pick-up of the ski on the beach, past swim and board buoys 1 on the outside (i.e. the paddler stays to the left of the swim and board buoys 1) and around the first ski buoy (and the marker buoy) from left to right, return to the beach passing the board and swim buoys 1 on the outside (i.e. the paddler stays to the left of the swim and board buoys 1). The turning marker is then rounded from right to left and the ski is paddled past the swim and board buoys 2 on the outside (i.e. the paddler stays to the left of the swim and board buoys 2) and around the second ski buoy (and marker buoy) from left to right, passing board and swim buoys 2 on the outside (i.e. the paddler stays to the left of the swim and board buoys 1) to return to the beach, past the first beach marker and through the finish line and arch to complete the race.

12. Beach sprint course and finish The race shall be concluded when a competitor completes all legs. To finish, a competitor must past the first beach marker and through the finish at the Finish Arch (or through the two finish flags).

Notes: 1. Competitors round the turning flags in the same direction as the buoys for each leg of the

course. 2. If the swim buoy distance is to exceed 90 m from the water’s edge because of prevailing tide

or surf or beach conditions, the Event Management Committee may decide to use the two board buoys for the swim. In such circumstances competitors shall not complete an M shape swim course but shall proceed around both board buoys without returning to the beach and then commence the “M” board leg.

3. Should tide or surf or beach conditions make it impractical to set a suitable M shaped water course, the Event Management Committee may also alternatively decide to use the traditional Oceanman/Oceanwoman for the water legs of the event while retaining the on-beach course for the event.

13. Equipment Surf skis, paddles, boards: See Section 9: Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures.


a) Changing of damaged equipment: A board, surf ski and/or paddle shall not be changed during a section of the race unless it is damaged or becomes unseaworthy. Team members/handler shall be permitted to assist in replacing the damaged craft, but only to the extent of placing other craft at edge of the competition arena where directed by the Chief Referee.

b) Equipment removal: To assist with the safe conduct of the event, team members and/or handlers may remove damaged or abandoned equipment from the course during the race provided the progress of other competitors is not obstructed.

14. Judging

Judges shall be placed to observe the conduct of the event and to determine competitors’ place at the finish. Competitors must finish on their feet in an upright position. The finish is judged on the competitor’s chest crossing the finish line.

15. Contact with craft

Competitors must be in contact with the surf ski or board up to and including the last course buoy. Competitors shall not be disqualified if they lose contact with the craft on the return journey from the buoys. Competitors may lose contact on the way out without penalty provided they regain the craft and round the last turning buoy of each leg in contact with the craft and complete the course.

16. Disqualification

In addition to the General Rules in Section 2 and those outlined in 4.1 through 4.3 above, the following behavior shall result in disqualification: Failure to complete the course.

Note: the beach setup relative to the positioning of the buoys may be adjusted dependent on the sea conditions.


4.6.9 Ocean M Lifesaver Relay 1. Event description

The Ocean M Lifesaver Relay is a variation of the Ocean M event. Except for the differences noted in this section, the conditions and rules are as per the Ocean M event. Teams shall consist of two males and two females. The first competitor is to complete the run leg, the second competitor the swim, the third the board, and the last competitor is to complete the ski leg and run to finish the event at the finish arch (or flags) on the beach. Teams are permitted to select their own gender order.

2. The course

The course shall be as indicated in the following diagram. The event commences with a 500 m run leg which shall be conducted from the start/change/finish line located at the finish arch to a point 125 m across the beach, turning clockwise around two markers and returning to finish arch. The runner turns clockwise around two markers at the finish arch and then repeats the course and tags the swimmer who shall be waiting on the finish side of the start/change/finish line.

The changeover tag between competitors in the Ocean M Lifesaver Relay shall take place in a zone between the finish arch side of the start/change/finish judging Line and a line approximately 5 m to outgoing side of the finish arch. At the discretion of the team the outgoing competitor is to stand with their feet on start/change/finish judging line or be on the finish arch side of the start/change/finish judging line within the changeover zone. The tag must take place within this zone.

Note: The outgoing competitor’s hand may extend into the incoming side of the start/changeover finish line to effect the tag but the competitors feet must be on or within either end of the changeover zone at the time of the tag.

The race then continues as per the individual Ocean M except that the tags of the swimmer to board paddler to ski paddler are as described above. The event shall be concluded when the ski paddler completes the ski leg and passes the first beach marker and through the start/change/finish judging line.

Notes: 1. If the swim buoy distance is to exceed 90 m from the water’s edge because of prevailing

tide or surf or beach conditions, the Event Management Committee may decide to use the two board buoys for the swim. In such circumstances competitors shall not complete an M shape swim course but shall proceed around both board buoys without returning to the beach and then commence the “M” board leg.

2. Should tide or surf or beach conditions make it impractical to set a suitable M shaped water course, the Event Management Committee may also alternatively decide to use the traditional Oceanman/Oceanwoman for the water legs of the event while retaining the on-beach course for the event.

3. Disqualification

In addition to in Section 2: General Competitive Conditions and those outlined in par. 4.1 through 4.3 above, the following behavior shall result in disqualification: Failure to complete the course.


Note: the beach setup relative to the positioning of the buoys may be adjusted dependent on the sea conditions.

4.6.10 Oceanman/Oceanwoman Eliminator Variation 1. Event Description

The Eliminator format is an alternate format to conduct the traditional Oceanman and Oceanwoman and the Olympic “M” Course events. Qualification for the Elimination Event final is determined by heats and further rounds (where applicable) to arrive at a final of 18 competitors. The final is conducted over three Eliminator races as follows:

1. Race 1 eliminating the last 6 athletes

2. Race 2 eliminating the last 6 athletes

3. Race 3 (FINAL) 6 remaining athletes Notes: 1. In some circumstances it may be possible to have greater or less than 18 competitors

in the first race of an Eliminator final. However, the second elimination race is to start with 12 competitors.

2. Should there be less than 13 competitors starting the Chief Referee shall advise the number of competitors to be eliminated in the first two races. There will be 5 minutes rest between each race with the time commencing from the race winner crossing the finish line. This time can be subject to the organizer’s discretion based on conditions and advised prior to the Eliminator final commencing.

Rules for the Eliminator finals format shall be as per the traditional or Olympic M Shape Oceanman/Oceanwoman as appropriate except where varied below:

a) Final placing and point score points shall be dependent on point where a competitor is eliminated.


b) Dependent on event promotion, and set up and/or conditions there may be longer or shorter courses and/or run legs for either format.

Note: When racing occurs at “flat-water” venues an alternate course may be considered particularly when the events are conducted at standalone competitions. In such circumstances the course shall be advised by way of entry circular and should include a course diagram and the approximate distances for each leg.

c) Competitors who fail to complete the course correctly (including missing a turning buoy or mark) shall be subject to the following:

d) If an error occurs in the first race of the eliminator round then the competitor would be disqualified and allocated last place and any relevant points.

e) If the error occurs in the second or third race of the eliminator then the competitor would be disqualified and allocated last place in that round. This is because the competitor has already qualified above those who have already been eliminated.

f) The event winner is the competitor who correctly finishes first in the third (final) elimination race irrespective of what qualifying place they achieved in the first two eliminator races.

4.6.11 Olympic Mixed Ocean Lifesaver Relay 1. Event description

The Olympic Mixed Ocean Lifesaver Relay is a variation of the Olympic “M Course” Oceanman/Oceanwoman event.

Except for the differences noted in this section, the conditions and rules are as per the Olympic “M Course” Oceanman/Oceanwoman event.

The event is conducted in the set order of Swim, Board, Ski and Run.

There shall be two males and two females in each team who each complete a full (swim, board, ski and run) Oceanman/Oceanwoman race in Relay Order.

The Event Management Committee shall undertake a single draw to determine the teams’ Male and Female gender order for the first two legs of the relay. This gender order shall then be repeated for the third and fourth competitors.

Competitors must commence their leg of the event from the correct allotted beach position.

The changeover tag between competitors in the Mixed Ocean Lifesaver Relay shall be on finish/change arch side of the finish judging Line. At the discretion of the team the outgoing competitor is to stand with their feet on finish judging line or on the finish arch side of the finish judging line. The outgoing competitor’s hand may extend into the incoming side of the Finish Judging Line to effect the tag.

Notes: 1. The second and third competitors do not need to cross the start line to enter the water after

being tagged.

4.7 SURF BOAT EVENTS

4.7.1 General Conditions

Team management and competitors are responsible for being familiar with the competition schedule, and with the rules and procedures governing surf boat events.

a) A boat crew shall consist of five competitors, four of whom shall be rowers. The fifth shall control the boat by a sweep oar and shall be known as the sweep. A crew must commence each race with all five competitors. The sweep: With the Chief Referee’s approval, proficient sweeps who are non-team members may act as sweeps provided they are a member of a lifesaving authority, and are registered to


participate at the championships in some capacity. In master’s competition, sweeps do not need to be masters competitors. Sweeps may compete in multiple masters total-age groups.

b) Crews may not be permitted to start in an event if they are late reporting to the marshalling area.

c) A crew absent from the start of an event shall be disqualified. d) Should a member of any crew become indisposed, he or she may be replaced subject to

approval of the Chief Referee, provided the competitor complies with the requirements for team substitution as detailed in Section 2: General Competitive Conditions.

e) Crews and Officials must leave the designated competition area when not competing or officiating.

f) Unless specifically provided for, no artificial means of propulsion may be used in competition. g) Boat crews shall be dressed in accordance Section 2: General Competitive Conditions, par.

2.10 Competition Attire. However, the sweep may wear different style apparel as warranted by the conditions. Crews may wear flotation vests.

h) All boat rowers and sweeps must wear an approved aquatic helmet (e.g., EN1385 certified) during competition unless the Chief Referee has issued a dispensation because of favourable conditions.

i) Should conditions alter during the course of an event, the Chief Referee may reverse the initial decision for the optional wearing of helmets and mandate that all boat rowers and sweeps must wear an approved aquatic helmet in competition.

j) A decision to make helmet wearing optional is subject to a documented risk assessment that determines an acceptably low risk level.

k) A nominal wave height of 1 m is considered the maximum threshold where surf helmets may be considered optional. Wave height is only one consideration in assessing surf zone hazards (examples of others could include: a heavy shore break, littoral drift, shorter wave periods, wind strength and direction).

l) Helmets should be presented in team colours and design. m) Helmets (or club skull caps if helmets are not required) securely fastened under the chin, must

be worn on competitors’ heads at the start. A team shall not be disqualified if the helmet or cap is lost after the start of an event provided that officials can identify that the crew correctly completed the course.

n) Crews are strongly recommended to wear PFD (refer Section 2: General Competitive Conditions, par. 2.10.3)

A boat panel may be appointed to discuss boat racing conditions with the Chief Referee and to represent competitors. The boat panel shall act as a communication link between the competitors and Technical Officials and act under the following guidelines:

a) The representatives of the boat panel shall liaise directly with the Chief Referee on all matters pertaining to the conduct of the competition.

b) The boat panel may assist the Chief Referee in setting competition courses prior to the commencement of competition.

c) The boat panel representatives shall abide by decisions of the Chief Referee or Appeals Committee.

4.7.2 Competition Area The competition area may be defined as the section of the beach encompassed by a line or fence, or a direct line to the water from the extreme ends of a line or fence or other designated areas as specified by the Chief Referee.

4.7.3 The Course The course shall be as detailed in the diagram. The boat turning buoys and the gate buoys should be of distinctive colours. The turning buoys should be set at a minimum of 400 m rowing distance from knee depth water at the low tide mark depending on prevailing surf conditions and should be set in such a position to allow the boats to clear other course buoys by taking a straight course to and from their respective turning buoys.

The turning buoys should be set so as to provide a course which is as fair as possible and which will give all crews the same distance to row, regardless of which position they are allocated.


The gate buoys (in matching colours to turning buoys), which are optional at the Chief Referee’s discretion for usage on the outward and return journey, should be:

a) Set in line with the turning buoys on the seaward side of the break area and inshore from the turning buoys.

b) Negotiated as directed by the Chief Referee or Sectional Referee.

The finishing line shall be a line of sight drawn between two red flags (or other colour(s) as determined by the Chief Referee) on poles positioned far enough apart to correspond with the number of buoys laid (see diagram) and to allow all boats to finish afloat.

As an alternative to the above, there is also an option for dry starts and dry finishes in any combination with wet starts and wet finishes.

Large elevated boat position markers, in the corresponding boat buoy colours, may be positioned on the beach behind each start position to assist sweeps returning to the beach to determine their position relative to their start position. When it is not possible to provide a fair course over the full number of positions, the Chief Referee, at his discretion, may reduce the number of crews in each race, including the finals to improve the fairness of racing. If it is clearly evident that the turning buoys are not parallel to the beach and therefore not fair for all crews, the buoys may be adjusted immediately at the discretion of the Chief Referee.


(Distances approximate only)

Note: The beach set up relative to the positioning of the buoys may be adjusted dependent on the surf and weather conditions.

4.7.4 Pre-Start a) For each race the boat crews shall be marshalled to their allocated positions on the beach

near the water’s edge. b) At the appropriate time, i.e. 5 minute preliminary notice for a wet start, the Check Starter

shall direct the crews to float and hold their boats in their allocated positions approximately 23 m apart in readiness for a race start.

c) Starts may be wet or dry and will be decided by the Chief Referee. When a dry start is used, coloured markers corresponding with the buoy colours will be placed in line on the beach, approximately 10 m from the water’s edge. A crew member from each crew shall line up behind the allocated marker in readiness for a race start. The remaining four crew members plus a handler (if required) shall hold the boat either floating in the water or at the water’s edge.

d) Handlers: Handlers shall not be considered to be a competitor but shall be required to:


• Be a member of the same club as the crew and be entered at the competition (exemption may be given by the Chief Referee for a member of another club to be a handler provided that the handler is entered at the competition).

• Wear a competition skull cap tied securely under the chin.

• Wear a distinctive high visibility vest as required by competition organizers if entering the water beyond knee depth.

• Comply with all instructions of the Technical Officials.

• Make every effort to ensure that they, or the equipment that they are handling, do not impede another competitor (otherwise both crew may be subject to disqualification).

• Handle the boat and/or oar as directed by the relevant Technical Official. e) The Check Starter shall hold a flag aloft when the crews are in line and ready to race. At

the discretion of the sweep, a crew may draw their boat back from the line if they so wish, provided the boat is stationary at the time of the start. If crews disregard the directions of the Check Starter or Starter they may be disqualified.

f) If a crew has a problem prior to the start, the sweep may raise an arm to indicate that the crew is not ready to race, whereupon, the Check Starter may lower his or her flag and the Starter may lower the gun, whistle or siren horn or flag. Once the problem has been rectified, the start process may recommence. A crew that disregards the further directions of the Check Starter and/or Starter the crew may be disqualified.

4.7.5. The Start The Starter shall make every effort to ensure that all crews are given a fair and even start. However, the decision for the crew to “in and away” is ultimately the responsibility of the sweep. Crews may not protest the start.

If the Starter or Check Starter is not satisfied that the start has been fair for all crews, the race shall be recalled by way of a second shot from the gun, whistle blast or siren horn blast.

In a dry start, the crew member runs to the boat when the start signal is given. When the crew member visibly touches the hull or gunwale of the boat (not the oars), the crew may board the boat and commence rowing. Failure by the runner to visibly make contact with the boat before the crew boards may result in disqualification.

4.7.6 The Seaward Journey a) On the starting signal, the boats shall be rowed to sea. Crews should endeavour to steer

a straight course to their allocated turning buoy. Failure to steer a straight course to their allocated turning buoy may result in a penalty or disqualification if another crew is impeded or disadvantaged by such action.

b) During the seaward journey, if a boat is swamped and overturns, the crew may right and empty the boat and continue the race. To achieve this, it may be necessary for the crew to return the boat to shore. If a time limit has been advised and it is clearly evident that a restarting crew will not complete the course in the allowed time, the Chief Referee may withdraw the crew from the race to prevent delays to the programme.

c) During the seaward journey, lost or damaged boats and/or gear (e.g., oars, rowlocks, etc.) may be replaced by other club members. Club members may place replacement boats and gear for collection at the water’s edge by the crew and remove damaged or lost equipment to ensure that interference is not caused to other competing crews.

d) Any member of any club or Technical Official authorised to be in the competition area may assist in the removal of damaged or lost boats and/or gear from the competition area to assist in maintaining safe competition.

e) Non-crew members may not recover lost boats and/or gear and place same on the start line for re-use by a crew during a race.

f) Replacement gear may be brought into the competition arena and placed adjacent to the starting line as directed by the Chief Referee or relevant Technical Official.


g) If a crew runs aground while steering a straight line to their allotted turning buoy, the Chief Referee may halt the race and re-run that particular heat or place the crew in a subsequent heat or round of the race.

4.7.7 The Turn Turns are usually made from left to right (i.e., clockwise or right hand in). However, this may change at the discretion of the Chief Referee after giving due consideration to the sea and weather conditions applicable at the time of that round. All crews must be informed of a decision to change from “left to right” to “right to left”. Failure to make the turn in the correct direction shall result in disqualification.

a) The turn shall be effected giving due consideration to other competing crews. The turn should be kept as tight as is required to avoid impeding other crews. This applies when approaching and departing the turning buoys (see diagram). Impeding another crew may result in penalty or disqualification.

b) If a crew overturns its boat after completing the turn and before crossing the finishing line (or in the case of a dry finish, the runner completing the course), the crew may continue the race after ensuring the safety of all crew members who rounded the buoys in the boat. This is to be demonstrated by all crew members who rounded the buoys regaining physical contact with their boat before the crew crosses the finish line (or in the case of a dry finish, the runner completing the course). Once this contact has been completed the crew may proceed to complete the race.

c) Only those crew members who rounded the buoy in the boat are eligible to assist their boat in finishing the race. Should a boat in a race cause another boat to overturn, the Chief Referee shall decide whether the affected crew may progress to the next round. However, there shall not normally be a re-run of the final in such circumstances.

SURF BOAT TURNS AT BUOYS

Some typical situations


4.7.8 The Return Journey a) After completing the turn, crews should make every effort to steer a straight course to

the finish line. Failure to do so may result in penalty or disqualification if another competing crew is impeded or disadvantaged by such action.

b) Boats taking a wave must keep clear of boats in front of them and may pass other boats on either side. Failure to comply may result in a penalty or disqualification if another crew is impeded by such action.

c) When gate buoys are in use, crews must pass through their allocated gate as decided by the Chief Referee. The Chief Referee shall advise crews of the boat buoy usage. Any changes made during competition shall also be advised to crews. Failure to negotiate the correct gate may result in disqualification. If another crew cannot pass through their gate buoy as a result of failure by another crew to correctly negotiate their correct gate, the matter shall be adjudicated upon by the Chief Referee whose decision shall be final and not subject to protest.

d) Should a boat on the return journey, when close to the finish line, be stopped by grounding, this boat shall be deemed to have finished the race. This boat may be allocated a placing as decided by the finish judges provided that the boat is not full of water and is heading towards the finish line under control of the crew.

4.7.9 The Finish A wet finish placing shall be determined when any part of the hull of the boat crosses the finish line under the control of the crew and properly equipped from the seaward side between the finishing flags or when a boat runs aground. The crew may recover a boat that has crossed the finish line not under control and/or properly equipped and then again cross the finish line correctly to record a finish placing result. “Under control” is defined as a boat being in an upright position with a crew of at least three members in contact with the boat and the boat moving in a direction towards the finish line. “Properly equipped” is defined as a boat equipped with a rescue tube, a minimum of three rowing oars or two rowing oars and a sweep oar which shall be in the boat or in the rowlocks. A dry finish is determined when a crew member leaves the boat and runs to his or her allocated position marker and crosses the line adjacent to same. The crew member may leave the boat at any time after the turn has been completed and must cross the line while remaining in an upright position on his feet. An alternate to crossing the line to finish may be prescribed by the Chief Referee. In such circumstances, the crew member leaves the boat as described and then is required to touch the crew’s finish marker while remaining on his feet. Any boat that dislodges a judging stand so as to impede judging may be disqualified. If one boat causes another boat to dislodge a judging stand, the matter shall be adjudicated by the Chief Referee whose decision shall be final and not subject to protest.

SURF BOAT RACE OPTIONAL DRY START AND/OR FINISH


4.7.10 Racing Format a) LSA may conduct surf boat events in either “Elimination”, “Round Robin”, “Other”, or a

combination of racing formats. b) In consultation with the Surf Boat Panel, the Chief Referee shall decide the racing

format and advise competitors accordingly prior to the commencement of the competition, or prior to the first round of each boat race.

c) If conditions dictate, and in consultation with the Surf Boat Panel, the Chief Referee may vary the racing format during the competition.

The standard format for the conduct of round robin racing is described below.

7.7.11 Round Robin Racing Surf, beach, weather and time constraint issues conditions permitting, “round robin” racing may be conducted over three rounds to determine qualifiers to further rounds of competition in surf boat events or the winner of the South African Surf Boat Champions. This is subject to the approval of the LSA Director of Sport and the Chief Referee of the Championships. If the “round robin” is used to determine qualifiers, progression into further rounds and finals shall then be by elimination. The conditions detailed are not subject to protest.

Qualifiers to further rounds of the competition or determining the South African Surf Boat Champions will be determined based on total points gained in the round robin round (unless otherwise disqualified). Points available in each of the rounds of the round robin will be based on the number of surf boats racing. If for example there are 4 boats the scoring will be:

Placing Points allocated

3 surf boats participating

1st Place 3

2nd Place 2

3rd Place 1


1st Place 4

2nd Place 3

3rd Place 2

4th Place 1


1st Place 5

2nd Place 4

3rd Place 3

4th Place 2

5th Place 1

….. and so on

Example:

4 Surf Boats participating

Placing/ Score per Round Total Rounds Score

Final point score to InterClub Grand Aggregate

after a 3 Rounds Event Round

1 Round 2

Round 3

Boat 1 1st /4 3rd /2 4th /1 7 6

Boat 2 2nd /3 4th /1 1st/4 Tie 8 7

Boat 3 4th /1 1st /4 1st 4 Tie 9 8

Boat 4 3rd /2 2nd /3 3rd /2 7 6

In the event of a dead heat (tie) in an individual round of the round robin, equal points shall be allocated for the placing achieved. For example, two crews tying for first place in a race shall be


awarded 4 points each (if there are 4 surf boats in the race) with the crew finishing third awarded 2 points, etc.

If a count back is required to determine the crews to progress to the elimination rounds of the competition, then all the results from the round robin will be compared between the crews involved in the count back. The highest placing points achieved in any of the individual round robin races shall be, in the first instance, the determining factor. The second highest placing points achieved by the crews shall then be compared. If crews cannot be separated after comparing all placing points in all three rounds, then all the crews achieving the dead heat will be allowed to progress in the competition. Prior to the first round of an event commencing the Chief Referee shall advise the number of qualifiers the elimination rounds of competition or finals (as appropriate).

If a crew is disqualified from an event, they may not compete in further rounds of that category of boat competition from which they are disqualified and lose all standing in that event. If a penalty is applied, a crew may continue in an event or be allocated placings or points (in the round robin) or be eliminated from a round or event as determined. (Note as before)

A “penalty" is defined as a punishment or consequence as a result of an infringement or breach of the competition rules which may not require disqualification. Penalties may include but are not limited to:

1. Allocation or reallocation of placing(s) (and therefore points in the round robin). In such circumstances, the aggrieved crew may be allocated or reallocated placings and therefore points.

2. Elimination from a round in round robin racing (but allowed to continue) in the event. In such circumstances, zero points will be allocated to the crew in that particular round of the round robin.

3. Crew being permitted to continue through to the following round.

By using the round-robin to determine the South African Surf Boat Champions, the winning boat, based on most points scored in the three rounds will be the South African Surf Boat Champions and their club will score 8 points, the runners up, 7 points and so on (refer Section 10: National Championships Interclub Grand Aggregate Championships (par. 10.8).

4.7.12 Penalties and Disqualification In addition to the Section 2: General Competitive Conditions Rules and in this section 4.2, the following behaviour shall result in disqualification: Failure to complete the course as defined and described.

a) In the event of a rule infringement, the Chief Referee or Sectional Referee may either penalise or disqualify a crew.

b) If a penalty is applied in an elimination round, a crew may be allocated a placing and could continue in the event or be eliminated, based on the placing allocated.

c) If a penalty is applied in a round robin, the crew may be allocated a placing (and/or placing points) and shall be permitted to continue in the round robin to determine progression to the next round of the event.

d) If a crew is disqualified in elimination round, they cannot compete in further rounds of that category of competition from which they are disqualified and they lose all standing in that event.

e) If a crew is disqualified in a round robin race for a matter other than “Abuse/Inappropriate Behaviour” or “Competing Unfairly” (Section 2: General Competitive Conditions and par. 4.2 of this section) they will lose all standing in that race (i.e., placing/points) but may continue in the “round robin”.


Disqualification Codes for Surf Boat Events

Code and Disqualification Events

1. Not competing in accordance with the general rules. All events

2. A team may be disqualified if a competitor, team or handler is deemed to have competed unfairly. Examples of “competing unfairly” include:

• committing a doping or doping-related infraction • impersonating another competitor • attempting to defeat the ballot or draw for events or positions • competing twice in the same individual event • competing twice in the same event in different teams • purposely interfering with a course to gain advantage • jostling or obstructing another competitor handler so as to impede his

or her progress • receiving physical or material outside assistance (other than verbal or

other direction)

All events

3. Teams may not be permitted to start in an event if they are late reporting to the marshalling area.

All events

4. Team or team absent from the start of an event shall be disqualified. All events

5. Activities that result in willful damage to the venue sites, accommodation sites or the property of others will result in disqualification of the individuals/teams involved from competition.

All events

6. Abuse of officials may result in disqualification from the competition. All events

7. All competitors and teams who start (i.e., commence a starting motion) before the starting signal has been given shall be disqualified.

All events

8. Failing to comply with the starter’s commands within a reasonable time. All events

9. A team who, after the starter’s first command, disturbing others in the race through sound or otherwise may be disqualified.

All events

10. Starting from a position other than the allotted position or lane. All events

11. Failure to complete the event and/or course as defined and described. All events

Section 4 – Surf Competition

Section 5 – Pool Competition


SECTION 5: POOL COMPETITION - INDEX

5.1 EVENTS …………………………………………………………………………. 2

5.2 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF POOL COMPETITION …………………….. 2

5.3 STARTS …………………………………………………………………..……. 3

5.3.1 Dive start procedure ……………………………………………… 3

5.3.2 In-water start procedure ………………………………………….. 3

5.3.3 Disqualification ……………………………………………………. 4

5.4 MANIKINS ………………………………………………………………………. 4

5.4.1 Competitors surfacing the manikin …………………………….. 4

5.4.2 Carrying the manikin …………………………………………….. 5

5.4.3 Towing the manikin …………………………………………….. 5

5.4.4 Manikin handlers ………………………………………………….. 6

5.5 SEEDING ………………………………………………………………………. 6

5.5.1 Seeding in heats …………………………………………………. 6

5.5.2 Seeding in time-finals …………………………………………….. 6

5.5.3 Assignment of lanes …………………………………………….. 7

5.5.4 Seeding in finals ………………………………………………….. 7

5.6 TIMEKEEPING AND DETERMINATION OF PLACING …………………… 7

5.6.1 Automatic officiating equipment ……………………………….. 7

5.6.2 Manual time keeping and officiating ………………………….. 8

5.7 TECHNICAL OFFICIALS ……………………………………………………. 8

5.8 SOUTH AFRICAN RECORDS ……………………………………………….. 8

5.9 WORLD RECORDS ……………………………………………………………. 9

5.10 POOL EVENT RULES …………………………………………..…………….. 10

5.10.1 Obstacle Swim (200 m, 100 m and 50 m) ……………………… 10

5.10.2 Manikin Carry (50 m) ……………………………………………… 11

5.10.3 Rescue Medley (100 m) …………………………………………… 12

5.10.4 Manikin Carry With Fins (100 m) …………………………………. 13

5.10.5 Manikin Tow With Fins (100 m) ………………………………….. 14

5.10.6 Super Lifesaver (200 m) …………………………………………... 16

5.10.7 Line Throw (12.5 m) ……………………………………………….. 18

5.10.8 Manikin Relay (4 x 25 m) ……………………………………….. 20

5.10.9 Obstacle Relay (4 x 50 m) ……………………………………… 21

5.10.10 Medley Relay (4 x 50 m) ………………………………………… 22

5.10.11 Pool Lifesaver Relay (4 x 50 m) ………………………………… 24

5.10.2 2 x 2 Rescue Ball Rescue Relay ………………………………. 26

5.10.13 Rescue Torpedo Buoy Medley Relay (4x50 m) ……………….. 28

5.10.14 Super Nipper (200 m) ………………………………………….….. 32

DISQUALIFICATION CODES FOR POOL EVENTS ………………………………... 32



SECTION 5 – POOL COMPETITION 5.1 EVENTS The following events are described in this section: Junior/Seniors/Masters: Manikin Carry (50 m) Obstacle Swim (100 m & 200 m) Super Lifesaver (200 m) Manikin Carry with Fins (100 m) Manikin Tow with Fins (100 m) Rescue Medley (100 m) Pool Lifesaver Relay (4 x 50 m) Medley Relay (4 x 50 m) Manikin Relay (4 x 25 m) Obstacle Relay (4 x 50 m) Line Throw (12.5 m)

Nippers: Manikin Carry (50 m) Obstacle Swim (50 m) Obstacle Swim (100 m) Manikin Carry with Fins (100 m) Rescue Medley (100 m) Super Nipper (100 m) Pool Lifesaver Relay (4 x 50 m) Manikin Relay (4 x 25 m) Obstacle Relay (4 x 50 m) Rescue Torpedo Buoy Medley Relay 2 x 2 Rescue Ball Rescue Relay

5.2 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR POOL COMPETITION Team management and competitors are responsible for being familiar with the competition schedule, and with the rules and procedures governing events.

a) Competitors will not be permitted to start in an event if they are late reporting to the marshalling area (DQ3).

b) A competitor or team absent from the start of an event shall be disqualified (DQ4). c) Only competitors and officials shall be allowed on the pool deck in the designated

competition area. Competitors and officials must leave the designated competition area when not competing or officiating.

d) Unless specifically provided for in the rules, no artificial means of propulsion may be used in competition (e.g., hand webs, arm bands).

e) The use of sticky, tacky or adhesive substances (liquid, solid or aerosol) on competitors’ hands or feet, or applied to the surface of the manikin or rescue tube to improve grip, or to assist the competitor to push off the pool bottom, is not permitted in pool events (DQ7).

f) Body tape used for preventative, medical, therapeutic or kinesiology purposes is allowed at the discretion of the Chief Referee as long as it does not provide a competitive advantage to improve grip, grasping, or propulsion.

Note: The above means that, in general, tapes on the body (including limbs but not extremities) may be acceptable. Further, in general tape is not permitted: - on multiple fingers (two or more fingers taped together) as they may aid swimming and/or grip on a manikin: and - on a single finger, if it improves manikin/equipment grasping and manikin carry.

g) Competitors shall not take assistance from the pool bottom except where specifically allowed (e.g., Obstacle Swim, surfacing with a manikin, 4 x 25 m Manikin Relay) (DQ8).

h) Taking assistance from any pool fittings (e.g., lane ropes, steps, drains or underwater hockey fittings) is not permitted (DQ17, 24).

i) A competitor who interferes with another competitor during a race shall be disqualified (DQ2).

j) In all events, competitors and their equipment must remain in their designated lane for the entire race and, at the conclusion of the race; competitors shall remain in the water in their lane until instructed to leave the pool (DQ9). Competitors must exit by the sides of the pool, not by the pool end over timing pads.

k) Competitors shall wear their club or national team swim caps in all events. l) Order-of-finish decisions, whether by Judges or automated timing equipment, are not

subject to protest or appeal. m) Start decisions by the Event Director, Starter, or Chief Referee (or Chief Referee’s

designate) are not subject to protest or appeal.



n) The Chief Referee may permit re-run/re-throw of a race due to provided equipment failure or interference. The re-run/re-throw time shall be the official time. Only applicable if the equipment is provided by the event organisers.

o) Retrieving lost fins: Competitors may retrieve fins lost after the start and continue without disqualification as long as the rules are not violated. Competitors are not permitted to start again in another heat.

5.3 STARTS a) Prior to the start of each race, the Event Director or designated officials shall:

• Check that all technical officials are in position.

• Check that competitors, manikin handlers and victims are properly attired and in correct positions.

• Check that all equipment is in a safe and correct position.

• Notify competitors to remove all clothing except for swimwear and get ready to race.

b) When competitors and technical officials are ready for a legal start, a designated official shall:

• Signal the official start of each race with a long whistle indicating that the competitors should take their position on the starting platform or, for the Manikin Relay event, enter the water.

• Signal the Starter (that the competitors are under the Starter’s control) with an outstretched arm in the direction of the course.

Notes:

1. Notwithstanding that the above procedure is undertaken officials are not responsible if a competitor or team are not in attendance for the start of a race or are improperly attired i.e. no protest or appeal is permitted by a competitor/team/handler on the above points.

2. At the discretion of the Chief Referee, “over the top” starts may be used. 3. See event description for start procedure for Line Throw (5.13).

5.3.1 Dive start procedure At championships and competitions, the one-start rule shall be used.

a) On the long whistle, competitors step onto the starting platform and remain there. b) On the Starter’s “Take your Marks” command, competitors immediately assume a

starting position with at least one foot at the front of the starting platform. When competitors are stationary, the Starter gives the acoustic starting signal.

c) Competitors may start on the starting platform, or on the pool deck, or in the water with one hand in contact with the starting wall/edge or starting block.

5.3.2 In-water start procedure The Manikin Relay and Line Throw events begin with an in-water start as follows:

a) On the whistle, the first competitors in the Manikin Relay and Line Throw victims enter the water and prepare for the start.

b) At the second whistle, competitors take their positions for the start without undue delay.

c) In the Manikin Relay, the competitor starts in the water holding a manikin with the face above surface with one hand and the pool wall/edge or starting block with the other hand.

d) In Line Throw, the victim treads water on the near side of the rigid crossbar in the allocated lane. The victim holds both the throw line and anywhere on the cross bar with one or two hands.

e) When all competitors have assumed their starting positions, the Starter shall give the command “Take your Marks.”

f) When all competitors are stationary, the Starter gives the acoustic starting signal.



5.3.3 Disqualification

a) All competitors who start (i.e., commence a starting motion) before the starting signal has been given, shall be disqualified (DQ 10).

b) If the starting signal sounds before the disqualification is declared, the race shall continue and the competitor(s) shall be disqualified upon completion of the race (DQ 10).

c) If the disqualification is declared before the starting signal, the signal shall not be given; the remaining competitors shall be called back and start again (DQ 10).

d) The signal to call back the competitors shall be the same as the starting signal but repeated along with dropping of the false start rope. Alternatively, if the Chief Referee or Chief Referee's designate decides that the start is not fair, the Chief Referee or Chief Referee's designate shall blow a whistle, to be followed by the Starter’s signal (repeated).

e) For the 100 m Manikin Carry with Fins event, the call-back signal will be by an underwater acoustic signal whenever possible. Competitors will be advised if an alternate call-back signal is to be used.

f) If an error by an official follows a fault by a competitor, the fault of the competitor may be expunged.

Notes: 1. The duty of the Event Director, Chief Referee and Starter is to ensure a fair start. If

the Event Director, Starter, or Chief Referee decides that a start is not fair, for any reason, including technical or equipment fault, the competitors shall be called back and the race shall be started again.

2. Competitors shall be disqualified if they “commence a forward starting motion” prior to the starting signal. Movement by itself is not a disqualification. Anticipating the starting signal and commencing a starting motion is a disqualification (DQ10).

3. The Event Director, Starter, and Chief Referee use their discretion in determining whether a competitor – or more than one competitor – has commenced a starting motion. Commonly, the early starting motion of one competitor causes movement by other competitors. Such movements are not a DQ.

4. Start decisions by the Event Director, Starter, or Chief Referee (or Chief Referee’s designate) are not subject to protest or appeal.

5.4 MANIKINS 5.4.1 Competitors surfacing the manikin Competitors may push off the pool bottom when surfacing with the manikin.

Competitors must: a) Break the surface with the manikin b) Have the manikin in a correct carrying position when the top of the manikin’s head

passes the 5 m line (Manikin Carry, Rescue Medley, Super Lifesaver) or 10 m line (Manikin Carry with Fins)

c) Not re-submerge after surfacing Notes:

1. The competitor must break the surface of the water while holding the manikin with at least one hand before the designated 5/10 m line. The competitor cannot swim underwater beyond the designated 5/10 m lines and must remain at the surface with the manikin throughout the race beyond these lines.

Surfacing the manikin judging criteria applies only when the top of the manikin’s head passes the relevant 5/10 m line.

When judging the manikin carry, the competitor and manikin are treated as one unit/entity. The judging focus is on the competitors’ actions, their carrying technique,



and the position of the manikin. Water flowing over the manikin is not a judging criterion.

2. “Surface” means the horizontal plane of the surface of a still water pool.

5.4.2 Carrying the manikin a) In events where the manikin is carried, the manikin (as victim) is presumed to be non-

breathing. Water over the face is not a judged criterion. b) Competitors must carry the manikin with at least one hand always in contact with the

manikin. c) The manikin may not be “pushed” – a push is defined as the manikin’s head is forward

of the competitor’s head. d) The manikin may not be gripped or grasped by the throat, mouth, nose, or eyes.

“Gripping the manikin’s throat, mouth, nose, or eyes” also applies to covering the manikin’s mouth, nose, or eyes with the competitors’ hand, armpit, body and/or limb.

e) The manikin may not be carried below the surface. The competitor and manikin are

considered to be one unit and must remain at the surface. Note: “Surface” means the horizontal plane of the surface of a Stillwater pool.

f) The manikin may not be covered or carried under the competitor’s body. g) Carrying the manikin judging criteria applies only when the top of the manikin’s head

passes the 5 m or 10 m line. h) In the 5 m start zone or in the changeover zone zone and finish zone of the Manikin

Relay event, competitors are not judged on carrying the manikin criteria however competitors need to maintain contact with at least one hand with the manikin at all times including during the manikin exchanges.

Note: 1. The manikin carry rules have been amended to remove the disqualification for carrying

the manikin on an angle towards the pool bottom or face down. 2. U/10 Competitors carry the manikin with both hands. One hand may be released

after the final 5 m line in approach to the finish. No disqualification when a U/10 competitor moves his/her hand from the manikin provided that the competitor doesn’t use a swimming action as advantage.

5.4.3 Towing the manikin a) In events where the manikin is towed, the manikin (as victim) is presumed to be

breathing. Before the tow, competitors must secure the manikin correctly within the 10 m pick-up zone. “Correctly” means the rescue tube is secured around the body and under both arms of the manikin and clipped to an O-ring.

b) Competitors may return back into the 10 m change over zone to re-secure the manikin provided the manikin’s head has not passed the 10 m line.

c) Competitors may swim on their back, side or front and may use any kick or stroke while towing the manikin.

d) Beyond the 10 m pick-up zone, competitors must tow the manikin correctly secured with the manikin face above the surface of the water.

Note: The manikin towing rules have been amended. The previous requirement to secure the manikin under both arms at the 5 m mark has been modified to securing the manikin within 10 m mark.

e) The line of the rescue tube must become fully extended by the time the top of the manikin’s head passes the 10 m line.

f) Competitors shall be disqualified if the rescue tube and manikin become separated. Competitors shall not be disqualified if the rescue tube slips from under one arm of the Manikin during the tow, provided that the rescue tube was “secured correctly” at the 10 m line and the face of the manikin remains above the water surface.

g) Competitors shall be disqualified if the line of the rescue tube is or becomes wrapped around the Manikin as it is deemed to be shortening of the line.



h) Competitors shall not be disqualified if the manikin rotates in the rescue tube as long as the manikin’s face remains above the surface of the water. In addition, the manikin does not need to be carried head first provided it was secured correctly at the 10 m line and the manikin’s face remains above the surface of the water.

Note: The manikin towing rules have been amended from the previous rules to remove the disqualification for a manikin rotating within the rescue tube provided that the face remains above the surface of the water.

5.4.4 Manikin handlers

a) A member of the competitor’s team assists as manikin handler in the Manikin Tow with Fins and the Super Lifesaver events. With the Chief Referee’s approval, non-team members may act as handlers, provided they are registered in the competition in some capacity.

b) Before the start and during the race, the manikin handler positions the manikin – vertically and facing the wall at its natural buoyancy position anywhere within the allotted lane.

c) Manikin handlers must wear a competition cap. d) Manikin handlers may not intentionally enter the water during the event.

5.5 SEEDING a) Seeding shall be used. b) For pool events, competitors’ times are required to be submitted for both individual and

team events. Competitors and teams shall be ranked according to the entry times. c) Competitors for whom no times are submitted shall be considered to have the slowest

times. d) Placement of competitors with identical times and placement of those without times shall

be determined by draw.

5.5.1 Seeding in heats Where events are conducted as heats and finals (according to the entries received), competitors shall be seeded in heats according to the submitted times in the following manner:

a) If one heat: it shall be seeded as a final and swum during the final session. b) If two heats: the fastest competitor shall be seeded in the second heat, next fastest in

the first heat, next fastest in the second heat, next in the first heat, etc. c) If three heats: the fastest swimmer shall be placed in the third heat, next fastest in the

second, next fastest in the first. The fourth fastest shall be placed in the third heat, the fifth in the second heat, and the sixth fastest in the first heat, the seventh fastest in the third heat, etc.

d) If four or more heats: the last three heats of the event shall be seeded in accordance with (c) above. The heat preceding the last three heats shall consist of the next fastest competitors; the heat preceding the last four heats shall consist of the next fastest competitors, etc. Lanes shall be assigned in descending order of submitted times within each heat, in accordance with the pattern outlined in Assignment of lanes below.

e) Exception: When there are two or more heats in an event, there shall be a minimum of three competitors seeded into any one preliminary heat.

5.5.2 Seeding in time-finals Where events are conducted as time-finals, competitors shall be seeded into heats according to the submitted times in the following manner:

a) If one heat: it shall be seeded as a final.

b) If two or more heats: the fastest competitors shall be seeded in the last heat according to assignment of lanes detailed in the next section, the next fastest competitors into the second last heat, and so on until all competitors have been allocated a heat and lane according to submitted times.



5.5.3 Assignment of lanes Lanes shall be assigned by placing the fastest competitor or team in lane four of an eight-lane pool. (Lane one is on the right side of the pool viewed from the starting end.) The competitor having the next fastest time is placed on the left of the fastest, then alternating other competitors to right and left in accordance with the submitted times. Competitors with identical times shall be assigned lane positions by draw within the aforesaid pattern.

5.5.4 Seeding in finals

If A and B finals are going to be held, the starting positions for pool events shall be by seeding as follows:

a) Based on the times established in heats, competitors with the top eight times shall be assigned lanes in the A-final. Competitors with the ninth through sixteenth top times shall be assigned lanes in the B-final.

b) In the event that competitors from the same or different heats have equal times registered to 1/100 second for either the eighth place or sixteenth place, there shall be a swim-off to determine which swimmer shall advance to the appropriate finals. Such swim-off shall take place not less than one hour after all involved competitors have completed their heat (unless affected competitors agree to a shorter time interval). Another swim-off will take place if equal times are registered again.

c) Competitors or teams who withdraw or do not start (DNS) in an A or B final shall not earn any points to their team’s point score (i.e. zero points are scored for a “no show”).

d) Where one or more competitors or teams withdraw from an A-final, competitors shall be called forward from the B-final, alternate competitors up to a maximum of four competitors shall be called forward from the heats. The B final shall not be reseeded. Should insufficient reserves be on standby the B final shall progress with those who have marshalled. The final shall not be re-seeded.

Note: In pool events, reserves shall be determined based on heat times.

5.6 TIMEKEEPING AND DETERMINATION OF PLACING

Automatic officiating equipment should be used for all pool events to record the time of each competitor and to determine the place of each competitor.

5.6.1 Automatic officiating equipment

a) Any equipment installed must not interfere with competitors’ start and turns. The automatic officiating equipment must be activated by the Starter and must provide easy digital readings of competitors’ times.

b) Times recorded by automatic officiating equipment shall be used to determine the winner and all placings, and the time applicable to each lane. Results shall be recorded to 1/100 of a second.

c) The placing and times determined by automatic officiating equipment shall have precedence over the decision of Judges and timekeepers. If the electronic equipment breaks down or fails, or if a competitor has failed to activate it, the decisions of the human timekeepers shall be official.

d) In addition to the electronic timekeeping, a minimum of two timekeepers per lane are required.

5.6.2 Manual time keeping and officiating

a) In LSA-sanctioned lifesaving competitions where automatic officiating equipment is unavailable, the time of each competitor must be recorded by three timekeepers. There shall be two additional timekeepers designated, either of whom shall be directed to replace a timekeeper whose watch did not start or stopped during an event, or who for any other reason is not able to record the time.



b) Watches are started when the starting signal is given and stopped when the competitor touches (clearly visible to the timekeeper) the finish wall/edge with any part of the competitor's body.

c) With three timekeepers, where two of them have the same time, this time shall be considered official. If the three timekeepers differ, the middle time shall be official. If one watch fails, the average of the other two times shall constitute the competitor’s official time.

d) If the order of finish indicated by the times recorded by manual timekeepers does not coincide with the order of finish determined by the Finish Judges, the Finish Judges’ placings prevail. The times assigned to the competitors involved shall be identical. For example, if two competitors are involved, the times assigned shall be the sum of their individual times divided by two.

5.7 TECHNICAL OFFICIALS

Technical Officials ensure that events operate fairly and within LSA rules and procedures. They also assess whether competitors’ technique complies with specific event rules and must be positioned to ensure they have a clear view of the lane they are judging.

2.23 RECORDS

5.8 SOUTH AFRICAN RECORDS LSA maintains a register of all South African records. These are available on request.

LSA shall recognize records for individual male and female, and team events in all long course pool events and conducted using equipment which conforms to LSA standards. No S.A. Records shall be recognized without a negative doping test certificate. Any competitor establishing or equalling an S.A. Record shall submit to “doping control” following the race. When a relay team breaks or equals a world record all competitors swimming the relay shall be tested. If no “doping control” is conducted at the competition the competitor(s) shall submit to doping control no later than 24 hours after the race. Records shall be approved subject to the following conditions: a) All records must be made in competitions held in public and announced publicly by

advertisement at least 3 days before competition. In the case of an individual race against time being sanctioned by LSA, as a time trial during a competition, an advertisement at least 3 days prior shall not be necessary.

b) The facility and equipment requirements must be certified by a registered surveyor or other qualified Technical Official appointed or approved by the Sport Advisory Board.

c) LSA will accept records only when times are reported by automatic timing equipment. d) Times which are equal to 1/100 of a second will be recognized as equal records, and

competitors achieving these equal times will be called “Joint Holders.” Only the time of the winner of a race may be submitted for a record. In the event of a tie in a record-setting race, each competitor who tied shall be considered a winner.

e) The first competitor in a relay may apply for a record. The competitor’s performance shall not be nullified by any subsequent disqualification of the relay team for a violation occurring after the first competitor’s distance has been completed.

f) Applications for records must be made by the responsible authority of the Organising Committee of the competition and the application form (Appendix 3) and signed certifying that all regulations have been observed including a negative doping test certification. The application shall be forwarded to LSA within 30 days of the conclusion of the competition.

g) Upon receipt of the application for record, and upon satisfaction that the information contained in the application is accurate, the Director: Sport shall declare and publish the record, and provide a record certificate to the competitor.



If no electronic timing equipment is available, at least three (3) Timekeepers must time the competitor. 5.9 WORLD RECORDS

a) ILS shall recognise Youth, Open and Masters men’s and women’s world records in all pool events identified in the ILS Competition Rule Book and conducted at ILS Lifesaving World Championships. Such events must be conducted in a 50 m swimming pool and using equipment which comply with ILS standards detailed in Section 8 of the ILS Competition Rule Book.

b) Individual and Team Events including; Line Throw, Manikin Relay, Obstacle Relay, Medley Relay and Lifesaver Relay events, world records shall be recognised for Open and Youth age categories (national teams and club teams are not separated) and Masters club teams and must meet the team eligibility requirements as defined in the ILS Lifesaving World Championship Handbook.

c) Record holders must be members of an ILS Full, Associate or Corresponding Member organisation and eligible to compete at the sanctioned or ILS competition.

d) Open and Youth National team relay record holders must meet national team eligibility requirements as defined in the ILS Lifesaving World Championships Handbook.

Note: There are no Masters national team relay records. e) Club team relay record holders must meet the relevant Open and Youth interclub or

Masters team eligibility requirements as defined in the championships handbook. f) World records may be established at Lifesaving World Championships, multi-sport

games (e.g., World Games), ILS regional championships, national championships, or pan-national championships (e.g., Commonwealth or European) and at any other championship or competition conducted according to the ILS Lifesaving Competition Rule Book and sanctioned by ILS.

g) Youth competitors may establish youth or open world records regardless of the category in which they are competing at the time (i.e., youth or open competition). Similarly, Masters may establish Masters or open world records regardless of the category in which they are competing at the time (i.e., Masters or open competition).

h) Doping Control and World Records

• World records shall only be recognised with a negative doping test certificate. If the record was achieved at Interclub or National Teams Lifesaving World Championships, World Games, or ILS regional championships where there is in place a system of targeted and random tests in accordance with the ILS anti-doping rules, a negative doping test certificate is not required

• A competitor establishing or equalling a world record shall submit to “doping control” following the race. When a relay team breaks or equals a world record, all competitors swimming the relay shall be tested.

• If no doping control is conducted at the competition, the competitor(s) shall submit to doping control no later than 24 hours after the race.

• Masters world records shall be recognised without a negative doping test certificate.

i) All records achieved during Masters, Interclub or National Teams Lifesaving World Championships, World Games or ILS regional championships shall be automatically approved.

Note: It is recommended that a World Record application form is completed to ensure that all records created at a LWC are recorded. The Chief Steward/Head Scorer should assist with this process.

j) Records at the other competitions shall be approved subject to the following conditions:

• The competition must be sanctioned by ILS.



• All records must be achieved in competitions held in public and announced to the public (and to ILS headquarters) by advertisement at least three days before competition.

• The facility (including event-specific) standards and equipment specifications must be certified by a surveyor or other qualified official appointed or approved by the ILS

• Management Committee (for world championships) or the ILS member organisation for ILS-sanctioned competitions in their jurisdiction.

• ILS will accept world records only when times are recorded by automatic officiating equipment.

k) Times which are equal to 1/100 of a second will be recognised as equal records, and competitors achieving these equal times will be called “Joint Holders.” Only the time of the winner of a race may be submitted for a world record. In the event of a tie in a record-setting race, each competitor who tied shall be considered a winner.

l) Applications for world records must be made by the responsible authority of the organising committee of the competition using the official ILS Record Application Form (see end of this section and also available online at www.ilsf.org) and signed by the ILS-recognised Chief Referee certifying that all regulations have been observed including a negative doping test certification. The application shall be forwarded to the ILS Custodian of Records within 30 days of the conclusion of the competition.

m) Upon receipt of the ILS Record Application, and upon satisfaction that the information contained in the application is accurate, the ILS Custodian of Records will recommend that the ILS Secretary General declare and publish the world record and provide a world record certificate to the competitor signed by the ILS President and ILS Secretary General.

n) If the world record application is not accepted, it shall be referred to the ILS Sport Commission.

5.10 POOL EVENT RULES

5.10.1 Obstacle Swim (200 m, 100 m and 50m)

1. Event description – 200 m With a dive start on an acoustic signal, the competitor swims the 200 m course passing eight times under the immersed obstacles to touch the finish wall/edge of the pool.

a) Competitors must surface after the dive entry before the first obstacle; after passing under each obstacle; and after a turn prior to passing under an obstacle.

b) Competitors may push off the pool bottom when surfacing from under each of the obstacles. “Surfacing” means the competitor’s head breaks the plane of the surface of the water.

c) Swimming into or otherwise bumping an obstacle is not a behaviour that results in disqualification.

2. Event description – 100 m With a dive start on an acoustic signal, the competitor swims the 100 m course passing four times under the immersed obstacles to touch the finish wall/edge of the pool.

a) Competitors must surface after the dive entry before the first obstacle; after passing under each obstacle; and after a turn prior to passing under an obstacle.

Start/Finish

TurnWall

OBSTACLE SWIM AND RELAY (4 x 50m)OBSTACLE

Obstacles

50m12.5m

http://www.ilsf.org/



b) Competitors may push off the pool bottom when surfacing from under each of the obstacles. “Surfacing” means the competitor’s head breaks the plane of the surface of the water.


3. Event description – 50 m

With a dive start on an acoustic signal, the competitor swims the 50 m course passing twice under the immersed obstacles to touch the finish wall/edge of the pool.

Competitors must surface after the dive entry before and after the first obstacle and after passing the second obstacle. 4. Equipment

Obstacles: See Section 9: Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures. Obstacles are fixed at right angles onto lane ropes in a straight line across all lanes. The first obstacle is located 12.5 m from the start wall, with the second obstacle located 12.5 m from the opposite end. The distance between the two obstacles is 25 m.

5. Disqualification In addition to the General Rules in Section 2 and those outlined in 5.2 through 5.4, the following behaviour shall result in disqualification:

a) Passing over an obstacle without immediately returning over or under that obstacle and then passing under it (DQ11).

b) Failure to surface after the dive entry or after a turn before passing under an obstacle (DQ12).

c) Failure to surface after each obstacle (DQ13). d) Taking assistance from any pool fitting (e.g., lane rope, steps, drains or underwater

hockey fittings) when surfacing – not including the bottom of the pool (DQ17) e) Failure to touch the wall/edge during the turn (DQ14). f) Failure to touch the finish wall/edge (DQ15).

5.10.2 Manikin Carry (50 m)

1. Event description With a dive start on an acoustic signal, the competitor swims 25 m freestyle and then dives to recover a submerged manikin and bring the manikin to the surface to the surface within 5 m of the pick-up line. The competitor then carries the manikin to touch the finish wall/edge of the pool. Competitors may push off the pool bottom when surfacing with the manikin. 2. Equipment

a) Manikin: See Section 9: Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures. The manikin is completely filled with water and sealed for the event. Competitors must use the manikins supplied by organisers.

MANIKIN CARRY (50m)



b) Positioning the manikin: The manikin is located at a depth between 1.8 m and 3 m. In water deeper than 3 m, the manikin shall be placed on a platform (or other support) to position it at the required depth. The manikin is positioned on its back, the head in the direction of the finish, with the top of the transverse line on the 25 m line.

c) Surfacing the manikin: Competitors must have the manikin in the correct carrying position before the top of the manikin’s head passes the 5 m line.

3. Disqualification

In addition to the General Rules in Section 2 and those outlined in 5.2 through 5.4, the following behaviour shall result in disqualification:

a) Not surfacing before diving to the manikin (DQ16). b) Taking assistance from any pool fitting (e.g., lane rope, steps, drains or underwater

hockey fittings) when surfacing with the manikin – not including the bottom of the pool (DQ17).

c) Not having the manikin in the correct carrying position before the top of the manikin’s head passes the 5 m line (DQ18).

d) Using an incorrect carrying technique as described in 3.3 Manikins (DQ19). e) Releasing the manikin before touching the finish wall/edge (DQ21). f) Failure to touch the finish wall/edge (DQ15).

5.10.3 Rescue Medley (100 m)

1. Event description With a dive start on an acoustic signal, the competitor swims 50 m freestyle to turn, dive, and swim underwater to a submerged manikin located at 17.5 m from the turn wall. For the U/13 and U/14 Nippers the manikins are located 10 m from the wall. No U/9, U/10. U/11 and U/12 participate in this event. The competitor surfaces the manikin within the 5 m pick-up line, and then carries it the remaining distance to touch the finish wall/edge. Competitors may breathe during the turn, but not after their feet leave the turn wall/edge until they surface with the manikin. Competitors may push off the bottom when surfacing with the manikin. 2. Equipment Manikin: See Section 9– Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures.

a) The manikin is completely filled with water and sealed for the event. Competitors must use the manikins supplied by organisers.

b) Positioning the manikin: The manikin is located at a depth between 1.8 m and 3 m. In water deeper than 3 m, the manikin shall be placed on a platform (or other suitable support) to position it at the required depth.The manikin is positioned on its back, head

RESCUE MEDLEY (100m)

TurnWall

Start/Finish

50m17.5m5m



in the direction of the finish, with the top of the transverse line on the 17.5 m line for Junior and Senior competition and 10 m for U/13 and U/14 nipper competitons.

c) Surfacing the manikin: Competitors must have the manikin in the correct carrying position before the manikin’s head passes the 5 m line.


a) Surfacing after turning and before lifting the manikin (DQ22). b) Taking assistance from any pool fitting (e.g., lane rope, steps, drains or underwater

hockey fittings) when surfacing with the manikin – not including the bottom of the pool (DQ17).

c) Not having the manikin in the correct carrying position before the top of the manikin’s head passes the 5 m line (DQ18).

d) Using an incorrect carrying technique as described in 3.3 Manikins (DQ19). e) Releasing the manikin before touching the finish wall/edge (DQ21). f) Failure to touch the finish wall/edge (DQ15).

5.10.4 Manikin Carry With Fins (100 m)

1. Event description With a dive start on an acoustic signal, the competitor swims 50 m freestyle wearing fins and then recovers a submerged manikin to the surface within 10 m of the turn wall. The competitor carries the manikin to touch the finish wall/edge of the pool. Competitors need not touch the turn wall/edge of the pool. Competitors may push off the bottom when surfacing with the manikin. 2. Equipment

a) Manikins, fins: See Section 9: Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures. The manikin is completely filled with water and sealed for the event. Competitors must use the manikins supplied by organisers.

b) Positioning the manikin: The manikin is located at a depth between 1.8 m and 3 m. In water deeper than 3 m, the manikin shall be placed on a platform (or other support) to position it at the required depth. The manikin is positioned on its back in contact with the pool bottom and its base touching the pool wall, with its head in the direction of the finish. Where the facility design does not provide a vertical wall that joins the bottom at 90 degrees, the manikin must be positioned as close as possible to the wall, but no further than 300 mm from the wall as measured at the water surface.

c) Surfacing the manikin: Competitors must have the manikin in the correct carrying position before the top of the manikin’s head passes the 10 m line.

d) Retrieving lost fins: Competitors may retrieve fins lost after the start and continue without disqualification as long as the rules governing manikins are not violated (see 5.4 Manikins). Competitors are not permitted to start again in another heat.




a) Taking assistance from any pool fitting (e.g., lane rope, steps, drains or underwater hockey fittings) when surfacing with the manikin – not including the bottom of the pool (DQ17).

b) Not having the manikin in the correct carrying position before the top of the manikin’s head passes the 10 m line (DQ23).

c) Using an incorrect carrying technique as described in 5.4 Manikins (DQ19). d) Releasing the manikin before touching the finish wall/edge (DQ21). e) Failure to touch the finish wall/edge (DQ15).

5.10.5 Manikin Tow With Fins (100 m)


With a dive start on an acoustic signal, the competitor swims 50 m freestyle with fins and rescue tube. After touching the turn wall/edge, and within the 10 m pick-up zone, the competitor fixes the rescue tube correctly around a manikin and tows it to the finish. The event is complete when the competitor touches the finish wall/edge of the pool.

2. Equipment a) Manikin, fins, rescue tube: See Section 9: Facilities, Equipment Standards and

Scrutineering Procedures. The manikin is filled with water so that it floats with the top of its transverse line at the surface, the manikin needs to be able to float at the transition line (Height transition line – 550 mm (540-550 mm, 1.9% variance). Competitors must use the manikins and rescue tubes supplied by organisers.

b) Positioning the manikin: A member of the competitor’s team assists as manikin handler. With the Chief Referee’s approval, non-team members may act as handlers, provided they are registered in the competition in some capacity. Manikin handlers must wear their competitor’s team cap. Before the start and during the race, the manikin handler positions the manikin – vertically and facing the turn wall at its natural buoyancy position– anywhere within the allotted lane. The handler releases the manikin immediately after the competitor touches the turn wall/edge. The handler may not push the manikin toward the competitor or the finish wall. Manikin handlers may not intentionally enter the water during the event.

c) Starts with rescue tubes: At the start, the rescue tube and rescue tube line may be positioned at the competitor’s discretion, but within the competitor’s allotted lane. Competitors should ensure a safe and correct position of rescue tube and line. The rescue tube remains unclipped until secured around the manikin.

d) Wearing rescue tubes: Rescue tubes must be donned correctly, either with the loop over one or two shoulders, or over the shoulder and across the chest – at the



competitor’s discretion. Assuming the rescue tube was donned correctly, there is no cause for disqualification if the loop falls down on the competitor’s arm or elbow during the competitor’s approach to the manikin or during the manikin tow.

e) Securing the manikin: After first touching the turn wall/edge, the competitor then secures the manikin correctly with the rescue tube around the body and under both arms of the manikin, and clipped to an O-ring, within the 10 m pick-up zone. Competitors may go back into the 10 m change over zone to re-secure the manikin provided the manikin’s head has not passed the 10 m line.

f) Towing the manikin: Competitors must tow the manikin as detailed in the general conditions for pool competition. The rescue tube must be attached to the manikin and the line of the rescue tube must be fully extended by the time the top of the manikin’s head passes the 10 m line.

g) Competitors shall be disqualified if the rescue tube and manikin become separated. Competitors shall not be disqualified if the rescue tube slips from under one arm of the Manikin during the tow, provided that the rescue tube was “secured correctly” at the 10 m line and the face of the manikin remains above the water surface.

h) Competitors shall be disqualified if the line of the rescue tube is or becomes wrapped around the Manikin as it is deemed to be shortening of the line.

i) Competitors shall not be disqualified if the manikin rotates in the rescue tube as long as the manikin’s face remains above the surface of the water. The manikin does not need to be carried headfirst provided it was secured correctly at the 10 m line and the manikin’s face remains above the surface of the water.

j) Retrieving lost fins: Competitors may retrieve fins lost after the start and continue without disqualification as long as the rules governing manikins are not violated (see 5.4 Manikins). Competitors are not permitted to start again in another heat.

k) Rescue Tube Defect: If in the opinion of the Chief Referee the rescue tube, line and/or harness (belt) presents a technical defect during the race, the Chief Referee may allow the competitor to start again in another heat but only if the rescue tubes for the event were supplied by the organising body and the rules required that the provided tubes must be used by all competitors.


a) Taking assistance from any pool fitting (e.g., lane rope, steps, underwater hockey fittings) when fixing the rescue tube around the manikin (DQ24).

b) Competitor clipping the rescue tube into the ring before touching the turn wall/edge. (DQ30)

c) Manikin handler not releasing the manikin immediately after the competitor has touched the turn wall/edge (DQ27).

d) Manikin handler pushing the manikin towards the competitor or the finish wall (DQ28). e) Manikin handler positioning the manikin incorrectly or making contact with the manikin

after the competitor has touched the turn wall/edge (DQ25). f) Manikin handler intentionally entering the water during the event or entering the water

and interfering with the performance of another competitor or interfering with the judging of the event (DQ29).

g) At 50 m, not touching the pool wall/edge before touching the manikin (DQ26). h) Incorrectly securing the rescue tube around the manikin (i.e., not around body and

under both arms and not clipped to an O-ring) (DQ31). i) Not securing the rescue tube around the manikin within the 10 m pick-up zone, judged

at the top of the manikin’s head (DQ32). j) The line of the rescue tube not becoming fully extended before the top of the manikin’s

head passes the 10 m line (DQ34).



k) Not towing the manikin with the line of the rescue tube fully extended beyond the 10 m (DQ35).

l) Towing the manikin with the face below the surface (DQ20). m) Pushing or carrying, instead of towing, the manikin (DQ33). n) The rescue tube and manikin become separated after the rescue tube has been

secured correctly around the manikin (DQ36). o) Touching the finish wall/edge without the rescue tube and manikin in place (DQ37). p) Failure to touch the finish wall/edge (DQ15).

5.10.6 Super Lifesaver (200 m)

1. Event description With a dive start on an acoustic signal, the competitor swims 75 m freestyle and then dives to recover a submerged manikin. The competitor surfaces the manikin within the 5 m pick-up zone and carries it to the start and finish. After touching the wall/edge, the competitor releases the manikin. In the water, the competitor puts on fins and rescue tube and swims 50 m freestyle. After touching the turn wall/edge, and within the 10 m pick-up zone, the competitor fixes the rescue tube correctly around a manikin and tows it 50 m to the finish. The event is complete when the competitor touches the finish wall/edge of the pool. Note: Touching fins does not constitute touching the wall. 2. Equipment

a) Manikins, fins, rescue tubes: See Section 9: Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures. Competitors must use the manikins and rescue tubes supplied by organisers.

b) Placement of fins and rescue tubes: Prior to the start, competitors must place the fins and rescue tube on the pool deck – not the starting block/podium – within the confines of their allotted lane.

c) Positioning the manikin for the carry: The manikin is completely filled with water and sealed for the event. The manikin is located at a depth between 1.8 m and 3 m. In water deeper than 3 m, the manikin shall be placed on a platform (or other support) to position it at the required depth.

The manikin is positioned on its back, head in the direction of the finish with the top of the transverse line on the 25 m line.

d) Positioning the manikin for the tow: The manikin is filled with water so that it floats with the top of its transverse line at the surface. The manikin needs to be able to float at the transition line (Height transition line – 550 mm (540-550 mm, 1.9% variance). A member of the competitor’s team assists as manikin handler. With the Chief Referee’s approval, non-team members may act as handlers, provided they are registered in the competition in some capacity. Manikin handlers must wear the identical team cap.

Before the start, the manikin handler positions the manikin – vertically and facing the wall at its natural buoyancy position anywhere within the allotted lane.



The manikin handler must let go of the manikin immediately after the competitor touches the turn wall/edge. The handler may not push the manikin towards the competitor or the finish wall. Manikin handlers may not intentionally enter the water during the event.

e) Surfacing the first manikin: Competitors may push off the bottom of the pool when surfacing with the manikin.

Competitors must have the manikin in the correct carrying position before the top of the manikin’s head passes the 5 m line.

f) Donning tube and fins: After first touching the turn wall/edge, the competitor discards the first manikin. In the water, the competitor dons fins and rescue tube and swims 50 m freestyle.

g) Wearing rescue tubes: Rescue tubes must be donned correctly, either with the loop over one or two shoulders, or over the shoulder and across the chest – at the competitor’s discretion. Assuming the rescue tube was donned correctly, there is no cause for disqualification if the loop falls down on the competitor’s arm or elbow during the competitor’s approach to the manikin or during the manikin tow.

The rescue tube remains unclipped until secured around the manikin. h) Securing the manikin: After first touching the turn wall/edge, the competitor then

secures the manikin correctly with the rescue tube around the body and under both arms of the manikin, and clipped to an O-ring, within the 10 m pick-up zone. Competitors may go back into the 10 m change over zone to re-secure the manikin provided the manikin’s head has not passed the 10 m line.

i) Competitors must tow the manikin as detailed in the general conditions for pool competition. The line of the rescue tube must be attached to the manikin and the line of the rescue tube must be fully extended by the time the top of the manikin’s head passes the 10 m line.

j) Competitors shall be disqualified if the rescue tube and manikin become separated. Competitors shall not be disqualified if the rescue tube slips during the tow, provided that the rescue tube was “secured correctly” at the 10 m line and that the face of the manikin remains above the water surface.

k) Competitors shall be disqualified if the line of the rescue tube is or becomes wrapped around the Manikin as it is deemed to be shortening of the line

l) Competitors shall not be disqualified if the manikin rotates in the rescue tube as long as the manikin’s face remains above the surface of the water. The manikin does not need to be carried headfirst provided it was secured correctly at the 10 m line and the manikin’s face remains above the surface of the water.

m) Retrieving lost fins: Competitors may retrieve fins lost after the start and continue without disqualification as long as the rules governing manikins are not violated (see 5.4 Manikins). Competitors are not permitted to start again in another heat.

n) Rescue Tube Defect: If in the opinion of the Chief Referee the rescue tube, line and/or harness (belt) presents a technical defect during the race, the Chief Referee may allow the competitor to start again in another heat but only if the rescue tubes for the event were supplied by the organising body and the rules required that the provided tubes must be used by all competitors.


a) Taking assistance from any pool fitting (e.g., lane rope, steps, drains or underwater hockey fittings) – not including the bottom of the pool when surfacing the manikin (DQ17).

b) Not having the manikin in the correct carrying position before the top of the manikin’s head passes the 5 m pick-up zone (DQ18).

c) Using an incorrect carrying technique as described in 5.4 Manikins (DQ19).



d) Releasing the manikin before touching the turn start/finish wall. (DQ21). e) Competitor clipping the rescue tube into the ring before touching the turn wall/edge.

(DQ30). f) Manikin handler not releasing the manikin immediately after the competitor has

touched the turn wall/edge (DQ27). g) Manikin handler pushing the manikin towards the competitor or the finish wall (DQ28). h) Manikin handler positioning the manikin incorrectly or making contact with the manikin

after the competitor has touched the turn wall/edge (DQ25). i) Manikin handler intentionally entering the water during the event or entering the water

and interfering with the performance of another competitor or interfering with the judging of the event (DQ29).

j) At 150 m, not touching the turn wall/edge before touching the manikin (DQ26). k) Incorrect securing of the rescue tube around the manikin (i.e., not around body and

under both arms and not clipped to an O-ring) (DQ31). l) Not securing the rescue tube around the manikin within the 10 m pick-up zone judged

at the top of the manikin’s head (DQ32). m) The line of the rescue tube not becoming fully extended before the top of the manikin’s

head passes the 10 m line (DQ34). n) Not towing the manikin with the line of the rescue tube fully extended beyond the 10 m

line (DQ35). o) Towing the manikin with the face below the surface (DQ20). p) Pushing or carrying, instead of towing, the manikin (DQ33). q) The rescue tube and manikin become separated after the rescue tube has been

secured correctly around the manikin (DQ36). r) Touching the finish wall/edge without the rescue tube and manikin in place (DQ37). s) Failure to touch the finish wall/edge (DQ15).

5.10.7 Line Throw (12.5 m)

1. Event description In this 45-second event, the competitor throws an unweighted line to a fellow team member located in the water on the near side of a rigid crossbar located 12.5 m distant. The competitor pulls this “victim” back to the finish wall/edge of the pool.

a) The start: On the first whistle, competitors (i.e. thrower and victim) step into the throw zone. The “thrower” holds only one end of the throw line in one hand. The “victim” takes the line and enters the water. The line extends to the “victim” who holds both the line and cross bar with one or two hands at the start. No throws are permitted prior to the start. The surplus line can be on either side, over or under the bar. At the second whistle, throwers take their positions for the start without undue delay. When all competitors have assumed their starting positions, the Starter shall give the command “Take your marks”. When all throwers and victims are stationary, the Starter gives the acoustic starting signal.

b) Starting position: The thrower stands in the throw zone facing the victim, motionless with heels and/or knees together and arms straight down and beside the body. The end of the throw line is held in one hand.



The victim is located on the near side of the rigid cross bar in allotted lane. The victim has contact with the throw line and grasps the crossbar with one or two hands.

c) On an acoustic starting signal: The thrower shall retrieve the line, throw it back to the victim (who grasps it), and pull him or her through the water until the victim touches the finish wall/edge. Victims may only grasp the line in their designated lane in front or behind the cross bar.

Note: The victim can slide their hand anywhere along the cross bar but must be grasping the bar when touching the line with any part of their body and when grasping the line.

To avoid any possible interference with other lanes, the victim may not exit the water and remains in his or her lane. The team will be disqualified if he or she attempts to climb out of the water beyond their waist or sit on the pool edge before the Chief Referee’s signal.

Similarly, the thrower remains in the throw zone until the Chief Referee signals the completion of the race.

There is no penalty for pulling on the rigid crossbar while attempting to reach the throw line.

d) Fair throw: Victims must grasp the throw line with their hands only within their lane. The lane marker is not “within the lane”. Victims may submerge to retrieve the throw line. Victims may not release the crossbar before grasping the throw line with the other hand.

As long as victims remain entirely within their designated lane and do not release their grasp on the crossbar prior to grasping hold of the line, they may use their foot or other part of the body to manoeuvre the throw line within their lane to a position where they can grasp the line with their hand.

Note: The victim can slide their hand anywhere along the bar but must be grasping the bar when touching the line with any part of their body and when grasping the line.

e) Pull through the water: While being pulled to the edge, victims must be on their front grasping the throw line with both hands. Victims may not “climb” the throw line hand-over-hand. For safety reasons, victims may release the line with one hand for the sole purpose of touching the wall/edge. This will not result in disqualification.

Victims may wear swim goggles. f) Throw zone: Throwers must remain on the deck and in their allotted lane, poolside of

a clearly defined mark 1.5 m from the pool edge. If there is a raised portion of the poolside, the line shall be 1.5 m back from the deck side of the raised portion.

Throwers who exit the throw zone while pulling the victim or prior to completion signal, shall be disqualified. Throwers must keep at least one foot wholly within the inside edge of the throw zone, either on the ground or in the air above the throw zone. Any part of the thrower’s feet may cross over the front of the “pool edge” of the throw zone without penalty.

Throwers may reach to retrieve a line dropped outside the throw zone as long as they maintain at least one foot wholly within the throw zone, and that there is no interference with another competitor. Throwers who enter (or fall into) the water shall be disqualified.

g) Time limit: Throwers must make a fair throw and pull the victim to the finish wall/edge within 45 seconds.

Throwers who fail to get the victim to the finish wall/edge before the 45-second acoustic completion signal shall be designated as “Did Not Finish” (DNF).

2. Equipment

a) Throw line: See Section 9: Facilities and Equipment Standardsand Scrutineering Procedures. The throw line must be between 16.5 m and 17.5 m in length. Competitors must use the throw lines supplied by organisers.

b) The rigid crossbar is positioned on the surface across each lane 12.5 m from the starting end of the pool. A tolerance of plus 0.10 m and minus 0.00 m in each lane is allowed.




a) Line Thrower executing practice throw(s) (DQ58). b) Victim not keeping a grasp on the crossbar from the starting signal and until grasping

the line for the pull to the finish wall/edge. (DQ51). c) Victim grasping the throw line outside the lane (DQ54). d) Victim not on his or her front while being pulled to the finish wall/edge (DQ55). e) Victim not holding the throw line with both hands while being pulled to the finish

wall/edge (victim may release the line with one hand for the sole purpose of touching the wall/edge) (DQ56).

f) Victim “climbing” the throw line hand-over-hand (DQ57).

g) Line Thrower exiting the throw zone at any time after the start and before the 45-second acoustic completion signal (DQ52).

h) Victim exiting the water before the 45-second acoustic completion signal (DQ53).

i) Failure to touch the finish wall/edge (DQ15).

5.10.8 Manikin Relay (4 x 25 m)

1. Event description Four competitors in turn carry a manikin approximately 25 m each.

a) The first competitor starts in the water holding a manikin at the surface with one hand and the start wall/edge or starting block with the other hand. On an acoustic signal, the competitor carries the manikin and passes it to the second competitor within the 5 m changeover zone situated between the 22.5 m and 27.5 m mark.

b) The second competitor carries the manikin to touch the turn wall/edge and passes the manikin to the third competitor who is in contact with the turn wall/edge or starting block with at least one hand. The third competitor may touch the manikin only after the second competitor has touched the turn wall/edge.

c) The third competitor carries the manikin and passes it to the fourth competitor in the changeover zone between the 72.5 m and 77.5 m mark.

d) The fourth competitor completes the event by carrying the manikin to touch the finish wall/edge with any part of the competitor’s body.

e) Once they have completed their leg of the race and the exchange, competitors must remain in the water, in their lane in the changeover zone, staying clear of any following exchanges, and remain there until the completion of the event has been signalled.

f) Only the incoming and outgoing competitors may participate in the manikin exchange within their changeover zones. The incoming competitors may assist outgoing competitors, but only as long as the manikin’s head remains within the changeover zones.

g) The hand of one competitor must be in contact with the manikin at all times. h) The start zone and relay changeover zones shall be indicated by flags.



i) Competitors involved in the exchange may push off the pool bottom in the changeover zones.

j) In the start, finish, and changeover zones, competitors are not judged on “carrying the manikin” criteria. However, competitors need to maintain contact with the manikin with at least one hand at all times and including during the exchanges.

k) The manikin exchange must take place within the designated changeover zones, as judged by the top of the manikin’s head.

Note: The nipper event allows two competitors wearing fins and two without fins in any order. 2. Equipment Manikin: See Section 9: Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures. The manikin is completely filled with water and sealed. Competitors must use the manikins supplied by organisers.


a) Using incorrect manikin carry technique as described in 3.3 Manikins (DQ19). b) Taking assistance from any pool fitting (e.g., lane rope, steps, drains or underwater

hockey fittings) – not including the bottom of the pool (DQ17). c) Leaving the turn wall before the previous competitor has touched the wall/edge

(DQ41). d) The manikin changing hands (DQ42):

• before or beyond the designated changeover zone • before the second competitor touches the pool wall/edge

e) Assistance from a third competitor during the exchange between the incoming and outgoing competitors (DQ39).

f) Releasing the manikin before the next competitor has grasped it (i.e., one hand of each competitor must be in contact with the manikin) (DQ43).

g) Releasing the manikin before touching the turn wall/edge or finish wall/edge (DQ38). h) Failure to touch the finish wall/edge (DQ15). i) A competitor leaving the water after completing his or her leg of the relay (DQ50) and

before the all clear signal is given (DQ61). j) One competitor completing two or more legs of the event (DQ40)

5.10.9 Obstacle Relay (4 x 50 m)

1. Event description With a dive start on an acoustic signal, the first competitor swims 50 m freestyle passing under two obstacles. After the first competitor touches the turn wall/edge the second, third, and fourth competitors repeat the procedure in turn.

a) Competitors must surface after the dive entry before the first obstacle and after passing under each obstacle. “Surfacing” means the competitor’s head breaks the plane of the surface of the water.

b) Competitors may push off the pool bottom when surfacing from under the obstacles.




d) The first, second and third competitors must leave the water upon finishing their legs of the relay without obstructing any other competitors. The first, second and third competitors may not re-enter the water.

2. Equipment Obstacles: See Section 9: Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures. Obstacles are fixed at right angles on lane ropes in a straight line across all lanes. The first obstacle is positioned 12.5 m from the start wall with the second obstacle 12.5 m from the opposite end. The distance between the two obstacles is 25 m. 3. Disqualification In addition to the General Rules in Section 2 and those outlined in 5.2 through 5.4, the following behaviour shall result in disqualification:

a) Passing over an obstacle and not immediately returning over or under that obstacle and then passing under it (DQ11).

b) Failure to surface after each dive entry (DQ12). c) Failure to surface after each obstacle (DQ13). d) Taking assistance from any pool fitting (e.g., lane rope, steps, drains or underwater

hockey fittings) when surfacing – not including the bottom of the pool (DQ17). e) Leaving the start before the previous competitor has touched the wall/edge (DQ41). f) Failure to touch the finish wall/edge (DQ15). g) A competitor re-entering the water after completing his or her leg of the relay (DQ50). h) One competitor repeating two or more legs of the event (DQ40).

5.10.10 Medley Relay (4 x 50 m)

This event is only for Masters, Senior and Juniors.

1. Event description With a dive start on an acoustic signal, the first competitor swims 50 m freestyle without fins. With a dive start after the first competitor touches the wall/edge, the second competitor swims 50 m freestyle with fins. With a dive start after the second competitor touches the wall/edge, the third competitor swims 50 m freestyle towing a rescue tube. The third competitor touches the turn wall/edge. The fourth competitor, in the water wearing fins with at least one hand on the turn wall/edge or starting block, dons the harness. The fourth competitor is not permitted to touch any part of the rescue tube harness, line or any part of the rescue tube, until the third competitor has touched the turning wall/edge. The third competitor, playing the role of “victim”, holds the rescue tube and/or clip with both hands while being towed 50 m by the fourth competitor to the finish.

a) Both the fourth and the third competitor (victim) must leave from the turn wall/edge. The victim must be in contact with the rescue tube before passing the 10 m line. The line of the rescue tube must be fully extended beyond the 10 m line when the top of the “victim’s” head crosses the 10 m line.



Note: Should the line of the rescue tube not be fully extended because of the power of the victim’s kick the team shall not be disqualified.

b) The event is complete when the fourth competitor touches the finish wall/edge of the pool with the victim in contact with the tube.

c) The victim may kick while being towed, but no other assistance is permitted. d) The victim must grip the main body of the rescue tube and/or clip – not the rope. e) The victim must hold onto the rescue tube and/or clip with both hands while being

towed but may reposition his or her hands on the tube and/or clip during the tow without disqualification.

f) While the fourth competitor must have at least one hand on the turn wall/edge or starting block when the third competitor touches the edge, the fourth competitor may push off the wall/edge with hand, arm, or feet. The fourth competitor may not touch any part of the rescue tube, its harness or line, until after the third competitor has touched the turn wall/edge.

g) The first and second competitors must leave the water upon finishing their legs of the relay without obstructing any other competitors. The first and second competitors may not re-enter the water.

2. Equipment

a) Rescue tube, swim fins: See Section 9: Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures. Competitors must use the rescue tubes supplied by organisers.

b) Starts with rescue tubes: For the third competitor’s start, the rescue tube and rescue tube line may be positioned at the competitor’s discretion, but within the competitor’s allotted lane. Competitors should ensure a safe and correct position of rescue tube and line. The rescue tube remains unclipped throughout.

c) Wearing rescue tubes: Rescue tubes must be donned correctly, either with the loop over one or two shoulders, or over the shoulder and across the chest – at the competitor’s discretion. Assuming the rescue tube was donned correctly, there is no cause for disqualification if the loop falls down on the competitor’s arm or elbow during the competitor’s approach or tow.

d) Towing the victim: Competitors must tow the victim with the line of the rescue tube fully extended. Competitors may go back into the 10 m change over zone to re-secure the victim, provided the “victim’s” head has not passed the 10 m line.

e) Retrieving lost fins: Competitors may retrieve fins lost after the start and continue without disqualification as long as the rules governing manikins (if being used in the leg of the race) are not violated (see 5.4 Manikins). Competitors are not permitted to start again in another heat.

f) Rescue Tube Defect: If in the opinion of the Chief Referee the rescue tube, line and/or harness (belt) presents a technical defect during the race, the Chief Referee may allow the competitor to start again in other heat but only if the rescue tubes for the event were supplied by the organising body and the rules required that the provided tubes must be used by all competitors.


a) Leaving the start before the previous competitor has touched the wall/edge (DQ41). b) The fourth competitor touching the rescue tube harness, line or any part of the rescue

tube before the third competitor touches the turn wall/edge (DQ44). c) The third competitor clipping the rescue tube into the ring (DQ45). d) The victim holding the rescue tube by the rope (DQ46). e) The victim helping with arm movements, or not holding the rescue tube and/or clip with

both hands (DQ47).



f) The victim losing the rescue tube after passing the 10 m line (DQ48). g) The fourth competitor towing the victim without the line of the rescue tube fully

extended beyond the 10 m line (DQ49). h) One competitor completing two or more legs of the event (excludes third competitor

acting as victim) (DQ40). i) Failure to touch the finish wall/edge (DQ15). j) A competitor re-entering the water after completing his or her leg of the relay (DQ50).

5.10.11 Pool Lifesaver Relay (4 x 50 m)


a) The first competitor: With a dive start on an acoustic signal, the first competitor swims 50 m freestyle without fins.

b) The second competitor: With a dive start after the first competitor touches the turn wall/edge, the second competitor swims 50 m with fins and dives to retrieve a submerged manikin. The second competitor does not need to touch the turning edge before passing the manikin to the third competitor.

Note: The Second swimmer is permitted to swim the whole lap underwater before surfacing with manikin or may surface one or more times after the start and before diving to retrieve the manikin.

c) The third competitor: The third competitor is waiting in the water (without fins) in contact with the turn wall/edge or starting block with at least one hand. The third competitor may touch (but cannot grasp) the manikin before the head of the manikin breaks the surface of the water. After the manikin’s head breaks the surface of the water the competitor may then take control of the manikin and release their hold on the turning turn wall/edge or starting block. The third competitor then carries the manikin 50 metres and touches the turning wall/edge before passing the manikin to the fourth competitor.

d) The fourth competitor: The fourth competitor (with fins) is holding the turning wall/edge or starting block with at least one hand until taking the manikin. The fourth competitor may touch but cannot grasp the manikin before the third competitor has touched the turn wall/edge. The fourth competitor then carries the manikin to touch the finish wall/edge with any part of the competitor’s body.

e) The incoming second and third competitors may assist their outgoing competitors, but only as long as the manikin’s head remains within the changeover zones.

f) Flags shall indicate the changeover zones for the manikin carry legs: a) At the 2nd to 3rd competitor changeover - 5 m from the pool wall. b) At the 3rd to 4th competitor changeover – 10 m from the pool wall.

g) Competitors may not release the manikin until the next competitor has grasped it (i.e., one hand of each competitor must be in contact with the manikin).

h) The third and fourth competitors are not judged on “carrying the manikin” criteria (defined in 3.3) within the changeover zones as judged by the top of the manikin’s head. Carrying the manikin criteria do apply within the finish zone at the end of the relay.



i) The third and fourth competitors may push off the wall/edge with hand, arm, or feet after taking the manikin for their respective legs.

j) The event is complete when the fourth competitor touches the finish wall/edge of the pool while still correctly carrying the manikin.

k) The first, second and third competitors must leave the water upon finishing their legs of the relay without obstructing any other competitors. These competitors may not re-enter the water.

l) Retrieving lost fins: Competitors may retrieve fins lost after the start and continue without disqualification as long as the rules governing manikins (if being used in the leg of the race) are not violated (see 5.4 Manikins). Competitors are not permitted to start again in another heat.

2. Equipment Manikin: See Section 9: Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures. The manikin is completely filled with water and sealed. Competitors must use the manikins supplied by organisers.

Swim fins: See Section 9: Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures.


a) Using incorrect manikin carry technique as described in 5.4 Manikins (DQ19). b) Taking assistance from any pool fitting (e.g., lane rope, steps, drains or underwater

hockey fittings) – not including the bottom of the pool (DQ17). c) The third competitor releasing contact with the wall/edge or grasping the manikin

before the head of the manikin breaks the surface of the water (DQ59). d) The third competitor not having the manikin in a correct carrying position before the

top of the manikin’s head passes the 5 m line (DQ18). e) The fourth competitor grasping the manikin before the third competitor touching the

turn pool wall/edge (DQ60). f) Assistance from a third competitor during the exchange between the incoming and

outgoing competitors (DQ39). g) Releasing the manikin before the next competitor has grasped it (i.e., one hand of each

competitor must be in contact with the manikin) (DQ43). h) The fourth competitor not having the manikin in a correct carrying position before the

top of the manikin’s head passes the 10 m line (DQ23). i) Failure to touch the finish wall/edge (DQ15). j) One competitor completing two or more legs of the event (DQ40). k) Leaving the start before the previous competitor has touched the wall/edge (DQ41). l) A competitor re-entering the water after completing his or her leg of the relay (DQ50).



5.10.12 2 x 2 Rescue Ball Rescue Relay

1. Event Description Teams consist of four competitors - two rescuers who shall rescue two patients, one by one, using a lifesaving ball within a time limit of two minutes twenty seconds (2.20). U/9 and U/10 nippers cannot participate in this event. This event is for Nippers only. Teams compete in the U/12 combined (U/11 and U/12) age group for boys and an event for girls and U/14 combined (U/13 and U/14) age group for boys and an event for girls. After an acoustic signal, the first rescuer throws the ball to one patient, who is located in the drop zone. The first patient grasps the ball/net, ducks under the rope or demarcation line and is towed to the finish edge where he touches the hand of the rescuer. After that, the second rescuer uses the same procedure to save the second patient (only one ball per team). When the second patient touches the hand of the second rescuer, the event is completed and the watches are stopped.

AGE GROUP DISTANCE

U/12 Boys Combined 12 m

U/12 Girls Combined 10 m

U/14 Boys Combined 12 m

U/14 Girls Combined 10 m

For this event any numbers of throws are permitted within the time limit, but the first patient must be rescued by the first rescuer and the second patient must be rescued by the second rescuer. The rescuers can help each other, except during the throwing of the ball and the pulling of the patients. While helping each other, they are not allowed to interfere with any other teams Note: It is not necessary for the patients to touch the finish edge prior to touching the hand of the rescuer. 2. Equipment Equipment to be used is a lifesaving ball, net and rope. The competitor is not allowed to change the composition or size of the material. It is also forbidden to make knots in the line. See Section 9: Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures. Competitors must use the lifesaving ball, net and rope supplied by organisers.

3. Pool: Drop Zone and Roof Drop zone: The drop zone is delimited by two parallel lane ropes 2.5 m apart, fixed perpendicular to the width of the launch zone. The drop zone is also delimited by a demarcation line which is fixed right angled to the lane ropes in 12 m distance for the boys and in 10 m distance for the girls from the launch zone. The ceiling of the swimming pool: The distance between the launch zone and the ceiling of



the pool shall be of 7 m at the minimum. The ceiling is to be considered as a dead obstacle, this means that if the ball touches the ceiling and later falls into the drop zone, the throw is to be considered valid. Between competitors’ lanes there shall always be one free lane. The two border lanes must also be free. 4. Preparation and Start Both rescuers position themselves in their lane and prepare the lifesaving ball and line. The preparation of the ball and the roll up of the line is the responsibility of the rescuers who can be assisted in this phase only (by team members) prior to commencement of the event. No further help is then allowed. The rescuer is permitted to hold the line and the ball as desired. The residue of the line can be left on the ground. After the acoustic start signal the competitor throws the ball as the competitor chooses, but is forbidden to kick the ball with the foot (i.e. shoot). It is also forbidden to use devices which effect an elongation of the level arms, which facilitate the rolling up or the hold of the line or which in any way facilitate the throwing. The wearing of gloves shall not be permitted. The patients are located in the water behind a dropping cord or demarcation line in the lane allocated to and prepared for the participant. 5. Throwing Conditions The rescuers may launch the ball as they like. The ball must not be kicked by foot. Any number of throws within the time limit is permitted. 6. Validity of Throws A Technical Official shall be appointed to each lane to judge the validity of throws. The Technical Official shall stand behind the rescuer in a position not obstructing the rescuer and where he can be observed by the patients. The Technical Official shall signal the validity of each throw using a white flag for valid throws and a red flag for invalid throws as follows:

• If a throw falls outside of the drop zone it is not valid.

• If the ball touches the lane rope, the ceiling or another object (except the person) and then falls into the drop zone, the throw is valid.

• If the ball goes outside of the drop zone at any time the throw is not valid.

7. Grasping the Ball/Net by the Patient The ball/net may only be grasped by the patient after the ball has touched the water correctly in the drop zone. If the ball is thrown too far so that the patient cannot reach it but in the drop lane, the rescuer is allowed to pull the ball towards them to enable the patient to grasp it. The patient is permitted to let the rope pass through his hand (as the rescuer pulls the rope in) until the ball/net is grasped. Waiting patients may not under any circumstances catch a ball which passes above their head and may not touch a ball that falls out of the drop zone. Further, the patient cannot touch the rope until the ball has landed and is not permitted to pull the ball towards their self. 8. The Rescue The patient must remain in contact with the ball/net with at least one hand. Climbing over the demarcation line rope and pulling it towards to themselves shall result in disqualification. Note: It is clarified that whilst the patient must remain in contact with the ball/net with at least

one hand, the patient may move a free arm to assist in the rescue process. The patients are not allowed to lose the ball/net. If a patient does lose the ball/net the patient shall return behind the demarcation rope and wait for another throw of the same rescuer. When the first patient has been successfully rescued, the second rescuer proceeds to rescue the second patient as described in these rules. The first rescuer may assist the second rescuer in the changeover of equipment. Note: When not using the rope, net and ball the rescuers must take care not to interfere with



any other team in the competition. If interference occurs the offending team may be disqualified and the “innocent” team shall be permitted to restart the complete event.

9. Particular Conditions If the rescuer falls into the pool, the rescuer is allowed to climb out and continue. However, no one can assist the rescuer to climb out of the pool. If the rescuer throws the ball in the lane of another competitor, thereby causing an entanglement with another competitors rope or ball the offending rescuer may continue the event if time permits and the equipment is untangled. The “innocent” competitor, however, shall be permitted to restart the complete event. If the entanglement occurs in a neutral lane, both rescuers should free their lanes and continue if time permits. In this case a new start is not allowed. 10. Timekeeping The time is taken by three timekeepers. The watches are started at an acoustic start signal. The time is stopped when the acoustic signal is given after the two minute twenty seconds time has elapsed before the second patient touches the hand of the second rescuer. The teams who have not rescued the two patients during the official time will automatically be disqualified. If the time taken by three timekeepers differs, and two of them have the same time, this time is considered as the official one. In case the times of all three differ, the one recorded by the middle watch shall be accepted. If one of the watches fails, the procedure for two Timekeepers described in the general conditions is followed. Attribution of place: If, in a heat the placings of the Finish Judge does not coincide with the times of the timekeepers, the Chief Referee will determine the placing of the teams. The same times are given to both teams. The time allotted is the addition of both times divided by two (if two teams are involved). 11. Dead heats (Ties) The team rescuing the two patients in the fastest time will be the winner. When two teams have the same time, a deciding heat will be organised in order to determine the winner. The team winning this heat is the overall winner, regardless of time. 12. Disqualification

a) A rescuer kicking the ball instead of throwing. (DQ 60) b) A patient climbing over the demarcation rope. (DQ 61) c) A waiting patient grasping a flying ball or touches the rope prior to the ball landing. (DQ

62) d) A team receiving outside assistance. (DQ 1) e) Any patient losing contact with the ball/net and not returning to behind the 10 m/12 m

demarcation line. (DQ 63) f) The first patient not staying within the pool in their lane until completion of the event.

(DQ 64)



5.10.13 4 x 50 m Rescue Torpedo Buoy Medley Relay

Note: This is a nipper event only


At an acoustic signal, with a dive start, the first competitor swims 50 m freestyle without fins.

When the first competitor touches the turn-wall, with a dive start the second competitor swims 50 m freestyle with fins.

When the second competitor touches the start/finish turn-wall, with a dive start third competitor swims 50 m freestyle towing a Rescue Torpedo Buoy (RTB).

When the third competitor touches the turn-wall, the fourth competitor is in the water wearing fins with at least one hand on the turn-wall or starting block, dons the harness. The third competitor, playing the role of “patient”, holds the RTB with both hands while being towed 50 m by the fourth competitor to the finish.

Notes: a) Both the fourth and the third competitor (patient) must leave from the turn-wall. The

patient must be in contact with the RTB before passing the 5 m line. The line of the RTB must be fully extended beyond the 10 m line.

b) The event is complete when the fourth competitor touches the finish-wall of the pool with the patient in contact with the RTB.

c) The patient may kick while being towed, but no other assistance is permitted. d) The patient must grip the main body of the RTB – not the rope. e) The patient must hold onto the RTB with both hands while being towed, but may

reposition his or her hands on the RTB during the tow without disqualification. f) While the fourth competitor must have at least one hand on touches the turn-wall, the

fourth competitor may push off the wall with hand, arm, or feet. The turn-wall or starting block when the third competitor fourth competitor may not touch any part of the RTB, its harness or line, until after the third competitor has touched the turn-wall.

g) The first and second competitors must leave the water upon finishing their respective legs of the relay without obstructing any other competitors. The first and second competitors may not re-enter the water.

2. Equipment a) RTB and swim fins: See Section 9: Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering

Procedures. Competitors must use the RTB supplied by organisers. b) Starts with RTB: For the third competitor’s start, the RTB and RTB line may be

positioned at the competitor’s discretion, but within the competitor’s allotted lane. Competitors should ensure a safe and correct position of RTB and line.



c) Wearing of RTB: RTB must be donned correctly, either with the loop over one shoulder, or over the shoulder and across the chest – at the competitor’s discretion. Assuming the RTB was donned correctly, there is no cause for disqualification if the loop falls down on the competitor’s arm or elbow during the competitor’s approach or tow.

d) Towing the patient: Competitors must tow the patient with the line of the RTB fully extended.

e) Retrieving lost fins: Competitors may retrieve fins lost after the start and the team may continue in the race. The team will not be permitted to start again in another heat.

f) RTB defects: If in the Chief Referee’s opinion, the RTB, line or harness (belt) presents a technical defect during the race, the Chief Referee may allow the team to repeat the race.

3. Disqualification

In addition to the General Rules in Section 2, the following behaviour shall result in disqualification: a) Leaving the start before the previous competitor has touched the turn-wall (DQ 41). b) The fourth competitor touching the RTB harness, line or any part of the RTB before the

third competitor touches the turn-wall (DQ 44). c) The patient holding the RTB by the rope (DQ 46). d) The patient helping with arm movements or not holding the RTB with both hands (DQ

47). e) The patient losing the RTB after passing the 5 m line (DQ 48). f) The fourth competitor towing the patient without the line of the RTB fully extended

beyond the 10 m line (DQ 49). g) One competitor completing two or more legs of the event (excludes third competitor

acting as patient) (DQ 40). h) Failure to touch the finish-wall (DQ 15). i) A competitor re-entering the water after completing his or her leg of the relay (DQ 50).

5.10.14 100 m Super Nipper


At an acoustic signal, with a dive start the competitor swims 25 m freestyle and then dives to recover a submerged manikin. The competitor surfaces the manikin within the 5 m pick-up zone and carries it to the turn-wall. After touching the wall the competitor releases the manikin. The competitor dons the fins and the rescue tube and tows the rescue tube to the finish. The event is complete when the competitor touches the finish-wall of the pool.

2. Equipment Manikins, fins, rescue tubes: See Section 9: Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures. Competitors must use the manikins and rescue tubes supplied by organisers. Note: The U/11 to U/14 Manikin (Midi Manikin) is used.



a) Placement of fins and rescue tubes: Prior to the start, competitors must place the fins and rescue tube on the pool deck – not the starting block/podium – within the confines of their allotted lane.

b) Positioning the manikin for the carry: The manikin is completely filled with water and sealed for the event. The manikin is located at a depth between 1.8 m and 3 m. In water deeper than 3 m, the manikin shall be placed on a platform (or other support) to position it at the required depth.

c) The manikin is positioned on its back, head in the direction of the turn-wall with the transverse line in the middle of the manikin’s thorax on the 2 5 m line.

d) Surfacing the manikin: Competitors may push off the bottom of the pool when surfacing with the manikin.

3. Procedure Competitors must have the manikin in the correct carrying position before the top of the manikin’s head passes the 5 m line. Donning tube and fins: After first touching the turn-wall, the competitor discards the manikin. In the water, the competitor dons fins and rescue tube. Wearing rescue tubes: Rescue tubes must be donned correctly, either with the loop over one shoulder, or over the shoulder and across the chest – at the competitor’s discretion. Assuming the rescue tube was donned correctly, there is no cause for disqualification if the loop falls down on the competitor’s arm or elbow during the competitor’s approach to the manikin or during the manikin tow. The rescue tube remains unclipped. Competitors must do nothing to delay or inhibit the line of the rescue tube becoming fully extended at the earliest possible moment. Retrieving lost fins: Competitors may retrieve fins lost after the start and continue without disqualification. Rescue tube defect: If in the opinion of the Chief Referee, the rescue tube, line and/or harness (belt) presents a technical defect during the race, the Chief Referee may allow the competitor to repeat the race.

4. Disqualification In addition to the General Rules in Section 2, the following behaviour shall result in disqualification: a) Taking assistance from any pool fitting (e.g., lane rope, steps, drains or underwater

hockey fittings) – excludes the bottom of the pool when surfacing the manikin (DQ 17). b) Not having the manikin in the correct carrying position before the top of the manikin’s

head passes the 5 m pick-up zone (DQ 18). c) Using an incorrect carrying technique as described in 5.4 Manikins (DQ 19). d) Releasing the manikin before touching the turn-wall. (DQ 21).

e) Touching the finish-wall without the rescue tube (DQ 37).

f) Failure to touch the finish-wall (DQ 15).



DISQUALIFICATION CODES FOR POOL EVENTS


1. Not completing the event in accordance with the event description or general

rules. All events

2. A competitor or team will be disqualified if a competitor, team or handler is

deemed to have competed unfairly. Examples of “competing unfairly” include:

• committing a doping or doping-related infraction

• impersonating another competitor

• attempting to defeat the ballot or draw for events or positions

• competing twice in the same individual event

• competing twice in the same event in different teams

• purposely interfering with a course to gain advantage

• jostling or obstructing another competitor handler so as to impede his or

her progress

• receiving physical or material outside assistance (other than verbal or

other direction)

All events

3. Competitors will not be permitted to start in an event if they are late reporting

to the marshalling area or properly attired. All events

4. A competitor or team absent from the start of an event shall be disqualified

except for the A- or B-final. All events

5. Activities that result in willful damage to the venue sites, accommodation sites

or the property of others will result in disqualification of the individuals

involved from competition.

All events

6. Abuse of officials will result in disqualification from the competition. All events

7. Using sticky, tacky or adhesive substances (liquid, solid or aerosol) on hands

or feet, or on the manikin or rescue tube to improve grip or push of the bottom

of the pool.

All events

8. Taking assistance from the pool bottom except where specifically allowed

(e.g., Obstacle Swim, 4 x 25 m Manikin Relay). All events

9. Leaving the water after an event before permission is given by the official. All events

10. Commencing a starting motion before the starting signal has been given. All events

11. Passing over an obstacle without immediately returning over or under that

obstacle and then passing under it.

Obstacle Swim,

Obstacle Relay

12. Failure to surface after the dive entry or after a turn before passing under an

obstacle.

Obstacle Swim,

Obstacle Relay

13. Failure to surface after each obstacle. Obstacle Swim,

Obstacle Relay

14. Failure to touch the wall/edge during the turn. Obstacle Swim

15. Failure to touch the finish wall/edge. All events

16. Not surfacing before diving to the manikin. Manikin Carry

17. Taking assistance from any pool fitting (e.g., lane rope, steps, drains or

underwater hockey fittings) when surfacing with the manikin (as applicable for

the event) – not including the bottom of the pool.

Obstacle Swim,

Obstacle Relay,

Manikin Carry,

Manikin Carry with Fins,

Manikin Relay,

Rescue Medley,

Super Lifesaver,

Pool Lifesaver Relay




18. Not having the manikin in a correct carrying position before

the top of the manikin’s head passes the 5 m line (for carries without fins).

Manikin Carry,

Rescue Medley,

Super Lifesaver

19. Using an incorrect carrying technique (as described in 3.3 Manikins).

Manikin Carry,


Manikin Relay,

Rescue Medley,

Super Lifesaver,


20. Towing the manikin with the face below the surface. Manikin Tow with Fins,

Super Lifesaver

21. Releasing the manikin before touching the finish wall/edge or the turn

wall/edge

Manikin Carry,


Rescue Medley,

Super Lifesaver,

Manikin Relay,

Lifesaver Relay

22. Surfacing after turning and before lifting the manikin. Rescue Medley

23. Not having the manikin in the correct carrying position before the top of the

manikin’s head passes the 10 m line (for carries with fins).


Pool Lifesaver Relay,

Medley Relay

24. Taking assistance from any pool fitting (e.g., lane rope, steps, underwater

hockey fittings) when fixing the rescue tube around the manikin.

Manikin Tow with Fins,

Super Lifesaver

25. Manikin handler positioning the manikin incorrectly or making contact with the

manikin after the competitor has touched the turn wall/edge.


Super Lifesaver

26. At 50 m / 150 m, not touching the pool wall/edge before touching manikin. Manikin Tow with Fins,

Super Lifesaver

27. Manikin handler not releasing the manikin immediately after the competitor

has touched the turn wall/edge.


Super Lifesaver

28. Manikin handler pushing the manikin towards the competitor or the finish

wall/edge.


Super Lifesaver

29. Manikin handler intentionally entering the water during the event or entering

the water and interfering with the performance of another competitor or

interfering with the judging of the event.


Super Lifesaver

30. Competitor clipping the rescue tube into the ring before touching the turn

wall/edge.

Manikin Tow

with Fins,

Super Lifesaver

31. Incorrect securing of the rescue tube around the manikin

(i.e., not around body and under both arms and not clipped to

an O-ring).


Super Lifesaver

32. Not securing the rescue tube around the manikin within the

10 m pick-up zone (judged at the top of the manikin’s head).


Super Lifesaver

33. Pushing or carrying, instead of towing the manikin.

Manikin Tow

with Fins,

Super Lifesaver

34. The line of the rescue tube not becoming fully extended before the top of the

manikin’s head passes the 10 m line.


Super Lifesaver

35. Not towing the manikin with the line of the rescue tube fully extended beyond

the 10 m line.


Super Lifesaver




36. The rescue tube and manikin become separated after the rescue tube has

been secured correctly around the manikin.


Super Lifesaver

37. Touching the finish wall/edge without the rescue tube and manikin in place. Manikin Tow with Fins,

Super Lifesaver

38. Releasing the manikin before touching the turn wall/edge or finish wall/edge.

This DQ point no longer applies.

Manikin Relay,

Manikin Carry with Fins

Super Lifesaver

39. Assistance from a third competitor during the exchange between the incoming

and outgoing competitors.

Manikin Relay,


40. One competitor repeating two or more legs of the event.

Obstacle Relay,

Manikin Relay,

Medley Relay,


41. Leaving the start before the previous competitor has touched the wall/edge.

Obstacle Relay,

Manikin Relay,

Medley Relay, Pool

Lifesaver Relay

42. The manikin changing hands:

• before or beyond the designated changeover zone

• before the second competitor touches the pool wall/edge

Manikin Relay

43. Releasing the manikin before the next competitor has grasped it (i.e., one had

of each competitor must be in contact with the manikin).

Manikin Relay,


44. The fourth competitor touching the rescue tube harness, line or any part of the

rescue tube before the third competitor touches the turn wall/edge. Medley Relay

45. The third competitor clipping the rescue tube into the ring. Medley Relay

46. The victim holding the rescue tube by the rope. Medley Relay

47. The victim helping with arm movements, or not holding the rescue tube and/or

clip with both hands. Medley Relay

48. The victim losing the rescue tube after passing the 10 m line. Medley Relay

49. The fourth competitor towing the victim without the line of

the rescue tube fully extended beyond the 10 m line. Medley Relay

50. A competitor re-entering the water after completing his or

her leg of the relay.

Obstacle Relay,

Medley Relay,


51. Victim not keeping a grasp on the crossbar from the starting signal and until

grasping the line for the pull to the finish wall/edge. (DQ 51). Line Throw

52. Line thrower exiting the throw zone at any time after the start and before the

45-second acoustic completion signal. Line Throw

53. Victim exiting the water before the 45-second acoustic completion signal. Line Throw

54. Victim grasping the throw line outside his or her lane. Line Throw

55. Victim not on his or her front while being pulled to the finish wall/edge. Line Throw

56. Victim not holding the throw line with both hands while being pulled to the

finish wall/edge (victim may release the line with one hand for the sole

purpose of touching the wall/edge).

Line Throw

57. Victim “climbing” the throw line hand-over-hand. Line Throw




58. Line thrower executing practice throws. Line Throw

59. The third competitor releasing contact with the wall/edge or grasping the

manikin before the head of the manikin breaks the surface of the water. Pool Lifesaver Relay

60. The fourth competitor grasping the manikin before the third competitor

touching the pool wall/edge. Pool Lifesaver Relay

61. A competitor in the Manikin Relay leaving the water after completing his or her

leg of the relay and before the all clear signal is given Manikin Relay

62. A Rescuer kicking the ball instead of throwing Rescue Ball Rescue

Relay

63. A Patient climbing over the demarcation rope Rescue Ball Rescue

Relay

64. A waiting Patient grasping a flying ball or touches the rope prior to the ball

landing.

Rescue Ball Rescue

Relay

65. Any Patient losing contact with the ball/net and not returning to behind the 10

m/12 m demarcation line.

Rescue Ball Rescue

Relay

66. The first Patient not staying within the pool in their lane until completion of the

event

Rescue Ball Rescue

Relay

Note: In the Line Throw event failure to get the victim to the finish wall/edge before the 45-second acoustic

completion signal shall be designated DNF, not a DQ.

Section 6 – Open Water Competition


SECTION 6: OPEN WATER COMPETITION - INDEX

6.1

INTRODUCTION ………………………………………………………………..

2

6.2 EVENTS...……………………………………………………………………... 2

6.3 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF OPEN WATER COMPETITION ……….….. 2

6.3.1 Arena Layout ……………………………………………………… 3

6.3.2 Buoy Colours ……………………………………………………… 3

6.3.3 Buoy Distances …………………………………………………… 3

6.3.6 Flag Colours ………………………………………………………. 4

6.3.5 Setting of Competition Courses ………………………………… 4

6.3.6 Hazardous Conditions …………………………………………… 4

6.3.7 Assignment of Positions ………………………………………… 4

6.3.8 Draws ……………………………………………………………… 5

6.3.9 Competitor Limitations …………………………………………... 6

6.3.10 Eliminations ……………………………………………………….. 6

6.3.11 Time Limits for Surf Events ……………………………………… 6

6.3.12 Reporting and Starting Times ……………………………………. 7

6,3,13 Marshalling ………………………………………………………... 7

6.3.16 Starting of Events ………………………………………………… 8

6.3.15 Racing Patient Events …………………………………………… 9

6.3.16 Change-Over (Tagging) in Relay Events ………………………. 10

6.3.17 Completion of Courses ………………………………………….. 10

6.1.18 Finish of Events …………………………………………………... 10

6.3.19 Dead Heats ……………………………………………………….. 11

6.3.20 “Disqualifications" and “Did Not Finish” Classifications ………. 11

6.3.21 Handler …………………………………………………………….. 12

6.4 SWIMMING EVENTS …………………………………………………………. 12

6.4.1 Rescue Tube Rescue Race …………………………………….. 12

6.4.2 Rescue Tube Race ………………………………………………. 15

6.4.3 Open Water Swim Race ………………………………………. 17

6.6.4 Run/Swim/Run Race …………………………………………….. 19

6.3.5 Run/Swim/Run Relay Race …………………………………… 21

6.5 CRAFT EVENTS ………………………………………………………………. 23

6.5.1 General Conditions of Craft Events …………………………….. 24

6.5.2 Juniors/ Seniors and Masters Board Race ………………….. 25

6.5.3 Nippers Board Race ………………………………………… 27

6.5.4 Board Relay Race ………………...……………………………… 29

6.5.5 Nippers Relay Race ……………………. 31

6.6 MULTI-DISCIPLINE EVENTS ………………………………………………… 31


6.6.2 Order of Legs ……………………………………………………… 32

6.6.3 Starting Positions …………………………………………………. 32

6.6.6 The Finish ………………………………………………………….. 32

6.6.5 Handler …………………………………………………………….. 32

6.6.6 Replacing of Boards ……………………………………………… 32

6.6.7 Control of Craft ……………………………………………………. 32

6.6.8 Shortening of Course ……………………………………………... 32

6.6.9 Iron Man / Woman Race ………………………………………… 33

6.6.10 Iron Nipper Race ………………………………………………….. 34

6.6.11 Taplin Relay Race (Juniors, Seniors and Masters) …………… 35

6.6.12 Taplin Relay Race (Nippers) …………………………………….. 37



SECTION 6: OPEN WATER COMPETITION

6.1 INTRODUCTION

LSA conduct some open water competitions and South African Open Water Championships

in “open water” – that is in lakes and dams. Although the rules are basically similar to that of

Surf Competitions rules, certain modification have been made to the rules to ensure a safe

competition for athletes.

6.2 EVENTS The following events are described in this section:

Swim Events: Open Water Swim Rescue Tube Rescue Race Run/Swim/Run Run/Swim/Run Relay

Multi-Disciplinary Events Iron Nipper (Boys and Girls) Iron Nipper Taplin Relay (Junior/Senior/Masters) Nipper Taplin Relay

6.3 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF OPEN WATER COMPETITION

Team management and competitors are responsible for being familiar with the competition

schedule, and with the rules and procedures governing events.

a) Competitors will not be permitted to commence in an event if they are late reporting to the marshalling area. To assist the organizers in determining how many heats may be required, events may be marshalled the day before or at the start of the day the event is scheduled.

b) A competitor or team absent from the start of an event shall be disqualified. c) Unless specifically provided for, no artificial enhancements to propulsion may be used

in competition (e.g., hand webs, arm bands). d) The use of wax or similar substances to assist the competitor in maintaining the grip

on or contact with boards or paddles is permitted in open water events. e) Body tape used for preventative, medical, therapeutic or kinesiology purposes is

allowed at the discretion of the Chief Referee as long as it does not provide a competitive advantage.

f) Video cameras may be mounted on boards as long as such devices conform to the requirements specified in Section 9: Facilities, and Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures. Video cameras may not be worn by or otherwise attached to a competitor from start to finish of a race.

g) Competitors must wear their club or national team swim caps in all events. Skull caps, securely fastened under the chin, must be worn on competitors’ heads at the start of each race.

h) A competitor shall not be disqualified if the cap is lost after the start of a race provided that officials can identify that the competitor correctly completed the event.

i) Competition courses: Protests against the course will only be accepted prior to the start of each event or race.

j) All courses shall be measured, set, and aligned to the Chief Referee’s satisfaction ensuring as far as possible that all lanes have fair and equal conditions.

k) The Chief Referee may authorize adjustments to course set-ups to ensure the safety, fair judging and efficient running of the event (e.g., distances, number of lanes or buoys, number of competitors per race). Any course changes must be communicated to competitors prior to the start of the race (e.g., at the team managers briefing, in the marshalling area, or at the start).

l) The use of colour-coded buoys and flags is recommended to guide competitors accurately through the required courses.



m) Buoy distances shall be measured from the end of knee-depth water. However, distances may vary depending upon shore conditions and safety factors. Adjustment of the buoys may be necessary during the competition if they move out of alignment.

n) Competitors in craft events may pass through the swimming buoys on their craft on the understanding that they are solely responsible if the buoys offer an impediment to their progress (not permissible in Ironman/woman and Taplin Relay Races).

o) Competitors and officials must leave the designated competition area when not competing or officiating. The competition area may be defined as the section of the shore encompassed by a line or fence, or a direct line to the water from the extreme ends of a line or fence or other designated areas as specified by the Chief Referee.

p) Start decisions by the Starter or Chief Referee (or Chief Referee’s designate) are not subject to protest or appeal.

q) Luck of prevailing conditions: No protest or appeal will be entertained when an incident is caused by the prevailing conditions (see Section 2: General Conditions, par. 2.18 Luck of Prevailing Conditions)

6.3.1 Arena Layout

Every effort will be made by the Chief Referee to ensure that all courses are as fair as possible,

given prevailing conditions. The Chief Referee may alter courses to allow for successful

completion of the competition and his decisions in this regard will then become the prescribed

course and not subject to challenge by a lifesaving authority or competitors.

At various times colours of turning buoys or flags may be different to those stated in this

manual. Any changes will be well communicated by the Chief Referee respectively.

6.3.2 Buoy Colours

The colours of the buoys shall be in the following order, from left to right, facing the water:

The buoys must be 5 m apart.

1. Red/Yellow: red and yellow is half/half 2. Black 3. Green/White: green has a vertical white stripe in the middle 4. Red 5. Blue/White: blue has a white vertical stripe in the middle 6. Yellow 7. White/Black: white has a vertical black stripe in the middle 8. Orange 9. Green/Yellow: green and yellow is half/half

The board buoys shall be orange in colour.

In nipper competitions, the colour of the swim turning buoys is determined by the Chief

Referee and dependent on the number of arenas used at the championships.

6.3.3 Buoy Distances

The distance the buoys are moored at, is measured from knee deep water. The distances are set out in each section per event. Distances may vary depending upon conditions and safety factors. Consideration should be given when setting all courses to ensure that all draws have fair and equal conditions. Conditions shall be set and aligned to the Chief Referee’s satisfaction provided that protests may be accepted on the course prior to the start of each event or round. Adjustments of the course may be necessary during the competition.



In the event that it is necessary to lay special turning buoys for swimming events – for example if there is a need to shorten the course, then not less than two buoys shall be laid (a minimum distance of 10 m apart). The colour of these buoys is at the Chief Referees discretion and competitors will be advised accordingly.

6.3.6 Flag Colours

The start shall be “flagless” and the flags indicating the finish shall be “red” and all turning

flags shall be "orange".

6.3.5 Setting of Competition Courses When setting courses, consideration must be given to ensure that, as far as possible, all competitors have fair and equal conditions. All distances for both shore and water events should be measured.

Buoy distances shall normally be measured from the end of knee depth water taking into account varying conditions such as sandbars, exclusion of holes and currents, conditions, prevailing winds and safety factors.

The setting of positions, start lines, turning and finish flags and judging stands shall take into account sand, shoreline and water conditions and prevailing winds to ensure that, as far as possible, a fair and equal course for all competitors is established.

Courses may be adjusted at any time during competition to address safety, account for significant shore condition changes and maintain compliance and course fairness.

Prior to commencement of each race the Chief Referee or Sectional Referee shall check courses to ensure compliance with the rules of the event and this section.

Note: Protests may only be accepted on a competition course prior to the start of an event or a race.

6.3.6 Hazardous Conditions

The Organizing Committee, in consultation with the Chief Referee, has the authority to cancel

or reschedule an event or final. If cancellation should occur, even after the conducting of some

heats, etc., then no points from that event will be credited to any competitor or team in the

overall point score. The decision to cancel an event by the Chief Referee is not subject to

challenge by a competitor, Team Manager or other lifesaving authority.

If the cancellation of the competition occurs due to hazardous conditions, lightning/thunder

storms or insufficient area is available due to extreme windy weather conditions, even after

the conducting of some heats - if not more than 75% have been contested, no “Grand

Aggregate Point” score or “Competitor of the Championships” can be awarded for that group

or for that section.

6.3.7 Assignment of Positions

The number 1 position shall always be on the left (facing the water) for all starts other than events run parallel to the water when the number 1 position shall always be nearest the water. These number 1 positions do not change irrespective of the direction of the event

6.3.8 Draws

The initial draw for heats and shore positions may be conducted at the discretion of the Chief

Referee. Draws for positions in “next” rounds, quarters, semis and finals to be drawn under



the direction of the Chief Referee by a nominated Technical Official, usually the Chief Judge.

The number of heats, quarter final, semi-finals and so on is determined by the draw tables set

out in the appendix. The method used for the draw will be as follows:

a) The Chief Referee will be responsible for all draws for quarters, semis and finals where heats have taken place.

b) The Chief Judge will furnish the Recorders with a draw sheet or the draw sheets at the back of this manual may be used, one sheet for a 16 competitor round and one for a 8 team round (refer appendix) .

c) Prior to the start of each new event, the Chief Judge informs the relevant Recorders of the draw column number chosen at random at the Chief Judge’s discretion alternating between events (for the sake of this explanation presume there are 2 heats of 16 with 8 competitors going through to a final of 16).

d) At the conclusion of each heat, the Recorder will write down the names of the first 8 competitors in Heat 1 in their finishing positions from 1 to 8 on the Recorder’s pads and the same for Heat 2 recording the first 8 competitors in positions from 9 to 16 then in front of each name circled in pen the number that corresponds to that finishing number on the draw sheet from the Chief Judges’ specified pre-drawn column. The circled number will be the competitors draw for the next round.

e) To be duly signed off by the Chief Judge if agreed such process was carried out correctly. A copy thereof to be forwarded to the Check Starter to correctly place each competitor in the correct position for the next round. The draw number must be indicated at the bottom of each record sheet.

It will be the responsibility of the Chief Referee to submit a new draw sheet for the competition

or to use the pre-drawn sheets found at the back of this competition manual. Should there be

insufficient nominations for heats; draws for positions for finals may be conducted at the

discretion of the Chief Referee.

Should there be insufficient nominations for heats, draws for shore positions in semi-finals or

finals may be conducted by LSA or nominated officials and supplied to clubs.

Vacancies created by the disqualification of a competitor or team shall only be filled by the

next place getter participating in the same race.

Vacancies created in qualifying to further rounds of an event due to the withdrawal of a

competitor or team shall only be filled by the next place getter who participated in the same

race.

6.3.9 Competitor Limitations

The Chief Referee or Sectional Referee shall decide whether events shall be conducted in

heats, rounds, quarter-finals, semi-finals or straight out finals. Only the Chief Referee may

authorize changes to these maximum numbers with due consideration for effective judging,

environmental conditions, safety considerations and fairness for all competitors.


Board Race 16 Competitors

Board Relay 16 teams of 3 Competitors

Iron Man & Woman Event 16 Competitors

Iron Nipper 16 Competitors

Open Water Swim 32 Competitors




Nipper Taplin Relay 16 Competitors (team of 3 competitors)

Rescue Tube Rescue 9 Teams of 4 competitors in heats/ 8 teams in final

Run/Swim/Run 32 Competitors

Run/Swim/Run Relay 32 Teams of 3 competitors

Taplin Relay 16 teams of 3 competitors

Note: All events not stating “Nippers” will also apply to Nippers events where applicable.

6.3.10 Eliminations

To assist with the fair conduct of competition if there is an even number of competitors in a

heat at least half the competitors who correctly complete the course should progress to the

next round of the event (e.g. if there are 16 starters in a race at least 8 who correctly compete

the course should qualify for the next round of the event). If there uneven number of

competitors in a heat at least half the competitors less one who correctly complete the course

should progress to the next round of the event (e.g. if there are 7 starters in a race at least 3

who correctly complete the course should qualify for the next round of the event).

Note: Technical Officials should be mindful of confirmed entries when determining the

number of heats/rounds required to conduct an event through to a final and also to, as

far as practicable, have an equal number of competitors in each heat/round.

The Chief Referee may change the number of competitors in remaining heats, after one or

more have been run, if safety conditions warrant, providing that the number going through to

the next round/heat, quarter, semi or final do not compromise the number of qualifiers from

earlier heats.

6.3.11 Time Limits for Events

The time limit for each event shall be as set out in the table below:

EVENT TIME LIMIT

(in minutes)

Board 10

Board Relay 20

Iron Man/Woman & Taplin Relay 20

Iron Nipper & Nipper Taplin Relay 20

Nipper Board 10

Nipper Bodyboard Relay 20

Open Water Swim 10

Rescue Tube Rescue Race 15

Run/Swim/Run 15

Run/Swim/Run Relay 15

Note: All events not stating “Nippers” will also apply to Nipper events where applicable.

No water events to start 1½ hours before sunset.

When warranted the time limit for an event may be extended by 5 minutes by the Chief Referee

after consulting with the appropriate Sectional Referee. Such extension to the time limit shall

be advised to competitors and Technical Officials prior to the commencement of the event. It



is considered that an event has been finished when all the competitors have completed the

event, or the event has been aborted (withdrawn) or when the time limit has expired.

The Chief Referee may declare an event finished if sufficient competitors or teams have

completed the event, without D/Q’s, prior to the time limit expiring or when the number of

competitors required for subsequent rounds have qualified by completing the race without

disqualification, should time become of the essence to complete the competition.

In events requiring patients, any patient arriving at his buoy more than 5 minutes after the

arrival of the first patient, or failing to reach his buoy within 10 minutes, will render his team

disqualified.

Where practicable, disqualifications due to the time limit being exceeded shall be advised to

the competitor by the Chief Referee or Sectional Referee or the Course Judge.

6.3.12 Reporting and Starting Times

Competitors shall advise their intention to start or withdraw by reporting to the Marshal prior

to the start of the event, to be marked off on the draw sheet. Competitors or teams qualifying

for subsequent heats/rounds, who wish to withdraw, must advise the Marshal prior to the next

draw being conducted. Competitors or teams may be subject to a fine if they withdraw.

Each competitor is responsible and shall ascertain the starting time to gain knowledge of

conditions governing the particular event/s. Competitors shall be prompt in reporting to the

Marshal before the start of each event. Competitors will not be allowed to commence in an

event if they are late in reporting to the Marshal.

6.3.13 Marshalling

Competitors shall be marshalled, registered and entries checked by the Marshal, allocated in

heats and positioned according to the draw.

Failure of competitors to present themselves properly attired and complete with satisfactory

equipment when called by the Marshal, may render them liable to disqualification. These

competitors shall be reported to the Chief Referee. It is the obligation of the competitors to be

on the starting line once marshalled and provided further that competitors warming up after

the start of the first heat do not interfere in any way with the conduct of any aspect of the

competition.

6.3.14 Starting of Events

The one-start rule shall be used in all events.

The process of starting events should commence with a signal or command that indicates

“Take Your Marks” followed by a signal or command that indicates “Set” and then followed

by a start signal or command that indicates “Go”. If, for any reason, the Starter has to speak

to any competitor after either command, the start process shall be recommenced.

Start lines may be established in the following manner and competitors must cross the start

line to commence their race:

1. A designated line marked by a cord between two poles and/or with flags. 2. A designated line drawn on the ground between two poles. 3. A line of sight between two poles or straight line in the water or as determined by

the Starter or the Check Starter.



In events where a cord is used competitors’ toes shall be on or behind the line but parts of the

body may overhang the line.

In board events where a cord is used, and the board is held by the competitor, a part of the

craft may be over the line but must be at right angles to the line or at an angle to accommodate

prevailing conditions. In events where a board is placed on the shore line it shall be placed flat

on the ground (i.e. no mounds underneath the board) at 90 degrees and with the nose of the

board on the shoreward side of the start or change-over line.

Whilst every endeavour should be made by the Starter to effect an even start the decision to

“go” on the start signal rests with the competitor or team. If there is no recall by the Starter or

the Check Starter(s) or the Chief or Sectional Referee, no protest shall be allowed on the start.

The first competitor to leave their position on the starting line mark after the command “Take

Your Marks” and before the signal to commence shall be considered to have made a starting

break infringement and a false start declared.

The first competitor who breaks shall be disqualified. If one competitor false starts, others may

follow. Any competitor who follows is not deemed to have false started.

False Start – One Start Rule shall apply to all events.

Note: Irrespective of whether a false start occurred, if in the opinion of the Starter or the

Check Starter, the start was not fair because of a technical defect or other matter not caused

by competitors the Starter must recall the competitors and recommence the starting process.

Prior to the start a Marshall shall:

1. Place competitors in the order as drawn for all heats and or finals. 2. Accompany competitors and their required equipment to the starting area and ensure

that competitors are positioned in proper order.

Prior to the start of each race, designated Technical Officials shall:

1. Check that all Technical Officials are in position. 2. Check that Competitors have swim wear and skull caps for a legal start. 3. Check that equipment and course markers are in position.

A Technical Official shall signal the Starter that the competitors are under the starter’s

control.

If, for any reason, the Starter is not satisfied that all is ready for the start to proceed after

competitors are “Take your Marks”, the Starter shall order all competitors to withdraw from

their marks, and recommence the start. While the Starter makes every attempt to affect a fair

start, the decision to “Go” on the start signal rests with the competitor or team. If there is no

recall by the Starter, Check Starter or Chief Referee, no protest or appeal shall be allowed on

the start.

Notes:

a) The duty of the Starter and Check Starter is to ensure a fair start. If the Starter or Check Starter decides that a start is not fair, for any reason, including technical or equipment fault, the competitors shall be called back and start again. Competitors shall be disqualified if they “commence a forward starting motion” prior to the starting signal.



Involuntary movement by itself is not a disqualification. Anticipating the starting signal and commencing a starting motion is a disqualification.

b) The Starter and Check Starter use their discretion in determining whether a competitor – or more than one competitor – has commenced a starting motion. Commonly, the early starting motion of one competitor causes movement by other competitors. Such movements are not a DQ of the other competitors.

The Starter shall:

1. Have sole jurisdiction over the competitors from the time of the signal until the race has started.

2. Position himself or herself so as to have full visual control over all competitors during the start.

3. Ensure that the start for all races is consistent and fair. 4. Disqualify competitors for false starts.

The Starter’s or Check Starter’s decisions on starts are not subject to protest or appeal.

Competitors entering the water in swim, craft and multi-discipline events may do so at their

own discretion providing there is no interference to other competitors. The competitor entering

the water in second or subsequent legs shall be deemed to be at fault if the progress of a

competitor coming from the water is impeded.

6.3.15 Racing Patient Events

In all events with a racing patient (such as rescue tube rescue), should weather conditions

warrant, the Chief Referee may allow any team members participating in that heat, semi-final

or final, to take up any position anywhere within the confines of the arena to observe the

patients progress and arrival at the buoys and advise his team members accordingly.

6.3.16 Change-Over (Tagging) in Relay Events

Unless otherwise provided (e.g. shore relay) in relay events change-over shall be effected by

a competitor "tagging" the next team member. Tagging is defined as when the incoming

competitor, using either hand, visibly touches the on-going competitor either on the hand or

any other part of the body. The on-going or outgoing competitor shall be positioned with his

feet on or behind the change-over line.

In taplin, board and relay events competitors must commence the leg of the event from the

(correct) position as allocated by the Marshall or Check Starter. If a competitor does not

comply with this, the team will be disqualified.

6.3.17 Completion of Courses

Competitors/teams must compete fairly and adhere to the courses and the rules as detailed

in this Manual or Entry Conditions Circular/s or as directed by the relevant official for the

conduct of various events. Where available, electronic equipment (including video) may be

utilised to assist the judging process.

If a competitor/team misses a turning buoy or turning flag they may, without penalty, alter their

direction and return by their most direct route to correct the course error and continue to the

finish of the event.



In events where it is required to cross a line to finish, should a competitor or team not correctly

cross the finish line as prescribed in the relevant section for that event, they may recover and

correctly re-cross the finish line to record their placing.

Once a competitor has been judged to have correctly crossed the finish line, they will be

deemed to have completed that race. As such, a competitor will then not be permitted to then

re-enter the course to correct any previous race errors.

Where a competitor fails to correctly complete the prescribed course, compete fairly or in any

other way breaches or fails to follow a rule in this manual they will be penalised or disqualified

by the Chief Referee or Sectional Referee at their discretion.

6.3.18 Finish of Events

All events shall be judged visually or with the use of electronic equipment. Placing shall be

decided by Finish Judges. Ties (dead heats) shall be declared as such. Finish Judges shall

be positioned to ensure a clear view of the finish line. Where appropriate Finish Judges shall

be placed in elevated positions.

Judge 1 selects finishers 1 and 2; Judge 2 selects finishers 2 and 3; and so on, with Judges

primarily responsible for their corresponding number (that is, Judge 1 is primarily responsible

for finisher 1, as well as noting who finished second).

At the Chief Judge’s signal, placing discs shall be issued and/or names recorded. Where

available, Finish Judges may use video/electronic equipment to assist them. Video playback

is for use by appointed officials only.

In events where competitors are required to cross a finish line, the finish is judged on the chest

of the competitor when crossing the finish line. They must cross the line on their feet in an

upright position, i.e. not falling or diving across the line and failing to do so correctly,

competitors may recover and correctly re-cross the finish line to record their placing.

Competitors not correctly crossing the finishing line shall be marked as not finished, any

competitor marked as not finished (i.e. “Did Not Finish”/“DNF”) will not be eligible for any

placing or points. Competitor must be notified as for disqualification.

The Chief Referee or Sectional Referee may declare an event “finished” if sufficient

competitors or teams have successfully completed the heat or event, without disqualifications,

prior to the time limit for the event having expired, should time become the essence to

complete the competition.

The Chief Referee may authorize the wearing of electronic finish tags to aid the judging and

recording of races. Competitors must place tags as directed (e.g., around a specified ankle or

wrist or placed on a designated part of their craft). The result of such races shall then be

determined by the order of the finish of the tags across the finish line. In the event of failure of

the electronic tags, all placings in a race shall be visually judged using normal methods.

6.3.19 Dead Heats

In the event of a dead heat the following shall apply:

a) In finals, unless otherwise provided, a dead heat shall be declared as such and trophy allocation shall be as decided by the Chief Referee.

b) Qualifying dead heat competitors in preliminary heats, quarter finals or semi-finals



shall be entitled to compete in the next round or final unless otherwise provided.

6.3.20 “Disqualifications" and “Did Not Finish” Classifications

Competitors or teams may be disqualified from an event or from the entire competition. Where

a competitor is disqualified for any reason, in a heat or a final, the place he or she would have

held shall be awarded to the competitor who finished next and all lower placing competitors

shall be advanced one place.

Where a competitor is disqualified for any reason, the event results shall include a place or

time for the competitor.

a) Did not finish (DNF): Where a competitor does not finish an event for any reason, in a heat or a final, the place he or she would have held shall be awarded to the competitor who finished next and all lower placing competitors shall be advanced one place. Where a competitor does not finish an event, the event results shall not include a place or time for the competitor.

b) Disqualification from competition (D/Q): Examples of behaviour which will result in disqualification of individuals or teams from the competition, include:

• Refusing to fulfil the conditions of entry.

• Breach of the LSA code of conduct.

• The impersonation or use of unauthorised competitors.

• Activities resulting in wilful damage to the venue sites, accommodation sites or the property of others.

• Abuse of officials.

• Acts of discrimination and racism.

• Sexual harassment of competitors. c) Disqualification from events (D/Q): Examples of behaviour, which will result in

disqualification of individuals or teams from an event, include:

• Being absent at the start of an event.

• Infraction of the “General Competitive Conditions” for events or infraction of event rules.

• Competitors shall be notified of their disqualification from an event by the Chief Referee or appropriate Technical Officials, at the completion of the race. Competitors shall not leave the designated competition area until dismissed by the Chief Referee.

d) If an error by a Technical Official follows a fault by a competitor, the fault by the competitor may be expunged at the Chief Referee’s discretion.

6.3.21 Handler

In certain events, especially Ironman/woman and iron nipper and relay races, a handler shall

not be deemed to be a competitor but shall be required to:

a) Be a member of the same team as the competitor and be entered at the competition. (Exemption may be given by the Chief Referee for a member of another team to be a handler provided that the handler is entered at the competition). In nipper competitions the team manager or coach may be considered to be a handler

b) Wear a competition skull cap and shall be required to wear a distinctive high visibility vest as determined by LSA (or the relevant Event Organizer) if entering the water beyond knee depth.

c) Comply with all instructions of the Technical Officials. d) Make every effort to ensure that they, or the equipment that they are handling, does

not impede another competitor, otherwise their competitor may be subject to disqualification.

e) Make every effort to ensure that they and the equipment they are handling do not



impede other competitors (otherwise disqualification of the competitor may result).

6.4 SWIMMING EVENT RULES

Swimming ability is a prime factor in competition lifesaving. Rescue tube races are in fact

"simulated" rescues, with swimming buoys substituting for patients. Swim races are straight-

out tests of ability and encourage members to keep fit for their patrol work.

6.4.1 Rescue Tube Rescue Race

1. The Course The course layout shall be as per the diagram. The start/finish line shall be positioned 5 m from the water’s edge. A further 5 m shore wards from the start/finish line and 5 m apart a set of shore markers 5 m apart and corresponding in colour to and lined up with each swimming buoy shall be positioned.

2. Procedure a) The event shall consist of four competitors in each team – a patient (racing), rescue

tube swimmer and two rescuers i.e. carry/drag party. b) Competitors in the rescue tube rescue race event shall assemble in the marshaling

area and when entries have been checked, buoy colours allocated teams i.e. all four competitors shall then file into the competition area and proceed to their allotted position on the start/finish line as follows: the racing patient stands on the start/finish line, the rescue tube swimmer stands in the allocated position on the shoreward side of the start line. The rescuers stand immediately in front of their allotted shore markers facing the open water and on the shoreward side of the start/finish line. The rescue tube swimmer may hold or don the rescue tube, and may hold the swim fins in his or her hands. Fins may not be worn prior to crossing the start line.

c) On the starting signal the “racing” patients enter the water taking advantage of conditions, swim to their allotted buoy. On reaching their allotted buoy, the patient shall place their forearm over the top of the buoy and then signal their arrival by raising the other arm to a vertical position whilst remaining in contact with the buoy. The said signal, subject to all conditions being fulfilled, shall be the determining factor in judging the patients arrival at their buoy. The patient must then retire to the opposite side of the swimming buoy and await arrival of the rescue tube swimmer.

Notes: 1. Should a patient swim to a wrong buoy and signal the team shall be disqualified. 2. Should the patient swim to the wrong buoy and then correct himself and then

proceed to the correct buoy, before signaling, the team shall not be disqualified. 3. The swimming buoy is described as the buoy only and does not include any

attaching ropes or straps. d) The rescue tube swimmer shall await the patient’s signal and must start from the

correct allocated position on the shoreward side of the start line and may have their toes on or behind the start line. The rescue tube swimmer may wear the rescue tube neck strap (harness) and hold the rescue tube and swim fins in their hands or place them on the sand on the shoreward side of the start/finish line. The wearing of the swim fin/s prior to the starting signal is not permitted.

e) The swim fins and rescue tube shall comply with the specifications as set out in Section 9: Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures.

f) On the patient’s arrival signal, the rescue tube swimmer crosses the start/finish line, dons the rescue tube harness (if not already being worn) and swim fins at their own discretion and swims out to make the rescue of their patient. The rescue tube swimmer swims to the left hand side of the designated buoy (viewed from the shore) to the awaiting patient on the outside side of the buoy.



Note: The team shall not be disqualified if the rescue tube swimmer crosses the start line and then resumes the correct position to correctly await the arrival signal from their patient.

g) The rescue tube swimmer and/or the patient secure the rescue tube around the patient’s body and under both arms and clipped to an O-ring. The patient may assist with the securing and clipping of the rescue tube. The patient and rescue tube swimmer must remain behind the buoy line during the ‘clip in’ process. With the patient clipped into the rescue tube, the rescue tube swimmer continues (clockwise) around the buoy towing the patient to the shore.

h) Rescue tubes must be donned correctly, either with the loop over one shoulder, or over the shoulder and across the chest – at the competitor’s discretion. The rescue tube must be towed behind the rescue tube swimmer with the line fully extended; no knots are permitted to shorten the tow line.

i) The rescuers may move from their allotted positions once the rescue tube swimmer has commenced swimming but must return to their position behind the start/finish line before the tow commences. At their own discretion, they may then cross the start/finish line and enter the water, and assist the rescue tube swimmer to bring the patient back to the shore. Note: The rescuers shall not be penalized if they cross the start/finish line before the rescue tube swimmer has started to tow the patient back to the shore and provided that they come back across the start/finish line before assisting in the carry/drag of the patient.

j) The patient is permitted to assist by kicking and sculling with arms under the surface, but must not swim with an out-of-water arm recovery. The patient must not be towed on their stomach. Only the rescue tube swimmer is permitted to use swim fins. Rescuers and patients shall not use any equipment or swim fins. Rescuers will simply assist with the rescue.

k) On return to the shore the rescuers must drag or carry the patient to the finish line. The finish is judged on the chest of the first team member of the rescuers crossing the finish line in an upright position on their feet (the rescue tube need not be attached to the patient). The patient is not permitted to assist the carrying party at any time by walking or running, but the patient may assist by lifting the legs during the carry. Rescuers should continue to drag or carry the patient well past the finish line to assist with judging of other teams in the event.

Notes:

1. Rescue tube swimmers and the two rescuers, who have previously crossed over the start line (for whatever reason), must return to the shoreward side of the start line prior to beginning their leg of the event.

2. At the start, rescue tube swimmers may place the rescue tubes and swim fins on the shoreward side of the start/finish line or may hold their swim fins and rescue tubes in their hands. The rescue tube harness may be worn.

3. Rescue tubes must be worn with the harness across or over one shoulder. 4. The patient may assist the rescue tube swimmer in securing the rescue tube. Either

may clip-in the rescue tube, but the patient must be clipped into the tube behind the buoy line.

5. Rescue tube swimmers must tow the victim with the tube secured around the body and under both arms and clipped in an O-ring.

6. The patient must not be towed on the stomach. 7. During the tow, the patient may assist by kicking and sculling with the arms under the

surface, but must not swim with an out-of-water arm recovery stroke. 8. At no time, may the patient assist by walking or running. 9. Only the rescue tube swimmer may use the swim fins. Rescuers and patients shall not

use any equipment or swim fins.



3. Judging

Finish Judges shall be positioned at each end of the finishing line at least 5 m from the flagged

markers and in line with each other. A Water Judge (Course Judge) shall be positioned in line

with the buoys 5 m from the Red/Yellow or Green/Yellow buoys, so to have a clear line of sight

of all swim buoys as shown in the diagram.

Note: Infringements recorded during the event observed by any of the Technical

Officials shall be reported to the Chief Referee who shall adjudicate on the

infringement with the Technical Officials concerned. A Water Judge observing an

infringement shall report to the Chief Referee as soon as practical and prior to the race

result being signed off.



6.4.2 Rescue Tube Race


a) Rescue tubes and fins are placed on the shore, approximately 10 m from the water’s edge in line with the competitor’s designated buoy peg.

b) Competitors take their positions on the starting line approximately 5 m from the water’s edge. On the starting signal, competitors race up the shore to obtain their rescue tubes and fins, and donning the equipment at their discretion, enter the water and swim toward and around (the left side, viewed from the shore) their designated buoy to return to the shore and cross the finish line.

c) The finish is judged on the chest of the competitor crossing the finish line in an upright position in possession of both fins and with the rescue tube strap over the shoulder.

Notes:

1. At the start, the rescue tube and fins must be positioned at competitors’ discretion at and on the seaward side of the competitors’ designated buoy peg.

2. Rescue tubes must be worn with the shoulder loop across or over one shoulder.

2. The course

The rescue tube race shall be conducted under the general rules of the Rescue Tube Rescue.

The course shall be the same as the Rescue Tube Rescue as shown in the following diagram.



To ensure fair starts and finishes, alignment of the start line and finish line to the buoys may

be altered at the discretion of the Chief Referee, depending on the prevailing sea conditions.

3. Judging

An in-boat Judge shall be positioned in line with the buoys as shown in the diagram. Finish

Judges shall be positioned at each end of the finish line at least 5 m from the flag pole and in

line with each flag pole.

6. Equipment

Rescue tube: See Section 9: Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures.

6.4.3 Open Water Swim Race

1. The Course

The course shall be as detailed in the diagrams. In the event that it is necessary to lay special

turning buoys for swimming events, then not less than two buoys shall be laid (a minimum

distance of 10 m apart).

The buoy distances are as follow:

AGE GROUP DISTANCE

Nipper

U/9 & U/10 60 m

U/11 & U/12 60 m

U/13 & U/14 80 m

Junior

U/15 120 m

U/17 120 m

U/19 120 m

Senior Senior 120 m


2. Procedure

1. Competitors in swimming events shall assemble in the marshalling area and, when names are checked and placed in drawn order, the competitors shall file into the competition area in order as directed.

2. At the given signal the competitors shall commence from the start line, enter the water without impeding any other competitors in the event, swim to and around the buoys, and return to shore and finish between the two finish flags.

3. Competitors may be positioned after the finish in either of the following ways: 1. On a straight line drawn at approximately a 30 degree angle from the finishing

line and up the shore. 2. On a series of lines 10 m behind and at right angles to the finishing line and 5 m

apart.





6.4.4 Run/Swim/Run Race 1. Event description

From the start line, competitors run past the turning flag at the water’s edge and enter the

water to swim out to and around the string of nine (9) coloured buoys for Junior and Senior

and around the two swim buoys in Nippers. Competitors swim back to the shore and again

run past the turning flag to the finish line.

2. The course (The start/finish line may be either from the left or right depending

on environmental conditions)

As shown in the following diagram, the course shall be laid out from the left so that competitors

run the course from the start/finish line to a turning marker with an flag at the water’s edge

keeping the turning marker and flag on the left shoulder, enter the water and swim a swim leg



and on returning to the water’s edge run from the turning marker and flag to the finish indicated

by two flags spaced approximately 5 m apart.

Note: In the diagram the turning marker/flag is on the left shoulder on the way out and the

right shoulder on the way back.

The buoy distances for the swim leg are as follow:

AGE GROUP DISTANCE

Nipper

U/9 & U/10 60 m

U/11 & U/12 60 m

U/13 & U/14 80 m

Junior

U/15 120 m

U/17 120 m

U/19 120 m

Senior Senior 120 m


The distance for the run legs are as follow (note: distance is for each leg):

AGE GROUP DISTANCE

Nipper

U/9 & U/10 50 m

U/11 & U/12 60 m

U/13 & U/14 70 m

Junior

U/15 90 m

U/17 90 m

U/19 90 m

Senior Senior 90 m


3. Judging

Competitors may not grab and or dislodge the turning marker/flag positioned at the water’s

edge and must finish on their feet in an upright position. The finish is judged on the competitor’s

chest crossing the finish line. Technical Officials shall be placed to observe the conduct of the

event as well as determine competitors’ placing at the finish line.

The Judge in boat is positioned in line with the string of nine (9) coloured buoys so as not to

hinder/obstruct competitors rounding the red/yellow and green/gold buoys but to allow clear

observation of any likely infringement of the rules by competitors rounding and or swimming

along the line of coloured buoys.

6. Disqualification

In addition to the General Conditions. Section 2: General Competitive Conditions and par. 6.3 of this section, failure to complete the course as defined and described above shall result in disqualification.



6.4.5 Run/Swim/Run Relay Race 1. General Conditions

The run/swim/relay race event shall be conducted under General Conditions. Section 2:

General Competitive Conditions and par. 6.3 of this section.

Teams will consist of three competitors – a swimmer and two runners.


From the start line, the first competitor run to the change-over line and tags the swimmer, who

is standing on the line at the water’s edge. The swimmer (2nd competitor) enters the water to

swim out to and around the string of nine (9) coloured buoys. Competitors swim back to the

shore and tags the 2nd runner (3rd competitors) who runs to the finish line.

3. The course (The start/finish line may be either from the left or right depending

on environmental conditions)

As shown in the following diagram, the course shall be laid out from the left so that competitors

run the course as set out below from the start/finish line to the change-over line, demarcated



with two flags at the water’s edge keeping, The swimmer enters the water and swim the swim

leg and on returning to the water’s edge tags the 3rd competitor who should be standing on

the change-over line, who then runs to the start/finish line indicated by two flags spaced

approximately 60 m apart.

Note: In the diagram the turning marker/flag is on the left shoulder on the way out and the

right shoulder on the way back.

The buoy distances for the swim leg and run legs are as set out in the run/swim/run race above

(par. 6.6.6 of this section) the distance for the run legs are as set out above (note: distance is

for each leg):

4. Judging

Competitors must tag the next competitor as set out in par. 6.3.16 of this section. Competitors

may not grab and or dislodge the marker/flag positioned at the water’s edge and must finish

on their feet in an upright position. The finish is judged on the competitor’s chest crossing the

finish line. Technical Officials shall be placed to observe the conduct of the event as well as

determine competitors’ placing at the finish line.

The Judge-in-Boat is positioned in line with the string of nine (9) coloured buoys so as not to

hinder/obstruct competitors rounding the red/yellow and green/gold buoys but to allow clear

observation of any likely infringement of the rules by competitors rounding and or swimming

along the line of coloured buoys.

5. Disqualification

In addition to the General Conditions. Section 2: General Competitive Conditions and par. 6.3 of this section.



6.5 CRAFT EVENTS

6.5.1 General Conditions of Craft Events

a) The rules contained in this section shall apply to board races. b) No artificial means of propulsion may be used in board races, i.e. hand webs, swim

fins, etc. c) The use of wax or similar substances to assist the competitor in maintaining the

grip on or contact with boards is permitted. d) In board competitors may pass through the swimming buoys on their craft. Should

impediment occur as a result the onus is on the competitor that chose that direction and no protest/appeal will be entertained.

e) All craft must be in accordance to the specifications as set out in Section 9: Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures, and the Chief Referee may request competitor/s to submit their craft for scrutineering before, during or after the competition. All craft must display a decal stating that the craft has been manufactured according to LSA specifications. Failure to display such a decal will disqualify the craft from the competition.

f) In events where competitors are required to cross a finish line, and fail to do so correctly, competitors may recover and correctly re-cross the finish line to record their placing. The placing will be the re-crossed finish line position.

g) Replacing boards is permitted during an event provided such replacement is effected before the competitor rounds the last course buoy.

h) Club or team members shall be permitted to assist in replacing equipment, but only to the extent of placing replacement equipment at the water's edge. It is the responsibility of the club or team members to ensure that any abandoned or damaged equipment does not cause any interference to another team or competitor in the race.

i) In board relay races, a member of the competitor’s club/team may assist the competitors. With the Chief Referee’s approval, a non-team member may act as handler provided he or she is a member of the same club/region and is registered to participate at the championship in some capacity and is wearing the approved club’s skull cap on the head and properly fastened under the chin.

6.5.2 Juniors/ Seniors and Masters Board Race

1. The Course

a) The course(s) shall be as detailed in the diagram. b) Two orange buoys, equal in size to a 50 litre drum shall be used and be

placed about 75 m apart 200 m measured from knee deep water. A third buoy is placed midway between these turning buoys (called the “apex” buoy). The apex buoy should be approximately 16 m further from the turning buoys and with the two buoys should form a triangle.

c) The centre of the start line is to be in line with the first turning buoy but may vary at the discretion of the Chief Referee.

d) The finish line for board events shall be between two flags. The centre of this line is to be relative to the third turning buoy allowing for the prevailing weather conditions.

2. Procedure


b) The distance between boards at the start should be 1.5 m. On the starting signal from the Starter, the competitors shall enter the water with their boards and paddle around their respective board buoys and return to the shore.



c) Competitors may lose contact and control of their board without disqualification. If a competitor deliberately impedes the progress of another competitor he may be disqualified.

d) To complete the race, a competitor must have (or have regained) his board and cross the finish line from the water side whilst maintaining contact with his board.

e) The finish is judged on the chest of the competitor crossing the finish line on his feet while being in control of the board.

6.5.3 Nippers Board Race

The U/9 and U/10 must use the 2.6 m or 2.9 m Nipper Boards. The U/11, U/12, U/13 and

U/14 age groups may use the standard board (3.2 m board), as used in junior, senior and

master competition as specified in Section 9: Facilities, Equipment Standards and



Scrutineering Procedures. These age group may also use other nipper boards as specified

in Section 9: Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures: nipper hard

board and nipper soft board specifications

1. The Course

a) The course(s) shall be as detailed in the diagram. b) The turning buoys are moored 60 m measured from knee deep water for

U/9, U/10, U/11 and U/12 age group and 80 m measured from knee deep water for U/13 and U/14 age group.

c) The centre of the start line is to be in line with the first turning buoy 5 m from the water’s edge but may vary at the discretion of the Chief Referee.

d) The centre of the finish line is to be in line with the last turning buoy 5 m from the water’s edge. The finish for board events shall be between two finishing flags. The centre of this line is to be relative to the last turning buoy allowing for the prevailing weather conditions.

2. Procedure


b) Nippers may use boards as per specifications. c) The distance between boards at the start should be 1.5 m. On the starting

signal from the Starter, the competitors shall enter the water with their boards and paddle around their respective board buoys and return to the shore.

d) Competitors may lose contact and control of their board without disqualification. If a competitor deliberately impedes the progress of another competitor he may be disqualified.

e) To complete the race, a competitor must have (or have regained) his board and cross the finish line from the outside side whilst maintaining contact with his board.

f) The finish is judged on the chest of the competitor crossing the finish line on his feet while being in control of the board.



6.5.4 Board Relay Race

1. General Conditions

a) Board relay events shall be conducted under General Conditions of the board. b) Teams shall consist of 3 competitors. Team members may use the same craft.

2. Control of Craft

A competitor must paddle his board, around the last course turning buoy and shall not be

disqualified if he loses control or contact with his craft after the last course turning buoy on the

return journey. A competitor can lose control or contact with his craft on the way out provided

he regains the craft and rounds the last course turning buoy in contact with the craft and

completes the course.

3. The Finish

In events where competitors are required to cross a finish line, and fail to do so correctly,



competitors may recover and correctly re-cross the finish line to record their placing. The

placing will be the re-crossed finish line position.

6. The Course

a) For seniors and juniors the course will be around the craft buoys as defined for board races.

b) The course shall be as detailed in the diagram.

5. Procedure

a) Competitors must obey the Starter’s or Check Starter’s directions concerning craft alignment at the start.

b) First Competitor: Competitors for the first leg of the relay shall be started as in the respective discipline and paddle around the designated buoys. Having completed the course, the first competitor may leave his or her craft (and paddle) at the water’s edge, sprint round the two turning flags to tag the second competitor on the designated changeover line.

c) Second Competitor: The second competitor completes the same course and tags the third competitor on the designated changeover line.

d) Third Competitor: The third competitor completes the same course, rounds one turning flag, passes the other turning flag on the shoreward side, and finishes between the two finish flags.

e) Competitors in the board relay events must commence their leg of the event from the correct allotted position.


g) Competitors are not permitted to hold or otherwise interfere with other competitors craft or deliberately impede their progress.

1st & 3rd Competitor’s

starting position 1 2 3 6 5 6 7 8 ...16

2nd Competitor’s starting

position 16 15 16 13 12 11 10 9 …1



6.5.5 Nippers Board Relay Race

The U/9 and U/10 compete as a team in the U/10 category and use a 2.6 or 2.9 m board –.

The U/11 and U/12 compete in a team in the U/12 board relay category and the U/13 and U/14

compete as a team in the U/14 board relay category and use the board only.


a) Board relay events shall be conducted under General Conditions of the board events. b) Teams shall consist of 3 competitors. Team members may use the same craft.

2. Control of Craft

Competitors must be in contact with the board up to and including the last course buoy.

Competitors shall not be disqualified if they lose contact with the craft on the return journey

from the buoys. Competitors may lose contact on the way out without penalty provided they



regain the craft and round the last turning buoy of each leg in contact with the craft and

complete the course.

3. The Finish


competitors may recover and correctly re-cross the finish line to record their placing. The

placing will be the re-crossed finish line position.

6. The Course

The course(s) shall be as detailed in the diagram.

5. Procedure

a) Competitors must obey the Starter’s or Check Starter’s directions concerning craft alignment at the start.

b) First Competitor: Competitors for the first leg of the relay shall be started as in the respective discipline and paddle around the buoys. Having completed the course, the first competitor may leave his or her craft at the water’s edge, sprint round the two turning flags to tag the second competitor on the designated start changeover line.

c) Second Competitor: The second competitor completes the same course and tags the third competitor on the designated start changeover line.

d) Third Competitor: The third competitor completes the same course, rounds one turning flag, passes the other turning flag on the shoreward side, and finishes between the two finish flags.

e) Competitors in the board relay events must commence their leg of the event from the correct allotted position.




g) Competitors are not permitted to hold or otherwise interfere with other competitors’ craft or deliberately impede their progress.



6.6 MULTI-DISCIPLINE EVENTS

6.6.1 General Conditions

Events where more than one discipline is performed are termed “multi-discipline events” and

include ironman/woman and taplin relay. Different disciplines in each particular event are

referred to as "legs" of that event.

Conditions of racing of each leg are as generally required for the individual conditions of that

discipline with differences as detailed in this section. In ironman/woman and taplin relay events

the competitors on the craft legs may not pass through the swim buoys.

6.6.2 Order of Legs

One ballot shall be taken at the commencement of each competition or day of the competition,

in competitions stretching over more than one day, a new draw shall be done per day to

determine the order for the swim and the board leg (for juniors or seniors)



In juniors, seniors and masters taplin relay the run leg will always be last.

The order of legs in the nipper taplin events shall be fixed, it will be –run, swim, board.

The order of legs in the iron nippers events shall be fixed, it will be – swim, board and a sprint.

6.6.3 Starting Positions

Competitors or teams must commence craft legs from the correct allotted shore positions. The

starting positions are reversed for the board legs. For example, in a 16-competitor race in

which a competitor has drawn position 1: the competitor commences the initial craft leg from

position 1 but commences the other craft leg from position 16.



6.6.4 The Finish


competitors may recover and correctly re-cross the finish line to record their placing.

6.6.5 Handler

Competitors may be assisted by a handler, who is not considered to be a competitor, but shall:

a) Be a member of the same lifesaving authority as the competitor (exemption may be given by the Chief Referee for a member of another lifesaving authority to be a handler provided that the handler is entered at the competition).

b) Wear a registered skull cap. c) Wear a distinctive high-visibility vest as required by competition organizers if

entering the water beyond knee depth. d) Make every effort to ensure that he and his craft do not impede another competitor;

otherwise his competitor will be subject to disqualification. e) Comply with all instructions of the officials.

6.6.6 Replacing of Boards

Equipment may be replaced during an event. The handler or team or club members

shall be permitted to assist in replacing equipment, but only to the extent of placing

replacement equipment at the start and change-over line (SCO line). Handlers, team

or club members may remove damaged or abandoned equipment. It is the

responsibility of the handler, team/club members to ensure that any abandoned or

damaged equipment does not cause any interference to another team or competitor in

the race.

6.6.7 Control of Craft

Competitors must be in contact with the board up to and including the last course buoy.

Competitors shall not be disqualified if they lose contact with the craft on the return

journey from the buoys. Competitors may lose contact on the way out without penalty

provided they regain the craft and round the last turning buoy of each leg in contact

with the craft and complete the course.

6.6.8 Shortening of Course

In the event that it is necessary to lay special turning buoys for swimming events – for

example if there is a need to shorten the course, then not less than two buoys must be

used.



6.6.9 Iron Man / Woman Race


Legs: This event shall be conducted over a course which shall include a swim leg, a board

leg, and finish with a shore sprint leg.

2. The Course

The course shall be as detailed in the diagram.

3. The Procedure

For the purpose of this description the ballot will be board and swim and the course direction

is right hand in.

a) Board Course: The board leg is conducted from the SCO Line, around the swimming buoys and two board buoys return to the shore and around the two turning flags and passing between the SCO poles.

b) Swim Course: The swim leg is conducted from the SCO Line, around the swimming buoys and returning to the shore.

c) Shore Sprint Course and Finish: The race will be concluded when a competitor completes all legs. To finish a competitor rounds one turning flag passes the other turning flag on the shoreward side and finishes between the two finish flags.

Note: The turning flags are to be rounded clockwise, i.e. right hand in.

The competitor shall cover all legs of the course as laid down in the diagram.

6.6.10 Iron Nipper Race

General Conditions as set out in the Iron Man/ Woman must be adhered to.


Legs: This event shall be conducted over a course which shall include a swim leg, a board

leg and finish with a shore sprint leg.

Control of craft: Competitors must be in contact with the board up to and including the last



course buoy. Competitors shall not be disqualified if they lose contact with the craft on the

return journey from the buoys. Competitors may lose contact on the way out without penalty

provided they regain the craft and round the last turning buoy of each leg in contact with the

craft and complete the course.

2. The Course

The course shall be as detailed in the diagram. Competitors will go around the two craft buoys

moored 80 m measured from knee deep water for all the legs.

3. The Procedure

Swim and Board Course: The course direction is right hand in. Both are conducted from the

start line, around the craft buoys, returning to the shore, around the two turning flags and

passing between the SCO lines.

Shore Sprint Course and Finish: The race will be concluded when a competitor completes

all legs. To finish a competitor rounds one turning flag passes the other turning flag on the



shoreward side and finishes between the two finish flags.

Note: The turning flags are to be rounded clockwise in the same direction as the buoys for

each leg.

6.6.11 Taplin Relay Race (Juniors, Seniors and Masters) 1. General Conditions

a) Team Composition: Teams shall comprise 3 competitors (1 swimmer, 1 board paddler, and 1 runner).

b) Placing of Equipment: Items of equipment shall be placed adjacent to the respective starting discipline areas of the various craft by team members.

c) Legs: This event shall be conducted over a course which shall include a swim leg, a board leg, and finish with a shore sprint leg.

2. The Course

The course shall be as detailed in the taplin relay race diagram.

3. Procedure a) On the starting signal the swimmer shall enter the water round the swimming

buoys and return to the shore, round the two turning flags and tag the board paddler, who shall be waiting, with his board, with his feet on or on the shoreward side of the SCO line.

b) The board paddler will then round the board course and return to the shore, round the two turning flags and tag the runner waiting at the water’s edge. The location of the tag is at the discretion of the team provided it occurs after the last course buoy has been rounded and before the first shore turning flag.

c) As the shore sprint leg is always the last leg the runner shall remain at the water’s edge no deeper than knee deep until tagged by the board paddler. The runner then rounds one turning flag, right hand in and passes on the shoreward side of the other turning flag, and continuing to the finish between the two finish flags.

Removal of craft from the competition course during the event is only permitted by handlers

authorized by the Chief Referee and provided they do not impede the progress of other

competitors. Competitors in the taplin relay events must commence their leg of the event from

the (correct) position as allotted by the Check Starter. If the competitor does not comply with

this the teams shall be disqualified.



6.6.12 Taplin Relay Race (Nippers)


Team Composition - Teams shall comprise 3 competitors (1 swimmer, 1 board paddler and 1

runner) for the U/9 and U/10 combined, U/11 and U/12 combined and U/13 and U/14

combined.

Placing of Equipment- Items of equipment shall be placed adjacent to the respective starting

areas of the various craft by team members.

2. The Course

The course shall be as detailed in the taplin relay diagram.

3. Procedure a) The sequence of legs in nippers, the draw is always 600 m shore run, swim, board (and

the course direction is right hand in. the start will be 600 m along the shore from the designated turn flag.

b) On the starting signal the runner will run to and round the designated turning flag depending on the direction of the run and tag the swimmer, who shall be waiting with his feet on the shoreward side of the SCO line.

c) Swimmer shall enter the water round the two turning buoys and return to the shore, round the two turning flags and tag the or board paddler who shall be waiting, with his board, with his feet on or on the shoreward side of the SCO line.

d) The board paddler will round the two turning buoys and return to the shore, round the first turning flag pass the other turning flag on the shoreward side and continues to the finish between the two finish flags.

e) Removal of craft from the competition course during the event is only permitted by a team member or other person(s) authorised by the Chief Referee and provided they do



not impede the progress of other competitors. f) Competitors in the taplin relay events must commence their leg of the event from the

(correct) position as allotted by the Check Starter. If the competitor does not comply with this the teams will be disqualified.

Section 7 –Simulated Emergency Response Competition


SECTION 7: SIMULATED EMERGENCY RESPONSE COMPETITION (SERC) - INDEX

7.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR SIMULATED EMERGENCY

RESPONSE COMPETITION…………………..……...……………….

2

7.1.1 Security and lock-up ………………………………………. 2

7.1.2 Competition start ……………………………………………….. 3

7.1.3 Competition arena …………………………………………….. 3

7.1.4 Situation scenarios …………………………………………….. 3

7.1.5 Victims, manikins and bystanders ……………………………. 3

7.1.6 Equipment ………………………………………………………. 4

7.1.7 Start and timekeeping …………………………………………. 4

7.2 PRINCIPLES OF RESCUE …………………………………………………. 4

7.2.1 Lifesaver versus lifeguard response ………………………… 4

7.3 JUDGING AND MARKING …………………………………………………. 5

7.4 Marking system ………………………………………………… 5

7.5 Disqualification ………………………………………………….. 6

DISQUALIFICATION CODES FOR SERC ………………………………………… 7

SERC: SAMPLE CHIEF JUDGE SCORING SHEET – OVERALL ………………. 8

SERC: SAMPLE JUDGE SCORING SHEET – Non-swimmer ………………… 9

SERC: SAMPLE JUDGE SCORING SHEET – Weak Swimmer ……………….. 10

SERC: SAMPLE JUDGE SCORING SHEET– Unconscious / non-breathing

Victim …………………………………………………………………………………..

11

SERC: SAMPLE JUDGE SCORING SHEET – Injured Victim ………………….. 12

SERC: SAMPLE JUDGES SCORING SHEET – Bystander …………………… 13



SECTION 7: SIMULATED EMERGENCY RESPONSE COMPETITION (SERC) The Simulated Emergency Response Competition (SERC) tests the initiative, judgement, knowledge, and abilities of four lifesavers who, acting as a team – under the direction of a team leader – apply lifesaving skills in a simulated emergency situation unknown to them prior to the start. This competition is judged within a two-minute time limit. All teams respond to the same scenario and are evaluated by the same Judges. Every effort will be made to ensure that the scenario is executed in the same manner for every team. The Simulated Emergency Response Competition shall be conducted without male and female categories. Teams may consist of any combination of males or females.

7.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR SIMULATED EMERGENCY RESPONSE

COMPETITION a) Team management and Teams are responsible for being familiar with the competition

schedule, and with the rules and procedures governing the competition. b) Teams may not be permitted to commence in the SERC event if they are late reporting

to the marshalling area. To assist the organisers in determining how many heats may be required, events may be marshalled the day before or at the start of the day the event is scheduled.

c) The Chief Referee shall decide whether the competition shall be conducted in heats, quarterfinals, semi-finals, or finals. A final may not have more than 8 teams of four.

d) If heats are conducted the top 8-point scoring teams shall be assigned places in the

final. If heats are conducted in different “tanks” (i.e. separate area with separate

judges) the top teams from each competition “tank” will progress to the final (e.g. if

there are four tanks used for the heats, the top four teams from each tank will progress

to the final). When a tie occurs that qualifies for a final the tied teams shall all advance

to the final. Should one or more teams withdraw from the final, up to a maximum of

four teams shall be called forward from the reserves list. The final shall not be re-

seeded. Reserves will come from the same “tank” as the withdrawn team provided that

marshalling lock-up has not closed for the event. The final shall not be re-seeded.

e) The order of teams shall be determined by draw in a method approved by the Chief

Referee.

f) Any written instructions provided in lock-up, which are required for the management of

the simulated emergency, shall be provided in English. Each team may bring one

additional person into lock-up to provide interpretation/translation of the English

instructions. This person remains in lock-up with the team.

Note: Organisers should allow sufficient time for translation of verbal or written instructions.

g) Teams shall report promptly to the lock-up area at the designated time before the start

of the competition. A team that is absent from lock-up at the start of the competition

shall be disqualified (DQ 3).

h) Teams shall treat and handle victims with care: verbal and physical abuse is

unnecessary and inappropriate and may result in penalty or disqualification (DQ 10).

i) Teams may wear corrective eyewear such as glasses and contact lens. Loss of such

eyewear shall not be grounds for protest or appeal. Corrective goggles or masks are

not permitted.

j) Body tape used for preventative, medical, therapeutic or kinesiology purposes is

allowed at the discretion of the Chief Referee as long as it does not provide a

competitive advantage.

k) Team members must wear their national team or club cap. A team shall not be

disqualified if Teams skull cap is lost after the start of an event provided that officials

can identify that the competitor correctly completed the event.



l) No other personal belongings or equipment are permitted in the competition arena

(e.g., watches, phones or any other communication device, goggles, masks, fins).

Teams may be required to remove jewellery which might cause harm to the rescuer or

victim.

m) Judges’ scores are not subject to protest.

7.1.1 Security and lock-up Before the start and throughout the competition, teams are isolated in a secure “lock-up” area out of sight and sound of the competition arena. The scenario, actors, and any equipment shall be secret until Teams are locked up. After competing, a team may observe subsequent teams compete. Teams in lock-up are not permitted to see or communicate with anyone who is not also in lock-up. Any device that would allow such communication is prohibited.

7.1.2 Competition start

One at a time, teams are escorted from lock-up to the pool where, following an acoustic

signal, they are confronted with “victims” in various locations who need various types of

assistance.

Actors will begin their victim simulations immediately prior to the acoustic starting signal, and

as the team enters the competition area. At the acoustic signal Teams respond to the victims

in any manner they wish within the time limit.

7.1.3 Competition arena

The Simulated Emergency Response Competition may be held in a variety of indoor and

outdoor aquatic environments. The competition arena shall be clearly defined to all teams in

advance. There shall be a clear indication of the location of both entry and exit points from

the scenario area (e.g., which pool sides can be used). Teams shall be advised in advance if

there are pool steps in the entry or exit area which may be removed or used. Unless

otherwise advised, Teams shall assume that the conditions in the competition arena are “as

found.” When electronic timing is available, it must be used as a countdown clock for teams

and spectators.

7.1.4 Situation scenarios

Simulated emergency scenarios, secret until the start of the competition, shall be designed

using one or more of the following approaches:

1. An amalgam of single or multiple-person situations which are related.

2. A group of people involved in a number of situations which relate to a common

theme, such as a pool party or an over-turned crowded boat.

3. A number of groups of people in a number of multiple themes.

Simulated emergencies shall be staged as realistically (and as safely) as possible, and not

test the Teams’ imagination. For example, a situation in which an actor complains of burned

hands should be staged with simulated evidence of a fire, or electrical wire, or chemicals.

(Real fire, live wires, or actual chemicals shall not be used.)

7.1.5 Victims, manikins and bystanders Victims shall be role-played by actors who present different problems necessitating different types of aid. Victim types may include simulated non-swimmers, weak swimmers, injured swimmers, and unconscious victims. In addition, teams may be confronted by resuscitation manikins in the role of “victim” as well as by bystanders and swimmers.



The role-playing may evolve (e.g., a conscious victim becomes unconscious) during the course of the scenario providing that marks reflect the change, that there is consistent timing in the change, and that the change is consistent for every team throughout the competition. Teams shall be notified before the start if victim type is to be signified by a symbol (e.g., a red/black cross on forehead indicating unconsciousness). Teams shall treat manikins as non-breathing, pulseless victims. Notes:

1. A bystander in a competition is not in immediate danger. 2. Only simulated CPR should be applied to live human victims. 3. CPR beyond diagnosis and the simulation of 2 rescue breaths will NOT be required

on live victims

7.1.6 Equipment

Teams may use all material and equipment available within the competition arena. Teams

may not bring their own equipment into the competition arena.

7.1.7 Start and timekeeping

An acoustic signal will indicate the start and finish of each team’s emergency response.

7.2 PRINCIPLES OF RESCUE

7.2.1. Lifesaver versus lifeguard response

SERC teams are expected to respond as a group of four individual lifesavers acting in a

coordinated team under the direction of a team leader.

Unlike lifeguards who often work as part of well-trained teams in controlled aquatic

environments, lifesavers must be prepared to respond appropriately in unexpected

emergencies without benefit of specialised equipment, back-up, or established procedures

and communications systems. In such circumstances, the personal safety of the lifesaver is

paramount at all times and this shall be reflected in the marking sheets.

Teams apply the following basic rescue steps:

1. Recognition of a problem

2. Assessment of the situation

3. Plan a course of action to overcome the problem

4. Action to effect the rescue

5. Care of the victim

When assessing the situation, teams consider:

1. Capabilities of the rescuer

2. Number of victims

3. Position of the victims

4. Condition of the victims (e.g., non-swimmer, weak swimmer)

5. Rescue aids (equipment) available

6. Conditionsprevailing (e.g., water depth, entry and landing points)

On the basis of their assessment, teams plan a course of action which may involve:

1. Seeking assistance

2. Organising assistance



3. Informing an available helper

4. Gathering any appropriate aids or equipment

5. Performing the rescue as necessary

The plan should establish control of the situation and aim to preserve as many lives as

possible. The management of a rescue of multiple victims presents rescuers with choices.

In brief, rescuers should manage the situation as follows:

1. Mobilise the mobile

2. Secure the safety of those in imminent danger

3. Recover and resuscitate those in need of continuous care

The mobile may include those capable of assisting themselves to safety. Those in imminent

danger may include non-swimmers and injured swimmers. Those in need of continuous care

include unconscious, non-breathing, or suspected spinal-injured victims.

When a suitable plan has been devised it should be put into action promptly. Teams should

be alert to changes in the situation and adapt their plan of action to respond to such

changes.

When carrying out a rescue Teams must remember:

1. Rescue from a position offering greatest safety to oneself

2. The management of rescue principles

3. Approach victims with extreme caution

4. Avoid direct personal contact with conscious victims

If entering the water is inevitable, Teams select the most effective techniques for the

situation without endangering their own life in any way.

It is important that Teams clearly show their intentions and actions to the Judges.

7.3 JUDGING AND MARKING

The marking sheets shall be prepared with one Judge marking the entire scenario while the

others judge the handling of the individual victims. One Judge per victim is recommended.

Before the competition start, Judges shall be briefed on the situation scenarios, scoring

procedure and marking priorities.

A Judge shall be assigned to a victim or group of victims and assess all teams in that part of

the scenario for the entire competition.

7.3.1 Marking system

The marking system used in this competition allows Judges to use their skill in assigning

marks and provides for a competitor offering an appropriate but unanticipated rescue

response. In allocating marks, Judge(s) consider the following:

1. victim type

2. victim’s distance from safety

3. equipmentavailable and used

4. speed of assessment

5. priority given

6. quality of action/task

7. victim care



Early and accurate recognition of the victim’s problem(s) is the essential first step to success

in this competition. Successful recognition is closely related to the quality of the victim

simulation and staging of the incidents.

Scoring shall reward the teams’ accurate assessment of which victims take priority.

The teams’ assessment of which victims take priority will depend on the nature of the

emergency. For in-water victims, teams should follow these victim priorities in determining

whom to help first:

1. Weak swimmers and others who are mobile

2. Victims in imminent danger: non-swimmers and injured swimmers

3. Victims requiring continuous care: unconscious, non-breathing, suspected spinal-

injured victims.

Specific aspects of the scenario may be weighted to provide higher scores for a rescue

performance requiring a greater degree of skill and judgement.

See sample score sheets at the end of this section. These score sheets are samples only.

Unique and competition-specific score sheets are designed for each championships.

Scenarios, marks and weighting will vary.

In addition, consult the SERC Guide for Coaches, Teams, Judges and Officials posted at

www.ilsf.org.

7.3.2 Disqualification

In addition to the General Rules in Section 2 and the General conditions for Simulated

Emergency Response Competition in 7.1, the following behaviour may result in

disqualification:

1. Receiving outside assistance, direction, or advice (DQ 7).

2. Taking any telecommunication device into the security area (DQ 8).

3. Using any equipment not provided as part of the competition (DQ 9).

4. Teams who verbally or physically abuse a victim may be assigned a penalty or

disqualified (DQ 10).




DISQUALIFICATION CODES FOR SERC


1. Not completing the event in accordance with the event description or general rules.

All events

2. A competitor or team may be disqualified if a competitor, team or handler is deemed to have competed unfairly. Examples of “competing unfairly” include:

• committing a doping or doping-related infraction

• impersonating another competitor

• attempting to defeat the ballot or draw for events or positions

• competing twice in the same individual event

• competing twice in the same event in different teams

• purposely interfering with a course to gain advantage

• jostling or obstructing another competitor handler so as to impede his or her progress

• receiving physical or material outside assistance (other than verbal or other direction)

All events

3. Teams may not be permitted to start in an event if they are late reporting to the marshalling area.

All events

4. A competitor or team absent from the start of an event shall be disqualified except for the final.

All events

5. Activities that result in wilful damage to the venue sites, accommodation sites or the property of others will result in disqualification of the individuals and teams involved from competition.

All events

6. Abuse of officials may result in disqualification from the competition.

All events

7. Receiving outside assistance, direction, or advice. SERC

8. Taking any telecommunication device into the security area. SERC

9. Using any equipment not provided as part of the competition. SERC

10. Teams who verbally or physically abuse a victim may be assigned a penalty or disqualified.

SERC



SERC: SAMPLE CHIEF JUDGE SCORING SHEET – OVERALL

Draw No: ________ Team Name: ____________ Judge Name: __________________

Scenario description: You have all come to the local swimming pool to relax for the

morning and you notice that there are some people in trouble in the water. The lifeguards

have not turned up for their shifts and there is no other staff around that you can see. There

is only one designated access or exit point for the scenario. If you secure or land a victim it

must be done within this entry area. If you use any other area you will not score any marks.

Judges notes: You have the overview of the SERC and assess overall efficiency of the

team. In particular you mark the Team Leader’s control of the team – assessment of

priorities and dispatch/direction of team members to deal with the casualties. You will also

mark communication between the Leader and the team and between team members and

this may include information about the condition of the victims and what help is needed.

Your marks MUST take into account:

• Any loss of control by the Leader becoming committed or involved to such an extent that

overall control is lost. Do not mark any rescues the leader carries out. They will be

marked by another judge allocated to that victim.

• Whether assistance was sought. Note: any person sent for help will not be allowed to

return during the scenario.

Areas of marking Marks out of 10

Assessment Assessment of the emergency Did the leader coordinate the team and direct to the correct priorities of rescue?

On-going assessment / re-assessment

Control Control and safety over the scenario area Leader retains control throughout the scenario On-going assessment / re-assessment

Communication Communication and feedback from Leader to team, and between team members and victims

Effective questioning / clear instructions given to victims and team

Search Effective search of scenario area Identification and location of victims

Teamwork Teamwork, summon assistance (emergency services called) with appropriate information provided

Identification and securing of all victims Effective use of bystanders / victims

Rough handling of victims – Deduct points

Total

Marking notes (in increments of 0.5 allotted by the Judge):

Perfect

10

Very Good

7.5 – 9.5

Satisfactory

5.0 – 7.0

Weak

2.5 – 4.5

Poor

0 – 2.0

Specific aspects of the scenario may be weighted to provide higher scores for a rescue performance requiring a greater degree of skill and judgement.



SERC: SAMPLE JUDGE SCORING SHEET – Non-swimmer

Draw No: _______ Team Name: _______________Judge Name: __________________

Victim: non-swimmer trying to get to the edge

The victim is struggling to stay above the water and is starting to panic as he cannot get to

the edge. He will take a rescue aid if pushed into his reach. However if a contact rescue is

attempted, he will struggle and try to grab hold of the rescuer (he will not turn on his back).

He needs assistance to get out of the water and when out will be exhausted from the

experience. He is on his own at the pool.

Judges notes

Non-swimmer is in imminent danger and is a high priority for rescue. He will attempt to grab

any rescuer who approaches him directly without an aid. If a contact rescue is used, no

marks should be recorded for the rescue component. He should be made safe with an

effective and efficient return to the edge. Landing should be done with care. He will answer

questions put to him but will not volunteer the information. He will not leave the area to call

for emergency services as he is frightened.


Victim recognition/approach Recognition of non-swimmer (high priority), speed of reaching victim Safe approach by rescuer

Rescue Rescue with extreme caution Effective rescue, non-contact (if contact rescue, no marks for this section)

Control of victim Clear effective questioning and reassurance Reassurance during rescue until returned to the edge

Landing Care of the victim; protection of the head Appropriate landing for size and strength of rescuer

Care and aftercare of victim Safe position away from the edge; warmth and protection where possible; monitor safety; ongoing reassurance

Rough hhandling of victims – Deduct points

Total


Perfect

10

Very Good

7.5 – 9.5

Satisfactory

5.0 – 7.0

Weak

2.5 – 4.5

Poor

0 – 2.0




SERC: SAMPLE JUDGE SCORING SHEET – Weak Swimmer

Draw No: _________ Team Name: ____________ Judge Name: __________________

Victim: uncooperative weak swimmer who was playing with friends

The victim is a weak swimmer struggling to get back to the edge after playing with friends.

He is shouting at his other friends to follow him but he is not sure where they are. He can

take an aid but can get to the edge without one. If a contact carry is performed he will

struggle and resist. He is concerned about getting the message to his other friends to swim

to the edge. He can land himself unaided. He will provide assistance or contact emergency

services and remains cooperative throughout.

Judges notes

Weak swimmer needs to be made safe very quickly. He can be talked at or given signs to

return to the edge; he will need to be kept under observation. He will struggle if a contact

rescue is used and low marks should be awarded for the rescue.


Victim recognition/approach Recognition that he is a weak swimmer and high priority to mobilize Safe approach by rescuer

Rescue Encourage return to the edge with clear directions; perform a non-contact rescue (low marks for contact rescue – maximum 5 marks for this section) Monitor while still in water; may require further directions/instructions

Control and use of victim Effective communication / instruction; use for keeping another victim warm / safe (especially his friends)

Landing Make secure and land Appropriate landing for size and strength of rescuer

Care and aftercare of victim Safe position away from the edge; warmth and protection where possible; monitor safety; ongoing monitoring and care

Rough handling of victims – Deduct points

Total


Perfect

10

Very Good

7.5 – 9.5

Satisfactory

5.0 – 7.0

Weak

2.5 – 4.5

Poor

0 – 2.0


performance requiring a greater degree of skill and judgement.



SERC: SAMPLE JUDGE SCORING SHEET– Unconscious / non-breathing Victim

Draw No: _________ Team Name: _____________ Judge Name: __________________

Victim: Child (manikin) unconscious, not breathing

This child is on the bottom of the pool. He was playing with his friends.

Judges notes

This victim is a low-order rescue priority and rescuers should deal with the high priority

casualties as quickly as possible in order to get to this casualty who requires continuous

care.

CPR should be commenced as soon as possible and your marks should reflect the efficiency

and effectiveness of the CPR simulation (and not measured against your own country’s

teaching / standards).

Areas of Marking Marks out of

10

Victim Recognition/Approach Identification of casualty

Rescue Speed of rescue (considering priority of rescue)

Speed in getting back to the edge

Control of victim Effective and efficient carry

Landing Careful handling/landing of the casualty

Care and aftercare of victim Effective and efficient CPR likely to assist recovery

Safe position away from the edge; monitor safety; ongoing monitoring and care

Rough handling of victim – Deduct points

Total


Perfect

10

Very Good

7.5 – 9.5

Satisfactory

5.0 – 7.0

Weak

2.5 – 4.5

Poor

0 – 2.0




SERC: SAMPLE JUDGE SCORING SHEET – Injured Victim

Draw No: ________ Team Name: _____________ Judge Name: __________________

Victim: conscious victim with injured shoulder

Fell into water, injured shoulder. Victim is calm.

Judges notes

This is a medium priority victim requiring assistance. Rescuer should use an aid. Victim can

hold aid and needs assistance to climb out of the pool. The victim should be removed

carefully from the water with attention to the injured shoulder. He is uncooperative and will

not go for assistance or contact emergency services.

Areas of Marking Marks out of

10

Casualty recognition/approach Recognition that he is an injured swimmer and medium priority to mobilize

Safe approach by rescuer

Rescue Encourage to return to the edge with clear directions

Perform non-contact rescue (low marks for contact rescue – maximum 5 marks for this section)

Monitor while still in water; may require further directions/instructions

Control of victim Effective communication / instruction

Reassurance throughout rescue

Landing Careful removal from water with attention to injured shoulder

Make secure and land (monitor while still in water; may require further directions/instructions)

Appropriate landing for size and strength of rescuer

Care and aftercare of victim Safe position away from the edge; warmth and protection where possible; monitor safety; ongoing monitoring and care

Rough handling of victim – Deduct points

Total


Perfect

10

Very Good

7.5 – 9.5

Satisfactory 5.0 – 7.0

Weak

2.5 – 4.5

Poor

0 – 2.0




SERC: SAMPLE JUDGES SCORING SHEET – Bystander

Draw No: _______ Team Name: ____________ Judge Name: ____________________

Bystander: Adult

The adult will provide assistance or contact emergency services and remains cooperative

throughout and is will follow directions and provide assistance, if directed.

Judges notes

The bystander is a high priority bystander and is a witness to the scenario and can provide

assistance, first aid treatment and information on the victims conditions, if directed.

Areas of marking Marks out of

10

Victim recognition/approach

Recognition that they are a bystander and cooperative.

Assesses relevant information

Questions bystander to assess information about the scenario.

(low marks for not giving the bystander directions - maximum 5 marks

for this section)

Provides direction and instructions

Rescuer provides directions or instructions to assist the rescue scenario

such as; asst. removal, reassure victims, calls emergency services.

Monitor bystanders actions

Check periodically to ensure that bystander has followed the directions of

the Rescuer throughout rescue.

Provides ongoing encouragement

Provides feedback to bystander on their actions to encourage them to

assist with victim support

Rough handling of victims – Deduct 10 points

Total

Perfect

10

Very Good

7.5 – 9.5

Satisfactory

5.0 – 7.0

Weak

2.5 – 4.5

Poor

0 – 2.0


performance requiring a greater degree of skill and judgment. Marking in increments of

0.5 allotted by the judge.

Section 8 – Protests, Appeals and Discipline


SECTION 8: PROTESTS, APPEALS AND DISCIPLINE - INDEX

8.1 CONDUCT AND DISCIPLINE GENERALLY ………………………………… 2

8.2 PENALTIES ……………………………………………………………………… 2

8.3 PROTESTS ………………………………………………………………………. 2

8.3.1 Types of protests ……………………………………………….. 2

8.3.2 Lodging a protest ……………………………………………….. 2

8.3.4 Appeals Committee …………………………………………….. 3

8.4 DISCIPLINE AT COMPETITION AND SIMILAR EVENTS …………………. 3



SECTION 8: PROTESTS, APPEALS AND DISCIPLINE

8.1 CONDUCT AND DISCIPLINE GENERALLY LSA requires of its Competitors, Technical Officials, Officials and members generally, the highest standard of conduct and behaviour. These expectations are reflected under the rules for competitions in the LSA Constitution, Regulations and this Competition Manual. The Competition Committee reserves the right to delete, alter or otherwise vary any rule, competition criteria, timetable or other matter as it deems necessary. Every effort will be made to ensure that each Team Manager receives notice. Protests resulting from such Competition Committee decisions will not be entertained. In addition, event courses and the competition area may change from the descriptions in this Competition Manual if the Chief Referee deems it necessary and providing teams have been advised of the change before the start of that changed event. Inevitably, in the field of competition there will be situations which may give rise to Protests and/or Appeals. Only a Team Manager may protest to the Chief Referee in the manner prescribed in this section. The official start of a competition is when a bulletin or circular is issued calling for entries to a competition. The official completion time of competition is 20 minutes after the completion of the final event at the competition. However, matters currently in consideration (i.e. protest or appeal or matters of “competing unfairly” shall continue to a final resolution, the result of which shall be considered as being within the official completion time.

8.2 PENALTIES LSA, either by predetermined publicised penalties or by adopting the decision of a Disciplinary Committee, may, in its discretion, issue penalties to individual members, clubs, branches and provinces. 8.3 PROTESTS The Organising Committee reserves the right to delete, alter or otherwise vary any rule, competition criteria, timetable or other matter as it deems necessary. Every effort will be made to ensure that each team manager receives notice. Protests resulting from such Organising Committee decisions will not be entertained. In addition, event courses and the competition area may change from the descriptions in this rule book if the Chief Referee deems it necessary and providing teams have been advised of the change before the start of that event. A Team Manager may protest to a Chief Referee, and subsequently dispute a Chief Referee’s decision in the manner prescribed below. See Protest/Appeal Form in the Appendix (Appendix 1). 8.3.1 Types of protests Protests, which may lead to the imposition of penalties, fall broadly into the following categories: • Protests arising from entry procedures or entry eligibility. • Protests arising from scrutineering or equipment eligibility. • Protests arising during participation in the competition and/or breaches of rules

No protest shall be accepted against the actions of another competitor or team in the same event except where that competitor or team has suffered direct interference e.g. if an official takes an action or no action against a competitor or team, another competitor or team cannot protest unless they are in the same race and there is direct interference involved.



8.3.2 Lodging a protest The procedures relating to the lodgment of protests shall be as follows:

a) A protest against the conditions under which an event or race is to be conducted must be made verbally to the Chief Referee prior to the event or race. Before the start of the event or race, the Chief Referee or appointed technical official shall inform the competitors in that event or race of such a protest.

b) A protest against a competitor or a team or against a decision of an official must be lodged verbally with the Chief Referee within 15 minutes of the posting of the result of the event or within 15 minutes of being notified verbally by the Chief Referee of the decision, whichever occurs first. Within 15 minutes of the submission of the verbal protest, a protest written in English shall be lodged with the Chief Referee. Note: The Chief Referee at their discretion may extend these time limits provided that results have not been declared as final.

c) Protests in Beach Flags:

• In Beach Flags events a protest against an elimination must be lodged verbally within 5 minutes of the completion of the round or before the next run through of an event begins (whichever occurs first). If a Beach Flag elimination protest occurs the Chief Referee will immediately consider the protest without delay before proceeding with the event. There will be no Appeal permitted on Beach Flag elimination protest decisions of the Referee.

• A Chief Referee is also authorised to refer a Beach Flag elimination protest directly to an on-beach Jury of Appeal Committee representative for decision on the basis of the processes and timings detailed above. No paperwork or is required nor is a fee is payable if this occurs.

• A Team Manager is permitted to protest and/or appeal against a disqualification decision in Beach Flag events provided that correct processes are followed.

d) The official result of an event shall be withheld until any protest is decided. e) The result of the protest shall be noted on the back of the event result card and also on the

protest form. f) There shall be no protest fee in Beach Flags. There is a fee payable whenever a matter is

referred to the appeals committee except in flags, whether by the Chief Referee directly or by a team appealing a Referee’s decision.

8.3.3 Adjudication of protests The procedures relating to the adjudication of protests shall be: a) Immediately after the correct lodgment of a protest, the Chief Referee may adjudicate on

the matter as provided for herein or refer the matter directly to the Appeals Committee Convenor.

Note: Should it be determined that there was a technical or an administrative error in recording either the disqualification or protest reference, the error can be corrected, and the protest or appeal proceed without prejudice.

b) If the Chief Referee adjudicates the matter forthwith, the decision may be appealed to the Appeals Committee. Such appeal must be lodged with the Appeals Committee Convenor within 30 minutes of the decision of the protest being advised to the competitor, accompanied by the appeal fee.

Note: The Chief Referee at their discretion may extend this time limit provided that results have not been declared as final.

c) The assistance of video or other electronic equipment may be used to consider protests. However, the onus is on the protester to provide proof of authenticity and any clearly viewable evidence and viewing mechanisms at the time that the protest is heard.

Note: A minimum 9 inch/228 mm (measured on the diagonal) tablet type device with high definition is generally considered to be the minimum size to properly adjudicate on a protest.



8.3.4 Appeals Committee The Organising Committee shall appoint a person of suitable experience and practical knowledge to act as the Appeals Committee Convenor. The Organising Committee shall appoint appeals committee members of sufficient number to enable at least two committees of three persons to sit simultaneously. The Appeals Committee Convenor selects members of the Appeals Committee, based on their backgrounds and experience, to adjudicate individual cases. While three people should ordinarily sit on an Appeals Committee, the quorum for an Appeals Committee shall be two persons. The membership of an Appeals Committee shall not include a person who has previously participated in the making of the decision that is the subject of dispute. a) The Appeals Committee shall deal with all appeals referred to it by the Chief Referee or

Appeals Committee Convenor. b) The Appeals Committee shall rule on the appeal and advise the competitor and relevant

technical officials of its decision and any penalty imposed (including a penalty other than disqualification). Reasons for the decision may be briefly given verbally and on the appeal form.

c) After hearing all available and relevant evidence, the Appeals Committee shall make its decision in camera. The decision to uphold (i.e., agree with) the appeal or to dismiss (i.e., rule against) the protest shall be delivered verbally or in writing to the team manager, competitor and/or team member concerned, to the Chief Referee and Appeals Committee Convenor. If the appeal is upheld, the fee is returned: if ruled against, the fee is forfeit.

d) The decision of the Appeals Committee shall be final, without the right of further appeal. e) The Appeals Committee may refer serious breaches of the LSA Code of Conduct to the

Disciplinary Committee. f) There shall be a fee payable whenever a matter is referred to the Appeals Committee,

whether by the Chief Referee directly or by a team appealing a Chief Referee’s decision. g) The Appeals Committee shall adjudicate after both sides have had an opportunity to state

their case. h) The assistance of video or other electronic equipment may be used to consider appeals.

However, the onus is on the protester to provide proof of authenticity and any clearly viewable evidence and viewing mechanisms at the time that the appeal is heard.

Note: A minimum 9 inch/228 mm (measured on the diagonal) tablet type device with high definition is generally considered to be the minimum size to properly adjudicate on an appeal. i) It is the Chief Referees duty to decide on the course of action to be followed on the

outcome of decisions made on Protests and Appeals in the best interest of all competitors and the competition. Such decision shall be final, without the right of further Protest or Appeal.

8.4 DISCIPLINE AT COMPETITION AND SIMILAR EVENTS Under Section 46 of the LSA Constitution, “Discipline at Competitions and similar Events”, the Convenor of the Disciplinary Committee shall appoint a sub-committee consisting of at least three (3) members for the duration and final conclusion of:-

1. Any National Competition, National Championships or National Competitive event taking place under the auspices or control of LSA; and

2. If requested to do so, for any other competition, championships or competitive event taking place under the auspices or control of LSA or of a lifesaving authority or club member for the purpose of:

a) Forthwith investigating any allegation of misconduct at or in connection with or in relation to such competition, championships or competitive event, including any allegation of misconduct committed in the vicinity of or committed en-route to and from the venue of such competition, championships or competitive event; and

b) Timeously and effectively dealing with any disciplinary charge in accordance with the “Disciplinary Code.”

If such a sub-committee finds any member guilty of misconduct, it may not impose a sanction greater than that determined by Disciplinary Committee which sanction may include a fine or



expulsion or impose a fine upon the member or him/her in an amount greater than the amount determined by the Disciplinary Committee from time to time. There shall be no appeal against any finding of guilty or any sanction imposed by such sub-committee. Any allegation of misconduct not dealt with or not finally disposed of by such subcommittee may be dealt with or disposed of by the Disciplinary Committee in the ordinary way during, after or at the conclusion of such competition, championships or competitive event.

Section 9 – Facilities, Equipment Standards and Scrutineering


SECTION 9: FACILITIES, EQUIPMENT STANDARDS AND SCRUTINEERING – INDEX

9.1 POOL FACILITY STANDARDS ………………………………………………….. 2

9.1.1 Scrutineering procedure ……………………………………………….. 2

9.1.2 Length …………………………………………………………………… 2

9.1.3 Lanes ……………………………………………………………………. 2

9.1.4 Starting platform ………………………………………………………... 2

9.1.5 Automatic officiating equipment ………………………………………. 2

9.1.6 Water ……………………………………………………………………. 2

9.1.7 Depth ……………………………………………………………………. 2

9.1.8 Dive start ………………………………………………………………… 3

9.1.9 Obstacle Swim, Obstacle Relay ………………………………………. 3

9.1.10 Manikin Carry (50 m), Super Lifesaver (200 m) …………………….. 3

9.1.11 Manikin Carry with Fins (100 m), Manikin Tow with Fins (100 m),

Super Lifesaver (200 m), Pool Lifesaver Relay (4 x 50m) …………

3

9.1.12 Rescue Medley (100 m) ……………………………………………….. 4

9.1.13 Manikin Relay (4 x 25 m) ……………………………………………… 4

9.1.14 Medley Relay (4 x 50 m ……………………………………………….. 5

9.1.15 Line Throw ………………………………………………………………. 5

9.1.16 Simulated Emergency Response Competition (SERC) ……………. 5

9.2 LSA EQUIPMENT STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS …………………… 5

9.2.1 Spirit of the Specification ………………………………………………. 5

9.2.2 Manufacturer’s Name ………………………………………………….. 5

9.2.3 Registered Surf Craft Manufacturers …………………………………. 5

9.2.4 Craft Manufactured According to Specifications Decal …………….. 5

9.2.5 Variations from Specifications ………………………………………… 6

9.2.6 Scrutineering of equipment ……………………………………………. 6

9.3 BATONS (BEACH FLAGS AND RELAY BATONS …………………………….. 6

9.4 BOARDS …………………………………………………………………………….. 7

9.4.1 3.2 m Board Specifications …………………………………………… 7

9.4.2 Nipper Bodyboard Specifications …………………………………….. 9

9.4.3 Nipper Hard Board ……………………………………………………… 9

9.4.4 Nipper Soft Board ………………………………………………………. 9

9.5 SURF BOATS ………………………………………………………………………. 10

9.6 BUOYS ………………………………………………………………………………. 10

9.7 RESCUE MANIKINS – SENIOR & MASTERS …………………………………. 11

9.8 RESCUE MANIKINS: NIPPER: U/11, U/12, U/13 & U/14 ……………………… 12



SECTION 9: FACILITIES, EQUIPMENT STANDARDS AND SCRUTINEERING – INDEX

9.9 RESCUE MANIKINS: NIPPER: U/9 & U/10 ……………………………………… 13

9.10 OBSTACLES ………………………………………………………………………... 13

9.11 RESCUE TUBE SPECIFICATIONS ……………………………………………… 14

9.12 RESCUE TORPEDO BUOY ……………………………………………………… 15

9.13 SWIM FINS SPECIFICATIONS …………………………………………………… 16

9.14 THROW LINES ……………………………………………………………………… 16

9.15 SWIMWEAR …………………………………………………………………………. 16

9.16 PERSONAL FLOTATION DEVICES (PFDs) ……………………………………. 17

9.17 HELMETS ……………………………………………………………………………. 18

9.18 WETSUITS …………………………………………………………………………... 18

2.19 LIFESAVING BALL, NETS AND ROPES 18

9.20 SINGLE SKI SPECIFICATIONS ………………………………………………….. 19

9.21 DOUBLE SKI SPECIFICATIONS ………………………………………………… 23

9.22 LONG DISTANCE (SINGLE AND DOUBLE) SKI SPECIFICATIONS………... 23

9.23 SKI PADDLES ………………………………………………………………………. 24

9.24 CRAFT NUMBERING ………………………………………………………………. 24



SECTION 9: FACILITIES, EQUIPMENT STANDARDS AND SCRUTINEERING

9.1 POOL FACILITY STANDARDS All Lifesaving championships and competitions shall be conducted in an eight-lane (minimum) 50 m swimming pool which complies with LSA standards. Facility measurements must be certified by a person appointed or approved by the LSA Management Committee. 9.1.1 Scrutineering procedure a) For LSA - managed events (e.g., Lifesaving Championships), a person appointed by the

organising committee shall review a pool survey certificate (or similar) that specifies: • Pool length, width, depths, lane widths and ropes, starting platforms, electronic timing

equipment, etc. b) In the absence of such a certificate, the person appointed by the LSA Management

Committee shall check that the pool facility meets LSA facility standards. In addition, the following equipment shall be checked: • Obstacles, rescue tubes, throw lines, manikins • Manikin platforms (including a depth check to ensure the platform is not too shallow).

c) Minimum measuring equipment required: tape measure (minimum 50 m with 1 mm increments; depth rod or pole).

d) For LSA-sanctioned events, the sanction application requires a declaration from the competition organisers that the pool and all equipment to be used in the competition meets LSA standards.

9.1.2 Length The pool shall be 50 m between the automatic officiating equipment touch panels at the starting end and the wall or touch panels at the turning end. A tolerance of plus 30 mm and minus 0.00 mm in each lane is allowed.

9.1.3 Lanes There shall be a minimum of eight lanes that shall be at least 2.5 m wide, with two spaces of at least 200 mm outside the first and last lanes. There shall be lane ropes on both sides of each lane that extend the full length of the course. Each lane rope will consist of floats placed end-to-end having a minimum diameter of 50 mm to a maximum of 150 mm. The lane ropes shall be firmly stretched.

9.1.4 Starting platform The height of the platform above the water surface shall be from 500 mm to 750 mm. The surface area shall be at least 500 mm x 500 mm and covered with non-slip material. The maximum slope shall not be more than 10 degrees. The starting platform may have an adjustable setting back plate and starting grips for both platform and in-water starts. If necessary any exposed ends on starting grips, etc. should be covered.

9.1.5 Automatic officiating equipment The pool shall be equipped with automatic officiating equipment to record the time of each competitor and to determine the place of each competitor in race events.

9.1.6 Water The pool water shall meet the clarity standards and the bacteriological and chemical standards of the applicable local health regulations in South Africa The water temperature shall be 25 to 28 degrees Celsius.

9.1.7 Depth For each event conducted, the pool shall comply with LSA event-specific depth standards. Except as specified in event-specific standards, a minimum depth of 1.0 m is required.



9.1.8 Dive start

Minimum depth of 1.35 m extending from 1.0 m to at least 6.0 m from the starting end wall.

9.1.9 Obstacle Swim, Obstacle Relay

Minimum depth of 1.8 m extending from 2.0 m on both sides of any obstacle.

9.1.10 Manikin Carry (50 m), Super Lifesaver (200 m)

(a) Minimum depth of 1.8 m extending at least 2.0 m beyond the 24 m mark from the wall.

(b) Manikins are placed on the pool bottom to a maximum depth of 3.0 m. In pools deeper than 3.0 m, “platforms” may be used to hold manikins at the 3.0 m depth.

9.1.11 Manikin Carry with Fins (100 m), Manikin Tow with Fins (100 m), Super Lifesaver

(200 m), Pool Lifesaver Relay (4 x 50m)

a) Minimum depth of 1.8 m extending at least 2.0 m from the turn wall.

b) Manikins are placed on the pool bottom to a maximum depth of 3.0 m. In pools deeper than 3.0 m, “platforms” may be used to hold manikins at the 3.0 m depth.

c) In the Manikin Carry with Fins event, the manikin shall be positioned on its back in contact with the pool bottom and its base touching the pool wall, with its head in the direction of the finish.

WATER SURFACE START WALL

1m 5m

24 m TO WALL 2m

WATER SURFACE

MINIMUM DEPTH 1.8 m

POOL BOTTOM MANIKIN

WATER SURFACE

OBSTACLE

MINIMUM DEPTH 1.8m

2m 2m



POOL BOTTOM

WATER SURFACE

MINIMUM DEPTH 1.8m

2m

MANIKIN

TURNWALL

16.5m

d) Where the facility design does not provide a vertical wall that joins the bottom at 90 degrees, the manikin must be positioned as close as possible to the wall, but no further than 300 mm from the wall as measured at the water surface.

9.1.12 Rescue Medley (100 m)

a) Minimum depth of 1.8 m extending at least 2.0 m beyond the 16.5 m mark from the turn wall.

b) Manikins are placed on the pool bottom to a maximum depth of 3.0 m. In pools deeper than 3.0 m, “platforms” may be used to hold manikins at the 3.0 m depth.

9.1.13 Manikin Relay (4 x 25 m)

a) Minimum depth of 1.8 m extending at least 2.0 m on both sides of the 25 m exchange mark at centre pool.

b) Minimum depth of 1.0 m at the starting end wall.

c) Minimum depth of 1.8 m extending at least 2.0 m from the turn wall.

POOL BOTTOM

MINIMUM DEPTH 1.8m

2m 2m

25m TO WALL25m TO WALL

WATER SURFACE

POOL BOTTOM

WATER SURFACE

MINIMUM DEPTH 1.8m

2m

MANIKINTURNWALL

POOL BOTTOM

WATER SURFACE

MINIMUM DEPTH 1.8m

2m

MANIKIN

TURNWALL



9.1.14 Medley Relay (4 x 50 m)

1. Minimum depth of 1.35 m, extending from 1.0 m to at least 6.0 m from the starting end wall.

2. Minimum depth of 1.8 m, extending at least 2.0 m from the turn wall.

9.1.15 Line Throw a) Minimum depth of 1.8 m extending at least 2.0 m from the rigid crossbar.

b) The rigid crossbar is positioned on the surface across each lane 12.5 m from the starting end of the pool. A tolerance of plus 100 mm and minus 0.00 mm in each lane is allowed.

9.1.16 Simulated Emergency Response Competition (SERC) SERC may be conducted in the eight-lane 50 m pool or in a facility of another design, as approved by the LSA Management Committee. 9.2 LSA EQUIPMENT STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS 9.2.1 Spirit of the Specification

As these specifications refer to craft and equipment used in competition within LSA, they will be used by Technical Officials to determine the eligibility, or otherwise, of competitor’s craft or equipment. Any competitor, or club, who attempts to win a race by any other than honourable means, or departs from the “spirit of the specification”, will be disqualified. LSA to ensure that all craft or equipment manufactured comply with the appropriate specifications. When a change in basic design is contemplated, manufacturers should first seek the advice of the LSA Director: Sport or nominated official as assigned by LSA. 9.2.2 Manufacturer’s Name It shall be a requirement, to be read in conjunction with the craft specifications, that all craft must carry clear identification of the manufacturer’s name and address.

STARTWALL

MINIMUM DEPTH 1.8m

MINIMUM DEPTH 1.0m

TURNWALL

1m

2m

50m

STARTWALL

1m 5m

MINIMUM DEPTH 1.35m

POOL BOTTOM

MINIMUM DEPTH 1.8m

TURNWALL

2m

WATER SURFACE



9.2.3 Registered Surf Craft Manufacturers LSA will compile a list of “Registered Craft Manufacturers”. The craft may not be required for scrutiny at competition, except for safety. Craft purchased and not strictly to specification (whether at the direction of the lifesaving authority by reasons of the manufacturer) must be reported to LSA immediately. 9.2.4 Craft Manufactured According to Specifications Decal All craft (that is single ski, double ski, boards, but excluding the nipper 2.6 m and 2.9 m soft boards and 2.9 m hard board, must display a decal advising that the craft has been manufactured in accordance to the LSA specification. If a nipper (U/13 and U/14 only) uses a 3.2 m board – it requires a decal and must comply with the minimum weight of 7.6 kg. Craft not having the said decal, will have to be scrutinised by the appointed Scrutineer of the Championship to be approved for use at the Championship. The fee for the scrutineering is set by the LSA General Manager and LSA Director of Sport. 9.2.5 Variations from Specifications Provision is allowed in LSA procedures for craft to be constructed outside the specification, for the purpose of improvement of design, performance or material evaluation. Such permission can only be forthcoming from LSA and as a result of a submission lodged through a lifesaving authority. Submissions must contain all relevant information and drawings, etc., in support of the application. The outcome of the application must not, however, be presumed and no deviations from specification may be undertaken until permission has been given, in writing, by LSA. LSA has adopted the following equipment specifications. Where appropriate, allowable tolerances are recorded – for example “(± 200 mm)” meaning a tolerance of plus 200 mm and minus 200 mm is allowed. Where appropriate, dimensions and weights are recorded as “minimum” or “maximum” allowed. In addition, all equipment used in Lifesaving Championships must comply with the criteria outlined in the commercial identification policy in the championships handbook.

9.2.6 Scrutineering of equipment Competition bulletins/circulars/handbooks shall detail the procedures for checking equipment. The organising committee reserves the right to re-inspect competition equipment at any time during the championships. Equipment found to contravene LSA specifications shall be subject to disqualification, which may result in the disqualification of the competitor using the equipment and the possible disqualification of the full team.

No protests and appeals against rulings of personal equipment ineligibility are permitted.

Some equipment may require detailed specification and testing in advance of the competition due to design features and the nature of the measurement equipment required. Surf skis, boards, surf boats and manikins have additional specifications that can be referenced through ILS at www.ilsf.org.

Pending on what equipment is to be scrutinised, the following measuring equipment is required:

• Measuring equipment required: tape measure.

• Swim Fin box.

• Weigh scale with minimum 20 kg capacity.

• Jig for surf craft.




• Micro meter

9.3 BATONS (BEACH FLAGS AND RELAY BATONS) Beach flag batons and beach relay batons shall be made of flexible material (e.g., flexible hose) a maximum of 300 mm and a minimum of 250 mm long with an external diameter of approximately 25 mm (± 1 mm). Batons should be coloured so as to be easily visible.

Beach Flag batons must have a 25 mm high visibility, tape and number on it 25 mm from one end of the baton.

9.3.1 Scrutineering procedure

a) For LSA-managed events, a person appointed by the organising committee shall check the batons. Minimum measuring equipment required: tape measure (minimum 1 m with 1 mm increments).

b) For LSA-sanctioned events, the sanction application requires a declaration from the competition organisers that all beach flag batons to be used in the competition will meet LSA standards.

9.4 BOARDS

Boards to be used per age group:

Age Group

Type of Board

2.6 m Soft Board

2.9 m Soft Board

2.9 m Hard Board

3.2 m Board

Nippers U/9 Yes No No No

U/10 Yes No No No

U/11 Yes Yes Yes Yes




Juniors U/15 No No No Yes

U/16 No No No Yes

U/17 No No No Yes

U/19 No No No Yes

Open Open No No No Yes

Masters Masters No No No Yes

9.4.1 3.2 m Board Specifications a) Maximum length: 3.2 m b) Minimum Radii: Nose and Tail in plan view (see Diagram 25) – 25 mm c) Minimum Radii: Leading edge Nose and trailing edge Tail in elevation view (see

Diagram) – 3 mm. d) Minimum Structural Weight: 7.6 kg (includes one fin, plastic/rubber handles and

knee/chest pads). Note: The Nipper U/11 to U/14 may use the standard 3.2m board. All specifications

are as for the Junior/Senior Board. e) Minimum Width: Not specified. f) Only one fin is permitted and must have a minimum profile radius of 25 mm at any

point, minimum leading edge radius of 3 mm and minimum trailing edge radius of 2 mm.

Note: Leading edge extends from the underside of the board to the lowest point of the fin.



g) The board may be constructed of foam sandwich core with a composite laminate skin or of thermoplastic construction solid or hollow with or without a soft foam surface.

h) Boards must contain a minimum flotation in the form of foam or other approved material to provide buoyancy of 20 kg mass. If the buoyancy foam used in the manufacturing of the board absorbs water, a permanent sticker must be applied advising the user “if the outer protective layer is pierced the board will absorb water”.

i) Boards to be of mono construction. j) Compliance labels to be secured to the surface of all boards manufactured to LSA

specification. k) All newly manufactured/approved boards shall have highly visible coloured tips. The

colours may include high visibility safety colours or vivid colours (including black) that contrast sharply against white or sky coloured background. Pastel tones that do not provide such contrast are not to be used. Tips are to be applied with colourfast paint, resin or thermoplastic adhesive film from the tip of the nose and back from the end of the tail to a length of 100 mm. This can be part of the logo or design. Where the deck and hull (bottom and top) join an allowance of 10 mm disconnect, is acceptable. It is recommended that High Visibility safety colours or vivid colours be applied to all existing craft.

l) Exemptions apply to boards with nose and tail colours in excess of 100 mm in High Visibility safety colours or vivid colours (including black) that contrast sharply against white or sky coloured background.

Board radius specifications

• Tail side view minimum radius 5 mm.

• Tail plan view minimum radius 25 mm on both outside edges.

• Nose plan view minimum radius 25 mm on both outside edges.

• Nose side view minimum radius 3 mm at tip of nose.

Note: Radius is the distance from the centre-point of a circle to the outer edge, as opposed to the diameter, which is the distance from edge to edge.



DIAGRAM: BOARD: PLAN AND ELEVATION

9.4.2 Nipper Bodyboard Specifications Length: Maximum 1.05 m - Minimum 900 mm. Width: Maximum 600 mm - Minimum 500 mm. Nose width: Maximum 300 mm - Minimum 200 mm. Thickness: Maximum 70 mm - Minimum 50 mm. Structural weight: Maximum 2.0 kg - Minimum 1.3 kg (including handles). Added weights are not permitted. Bodyboard to have two handles attached to the front of it. No skeg or leash is permitted and the Bodyboard shall not have any hardened surfaces or edges. 9.4.3 Nipper Hard Board Maximum length: 2.9 m Minimum radii: Nose and Tail in plan view. Minimum radii: Leading edge Nose and trailing edge Tail in elevation view 3 mm Minimum Width: Not specified. Only one fin is permitted. Fin must have minimum profile radius of 25 mm at any point, minimum leading-edge radius of 3 mm and minimum trailing edge radius of 2 mm. The leading edge extends from underside of the board to the lowest point of the fin.



The board may be constructed of foam sandwich core with a composite laminate skin or of thermoplastic construction solid or hollow with or without a soft foam surface. Boards must contain a minimum flotation in the form of foam or other approved material to provide buoyancy of 20 kg mass. If the buoyancy foam used in the manufacturing of the board absorbs water, a permanent sticker must be applied advising the user “if the outer protective layer is pierced the board will absorb water”. Boards to be of mono construction. All newly manufactured/approved boards shall have highly visible coloured tips. The colours may include high visibility safety colours or vivid colours (including black) that contrast sharply against white or sky coloured backgrounds. Pastel tones that do not provide such contrast are not to be used. Tips are to be applied with colourfast paint, resin or thermoplastic adhesive film from the tip of the nose and back from the end of the tail to a length of 100 mm. This can be part of the logo or design. Where the deck and hull (bottom and top) join an allowance of 10 mm disconnect, is acceptable. It is recommended that High Visibility safety colours or vivid colours be applied to all existing craft. 9.4.4 Nipper Soft Board a) Maximum length: 2.9 m or 2.6 m. b) Minimum Nose Radii: Nose and Tail in plan view – 25 mm. c) Minimum Radii: Leading edge Nose and trailing edge Tail in elevation view – 3 mm. d) Minimum Structural Weight: Not specified. e) Minimum Width: Not specified. f) Durometer hardness: Durometer reading will cover the complete radius of the rail, deck,

nose and tail. The Durometer reading is type Shore A, hardness no greater than 70. g) Only one fin is permitted. Fin must have minimum profile radius of 25 mm at any point and

minimum leading edge radius of 3 mm and minimum trailing edge radius of 2.0 mm. The fin is to be of flexible rubber/plastic material or moulded foam. The leading edge extends from underside of the board to the lowest point of the fin.

h) The board must be constructed of foam with solid core construction. No solid reinforcing stringers (e.g. fibreglass, wood, etc.) are permitted. No hard plastic/fibreglass type overing over the foam are permitted, i.e., the surface of the craft must be flexible.

Note: Plastic/rubber handles and plug attachments are permitted.

Boards constructed of Polyethylene or similar flexible material may incorporate internal stringers to provide rigidity. Such stringers must be adequately covered and approved by the LSA Director: Sport.

Boards must contain a minimum floatation in the form or foam or other approved material to provide buoyancy of 20 kg mass. If the buoyancy foam used in the manufacturing of the board absorbs water, a permanent sticker must be applied advising the user “if the outer protective layer is pierced the board will absorb water”.

9.5 SURF BOATS Surf boats must conform to LSA specifications including the following:

• Weight: minimum 180 kg (excluding oars, oarlocks, rescue tube and all optional equipment)

• Length: minimum 6.86 m; maximum 7.925 m (excluding outrigger) • Beam: minimum 1.62 m (measured in the midship section)

Video camera: If a camera is mounted on the surf boat it must be installed on a mounting device and toggle strap supplied or recommended by the manufacturer of the device. The camera may be mounted on the splash board (front deck), or on the tanks opposite the rowers’ seat, and on the rear deck.



The weight of any plugs permanently installed into the boat to attach the camera is included in the overall weight of the craft. The weight of other, non-permanently installed mount and camera are not included in the overall weight. Detailed specifications are available at www.ilsf.org.


a) When scrutineered boats shall at a minimum, be checked for weight and safety (e.g., state of repair). Oars shall also be checked for competitor safety. Minimum measuring equipment required: tape measure, minimum 10 m with 1 mm increments; weigh scale with minimum 200 kg capacity with 1 gm increments.

b) The host organising committee shall provide a stamp or sticker to be affixed to each boat as proof of the scrutineering check.

For LSA-sanctioned events:

a) The sanction application requires a declaration from the competition organisers that aall pooled boats to be used in the competition will meet LSA standards.

b) Any other scrutineering determined by the competition organisers.

9.6 BUOYS Surf and Open Water events: Buoys used in surf and open events shall be of distinctive colours, and numbered (from the left, facing the water) starting with the number 1, as specified in Section 4: Surf Competition: 4.2.2. 9.6.1 Scrutineering procedure

a) For LSA-managed events, a person appointed by the organising committee shall check the buoys.

b) For LSA-sanctioned events, the sanction application requires a declaration from the competition organisers that all equipment to be used in the competition will meet LSA standards.

9.7 RESCUE MANIKINS – SENIOR & MASTERS 9.7.1 Construction and composition

a) Manikins are to be constructed of PITET type plastic and must be hermetic (i.e.,capable of being filled with water and sealed for competition).

b) Material – Polyethylene c) Colour – Orange d) Transverse line – needs to be of contrasting colour with the rest of the manikin and

Water. e) Thickness – 944 Kg. /m2 f) Fluidity Index – 3 Dg/min

9.7.2 Mechanical properties of materials

a) Coefficient of Elasticity – 1000 N/mm2 b) Shock resistance lzod at +23 degrees Celsius – 19 kj/m2 c) Shock resistance lzod at -20 degrees Celsius – 6 kj/m2 d) Breaking resistance (ESCR) at 60aC N/mm2 – 40 e) Traction resistance at 50mm/min. – 31 N/mm2 f) Breaking point in lengthening at 50 mm/min. – >500% g) Hardness Shore D – 57 h) Vicat Point of softening – 121 degrees Celsius i) Fusion temperature – 128 degrees Celsius




9.7.3 Technical measurement and weight specification a) Total height – 1000 mm (980-1000 mm, 2% variance) b) Height under armpit – 595 mm (585-595 mm, 1.7% variance) c) Height transition line – 550 mm (540-550 mm, 1.9% variance) d) Width at base – 260 mm (250-260 mm, 4% variance) e) Depth at base – 200 mm (190-200 mm, 5.3% variance) f) Circumference of head at eyes – 590 mm (570-590 mm, 3.5% variance) g) Circumference of breast under arms – 800 mm (780-800 mm, 2.6% variance) h) Circumference of base 1 cm from bottom – 840 mm (820-840 mm, 2.4% variance) i) Weight in water completely submerged – 1500 g (1450-1500 g, 3.4% variance)

9.7.4 Physical features a) The manikin must resemble a human and possess anthropological features that are

required for rescue and resuscitation. The head requires the following features: eyes, nose, mouth, chin, jaw, and throat. The body requires a chest, torso arm buds, abdomen, and pelvis.

b) For events in which the manikin is recovered from the bottom, the manikin needs to rest on its back at 2.0 m depth without moving. The manikin needs to be able to rest in this position for a period of 4 hours without leaking water or air. If the manikin has filling holes and plugs, these should be located for ease of filling and emptying and be water and air tight. The manikin weight should be located such that it keeps the manikin positioned on its back.

c) The manikin needs to be able to float at the transition line for use in manikin towing events.


a) For LSA - managed events, a person appointed by the organising committee shall check the approved manikin. Minimum measuring equipment required: tape measure (minimum 3 m with 1 mm increments); weigh scale (minimum 20 kg capacity with 1.0 g increments).

b) For LSA-sanctioned events, the sanction application requires a declaration from the competition organisers that all pooled rescue manikins to be used in the competition will meet LSA standards.

1m



9.8 RESCUE MANIKINS: NIPPER: U/11, U/12, U/13 & U/14 9.8.1 Construction and Composition

a) Construction: Manikins are to be constructed of PITET type plastic and must be hermetic (i.e., capable of being filled with water and sealed for competition).

b) Height: The manikin shall be 680 mm in height. c) Colour: Orange . d) Transverse line: No transverse line required.

9.8.2 Scrutineering Procedure: For LSA - managed events, a person appointed by the organising committee shall check the manikin. Minimum measuring equipment required: tape measure (minimum 3 m with 1 mm increments. For LSA-sanctioned events, the sanction application requires a declaration from the competition organisers that all equipment to be used in the competition will meet LSA standards.

9.9 RESCUE MANIKINS: NIPPER: U/9 & U/10 9.9.1 Construction and Composition

a) Construction: Manikins are to be constructed of PITET type plastic and must be hermetic (i.e., capable of being filled with water and sealed for competition).

b) Height: The manikin shall be 405 mm in height. c) Colour: Orange. d) Transverse line: No transverse line required.

9.9.2 Scrutineering Procedure: For LSA - managed events, a person appointed by the organising committee shall check the manikin. Minimum measuring equipment required: tape measure (minimum 3 m with 1 mm increments). For LSA-sanctioned events, the sanction application requires a declaration from the competition organisers that all equipment to be used in the competition will meet LSA standards.



9.10 OBSTACLES

a) Dimensions: Obstacles used in pool events shall be 700 mm (± 10 mm) high and 2400 mm (± 30 mm) wide with no dangerous parts.

b) Inner frame: The inner frame shall consist of a net or other element which does not permit passage by a swimmer, and which is of a bright colour that contrasts with the water and is clearly visible.

c) Upper line: The upper line of the obstacle is placed on the water level and shall be clearly visible. Use of an additional floating line across the upper line of the obstacles is recommended.


a) For LSA-managed events, a person appointed by the organising committee shall check the obstacles. Minimum measuring equipment required: tape measure (minimum 3 m with 1 mm increments).

b) For LSA-sanctioned events, the sanction application requires a declaration from the competition organisers that all obstacles to be used in the competition will meet LSA standards.

9.11 RESCUE TUBE SPECIFICATIONS 9.11.1 Construction and Composition

a) Source of buoyancy: Material to be as specified in Australian Standard AS2259 or equivalent. The material shall be closed cell plastic foam, and durable and flexible.

b) Buoyancy: The rescue tube shall have a minimum buoyancy factor of 100 Newton’s in fresh water.

c) Flexibility: The body of the rescue tube shall be of such a nature as to be able to roll within itself with a force of 5-6 kg.

d) Strength: Webbing, leash, and fittings shall be able to withstand a minimum of 454.55 kg (1000 lb.) stress in a longitudinal direction without damage.

e) Weight: Total weight of the tube should be between 600-750 g. f) Colour: The body of the rescue tube shall be a colour-fast red, yellow, or orange

(impregnated, painted, or covered) as per Australian Standard AS1318.

OBSTACLES 240 cm

70 cm



g) Stitching/thread: Stitching shall be a locked stitched type 301 of British Standard BS 3870 as illustrated in Australian Standard AS2259. The thread is to have similar properties to the materials being sewn.

9.11.2 Technical Measurements Specification Rescue Tube Dimensions: The body of the tube (flotation component): L – Minimum length 875 mm; maximum length 1000 mm B – Maximum breadth 150 mm T – Maximum thickness 100 mm

The distance from the extremity of the clip to the extremity of the first O-ring shall be a minimum of 1 100 mm to a maximum of 1 400 mm. The distance from the extremity of the clip to the extremity of the second O-ring shall be a minimum of 1 300 mm to a maximum of 1 650 mm. Leash/line: The length of the leash from the first O-ring to the lanyard webbing shall be a minimum of 1.90 m to a maximum of 2.10 m and must include a minimum of 2 O-rings. The leash shall be a synthetic type rope which is UV treated. Webbing connections: Webbing used for the connection of O-rings/clips to the body of the tube shall be 25 mm (± 2.5 mm) wide woven nylon. Lanyard/harness: Webbing for the lanyard shall be 50 mm (± 5.0 mm) wide woven nylon with a minimum length of 1.30 m to a maximum of 1.60 m. The circumference of the lanyard loop shall be a minimum of 1.20 m. O-rings: O-rings shall be brass, stainless steel (welded) or nylon. If nylon, the rings shall be UV treated. O-rings shall be 37.5 mm (± 10.0 mm) in diameter, having no sharp edges or protrusions that may cut or injure the rescuer or victim. Clips: The clip shall be a brass or stainless-steel snap hook KS2470-70 with an overall length of 70 mm (± 7.0 mm). It shall have no sharp edges or protrusions that may cut or injure the rescuer or victim. Overall length: The distance from the clip to the end of the lanyard/harness shall be a minimum of 3.65 m to a maximum of 4.30 m. 9.11.3 Scrutineering procedure For LSA-managed events, a person appointed as Scrutineer by the Management Committee shall check the rescue tubes. Minimum measuring equipment required: tape measure (minimum 5 m with 1 mm increments).

CLIP

1100-1400mm

1300-1650mm

1st O-RING 2nd O-RING

TUBE BODY LENGTH (L) 875-1000mm TUBE BODYBREADTH (B)150mm MAX.

TUBE BODYTHICKNESS (T)100mm MAX.



For LSA-sanctioned events, the sanction application requires a declaration from the competition organizers that all equipment to be used in the competition will meet LSA standards. 9.12 RESCUE TORPEDO BUOY Rescue torpedo buoys (RTB) are obtainable from LSA. Rescue torpedo buoy dimensions: The body of the tube (flotation component): L – Maximum length: 686 mm B – Maximum with 229 mm T – Maximum height 140 mm

9.12.1 Leash The length of the leash to be approximately 2 m. The leash shall be a synthetic type rope which is UV treated.

9.12.2 Webbing Connections Webbing used for the connection of ‘O’ rings/clips to the body of the tube will be 25 mm wide woven nylon (synthetic).

9.12.3 Lanyard Webbing for lanyard to be 50 mm woven nylon and approximately 2 m in length. 9.12.4 Scrutineering procedure For LSA - managed events, a person appointed by the organising committee shall check the Rescue Tubes. Minimum measuring equipment required: tape measure (minimum 3 m with 1 mm increments). The sanction application requires a declaration from the competition organisers that all equipment to be used in the competition will meet LSA standards.



8.13 SWIM FINS SPECIFICATIONS Swim fins are measured while not worn. Swim fins used in competitions shall comply with the following specifications:

1. Length: maximum overall length 650 mm, including ‘shoe’ or ankle strap (ankle strap extended). 2. Width: 300 mm maximum at the widest point of the blade

LSA shall provide a stamp or sticker to be affixed to the swim fins as proof of the scrutineering check.

9.14 THROW LINES For the Line Throw event, throw lines shall be plaited, buoyant polypropylene with non-memory characteristics:

• Diameter: 8 mm (± 1 mm) • Length: minimum 16.5 m; maximum 17.5 m

9.14.1 Scrutineering procedure (a) For LSA -managed events, a person appointed by the organising committee shall check

the throw lines. Minimum measuring equipment required: tape measure (minimum 20 m with 1 mm increments).

(b) For LA-sanctioned events, the sanction application requires a declaration from the competition organisers that all pooled throw lines to be used in the competition will meet LSA standards.

9.15 SWIMWEAR Swimwear for both LSA pool and surf events must comply with the following standards:

• Swimwear worn by males shall not extend above the navel or below the knee. • Swimwear worn by females shall not cover the neck, shoulders or arms nor extend

below the knees. Two-piece swimsuits that conform to this standard may also be worn.



Female Swimsuits

Full Length Zippered Back

Knee Length, Open Back

Short, Open Back

Two Piece

Not Allowed Not Allowed Allowed Allowed Allowed

The material and construction used in swimwear to be worn in all LSA pool and surf events shall be:

• Only textile woven fabric(s) shall be permitted. • Non-woven and/or non-permeable (e.g., wetsuit type) materials shall not be

permitted. • The material used shall have a maximum thickness of 0.8 mm. • Other than string ties for the tops of male swimwear, the bottom and/or top of female

two-piece swimwear, and the back of female one piece open back swimsuits, no zippers or other fastening systems shall be permitted.

• The swimsuit worn by competitors shall not aid in their buoyancy. • Swimwear that provides flotation, pain reduction, chemical/medical stimulation or

other external stimulation or influence of any type shall be prohibited. • No outside application on the material shall be permitted.

Notes: 1. Manufacturer brandings, club names or similar is subject to LSA standards. 2. All swimwear stamped as being FINA compliant for Pool swimming shall be acceptable

for use in LSA competition. 9.15.1 Scrutineering procedure When scrutineered a person appointed by the organising committee shall check the competitor provided swimwear.

Male Swimsuits

Full Length Long Long Legs Knee length

Square Leg Short

Not Allowed Not Allowed Not Allowed

Allowed Allowed Allowed



9.16 PERSONAL FLOTATION DEVICES (PFDs) The wearing of PFDs is optional in craft events. It is highly recommended that the PFDs worn by competitors comply with an international standard or equivalent. (e.g., AS4758 L25 flotation Australian Specifications)

In cases where the device does not meet the standard, the wearer is encouraged to complete a risk assessment and read all relevant safety and operational instructions on the product. Not all PFDs meet standards and thus their effectiveness in preventing drowning is unproven. Non-compliance with the International Standard may mean that these devices present other potential risks (e.g., poor fit, easily dislodged in surf conditions and restricted movement and breathing).

9.16.1 Scrutineering procedure For LSA-managed events, a person appointed by the organising committee shall check that pooled PFDs meet LSA specifications. A person appointed by the LSA Event Management Committee shall check the competitor provided PFDs.

For LSA-sanctioned events, the sanction application requires a declaration from the competition organisers that all pooled PFDs to be used in the competition will meet LSA standards.

9.17 HELMETS Approved aquatic helmets are to be EN 1395 certified (or equivalent). Helmets may be in the manufacturer’s original colour, or preferably, painted or covered in material in accordance with competitors’ team/competition caps.

9.17.1 Scrutineering procedure For LSA-managed events, a person appointed by the organising committee shall check that pooled helmets meet LSA specifications. A person appointed by the LSA Event Management Committee shall check the competitor provided helmets.

For LSA-sanctioned events, the sanction application requires a declaration from the competition organisers that all pooled helmets to be used in the competition will meet LSA standards.

9.18 WETSUITS Wetsuits may be either full and extend from the neck to the wrists and ankles or can be briefer and include a wetsuit hoody. Wetsuits worn in swimming events or swimming legs of events shall have a maximum thickness of 5 mm for swimming events at any location on the wetsuit with a tolerance of ± 0.5 mm. 9.18.1 Scrutineering procedure For LSA-managed events, a person appointed by the LSA Event Management Committee shall check the water temperature and wetsuits. All wetsuits are subject to random scrutineering. Minimum measuring equipment required: thermometer (minimum 10 degrees Celsius with 0.5 degree increments); micrometre.

9.19 LIFESAVING BALLS, NETS AND ROPES Lifesaving balls shall consist of a standard FIBA type basketball filled with air. The ball shall be spherical, consist of a rubber inner tube with leather, synthetic or rubber cover and be 750 mm to 780 mm in diameter and 600 mm to 650 grams in weight. The ball shall be inflated to a pressure such that if the ball is dropped from a height of 1.80 m onto a wooden floor (measured at the lowest point of the ball), the ball will rebound from the floor to a minimum height of 1.20 m and a maximum of 1.40 m (measured at the upper (top) part of the ball).



The ball shall be encased in a net which is fixed to a line. The net is to be a minimum of 570 mm and a maximum of 630 mm long. The holes in the net are 60 mm and the net rope has a diameter of 2 mm.

The line (rope) is 25 m long and 6 mm in diameter and shall be constructed from hemp, nylon or a similar material which floats. Competitors are not allowed to change the composition or size of the material. Further, it is forbidden to make knots in the line other than to tie or loop the line to any part of the rescuer's body.

9.19.1 Scrutineering Procedure For LSA - managed events, a person appointed by the organising committee shall check the Lifesaving Balls, Nets and Ropes. Minimum measuring equipment required: tape measure (minimum 30 m with 1 mm increments). The sanction application requires a declaration from the competition organisers that all equipment to be used in the competition will meet LSA standards.

9.20 SINGLE SKI SPECIFICATIONS a) Maximum length 5.79 m (includes wave deflector – not including any rudder). b) Minimum structural weight 18 kg (excludes removable deflector, includes all rudders

and mechanism, rudder pedals and cables, all flexible foot straps, adjustable foot blocks and mechanism, pedals and seat pads, fixed fins, hatch covers and starting handles).

c) Single ski structural laminate construction must not contain more than 1 layer of 225 gm E glass CSM (except where reinforced patches are required) all other layers must consist of stitched fabric or woven fabric of E, S or R glass, carbon fibre or Aramid fibre. Core materials may be used provided they do not absorb water. Gel coat must be a NPG Isophthalic, NPG orthophthalic or Isophthalic with high UV protection.

Note: A single ski can lose weight after manufacture, if weight loss is less than 250 gms the weight maybe replaced with permanent material provided the material is fixed to the craft e.g. Thermoset resin. Greater weight loss MUST be reported to LSA and the manufacturer. The craft cannot be used within surf lifesaving competition until the weight is to the specification (18 kg).

d) Single skis are to be of mono construction. e) Compliance labels to be secured to the upper surface of all single skis manufactured to

LSA specification. f) Minimum width shall be 480 mm, measured at the widest point of the hull and exclude

any rubbing strips, mouldings, additional protective mouldings or edge of rollover decks. If they are incorporated in the single ski the measurement will be taken from the underside of the hull at the widest point excluding all rubbing strips, additional protective mouldings or rollover decks and shall have a minimum width of 480 mm.

g) Minimum width at a point 400 mm from the bow shall be 180 mm. h) Minimum width at a point 200 mm from the bow shall be 75 mm. i) Where a build in deflector greater than 400 mm in length is used, the minimum width

400 mm from the bow shall be measured. j) Where the deck and/or gunwale is raised in a manner which increases the width of the

hull, the minimum width of 480 mm is required to occur at a point on the underside of the hull on a line which represents the true line of the gunwale.

k) Reverse curve is permitted in the hull to provide greater lift and shall be built according to the following details.

• Reverse curve is permitted in hull only between forward edge of foot wells and bow of the single ski.



• The maximum depth of the reverse curve shall be 20 mm measured over 130 mm span. Width of span to be measured from deck line when removable deflector or built-in deflector less than 400 mm in length is used.

• The maximum reverse curve width shall be measured at a point 400 mm from the bow of the single ski and will reduce to no reverse curve at a point to the front of the forward edge of foot wells.

• When a built in deflector longer than 400 mm is used the method following shall be used to measure the 180 mm and 75 mm minimum width of the hull. From the underside of the single ski any deflector length in excess of 400 mm shall be disregarded and the measurement taken from the 400 mm point.

• An approved LSA template (see Diagram) 180 mm wide shall be placed against the underside of the single ski, 400 mm from the bow of the single ski. Adjustable straight edges, fitted to the template, 130 mm long shall be moved to touch the hull of the single ski and check made to ensure reverse curve to such straight edges do not exceed 20 mm each side.

• No reverse curve in any direction is permitted in the hull between the front foot straps and the stern of the single ski.

Note: When repairs or manufacture result in a reverse curve being created the single ski should be filled and faired to remove the reverse curve.

9.20.1 Component Specifications:

a) Deflectors (removable or built-in): Wave deflectors shall not be wider than maximum width of single ski. Minimum edge radius shall be 3 mm in elevation and in plan deflectors shall have a minimum radius of 25 mm.

b) Rudders: Rudder blades shall be of composite material or other approved material. Rudders must have a minimum profile radius of 25 mm, except at the hull, minimum leading edge radius of 3 mm and minimum trailing edge radius of 2 mm. Leading Edge extends from the underside of the hull to the lowest point of the rudder. Any fixed fin must also conform to this clause.

c) Rudder Mechanisms: There must be no projection of the rudder mechanism, e.g., balls, screws, nails, pins or rods etc. which could cause injury or damage. A plastic cover shall protect all rudder cables made of stainless steel.

d) Foot wells and seating wells shall be incorporated in the overall construction and be completely sealed from the hull.

e) Adjustable foot blocks/straps may be used. Mechanism used in the adjustment must be approved and have no projections or sharp edges that can cause injury.

f) All foot straps MUST incorporate an approved centre release system. g) All ventures protruding from the hull must have a minimum of 1.5 mm radius on all

exposed edges and be designed so no leading edge can cause injury due to wear through use. They must be constructed of plastic, rubber or composite. The use of metal ventures is not permitted.

9.20.2 Flotation: Single skis shall contain a minimum flotation in the form of foam or

other approved material to achieve 30 kg of positive buoyancy. Flotation foam must not absorb water. If polystyrene is used the surface MUST be sealed

All newly manufactured/approved single skis shall have highly visible coloured tips. The colours may include High Visibility safety colours or vivid colours (including black) that contrast sharply against white or sky coloured backgrounds. Pastel tones that do not provide such contrast are not to be used. Tips are to be applied with colourfast paint, resin or thermoplastic adhesive film from the tip of the nose and back from the end of the tail to a length of 100 mm. This can be part of the logo or design. Where the deck and hull (bottom and top) join an allowance of 10 mm



disconnect, is acceptable. It is recommended that High Visibility safety colours or vivid colours be applied to all existing craft. Exemptions apply to single skis with nose and tail colours in excess of 100 mm in High Visibility safety colours or vivid colours (including black) that contrast sharply against white or sky coloured background.

9.20.3 Design: Minimum measurements along the hull from a flat horizontal surface require are as follows:

a) 75 mm at stern to underside, this will be the general continued curvature line of the hull.

b) 300 mm at bow along true line of gunwale. (Deflectors are not considered to be a part of a true line of the gunwale and should not be included in the measurement).

c) At 600 mm in from stern, a clearance of 50 mm. d) At 100 mm in from bow, a clearance of 200 mm. e) At 400 mm in from bow, a clearance of 75 mm. f) A single ski less than the maximum length of 5.79 metres must still comply with

the measurements from bow and stern – for the curvature check. 9.20.4 For measuring The single ski must sit on LSA’s standard jig (see Diagram) and touch or clear all jig measurements, keeping within the overall length. For single skis less than the minimum length the jig must be adjusted to the length of the single ski. There must be no reverse curvature of the bottom of the single ski from the bow to the line of the LSA’s standard jig. As a safety precaution, minimum profile of hull/deck at tail and bow (where removable deflector is used) of single skis in either plan or side elevation shall be 25 mm. Minimum radii in other directions to be 4 mm. Further minimum radii of V bow to be 4 mm. Projection of the overlapping deck past the hull at tail (and bow) to not exceed 5 mm. If a deck is less than 25 mm deep at the join the 25 mm radius must extend to 2 5mm depth minimum. 9.20.5 Carrying handles These may be attached to the single skis such - handles are not to cause injury and are approved by scrutineers.





9.21 DOUBLE SKI SPECIFICATIONS There are no specifications regarding design, length, width, etc., for double skis. The only specifications will be for safety and weight which is: minimum structural weight – 29 kg (excludes removable deflector but includes rudder mechanism). Deflectors (Snitch): Wave deflectors shall not be wider than maximum width of double ski. Exposed edges of minimum radius less than 4 mm shall be covered with heavy duty Nynex tubing of 6 mm minimum inside diameter and 2 mm minimum wall thickness securely fastened to the deflector, or by an equivalent method giving minimum radius of 4 mm. Leading edge of deflector to be either flat for a minimum width of 200 mm or to be of 100 mm radius in plan view. Rudders: Rudder blades shall be of timber, fibreglass, aluminium, stainless steel or other approved material minimum 3 mm thick and all edges rounded. Note: Under no condition will piano wire be permitted as rudder control cables. Rudder

cables where exposed shall be attached to double ski at intervals not exceeding 600 mm.

Rudder Mechanisms: There must be no projection of the rudder mechanism e.g. balls, screws, nails, pins or rods, etc., which could cause injury or damage. All rudder mechanisms shall be protected by an approved cover. Foot wells and seating wells may be incorporated in the overall construction. Venturi drainers are permitted. Flotation: Double skis shall contain a minimum flotation in the form of foam or other approved material to provide a buoyancy of 40 kg mass. If double skis have no flotation, the competitor must carry a life jacket or rescue torpedo buoy. Note: Isolate foam provides buoyancy of 10 kg for each 0.01 cubic metre. Colour: All newly manufactured/approved double skis shall have highly visible coloured tips. The colours may include High Visibility safety colours or vivid colours (including black) that contrast sharply against white or sky coloured backgrounds. Pastel tones that do not provide such contrast are not to be used. Tips are to be applied with colourfast paint, resin or thermoplastic adhesive film from the tip of the nose and back from the end of the tail to a length of 100 mm. This can be part of the logo or design. Where the deck and hull (bottom and top) join an allowance of 10 mm disconnect, is acceptable. It is recommended that High Visibility safety colours or vivid colours be applied to all existing craft. 9.22 LONG DISTANCE (SINGLE AND DOUBLE) SKI SPECIFICATIONS There are no specifications regarding design, weight, length, width, etc., for long distance racing skis. The only specifications will be for safety. Deflectors (Snitch): Wave deflectors shall not be wider than maximum width of ski. Exposed edges of minimum radius less than 4 mm shall be covered with heavy duty Nynex tubing of 6 mm minimum inside diameter and 2 mm minimum wall thickness securely fastened to the deflector, or by an equivalent method giving minimum radius of 4 mm. Leading edge of deflector to be either flat for a minimum width of 200 mm or to be of 100 mm radius in plan view. Rudders: Rudder blades shall be of timber, fibreglass, aluminium stainless steel or other approved material minimum 3 mm thick and all edges rounded. Note: Under no condition will piano wire be permitted as rudder control cables. Rudder

cables where exposed shall be attached to ski at intervals not exceeding 600 mm. Rudder Mechanisms: There must be no projection of the rudder mechanism e.g. balls, screws, nails, pins or rods, etc., which could cause injury or damage. All rudder mechanisms shall be protected by an approved cover.



Foot wells and seating wells: May be incorporated in the overall construction. Flotation: Skis shall contain a minimum flotation in the form of foam or other approved material to provide a buoyancy of 30 kg mass. (Double Skis – 40 kg). If Skis have no flotation, the competitor must carry a life jacket or rescue torpedo buoy. Note: Isolate foam provides buoyancy of 10 kg for each 0, 01 cubic metre. Craft Colour: There is no specification on craft colour. However, 1 m of the nose of the craft must be painted / coloured in day-glow orange. 9.23 SKI PADDLES Currently no specification for paddles exists. However, all paddles must be free of sharp or jagged edges (which may cause injury). Metal tipped paddles are NOT permitted to be used. 9.24 CRAFT NUMBERING All Skis, single and double, must be numbered. Numbers are obtainable from LSA, and they should be applied as shown in the diagram. Numbers may be painted/sign written on craft, provided that the colour, style and size is exactly the same as the numbers supplied by LSA.

SKI (SINGLE AND DOUBLE) NUMBERING

Section 10 - National and Inter-Provincial Championships


SECTION 10: NATIONAL AND INTER-PROVINCIAL CHAMPIONSHIPS - INDEX

10.1 NATIONAL AND INTER-PROVINCIAL CHAMPIONSHIPS

CHAMPIONSHIPS ……………………………………………………………………

2

10.2 OFFICIAL CEREMONIES …………………………………………………...…… 2

10.2.1 Officials and Competitor Oaths…………………………………….. 2

10.2.2 Award Presentations ………………………………………………… 2

10.2.3 Flags and Banners ………………………………………………….. 3

10.3 ENTRY INTO NATIONAL CHAMPIONSHIPS: NIPPERS, JUNIORS,

SENIORS AND MASTERS ……………………………………………………….

3

3

10.3.1 Entry Forms ………………………………………………………….. 3

10.3.2 Entry Fees ……………………………………………………………. 3

10.3.3 Competitive Entry Requirements …………………………………. 4

10.3.4 Late Entries……………………………………………………………. 4

10.3.5 Restrictions …………………………………………………………… 4

10.3.6 Withdrawals …………………………………………………………... 4

10.3.7 Seeding of Entries: Draws & Qualifying Times …………………… 4

10.4 SOUTH AFRICAN CHAMPIONSHIPS TITLES ……………………………….. 4

10.4.1 Juniors/Seniors Surf National Championships Events …………... 4

10.4.2 Nippers Surf National Championships Events ……………………. 6

10.4.3 Masters Surf National Championships ……………………………. 7

10.4.4 Juniors/Seniors Pool National Championships Events…………… 7

10.4.5 Nippers Pool National Championships Events……………………. 7

10.4.6 Masters Pool National Championships ……………………………. 8

10.4.7 Juniors/Seniors Open Water National Championships events... 8

10.4.8 Nippers Open Water National Championships Events ………….. 9

10.4.9 Masters Open Water National Championships …………………… 9

10.5 INTER CLUB GRAND AGGREGATE CHAMPIONSHIPS: NIPPERS,

JUNIORS, SENIORS AND MASTERS …………………………………………….

9

10.5.1 Ties in Results………………………………………………………… 9

10.5.2 Ties in Events during Qualifying Rounds …………………………… 10

10.6 EVENT CANCELLATION ……………………………………………………….. 10

10.7 COMPETITOR OF THE CHAMPIONSHIPS …………………………………… 10

10.8 INTER-PROVINCIAL CHAMPIONSHIPS ………………………………………... 11

10.8.1 Age Groups. …………………………………………………………. 11

10.8.2 Team Composition …………………………………………………. 11

10.8.3 Events to be conducted …………………………………………… 11

10.8.4 Event Rules …………………………………………………………. 11

10.8.5 Point Scoring ………………………………………………………... 12

10.8.6 Ties in Results …………………………………………………………. 12



SECTION 10: NATIONAL AND INTER-PROVINCIAL CHAMPIONSHIPS 10.1 NATIONAL AND INTER-PROVINCIAL CHAMPIONSHIPS

a) Apart from duly authorised National Championships, no lifesaving authority may stage a lifesaving event and name a race or championships a "South African Championship" or name the winner thereof "South African Champion".

b) The winning competitor or team at the National Championships shall be styled the South African Champion of their respective event.

c) In Junior competition (U/15, U/17 and U/19), all championship titles shall be preceded by the word “Junior”, or respective age group as the case may be.

d) In Nipper competition or age group competition (U/9, U/10, U/11, U/12, U/13 and U/14), all championship titles shall be preceded by the word “Nipper” or respective age group as the case may be.

e) All events contested, conditions, rules and the name of the championships shall be as determined and laid down in this competition manual and this manual forms part of the constitution of LSA.

10.2 OFFICIAL CEREMONIES Official Ceremonies shall be conducted at all National Championships and consist of the following elements:

a) March on of teams before the official reviewing stand. b) Administration of the Competitors and Technical Official’s oaths. c) Official welcome by LSA President or nominee. d) Official welcome by hosting lifesaving authority. e) Playing of the South African National Anthem (Note: This can only be played if the South African National Flag is flown).

10.2.1 Officials and Competitor Oaths At major LSA competitions it may be appropriate for oaths to be recited at an Opening Ceremony or at the commencement of the competition. The selection of the Competitor and Official to read the oaths will be the responsibility of the organising committee for the event. The oaths are as follows:

Official’s Oath “On behalf of all appointed competition Officials at these (insert name) Championships, I declare that we will carry out our separate duties in an honest and sportsmanship manner and that we will treat each athlete competing at these Championships in a fair and reasonable manner and without personal prejudice or bias. We understand that our appointment to these Championships is made on the basis of our acceptance of the responsibility given to us as representative of Lifesaving South Africa”. Competitor’s Oath “On behalf of all athletes competing at these (insert name) Championships, I declare that we will compete to the best of our ability in a sportsmanship manner that is fair to all athletes in our field of competition. We declare that we will abide by the rules of competition and will comply with all oral and written instructions given to us by the appointed Championship Officials. As Athletes, we understand our responsibility to uphold the traditions of Lifesaving South Africa “.

Note: The wording in these oaths may be modified to meet the requirements of the event. 10.2.2 Award Presentations Official presentations of awards to event and team winners may be conducted throughout the championships. All award presentations shall share the following characteristics:

a) Presentations shall be staged on a podium or dais. b) An official presenter will place medals on ribbons around the competitor’s neck, in the order: bronze, silver and gold. c) Official photographs will be taken.



With the presentations of team events, all members of the team shall wear similar style clothing – either the lifesaving authority’s costume or uniform (tracksuit, short/shirt, etc.) and uniform head gear. Individuals shall wear the lifesaving authority’s costume or uniform (tracksuit, short/shirt, etc.) and head gear. A competitor or team shall not be permitted to take part in the presentation if, in the opinion of the Chief Referee or Presentation Official the competitor or team is not properly dressed.

10.2.3 Flags and Banners Each team shall bring to the Championships, a flag or banner indicating the team name or lifesaving authority’s name. Flags and banners shall be carried at the official opening ceremony. In addition, organizers may request the flags and banners to be displayed at the competition sites, official functions and award presentations. The South African flag, ILS flag and LSA flag, shall be flown at all National Championships and the South African National Anthem shall be played only if the National flag is displayed. 10.3 ENTRY INTO NATIONAL CHAMPIONSHIPS: NIPPERS, JUNIORS, SENIORS AND

MASTERS 10.3.1 Entry Forms Clubs intending to enter any of the lifesaving championships (Nippers or Juniors/Seniors or Masters – Pool, Surf or Open Water) will have to complete “Form A” – this form should list all the members of a club who wish to participate in any of the championships. The closing date shall be determined by the LSA Director: Sport. Names listed on Form A will be captured onto the “Event Carnival Management System” (the software used to manage the championships entries) by LSA. A competing club is to enter the names, i.e. individual names and teams per event on the system. A cut-off date for entering these events will be set. Notes:

1. LSA will not process entries until proof of payment is received. 2. Clubs should not enter any competitor who does not have the appropriate award, passed

the current retest and have completed the minimum voluntary duty hours. For Surf and Open Water Championships, Team Managers may make changes to team entries prior to the commencement of the championships, by 22h00 the day prior to the particular day of the championships, after that no more changes to teams will be allowed. For Pool Championships once entries have closed Team Managers may not make changes to entries on the “Event Carnival Management System”. Changes are to be notified in writing on a “Change Management Form”. Teams may be amended up to the close of the competition on the day prior to the particular day of the championships, after that no more changes to teams will be allowed. If heats have been held and the event held over to another day, no changes can be made to the composition of the teams in that event.

10.3.2 Entry Fees The entry fee for the championships shall be determined by the LSA General Manager in conjunction with the LSA Director: Finance and LSA Director: Sport. The fee to be paid is per championships (i.e. Nippers Championships, Juniors/Seniors Championships or Masters Championships). If a competitor would like to compete in an additional age group there is an additional fee payable (i.e. if say a junior competes in the juniors section (say U/19) and then enters a senior event – he needs to pay the original entry fee and an additional fee). Likewise, it should be noted that if a Master enters a Senior Championships and Masters Championships he is required to pay two entry fees. 10.3.3 Competitive Entry Requirements The competitive entry requirements as set out in Section 4: Competitive Entry Requirements regarding:

• Awards

• Entrance Requirements



• Competition Eligibility

• Annual Retest

• Duty Obligation shall apply for entry into the South African Lifesaving Championships. 10.3.4 Late Entries As specified annually by LSA, there will be no late entries accepted after the closing date. 10.3.5 Restrictions There are no restrictions regarding the number of teams or individuals a club may enter in the Nippers, Juniors/ Seniors or Masters Championships. 10.3.6 Withdrawals A withdrawal fee (fine) is payable per competitor per event if the competitor or team is a "no show" on the day of the competition after having registered for the event or having been “ticked off” by the Marshal. The fine may be waived on submission of an acceptable medical certificate for consideration to the Chief Referee, stating that the competitor is unable to compete. The fine is set by the LSA General Manager and the LSA Director: Sport.

10.3.7 Seeding of Entries: Draws & Qualifying Times There shall be no seeding for heats, quarter finals, semi-finals or finals for Surf and Open Water Championships. The placing of teams and competitors in heats, quarter finals, semi-finals or finals shall be based on the random draw tables. For the Pool Championships no qualifying times are set. The seeding for the Pool Championships shall be as follows:

a) The initial draw for heats should be conducted by LSA. b) Competitors and team best times in the 12 months prior to the entry deadline of the

championships shall be submitted on entry Form B’s. Competitors and teams will be ranked according to the entry times.

c) Competitors and teams for where no times are submitted shall be considered to have the slowest times.

d) Placement of competitors with identical times, or of more than 1 competitor without times, shall be determined by draw.

10.4 South African Championships Titles All competition events and races are competed for annually under the auspices of LSA, the winning clubs or individuals being styled the South African Champion(s) in the respective events and the individual medley race of; swim, board and ski where the winner is styled the “South African Iron Man Champion”. All other Championships are named similarly to the event they describe. The South African Lifesaving Championships are held in a number of sections:

1. Inter-Club Pool Championships – Masters, Nippers, Junior and Open 2. Inter Club Open Water Championships – Masters, Nippers, Junior and Open 3. Inter Club Surf Championships – Masters, Nippers, Junior and Open

The events may be hosted separately, or at the same time at the discretion of the Director of Sport. 10.4.1 Juniors/Seniors Surf National Championships Events The following S.A. Surf Championships titles – U/15, U/17, U/19, Junior and Senior are conferred annually:



EVENT

AGE GROUP

JUNIOR

SENIOR U/15 U/17 U/19

(U/15, U/17 & U/19 COMBINED)

Beach Flags M&F M&F M&F - M&F

Beach Relay - - - M&F M&F

3 x 1 km Beach Run Relay

- - - M&F M&F

Beach Run M&F M&F M&F - M&F

Beach Sprint M&F M&F M&F - M&F

Board Race M&F M&F M&F - M&F

Board Relay - - - M&F M&F

Board Rescue - - - M&F M&F

Double Ski - - - M&F M&F

Ironman/woman M&F M&F M&F M&F

Rescue Tube Rescue - - - M&F M&F

Single Ski M&F M&F M&F - M&F

Single Ski Relay - - - M&F M&F

Surf Boat - - - - O

Surf Swim M&F M&F M&F - M&F

Run/Swim/Run M&F M&F M&F - M&F

Taplin Relay - - - M&F M&F

M = Male only event F= Female only event O = Mixed event (Males and Females)

10.4.2 Nippers Surf National Championships Events The following S.A. Surf Nippers Championships titles – U/9, U/10, U/11, U/12, U/13 and U/14 are conferred annually:

EVENT AGE GROUPS

U/9 U/10 U/11 U/12 U/13 U/14

Beach Flags B&G B&G B&G B&G B&G B&G

Beach Relay O O O

Beach Run B&G B&G B&G B&G B&G B&G

Beach Sprint B&G B&G B&G B&G B&G B&G

Board Race - - B&G B&G B&G B&G

Board Relay - O O

Bodyboard Relay O - -

Bodyboard B&G B&G B&G B&G - -

Iron Nipper - - - - B&G B&G

Run/Swim/Run B&G B&G B&G B&G B&G B&G

Surf Swim B&G B&G B&G B&G B&G B&G

Taplin Relay O

Run, swim, bodyboard O

Run, swim, board O

Run, swim, board

B = Boys only event G = Girls only event O = Optional mixed event, boys and girls can enter and no restriction on gender participation



10.4.3 Masters Surf National Championships

The following Masters Surf Championships are conferred annually:

INDIVIDUAL

EVENTS

MASTERS AGE GROUPS

30-34 35-39 40-44 45-49 50-54 55-59 60-64 65-69 70-74 75+

Surf Swim X X X X X X X X X X

Beach Flags X X X X X X X X X X

Beach Sprint X X X X X X X X X X

2 km Beach Run X X X X X X

1 km Beach Run X X X X

Run/Swim/Run X X X X X X X X X X

Single Ski Race X X X X X X X X X X

Board Race X X X X X X X X X X

Ironman/

Ironwoman X X X X X X X X X

TEAM EVENTS 30-34 35-39 40-44 45-49 50-54 55-59 60-64 65-69 70-74 75+

Double Ski X X X X X X X X X X

TOTAL AGE TEAM EVENTS AGES TOTAL

110-129

AGES TOTAL

130-149

AGES TOTAL

150-169

AGES TOTAL

170+

Beach Relay

(3 Competitors per team) X X X X

3 x 1 km Beach Run Relay X X X X

Notes:

1. Individual events are conducted in age groups. 2. Three-person team events are conducted as total-age events with competitors whose

ages total 110-129 years, 130-149 years, 150-169 years, and 170 years or more. The total of the three competitors’ ages determines the team’s age-group. For example, a team composed of a 30-year-old, a 40-year-old, and a 50-year-old (= 120 years) would compete in the 110-129 years age group. A competitor may only compete in one three-person team event.

3. Masters competitors may not compete in more than one age category. 4. Masters competitors may enter the Championships as an individual member of a club and

may participate in individual events. 5. In team events, the team may not be made up of competitors from multiple clubs. 6. Competitors may only compete in one team per event. 7. Two-person competitor team events: double ski race the age category is determined by

the age of the younger competitor. Male and female compete in the same event together and the age categories are as follows: 30-34 years, 35-39 years, 40-44 years, 45-49 years, 50-54 years, 55-59 years, 60-64 years, 65-69 years, 70-74 years and 75 years and over

The age group of individual masters competition are as follows:

30-34 years - A 35-39 years - B 40-44 years - C 45-49 years - D 50-54 years - E 55-59 years - F 60-64 years - G

65-69 years – H 70-74 years – I 75 years and older - J



10.4.4 Juniors/Seniors Pool National Championships Events The following S.A. Pool Championships titles – U/15, U/17, U/19, Junior and Senior are conferred annually:

EVENT

AGE GROUP

JUNIOR TEAM

SENIOR U/15 U/17 U/19

(U/15, U/17 & U/19 COMBINED)

50m Manikin Carry M&F M&F M&F - M&F

200m Obstacle Swim M&F M&F M&F - M&F

200m Super Lifesaver M&F M&F M&F - M&F

100m Manikin Carry with Fins M&F M&F M&F - M&F

100m Manikin Tow with Fins M&F M&F M&F - M&F

100m Rescue Medley M&F M&F M&F - M&F

4x50m Pool Lifesaver Relay - - - M&F M&F

4x50m Medley Relay - - - M&F M&F

4x25m Manikin Relay - - - M&F M&F

4x50m Obstacle Relay - - - M&F M&F

Line Throw - - - M&F M&F

SERC - - - Mixed Mixed

10.4.5 Nippers Pool National Championships Events

The following S.A. Pool Nippers Championships titles – U/9, U/10, U/11, U/12, U/13 and U/14 are conferred annually:


10.4.6 Masters Pool National Championships The following S.A. Masters Pool Championships titles are conferred annually:

INDIVIDUAL EVENTS MASTERS AGE GROUPS

30-34 35-39 40-44 45-49 50-54 55-59 60-64 65-69 70-74 75+

200m Obstacle Swim X X X X

100m Obstacle Swim X X X X X X

50m Manikin Carry X X X X X X X X X X

100m Manikin Carry with Fins

X X X X X X X X X X

100m Manikin Tow with Fins

X X X X X X X X X X

EVENT AGE GROUP

U/9 U/10 U/11 U/12 U/13 U/14

50m Manikin Carry B&G B&G B&G B&G B&G B&G

50m Obstacle Swim B&G B&G - - - -

100m Obstacle Swim - - B&G B&G B&G B&G

100m Manikin Carry with Fins B&G B&G B&G B&G B&G B&G

100m Rescue Medley - - - - B&G B&G

4x50m Pool Lifesaver Relay O O O

4x50m Rescue Torpedo Buoy Relay O O O

4x25m Manikin Relay O O O

4x50 Obstacle Relay O O O

2x2 Rescue Ball Rescue Relay - O O



INDIVIDUAL EVENTS MASTERS AGE GROUPS

30-34 35-39 40-44 45-49 50-54 55-59 60-64 65-69 70-74 75+

Line Throw X X X X X X X X X X

TOTAL AGE TEAM

EVENTS

AGES TOTAL

120-139

AGES TOTAL

140-169

AGES TOTAL

170-199

AGES TOTAL

200-229

AGES TOTAL

230 +

4x50m Obstacle Relay X X X X X

4x50m Medley Relay X X X X X

Notes:

1. Individual events and the Line Throw event are conducted in age groups. In the Line Throw event, the two-person team shall compete in the age group of the younger competitor.

2. Four-person team events are conducted as total-age events with competitors whose ages total 120-139 years, 140-169 years, 170-199 years, 200-229 years and 230 years or more. The total of the four competitors’ ages determines the team’s age group. For example, a team comprised of a 30-year-old, a 40-year-old, a 50-year-old and a 60-year-old (= 180 years) would compete in the 170-199 years age group.

3. Masters competitors may not compete in more than one age category. 4. Masters competitors may enter the Championships as an individual member of a club and

may participate in individual events. 5. In team events, the team may not be made up of competitors from multiple clubs. 6. Competitors may only compete in one team per event.

The age group of individual masters competition are as follows:

30-34 years - A 35-39 years - B 40-44 years - C 45-49 years - D 50-54 years - E 55-59 years - F 60-64 years - G

65-69 years – H 70-74 years – I 75 years and older - J

10.4.7 Juniors/Seniors Open Water National Championships Events The following S.A. Open Water Championships titles – U/15, U/17, U/19, Junior and Senior are conferred annually:

EVENT

AGE GROUP

JUNIOR TEAM

U/15 U/17 U/19 (U/15, U/17 & U/19

COMBINED) SENIOR

Board Race M&F M&F M&F - M&F

Run/Swim/Run M&F M&F M&F - M&F

Ironman/woman M&F M&F M&F - M&F

Open Water Swim M&F M&F M&F - M&F

Rescue Tube Rescue Race - - - M&F M&F

Taplin Relay - - - M&F M&F

10.4.8 Nippers Open Water National Championships Events The following S.A. Nipper Open Water Championships titles – U/9, U/10, U/11, U/12, U/13 and U/14 are conferred annually:




10.4.9 Masters Open Water National Championships The following Masters Open Water Championships titles are conferred annually: .

INDIVIDUAL EVENTS

MASTERS AGE GROUPS

30-34 35-39 40-44 45-49 50-54 55-59 60-64 65-69 70-74 75+

Open Water Swim X X X X X X X X X X

Board Race X X X X X X X X X X

The notes as set out in Section 3: General Competitive Conditions, Par. 3.6. will apply.

10.5 INTER CLUB GRAND AGGREGATE CHAMPIONSHIPS: NIPPERS, JUNIORS,

SENIORS AND MASTERS For every Championship event, clubs will score points towards an Inter Club Grand Aggregate Championship. There will be no difference in the points scored for individual or team events. The scoring will be:

PLACE POINTS

1st 8

2nd 7

3rd 6

4th 5

5th 4

6th 3

7th 2

8th 1

The following Inter Club Grand Aggregate points will be calculated for Surf:

1. Junior (U/15, U/17, and U/19 combined) Grand Aggregate 2. Senior Grand Aggregate. 3. Masters Aggregate 4. Nipper U/9 and U/10 Combined Grand Aggregate 5. Nipper U/ 11 and U/12 Combined Grand Aggregate 6. Nipper U/ 13 and U/14 Combined Grand Aggregate 7. Grand Aggregate of all Nippers age groups (U/9 & U/10, U/11 & U/12, U/13 & U/14

added together). The following Inter Club Grand Aggregate points will be calculated for Pool:

1. Junior (U/15, U/17, and U/19 combined) Grand Aggregate 2. Senior Grand Aggregate. 3. Masters Aggregate. 4. Nipper U/9 and U/10 Grand Aggregate 5. Nipper U/ 11 and U/12 Grand Aggregate 6. Nipper U/ 13 and U/14 Grand Aggregate 7. Grand Aggregate of all Nipper age groups (U/9 & U/10, U/11 & U/12, U/13 & U/14)

The following Inter Club Grand Aggregate points will be calculated for Open Water: 1. Junior (U/15, U/17, and U/19 combined) Grand Aggregate

EVENT AGE GROUP

U/9 U/10 U/11 U/12 U/13 U/14

Iron Nipper - - - - B&G B&G

Open Water Swim B&G B&G B&G B&G B&G B&G

Run/Swim/Run - - B&G B&G B&G B&G

Board Relay O O O

Taplin O O O

Run/Swim/Run Relay O - -



2. Senior Grand Aggregate. 3. Masters Aggregate. 4. Nipper U/9 and U/10 Grand Aggregate 5. Nipper U/ 11 and U/12 Grand Aggregate 6. Nipper U/ 13 and U/14 Grand Aggregate 7. Grand Aggregate of all Nipper age groups (U/9 & U/10, U/11 & U/12, U/13 & U/14)

10.5.1 Ties in Results If there is a tie in the results of the Inter Club Grand Aggregate Championship, the winner will be determined using a system of tie-breaks.

1. Most 1st places in final finishes - if this does not determine a winner, 2. Most 2nd places in final finishes - if this does not determine a winner, 3. Most 3rd places final finishes - and so on.

Other events - share the total points score of the position in which the tie has occurred and the next position. 10.5.2 Ties in Events during Qualifying Rounds When a tie occurs in an event that qualifies for a final, the tied competitors shall advance to the final. However, if there are insufficient places available in the final, a repêchage shall be conducted between the tied competitors to determine the finalist.

10.6 EVENT CANCELLATION No points shall be credited to any club if an event is cancelled – even if some heats have been run. If the cancellation of the competition occurs due to hazardous surf conditions, or insufficient beach being available due to tidal change, extreme windy weather conditions, lightning or thunder, even after the conducting of some heats: and if not more than 75% of the beach and or ocean events have been contested, no “Grand Aggregate Point” score can be awarded for that group or for that section. 10.7 COMPETITOR OF THE CHAMPIONSHIPS At the conclusion of a competition or championships, a “Competitor of the Championships” is declared. The title is determined by the total amount of individual points the competitors achieve in their respective age groups for individual events only and only from the points allocated to them for 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, 5th, 6th, 7th and 8th placings. The following categories considered are; Juniors and Seniors: U/15, U/17, and U/19 and Senior, both Male and Female; Nippers: the following categories considered are: U/9, U/10, U/11, U/12, U/13 and U/14 for both Boys and Girls. The points to be allocated are:

PLACE IN INDIVIDUAL EVENTS

POINTS

1st 8

2nd 7

3rd 6

4th 5

5th 4

6th 3

7th 2

8th 1

For the Surf Championships, the Junior (U/15, U/17 and U/19) and Senior “individual” events are: Beach Flags; Beach Run; Beach Sprint; Board Race; Ironman/woman; Single Ski; Surf Swim; Run/Swim/Run races. For Nippers the following events are “individual”: Beach Flags, Beach Sprint, Board Race (U/11, U/12, U/13 and U/14 only), Bodyboard Race (U/9 and U/10 only), Iron Nipper (U/13 and U/14 only), Beach Run (all age groups), Surf Swim (all age groups) and Run/Swim/Run/ (all age groups). For the Open Water Championships, the Junior (U/15, U/17 and U/19) and Senior “individual”



events are: Board Race; Ironman/woman; Open Water Swim; Run/Swim/Run. For Nippers the following events are “individual”: Iron Nipper (U/13 & U/14), Open Water Swim and Run/Swim/Run. For Pool Championships, the title is determined by the number of points a competitor gains at the competition for all individual events. The following categories considered are: U/9, U/10, U/11, U/12, U/13, U/14, U/15, U/17, U/19 and Open in both Boys and Girls or Men and Women categories. If a competitor becomes the new SA record holder, the individual will get 1 bonus point towards his Competitor of the Championships point score. The score is only calculated on individual events in the pool for pool competition. There will be no discard of events for the point score. In the event that not all individual events are completed the Competitor of the Championships shall be determined over the total number of events completed. If there is a tie, the title shall be awarded to the competitor with the most gold medals. If still a tie, then to the competitor with the most silver medals, thereafter on bronze medals if necessary. After that a tie is declared. If the cancellation of the competition occurs due to hazardous surf conditions, insufficient beach is available due to tidal change, extreme windy weather conditions or thunder and lightning even after the conducting of some heats: and if not more than 75% of the beach and or ocean events have been contested no “Competitor of the Championships” can be awarded. 10.8 INTER-PROVINCIAL CHAMPIONSHIPS 10.8.1 Age Groups The Inter-Provincial Championships is staged for the following age categories:

• Nippers (12 to 13 years old)

• Youth (14 to 18 years old)

• Open (19 years and older)

10.8.2 Team Composition Competitors enter the Inter-Provincial Lifesaving Championships only as members of a Provincial Team, not as individuals. A team may consist of a minimum of one competitor and a maximum of 8 females and a maximum of 8 males, in addition to any non-competitive management or coaching personnel. It is not mandatory to have both male and female competitors in a team. Teams may not increase the number of male or female competitors beyond 8. This is applicable to Nipper, Youth and Open Teams. Inter-Provincial competitors who are 17–18 years of age may enter individual events in either Open competition or Youth competition but not both. Regardless, team size remains 8 males and 8 females maximum. 10.8.3 Events to be conducted The Open, Youth and Nipper championships shall be conducted in male and female categories in the events listed below:

Pool Events

Nipper Teams Maximum

entries per Province

Youth Teams Maximum entries

per Province

Open Teams Maximum entries

per Province

200m Obstacle Swim - 4 competitors 4 competitors

100m Obstacle Swim 4 competitors - -

50m Manikin Carry 4 competitors 4 competitors 4 competitors

100m Rescue Medley 4 competitors 4 competitors 4 competitors

100m Manikin Carry with Fins 4 competitors 4 competitors 4 competitors

100m Manikin Tow with Fins - 4 competitors 4 competitors



200m Super Lifesaver - 4 competitors 4 competitors

100m Super Nipper 4 competitors - -

Line Throw - 1 team 1 team

4x25m Manikin Relay 1 team 1 team 1 team

4x50m Obstacle Relay 1 team 1 team 1 team

4x50m Medley Relay 1 team 1 team 1 team

4x50m Pool Lifesaver Relay 1 team 1 team 1 team

Simulated Emergency Response Competition

- 1 team 1 team

Note: The SERC team will comprise of Males and Females

Surf Events Gender

Single Ski: Youth and Open Male & Female

Surf Swim Relay Race: Nipper 2 Male + 2 Female

Surf Swim Race Male & Female

Board Race: Youth, Open and Nipper Male & Female

Iron Man/Woman: Youth, Open and Nipper Male & Female

Beach Sprint: Youth, Open and Nipper Male & Female

Beach Flags: Youth, Open and Nipper Male & Female

Board Rescue: Youth and Open Male & Female

Rescue Tube Rescue: Youth and Open Male & Female

Surf Swim Race: Youth, Open and Nipper Male & Female

Single Ski Relay: Youth and Open Male & Female

Board Relay: Youth, Open and Nipper Male & Female

Beach Relay: Youth, Open and Nipper Male & Female

Taplin Relay: Youth, Open and Nipper Male & Female

10.8.4 Event Rules The event rules, as set out in this manual

10.8.5 Point Scoring

For every event the Province will score points towards an Inter-Provincial Grand Aggregate Championship for each category: Nippers, Youth and Open. There will be no difference in the points scored for individual or team events. The scoring will be:

PLACE POINTS

1st 8

2nd 7

3rd 6

4th 5

5th 4

6th 3

7th 2

8th 1

The following Inter Provincial Grand Aggregate points will be calculated for Surf:

1. Nipper Surf Inter-Provincial Grand Aggregate 2. Youth Surf Inter-Provincial Grand Aggregate 3. Open Surf Inter-Provincial Grand Aggregate 4. Grand Inter-Provincial Surf Aggregate of all age groups: Nipper, Youth and Open

combined



The following Inter Provincial Grand Aggregate points will be calculated for Pool:

1. Nipper Pool Inter-Provincial Grand Aggregate 2. Youth Pool Inter-Provincial Grand Aggregate 3. Open Pool Inter-Provincial Grand Aggregate 4. Grand Inter-Provincial Pool Aggregate of all age groups: Nipper, Youth and Open

combined

10.8.6 Ties in Results If there is a tie in the results of the Inter Provincial Grand Aggregate Championship, the winner will be determined using a system of tie-breaks.

1. Most 1st places in final finishes - if this does not determine a winner, 2. Most 2nd places in final finishes - if this does not determine a winner, 3. Most 3rd places final finishes - and so on.

Other events - share the total points score of the position in which the tie has occurred and the next position.

Section 11 - Officials and their Duties

Section 11: Page 1(2020 Manual - DRAFT)

SECTION 11: OFFICIALS AND THEIR DUTIES – INDEX

11.1 GENERAL ………………………………………………………………………… 2

11.2 APPOINTMENT OF TECHNICAL OFFICIALS ………………………………. 2

11.3 APPLICATION FOR APPOINTMENT………………………………………….. 2

11.4 NOTIFICATION OF APPOINTMENTS ………………………………………… 3

11.5 DRESS OF COMPETITION OFFICIALS ……………………………………… 3

11.6 TECHNICAL OFFICIALS QUALIFICATION POLICY ………………………. 3

11.7 TECHNICAL OFFICIALS CODE OF CONDUCT ……………………………. 3

11.8 THE COMPETITION COMMITTEE …………………………………………….. 4

11.9 LOCAL EVENT MANAGER …………………………………………………….. 4

11.10 LSA EVENT DIRECTOR ………………………………………………………… 4

11.11 DUTIES OF TECHNICAL OFFICIALS AND OFFICIALS …………………… 4

11.11.1 Chief Referee …………………………………………………….. 5

11.11.2 Deputy Chief Referee ……………………………………………… 6

11.11.3 Area Referee ………………………………………………………… 6

11.11.4 Area Referee /Event Directors ……………………………………... 7

11.11.5 Sectional Referee ………………………………………………….. 7

11.11.6 Referee Steward/Head Scorer …………………………………….. 8

11.11.7 Competition Liaison Officers ……………………………………….. 8

11.11.8 Course Supervisors …………………………………………………. 8

11.11.9 Scrutineer Coordinator and Scrutineers ………………………….. 9

11.11.10 Gear and Equipment Coordinator …………………………………. 9

11.11.11 Announcing Coordinator and Commentary Panel ……………….. 10

11.11.12 Judge ………………………………………………………………… 12

11.11.13 Starters ……………………………………………………………… 13

11.11.14 Check Starter ………………………………………………………… 14

11.11.15 Marshall ………………………………………………………………. 14

11.11.16 Check Marshall ………………………………………………………. 14

11.11.17 Presentation Steward ……………………………………………….. 14

11.11.18 Appeals Committee Convener ……………………………………... 15

11.11.19 Appeals Committee members ……………………………………… 15

11.11.20 Disciplinary Committee Convener …………………………………. 15

11.11.21 Disciplinary Committee members ………………………………….. 15

11.11.22 Safety Officer (Safety Emergency Mangement Cooordinator) … 15

11.11.23 Area Risk and Response Officers (ARRO) ……………………….. 16

11.11.24 Power Craft Coordinator ……………………………………………. 16

11.11.25 Water Safety Coordinator …………………………………………. 17

11.11.26 Water Safety Personnel …………………………………………….. 17

11.11.27 Communications Officer ……………………………………………. 17

11.11.28 Medical/First Aid Coordinator ……………………………………… 18

11.11.29 Course Statistician …………………………………………………... 18



SECTION 11: OFFICIALS AND THEIR DUTIES 11.1 GENERAL Technical Officials (Judges) are qualified and have the necessary qualifications to enable them to officiate in competitions and events. Officials are suitably experienced and qualified persons who can undertake certain specific duties – like Safety, First Aid, etc. LSA may appoint an Event Manager for major competition and/or events. The Event Manager is a suitably qualified and experienced person who is in charge of the managing of the event. He is the liaison person between the local organising committee, LSA General Manager, Sponsors and the Chief Referee. He oversees that the LSA standards, policies, rules and procedures are maintained. He may also be responsible and may assist the Chief Referee in terms of appointment of officials, compilation of programmes and other fields that need attention. All Technical Officials and Officials officiating and in events held under the jurisdiction of LSA (including LSA competitions) shall be registered members of a Province, District, Region, Branch or Club or Kindred Organisation. Any member wishing to officiate in a LSA National Championships (including LSA or any LSA Member Federations Competitions): 1. Shall be an active Technical Official within their Province, District, Region Branch or Club, 2. Holder of the appropriate award, 3. Proficient as prescribed for that particular award, 4. Not be in default with their Province, District, Region, Branch or Club or LSA in relation to

their financial, discipline and or duty/patrol commitments. All Technical Officials and Officials are bound to the same spirit of behaviour as the competitors. Technical Officials may not coach or similarly assist a competitor/team. However, Technical Officials who hold seminars or clinics for groups which include competitors are not deemed to be violating this rule. A Technical Official found to be in violation of this rule shall be declared ineligible to further act as a Technical Official at LSA competitions for a minimum period of two years. 11.2 APPOINTMENT OF TECHNICAL OFFICIALS The appointment of Technical Officials and other Officials for the conduct of competitions rests solely with the LSA Authority under whose control the competition is to be conducted. The Chief Referee and Deputy Chief Referee to conduct a competition are appointed by the LSA Sport Advisory Board. The Technical Officials and other Officials are appointed by the Chief Referee, subject to the criteria and endorsed by the LSA Sport Advisory Board. All Technical Officials (Judges) for the ensuing year are appointed annually by the respective Province, District, Region Branch or Club and endorsed at the LSA AGM upon recommendation by the LSA Director: Sport. 11.3 APPLICATION FOR APPOINTMENT LSA may call for nominations for Technical Officials and Officials for the appointment to officiate at a LSA National Championship, Competitions or Events. LSA may from time to time stipulate qualifications necessary for Technical Officials to carry out specified duties. However, Level 1 Accreditation (Judges Certificate) or equivalent is regarded as being the minimum qualification requirement. At Provincial, District, Regional, Branch or Club competitions probationary or “on the job training” candidates may be appointed to gain further experience. Technical Officials shall be deemed to be impartial in the discharge of their duties.



11.4 NOTIFICATION OF APPOINTMENTS Technical Officials and Officials should be notified as soon as possible of their appointment, the specific duties to be undertaken and the times and places for briefings and reporting arrangements. If applicable, appointed Technical Officials should also receive copies of any Supplementary Rules of the competition and other published information that is necessary in the discharge of their duties. 11.5 DRESS OF COMPETITION OFFICIALS The normal dress for Technical Officials and Officials at competitions shall be white or navy-blue shorts, slacks or skirt accompanied by, white shirt or blouse, white or navy-blue sweater. Protective clothing in inclement weather conditions is permitted. White caps or hats to give maximum sun protection are strongly recommended but are not mandatory. LSA Authority conducting the competition may require, or provide, coloured garments or other apparel to designate specific Technical Officials. Note: If the organiser provides an event specific uniform it is to be worn. With the prior approval of the LSA authority the Organising Committee may provide sponsor identified apparel, or other items to be worn by Technical Officials and Officials. The wearing, or display by any Official, of Club identification on apparel or other items is not permitted and if possible, this identification should be covered or it may lead to the removal of that Official from competition duties. Notwithstanding the above, certain Technical Officials may be permitted to wear costumes and wetsuits or similar garments in the discharge of their duties. Technical Officials are strongly encouraged to maintain a high standard of weather protection at all times by wearing suitable apparel, eye protection, footwear and sun block. Technical Officials should also be aware of competitors’ potential exposure to sun and weather conditions and, as far as practicable, should not keep competitors exposed to the elements for long periods of time. 11.6 TECHNICAL OFFICIALS QUALIFICATION POLICY All Technical Officials officiating in competitions held under the jurisdiction of LSA (including LSA competitions) shall be registered members of an affiliated Province, District, Region, Branch or Club or Kindred Organisation. Any member wishing to officiate in a LSA competition (including LSA or any LSA member Federations competitions) or events shall be the holder of the appropriate award, proficient as prescribed for that particular award, and not be in default with their Province, District, Region, Branch, Club or LSA in relation to their financial, discipline and or duty/patrol commitments. Any member wishing to officiate in a LSA National Championship shall be an active Technical Official within their Regional Association and the holder of the appropriate award, proficient as prescribed for that particular award, and not be in default with their Province, District, Region, Branch, Club or LSA in relation to their financial, discipline and or duty/patrol commitments. 11.7 TECHNICAL OFFICIALS CODE OF CONDUCT

1. All officials must be accredited by their Branch or Provincial Governing body for lifesaving sport and officials’ applications must be endorsed prior to notification of appointment as an official.

Note: Other personnel with suitable experience and/or specialist qualifications may be appointed to undertake specialist roles at a competition e.g. timekeeper, recorder, safety, medical, judge in boat, etc. Such personnel will be provided with instructions as to their roles and responsibilities.

2. Officials may not ‘coach’ or similarly assist a competing team. An official found to be in violation of this rule shall be declared ineligible to act further as an official. Officials who hold seminars or clinics for groups which include competitors are not deemed to be violating this rule.



3. For additional information, see Section 2: General Competitive Condition: 2.2 Code of Conduct.

Meetings: Officials are required to attend the appropriate briefings to review judging sheets and event procedures, etc. 11.8 THE COMPETITION COMMITTEE The composition, authority and powers of the Competition Committee are set out in Section 12: Competition Administration. 11.9 LOCAL EVENT MANAGER The Local Event Manager (or different name with this responsibility) reports to the Organising Committee and, during competition, to the Competition Committee. The Local Event Manager is responsible for the organisation Local Organising Committee. The Local Event Manager deals with any issues and represents the Organising Committee at the venue. 11.10 LSA EVENT DIRECTOR At LSA managed events an Event Director may be appointed to support LSA and the LSA Sport Committee in the planning and delivery of an Event, Competition or Life Saving Championships and reports to the Competition Committee for the event. At LSA managed events an LSA Event Director will be appointed to support LSA and the LSA Sport Committee in the planning and delivery of an Event, Competition or Life Saving Championships. The Organising Committee for an event shall arrange for the appointment of officials including but not limited to: 11.11 DUTIES OF TECHNICAL OFFICIALS AND OFFICIALS The Organising Committee in conjunction with the LSA Director of Sport and the appointed Chief Referee, for an event shall arrange for the appointment of officials including but not limited to: Technical:

• Chief Referee • Deputy Chief Referee • Area Referee • Pool Event Directors • Sectional Referee • Referee Steward /Head Scorer • Competition Liaison Personnel • Course Supervisor(s) • Scrutineer Coordinator and Scrutineers • Judges: • Chief Judge • Finish Judge • Lane Judge • Course Judge • Specialist Judge • Electronic Device Specialist Judge • Timekeeping Judge • Recording Judge • Starter • Check Starter • Marshall • Check Marshall • Announcing Coordinator and Commentary Panel • Gear and Equipment Coordinator • Presentation Steward • Appeals Committee Convenor • Appeals Committee Members



Non-Technical:

• Disciplinary Committee Convenor • Disciplinary Committee Members • Security Officer

Safety • Safety Officer • Area Risk and Response Officers • Water Safety Coordinators • Power Craft Coordinator • Water Safety Personnel • Communications Coordinator • Medical/First Aid Coordinator • Course Statistician

Notes: 1. At smaller competitions it may be appropriate for some of the functions of competition

officials to be combined providing that the provision of safety is not compromised. 2. At all times those involved at a competition need to be aware of the safety and welfare of

competitors, officials and other personnel and immediately report any observations or concerns.

3. Officials should record any infringement of competition rules or conduct violations that may be required to support any actions that have been taken or need to be considered at a later time.

Technical 11.11.1 Chief Referee The Chief Referee shall:

(a) In conjunction with the Competition Committee, be responsible for all matters relating to the actual conduct of the competition and matters, of which, the final settlement is not covered by LSA rules. The Chief Referee will also implement the rules and regulations governing the competition or event being conducted. Appoint all Technical Officials.

(b) Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel involved in the competition and have the authority to immediately suspend wholly or in part the competition and refer that decision to the Safety Officer and the Competition Committee.

Note: The Chief Referee has the authority to initiate and coordinate any search and rescue actions. The Chief Referee must immediately notify the Safety Officer and the Competition Committee of their action.

(c) Respond immediately to any reports of safety concerns directly received from competitors, power craft, water safety personnel, officials and lifesaving/lifeguard personnel and liaise as appropriate Safety Officer and/or the Competition Committee.

(d) Conduct pre and post briefings for senior officials and/or team managers and/or coaches and/or competitors on the conduct and programme for the competition including entry conditions, timetables, area layouts, special events, safety, and emergency arrangements.

(e) Make any alteration to the programme that they consider necessary and communicate these changes without delay to all interested parties. Any alterations should take into consideration the safety and welfare of both competitors and officials.

(f) Consider and adjudicate upon reports, protests, breaches of rules and on all matters relating to the conduct of officials, competitors, coaches, managers and events. Any decision made may be the subject of appeal as provided for in Section 8: Protests, Appeals and Discipline.



(g) Consider and adjudicate on any unbecoming conduct during the competition or event. If considered necessary, refer any offence or offenders to LSA for consideration of further penalty.

(h) If required exercise the power to disqualify or penalise a competitor. The Chief Referee is not required to give notification of any disqualification or penalty until the conclusion of the relevant event.

(i) Conduct any other briefings when considered necessary with officials, team managers, coaches and competitors.

(j) Report to the relevant LSA authority on the conduct of the competition together with any appropriate recommendations.

11.11.2 Deputy Chief Referee The Deputy Chief Referee, if appointed, shall:

(a) Assist in the conduct and organisation of the competition, and in the absence of the Chief Referee assume their authority and responsibilities.

(b) Take control of a particular area of the competition with Chief Referee authority or be assigned to a specific role or be designated a specific authority.

(c) Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel involved in the competition and have the authority to immediately suspend wholly or in part the competition and refer that decision to the Chief Referee.

(d) The Deputy Chief Referee also has the authority to initiate any search and rescue actions if necessary and notify the Safety Officer and Chief Referee or their delegate.

11.11.3Area Referee

The Area Referee/Event Director, if appointed, shall:

(a) Be responsible to the Chief Referee or the Deputy Chief Referee for the control and organisation of a specific area or a group of sections or events of the competition including the proper layout of course(s) pertaining to the conditions.

(b) Implement the rules and regulations governing the competition and events being conducted in the particular area of control.

(c) Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel involved in the competition and have the authority to immediately suspend wholly or in part the competition in that area and refer that decision to the Chief Referee and Safety Officer.

(d) In conjunction with the Area Risk and Response Officer, the Area Referee has the authority to initiate any search and rescue actions and immediately notify the Safety Officer and Chief Referee or their delegate.

(e) At the Chief Referee’s discretion, consider and adjudicate upon protests. (f) Brief the Sectional Referee/s under their control of any specific requirements to

manage their sections. (g) Provide reports and recommendations to the Referee or Authority on the conduct of

the area.

11.11.4 Area Referee /Pool Event Directors

The Area Referee/Pool Event Director, if appointed, shall:

(a) Be responsible to the Chief Referee for the control and organisation of a specific area or events of the competition, and implement the rules and regulations governing the competition and events being conducted in the particular area of control. In particular the Pool Event Director will:

• Whistle the competitors to prepare themselves for the start of the event

(by for example, positioning themselves on the starting blocks);

• Ensure the equipment is set and the Chief Timekeeper has signaled they

are ready before whistling competitors to their starting position;

• Signal to the Starter the competitors are set and hand them over to the

Starter; and

• Record the finish order of competitors in events.



(b) The Pool Event Director is responsible for overseeing and collating all result

paperwork relating to each event including any disqualifications and ensuring

they are received by recording. (c) The Pool Event Director (and the Starter) will be responsible for recalling

competitors by whistle signal or other means if in his or her opinion the start conditions were breached, or the start was unfair.

11.11.5Sectional Referee The Sectional Referee, if appointed, shall:

(a) Be responsible to the Chief Referee or Area Referee for the control and organisation of a specific section of the competition including the proper layout of courses(s) pertaining to the conditions.

(b) Implement the rules and regulations governing the competition and events being conducted in the particular section of responsibility.

(c) Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel involved in the competition and have the authority to immediately suspend wholly or in part the competition in that section and refer that decision to the Area Referee and the Area Risk and Response Officer.

(d) In conjunction with the Area Referee, Area Risk and Response Officer, the Sectional Referee has the authority to initiate any search and rescue actions and immediately notify the Safety Officer and Chief Referee or their delegate.

(e) At the Chief Referee or Area Referee’s direction, consider and adjudicate upon protests.

(f) Ensure all appointed officials are aware of their positions and responsibilities. (g) Provide reports and recommendations to the Chief Referee or relevant LSA

authority on the conduct of the Section. 11.11.6 Referee Steward/Head Scorer

The Referee Steward/Head Scorer, if appointed, shall: (a) Act under the supervision of the Chief Referee. (b) Be responsible for the overall manual and electronic record keeping of all

competition events and point scores. (c) Arrange for the supply and distribution of result cards and the necessary stationary

to conduct events. (d) Supervise the recording procedures as required for the conduct of the competition

and may allocate Recorders to Sectional Referees. (e) Supervise the collection of results from each section. (f) Supervise draws for rounds, quarterfinals, semi-finals and finals as required by the

Sectional Referee. (g) In the case of events where judges utilise marking sheets to determine the result of

an event e.g. SERC the Referee Steward shall liaise with the relevant Referee to determine a result in instances of any compilation errors.

(h) Liaise with media regarding results. (i) Complete South African (and other) record applications for signature by the Chief

Referee. (j) Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other

personnel involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Referee or their delegate and the Safety Officer.

11.11.7 Competition Liaison Officers The Competition Liaison Officers, if appointed, shall:

(a) Act under the supervision of a Liaison Coordinator (if appointed) and the Area or Sectional Referee.

Note: The Liaison Coordinator will usually be one of the appointed Liaison Officers and will liaise with the Chief Referee to streamline the liaison process to ensure, as far as practicable, the efficient conduct of competition.



(b) Liaise with competitors, coaches, team managers and officials so as to provide assistance and communicate any rules and queries related to the conduct of the events.

(c) Be positioned so as to be accessible to competitors, coaches and team managers.

(d) Advise the Chief Referee, Area Referee or Sectional Referee or Event Director of any concerns raised by competitors, coaches and team managers relating to event conduct, courses or safety issues.

(e) Provide guidance for competitors, coaches and team managers on protest and appeal procedures and the best method of approach to the Chief Referee involved.

Note: Liaison Officers are, at all times, to execute their duties without bias and to demonstrate the maintenance of an open, neutral position in all dealings with officials, competitors, coaches and team managers. (f) Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other

personnel involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Safety Officer and Chief Referee or their delegate.

11.11.8 Course Supervisors The Course Supervisor(s), if appointed, shall:

(a) Be responsible to the Chief Referee, or Area or Sectional Referee or Pool Event Directors for the safe, proper and fair layout of courses.

(b) In conjunction with the Area Risk and Response Officer (ARRO), assess the prevailing and expected on-beach and in-water conditions for the duration of competition including available beach and sand, tides, current, swell, wind conditions and any other pertinent issues.

(c) Work with the Power Craft Coordinator and other appointed personnel to supervise the laying of and adjustment of in-water courses prior to and during competition to ensure, as far as practicable, compliance with event conditions and to provide for safe, proper, fair and equal racing conditions for all competitors.

(d) Supervise the setting and adjustment of beach and lifesaving event courses and on-beach courses relating to in-water events to provide, as far as practicable, safe, fair and equal racing conditions for all competitors.

(e) Liaise with competitors and/or competitor panels, Competition Liaison Officers and other personnel regarding course conditions.

(f) Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Chief Referee their delegate and/or the ARRO. If the matter is a catastrophic event the official may recommend an immediate suspension of competition in their area to the Chief Referee or Sectional Referee and immediately escalate the matter to the Safety Officer.

11.11.9 Scrutineer Coordinator and Scrutineers The Scrutineer Coordinator, if appointed, shall:

(a) Act under the supervision of the Chief Referee. (b) Be responsible for control and organisation of measuring gear and scrutineering

equipment to ensure that all craft, boats and/or equipment is operating, and otherwise, in accordance with the current specifications approved by LSA.

(c) Arrange for the correct setting up of the scrutineering area and measuring devices.

(d) Ensure the scrutineering standards used are in line with the current gear and equipment specifications as advised by the relevant LSA authority.

(e) Arrange for a programme and timetable for the processing of competition gear and equipment including maintaining of records.

(f) Supervise and roster Scrutineers to allocated positions, times and particular responsibilities.



(g) Together with appointed Scrutineers, make inspections and examine craft and equipment before the entry of competitors’ equipment into the competition arena.

(h) Observe competition events and if they consider that the performance of a particular craft or item of equipment appears to exceed the manufacturers’ performance specification, they shall make these observations known to the Chief Referee.

(i) If considered necessary, or if requested, arrange for inspections during and/or after an event or competition.

(j) Liaise with the Chief Referee on infringements and any concerns raised by competitors, team managers or coaches.

(k) Provide reports and recommendations to the Chief Referee or Authority on the conduct of the scrutineering programme.

(l) Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Chief Referee or their delegate and/or the Safety Officer.

9.11.10 Gear and Equipment Coordinator The Gear and Equipment Coordinator, if appointed, shall:

(a) Act under the supervision of the Chief Referee. (b) Be responsible for the correct assembly of gear and equipment for the

competition. (c) Supervise the Organising Committee workforce involved in assisting with gear

and equipment. (d) Adjust, replace and arrange for the repair and security/return of gear and

equipment. (e) Maintain a record of gear and equipment issued to Organising Committee and

officials. (f) Supervise the relocation of gear and equipment to alternative venues. (g) Report to the Chief Referee any loss or damage of gear and equipment during

the competition. (h) At the conclusion of the competition ensure all gear and equipment is accounted

for, hosed down and properly stored. (i) Provide a report and recommendations to the Chief Referee or the relevant LSA

authority on the conduct of the gear and equipment section. (j) Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other

personnel involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Chief Referee or their delegate and/or the Safety Officer.

11.11.11 Announcing Coordinator and Commentary Panel

The Announcing Coordinator, if appointed, shall:

(a) Act under the supervision of the Chief Referee. (b) Be aware of the public announcing and other systems, including dedicated

sponsor and LSA promotion themes being put in place by the Organising Committee. The Announcing Co-ordinator shall also liaise with the Safety Officer for health and safety announcements during emergencies.

(c) Supervise roster, location, duties and responsibilities for announcing panel team members.

(d) Advise and assist in the setting up of the announcing systems and sundry equipment.

(e) Ensure spectators, competitors, coaches, managers, officials and workforce personnel are kept reliably informed of the competitions’ progress via the announcing team.

(f) Acquaint the announcing team with competition timetable and special events to be announced and ensure the announcing team is informative and accurate on competitor details.

(g) Describe and announce the running of events and other announcements requested by the Chief Referee, Safety Officer or the Organising Committee.



(h) Liaise with presentation section on the announcement of awards, medals, VIP and sponsor presentations.

(i) Provide a report and recommendations to the Chief Referee or the LSA authority on the conduct of the announcing section.

(j) Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Chief Referee or their delegate and/or the Safety Officer.

11.11.12 Judges 1. General

(a) The judges’ roles at competitions are many and varied but the principal activity is to supervise and assist with the conduct of events according to LSA rules and the authority of the Chief Referee.

(b) All judges are to be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Chief Referee or their delegate and/or the Area Risk and Response Officer.

(c) Dependent on the competition, activities may be combined and fall into the following categories:

2. Chief Judges

The Chief Judges shall:

(a) Be responsible to the Chief Referee, Area/Sectional Referee or Pool Event Director.

(b) Supervise or assist in the setting up of courses for events. (c) Roster, rotate, define position and allocate duties and responsibilities for

area/sectional judges. (d) Locate and position judges so as to best determine the finish and recording of

event results. (e) Adjudicate judges or Results Recorders’ decisions if necessary. (f) Report any breach or infringements of rules to the Area/Sectional Referee. (g) Co-ordinate results check and sign the result card and hand to Sectional Referee. (h) Note the number of starters and ensure that all competitors complete the course

and in emergencies notify the Chief Referee and/or the Area Risk and Response Officer.

3. Finish Judges

The Finish Judges shall:

(a) Determine the order of finishing of competitors.

(b) Report any breach or infringement of rules to the Chief Judge or Area/Sectional Referee or Pool Event Director.

(c) Be positioned on either side of the finish line away from the finishing poles to ensure the best-uninterrupted view of the finish of the event.

• Refer to LSA judging aids (e.g. video) if necessary, to determine a finish. • If there is a variance, a majority decision is taken under the supervision of

the Chief Referee or the Chief Judge. • Note the results and advise the Chief Judge or Chief Referee.

(d) Where possible and when results have been determined, authorise the issue of placing indicators to competitors.

(e) Assist in the setting up of the courses for events.

4. Lane Judges (Pool Rescue) The Lane Judges (Pool Rescue) shall:



(a) Be a Judge of fact in relation to the observation of the conduct of an event in the particular lane(s) they are allocated.

(b) They shall report any breach or infringement of the rules to the Chief Judge, or Area/Sectional Referee or Event Director.

Note: Competitors or teams should not be penalised until the infringement is reported to the Chief Referee.

5. Course Judges The Course Judges shall:

a) Be a judge of fact in relation to the observation of the conduct of an event. b) As far as possible, be located in an elevated position, or in a boat in ocean

events, as the case may be, to obtain a constant view of the event. c) Immediately report any safety concerns or rescue situations to the Chief Referee

or their delegate and/or the Area Risk and Response Office. d) Course Judges in Boat may also act as a rescue boat and shall assist in any

rescue situation. The crew should also ensure board riders, other craft and surfers are kept at a reasonable distance (having regard to the type of event being conducted) on each side of the competition area.

e) Observe, note and report any breaches of competition or other rules to the Chief Judge, or Area/Sectional Referee or Event Director.

f) Check the alignment of all buoys before the commencement of, and during the progress of, the competition particularly if a change of conditions occur.

g) Course Judge in Boat shall: h) Report to the Sectional Referee/Chief Judge before the start of the competition to

receive instructions.

• In events where competitors have to round all buoys, be stationed, sea conditions permitting, on the inside of the line of buoys.

• In Board Rescue and Rescue Tube Rescue and Rescue Tube events act as a Course Judge and Finish Judge and be stationed to readily observe that teams comply with the conditions of the competition and the event rules.

• Observe, note and report any breaches of competition or other rules to the Chief Judge, or Area/Sectional Referee or who shall adjudicate on the infringement in conjunction with the judge(s) concerned.

6. Specialist Judges

The Specialist Judges shall adjudicate on events including, but not restricted to SERC.

Electronic Device Specialist Judges

(a) Electronic Device Specialist Judges may be used to judge and confirm placing and confirm competitors’ conduct during the event.

Notes:

1. The LSA Authority shall, at its discretion, nominate which source(s) will be used

to determine as its final decision(s).

2. Different devices may be used at the same competition, as required, to determine

the final decision.

(b) The Electronic Device Specialist Judges (which include video, finish gates,

camera and drone operators etc.) shall, by the use of devices operated by officials and/or by an appointed external source (e.g. television/live stream etc.) and viewed by appointed judges:

• Be responsible to the Chief Judge, or Area/Sectional Referee or Pool Event Director and be positioned/and or set up devices as directed for particular events. Be responsible for the use of electronic recording devices within a section/area.

• Record particular phases of events and the finish of events as directed.



• Electronic Device Specialist Judges may be used to judge and confirm placings and confirm competitors’ conduct during the event.

Notes:

1. The organising authority shall, at its discretion, nominate which source(s) will be

used to determine as its final decision(s).

2. Different devices may be used at the same competition, as required, to

determine as the final decision. Timekeeping Judges The Timekeeping Judges shall: (a) Be responsible to the Chief Referee or Chief Judge or Pool Event Director. (b) Be used to specifically act as timekeepers for events. As such, these judges shall

be considered as a “judge of fact”. (c) Time and record all events where a time or a time limit is required or has been

imposed by the rules of the event or Sectional Referee. (d) Be available to carry out an allocated judging role in addition to timekeeping.

Recording Judges

The Recording Judges shall: (a) Act under the direction of the Chief Referee or Chief Judge or Event Director. (b) Liaise with the Marshall and assist with draws and pass on results and draws to

the Announcers. (c) Record the order in which each placed competitor or team finishes in the event

and ensuring that in team events all members of the team are recorded. (d) Ensure the Chief Referee/Chief Judge checks and signs the result card. (e) Maintain a record of results/disqualifications and ensure results are passed onto

the Referee Steward and the Marshall. (f) Keep a progressive total of any point scores or round robin events if required. (g) Be available to carry out an allocated judging role in addition to recording when

required. 11.11.13 Starters The starters shall: (a) Have, with the Check Starter, at the time the Event Director or Chief Referee

hands over competitors, sole jurisdiction over the competitors for the start including any briefing on course conditions.

(b) Be elevated or in such a position to best observe that starting conditions are fair and that the Check Starter’s signal can be observed.

(c) Ensure that an appropriate signal is given to competitors that a start is imminent. (d) Recall the competitors by whistle signal, second shot of gun or by some other

means, if in their or the Check Starter’s opinion the start was unfair. (e) Have the power to disqualify, or eliminate, a competitor for breaking the start, or

for wilfully disobeying their orders, or for any other obstruction during the start. (f) Notify the Sectional Referee of all disqualifications. (g) Ensure competitors, Water Safety, Duty Boats, Judges, equipment and patients

are correctly positioned before starting the event (h) Refer questions pertaining to event conditions to the Chief Referee. (i) Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other

personnel involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Chief Referee or their delegate and/or the Area Risk and Response Officer.

Note: Whilst starting, it is strongly recommended that ear protection is worn.

11.11.14 Check Starter The Check Starter shall:

(a) Work in conjunction with the Starter.



(b) Be appropriately positioned for the event and signal when competitors are in line and positioned and ready to start.

(c) Be responsible to recall competitors by whistle signal or other means if in their opinion the start conditions were breached, or the start was unfair.

(d) If required be called upon to act as Course Judges during an event e.g. relay baton/ changeovers, equipment replacement and gear positioning in team events.

(e) In conjunction with the Starter ensure competitors, Water Safety, Duty Boats, judge(s), equipment are correctly positioned before starting the event.

(f) Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Chief Referee or their delegate and/or the Area Risk and Response Officer.

11.11.15 Marshall The Marshall shall:

(a) Act under the supervision of the Chief Referee, Area/Sectional Referee or Pool Event Director.

(b) Be responsible for ensuring competitors’ entries are in order and competitors are marshalled correctly before proceeding to the start line.

(c) Liaise with the Chief Referee, Area/Sectional Referee or Event Director regarding entry conditions, draws, order of events, timetables, sponsor uniforms, courses and other arrangements put in place by the Chief Referee or Organising Committee.

(d) Ensure all competitors comply with the appropriate LSA general rules of competition.

(e) Liaise with Scrutineers on competitor compliance with gear and equipment specifications or LSA standards or safety requirements.

(f) Advise the Chief Referee on any infringements or irregularities. (g) Organise draws to be displayed or available to competitors and maintain

discipline of competitors in the marshalling area. (h) Liaise with the Announcers, Recorders, Timekeepers and Stewards regarding

entries and draws. (i) Assemble the competitors in the order as drawn. (j) Ensure competitor numbers in events comply with competitor limitations for the

event. (k) Liaise with the Chief Referee, Marshall and Course Statistician to confirm starting

numbers in each race in the water. (l) Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other

personnel involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Chief Referee or their delegate and/or the Area Risk and Response Officer.

11.11.16 Check Marshall The Check Marshall shall:

(a) Assist the Marshall.

(b) Report any competitor team changes to the Marshall, Area/Sectional Referee or Pool Event Director and Chief Referee.

(c) Report any competitor, equipment infringements or other irregularity to the Marshall and Chief Referee.

(d) Assist the Marshall in placing competitors in their order ready for starting and ensuring all competitors names and race numbers have been recorded prior to a race commencing.

(e) Accompany all competitors to the start line and ensure all competitors are positioned as drawn.

(f) Ensure that all competitors are dressed according to this Manual or other conditions laid down by LSA.



(g) Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Chief Referee or their delegate and/or the Area Risk and Response Officer.

11.11.17 Presentation Steward The Presentation Steward, if appointed, shall:

(a) Be responsible to the Chief Referee for the orderly marshalling of competitors and recipients receiving presentations and ensure all trophies and awards are available at the presentation dais.

(b) Be aware of the LSA and sponsor requirements for presentation, including LSA protocols relating to VIP’s.

(c) Liaise with Announcing Coordinator on suitable introduction for awards, medals and other presentations.

(d) Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Safety Officer and Chief Referee or their delegate.

11.11.18 Appeals Committee Convener The Appeals Committee Convener shall be responsible for appointing an appeals committee to adjudicate all matters referred to it by the Chief Referee.

11.11.19 Appeals Committee members Appeals Committee members shall be responsible for adjudicating on all matters referred to the committee by the Chief Referee. The Appeals Committee Convener selects appropriate members of the appeals committee to adjudicate individual cases.

Non-Technical 11.11.20 Disciplinary Committee Convener The Disciplinary Committee Convener shall be responsible for appointing a Disciplinary Committee to adjudicate all matters referred to it by the Competition Committee, Chief Referee or Appeals Committee (see Section 8: Protests, Appeals and Discipline) of this manual)

11.11.21 Disciplinary Committee members The Disciplinary Committee members shall be responsible for adjudicating on all matters referred to the committee by the Competition Committee, Chief Referee or Appeals Committee. The Disciplinary Committee Convener selects appropriate members of the Disciplinary Committee to adjudicate individual cases.

Safety

11.11.22 Safety Officer

The Safety Officer shall chair the Safety Committee, provide advice as a member of the Organising Committee and the Competition Committee and shall:

(a) Work in conjunction with the Chief Referee. (b) Formulate and implement a safety, search and rescue and contingency plan

which will provide prompt and effective safety, rescue and recovery in an emergency situation. This programme shall be approved by the Competition Committee conducting the event.

(c) Respond immediately to and record any reports of safety concerns directly received from competitors, power craft, water safety personnel, officials and lifesaving/lifeguard personnel and liaise as appropriate with the Chief Referee and/or the Competition Committee.

(d) Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel involved in the competition and non-competition support functions and have the authority to immediately suspend wholly or in part the competition



whenever there is a credible basis for concluding there is an unacceptable risk of serious injury occurring and refer that decision to the Competition Committee.

(e) The Safety Officer has the authority to immediately initiate and coordinate (command and control) any search and rescue actions if necessary and notify the Chief Referee and the Competition Committee.

(f) Co-ordinate other services to provide essential communication, transport and trained personnel in an emergency.

(g) Brief all associated services prior to the competition to ensure that all: (i) Other involved services are aware of their responsibilities; and (ii) All Referees are aware of the safety and emergency plans. (h) Liaise and coordinate with Medical/First Aid/Emergency/Safety personnel

including local emergency groups such as Police, Ambulance, Fire services and relevant government agencies.

(i) Be located in a convenient position during the competition and be available for communication with the Chief Referee at all times.

(j) Brief any lifesaving service and any other designated personnel on the emergency plans and assistance required in case of an emergency.

(k) Provide reports and recommendations to the Chief Referee or the relevant LSA authority on the conduct of the safety systems.

(l) Dependant on the size of the event, the Safety Officer may also assume the responsibilities of other roles of the safety team as qualifications and skill allow.

11.11.23 Area Risk and Response Officers (ARRO’s)

(a) An Area Risk and Response Officer must be appointed for each competition arena and reports to the Safety Officer.

(b) Area Risk and Response Officers work with the Area and Sectional Referees or Pool Event Directors and course supervisor to:

• Undertake an initial risk assessment of the area and then continually monitor competition conditions by conducting further risk assessments on a regular basis;

• Monitor the time events take to complete and note any issues with the competition conditions;

• Monitor trends in the ratios of competitors starting and finishing events;

• In the absence of a Statistician assume the duties of this role including recording the number of starters and finishers and account for any non-finishers in each race. If there is any competitor not accounted for in a race, immediately advise the Safety Officer and then the Sectional Referee/Referee.

• Obtain, record and immediately convey feedback from competitors, power craft water safety personnel, officials and lifesaving/lifeguard personnel as to the conditions and immediately escalate any reports of safety concerns directly with the Safety Officer and the Area Referee.

• The outcomes of such tasks are to be conveyed to the Safety Officer. (c) Area Risk and Response Officers must be aware at all times of the safety and

welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel involved in the competition and have the authority to immediately suspend wholly or in part the competition whenever there is a credible basis for concluding there is an unacceptable risk of serious injury and refer that decision to the Safety Officer and Chief Referee or their delegate.

(d) In conjunction with the Area/Sectional referee, the Area Risk and Response Officer has the authority to initiate any search and rescue actions and immediately notify the Safety Officer and Chief Referee or their delegate.

(e) The Area Risk and Response Officer may be required to take and keep control as forward coordinator under direction of the Safety Officer or representatives of government agencies. This is to avoid confusion and conflicting directions being given to personnel and contradictory instructions being given in respect to the use of rescue assets and crowd control.



11.11.24 Power Craft Coordinator The Power Craft Coordinator, if appointed, shall:

(a) Act under the supervision of the Chief Referee and in emergencies the Safety Officer and/or Area Risk and Response Officer.

(b) Provide advice and co-ordinate the recruitment of IRBs and the crew required to conduct the competition at events to be conducted.

(c) Supervise the activities of both the Water Safety Craft and Judge in Boat systems.

(d) Supervise the laying of courses prior and during the competition. (e) Assume the responsibilities of the Water Safety Coordinator (if not appointed).

Supervise the water safety aspects of the competition. (f) Roster, rotate and brief crews on locations and duties. (g) Ensure IRBs are serviced and properly equipped during the competition. (h) Report to the Chief Referee and/or Safety Officer any problems relating to the

availability of craft and the ability to provide water safety and judging systems. (i) Ensure an effective communication system is in place to provide communication

to all Referees and Coordinators. (j) Liaise at all times with the Safety Officer. (k) Provide reports and recommendations to the Chief Referee or relevant LSA

authority on the conduct of the section. (l) Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other

personnel involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Referee or their delegate and/or the Safety Officer.

11.11.25 Water Safety Coordinator The Water Safety Coordinator, if appointed, shall:


(b) Be responsible for the safety of competition while water events are in progress. (c) Supervise and roster water safety personnel. (d) Co-ordinate the positioning of rescue craft and water safety personnel. (e) Bring to the attention of the Safety Officer any concerns regarding the level of

water safety. (f) In IRB competition (if appointed) maintain safety for crews and patients in

conjunction with the Safety Officer. (g) In all competitions ensure that water safety meets the prescribed and assessed

requirements. (h) Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other

personnel involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Chief Referee or their delegate and/or the Safety Officer.

11.11.26 Water Safety Personnel Water Safety Personnel shall:

(a) Act under the supervision of the Water Safety Coordinator and in emergencies the Safety Officer and/or Area Risk and Response Officer.

(b) Be positioned on the beach and in the water as directed by the Water Safety Coordinator.

(c) Bring to the attention of the Water Safety Coordinator any concerns regarding the level of water safety at a particular time.

(d) Be responsible for the safety of competition in their appointed water area. (e) Under the direction of the Water Safety Coordinator assist other areas if required. (g) In all competition ensure that water safety meets the prescribed and assessed

requirements. (h) Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other

personnel involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Water Safety Coordinator and/or the Area Risk and Response Officer.



11.11.27 Communications Coordinator The Communications Coordinator, if appointed, shall:


(b) Ensure effective radio communication is maintained to all senior officials and IRB’s including Organising and Competition Committee members, Safety, Medical and workforce personnel for the duration of the competition.

(c) In conjunction with the Chief Referee or the relevant LSA authority, agree on the required quantity and type of radio equipment required for the competition.

(d) Supervise the central control centre including the issue and maintenance and return of radio equipment.

(e) Publish a list of calls signs/frequencies and radio procedures for the competition. (f) Provide reports and recommendations to the Chief Referee or relevant LSA

authority on the conduct of the section. (h) Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other

personnel involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Chief Referee or their delegate and/or the Safety Officer

11.11.28 Medical/First Aid Coordinator The Medical/First Aid Coordinator, if appointed, Act under the supervision of the Chief Referee and in emergencies the Safety Officer and/or Safety Officer.

(a) Be appropriately qualified to undertake the role required given the nature of the competition being conducted and the resources available.

(b) Be responsible for the organisation and operation of the competition medical/first aid service.

(c) Where required, assess the physical and psychological fitness of any competitor or official and ensure through the Chief Referee that an unfit competitor or official does not participate for the well-being safety of themselves and/or others involved in a competition.

(d) Acquaint the Chief Referee with any medical decisions that may affect the conduct of the competition.

(e) Be aware of the plan developed by the Organising Committee for the evacuation of casualties and other persons in the event of a serious accident or other incident or implications relating to the safety of competitors, officials, assisting personnel and/or the public.

(f) Direct the deployment of first aid posts and other medical services and supplies including medical/first aid personnel at the competition venue(s).

(g) Be available through communication and be located in such a position to assist or direct medical or first aid specialists to any medical or first aid incident.

(h) Provide a report and recommendations to the Chief Referee or the relevant LSA authority on the conduct of the medical/first aid section.

(i) Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Chief Referee or their delegate and/or the Safety Officer.

11.11.29 Course Statistician The Course Statistician shall:

(a) Act under the direction of the Safety Officer and/or Sectional Referee/Area Referee.

(b) Maintain the statistical records for the area and ensure that data is handed on to the Referee Steward.

(c) Liaise with the area Marshall to obtain event starters for each race in the water. (d) Record the number of starters and finishers and account for any non-finishers in

each race. (e) Monitor the time events take to complete and note any issues with the

competition conditions.



(f) Immediately advise the Safety Officer, and then the Sectional Referee/Area Referee (as applicable) if there is any competitor that is not accounted for in a race.

(g) Be aware at all times of the safety and welfare of competitors, officials and other personnel involved in the competition and immediately report any concerns to the Chief Referee, their delegate and/or the Safety Officer.

Section 12: Competition Organisation and Administration


SECTION 12: COMPETITION ORGANISATION AND ADMINISTRATION - INDEX

12.1 ORGANISATION …………………………………….………………………………… 2

12.2 STRATEGIC GOALS ……………………………….…………………………………. 2

12.3 SPORT COMMITTEE ………………………………………………………………….. 2

12.4 CONDUCTING COMPETITIONS & EVENTS ………………………………………… 2

12.5 COMPETITION CALENDAR …………………………………………………………. 4

12.6 ADMINISTRATION ……………………………………………………………………… 4

12.6.1 Organising Committee……………………………………………………… 4

12.6.2 Competition Committee …………………………………………………….. 5

12.6.3 Safety and Emergency Committee………………………………………… 5

12.6.4 Competition Officials ………………………………………………………. 6

12.6.5 General …………………………………………………………………….. 6

12.6.5 Team Events ………………………………………………………………….. 6

12.6.7 LSA Permission to enter Competitions …………………………………….. 6

12.6.8 Competitions and/or displays conducted by other organisations…………. 7

12.6.9 Late Entries/Additional ………………………………………………………. 7

12.7 TROPHIES, PRIZES AND ELIGIBILITY ……………………………………………. 7

12.8 COMPETITION SANCTIONING ……………………………………………………… 7

12.8.1 Preamble …………………………………………………………………….. 8

12.8.2 Definition ……………………………………………………………………… 8

12.8.3 Introduction ……………………………………………………………………. 8

12.8.4 Sanction Procedure Step by Step ………………………………………….. 8

Annexure 1 Sanctioning Application Form …………………………………………… 11

Annexure 2 Facility and Equipment Inspection Report ………………………….…… 13



SECTION 12: COMPETITION ORGANISATION AND ADMINISTRATION

12.1 ORGANISATION The supreme authority of LSA is the National Council in which member Provinces are represented. The National Council establishes LSA priorities. The National Council is organised every year and elects a Board of Directors. The Board of Directors conducts the business of LSA between meetings of the National Council and is chaired by the President. The General Secretariat (Head Office) is currently located in Durban and houses the administration of LSA. LSA decentralises its affairs under the management of Provinces and are responsible for initiating, supervising who coordinating regional activities. LSA has created Committees which are responsible for the management, development and technical aspects of each major LSA field of activity. LSA is a unique national federation in that it sponsors and sanctions athletic competition as an important method of furthering its humanitarian lifesaving work. Lifesaving through competition is one of the established goals. 12.2 STRATEGIC GOALS The Strategic Goals of LSA are to:

• Build the capacity to reduce drowning within targeted communities. • Position LSA as the national authority of drowning prevention, lifesaving and lifesaving

sport. • Reduce the drowning of children through partnership and collaboration. • Expand the scope, reach and recognition of lifesaving sport. • Create a sustainable business model. • Establish and promote best practice. • Engage with every province.

12.3 SPORT COMMITTEE The Sport Committee oversees all aspects of lifesaving sport in the national sport arena. The Committee’s responsibilities include, but are not limited to:

• Sport rules • Championships • Sport Management of National Teams • Anti-doping • Athletes • Coaches • Technical Officials • Sport development and • Sport research

The Committee supports the Management Board in the facilitation of relationships with collaborating sports organisations. 12.4 CONDUCTING COMPETITIONS & EVENTS 1. All competitions conducted by LSA or within LSA's framework are subject to the constitution of

LSA, the regulations made under that constitution and this Manual. Members have a duty to know and LSA expects its members to know and be aware of LSA regulations. It is for this reason that the regulations of each and every competition or event are not repeated. By entering LSA competitions competitors acknowledge and agree that they know and are aware of the relevant LSA rules and regulations.

2. For some competitions however, special conditions apply to entry fees, opening and closing of entries, type of competition and times of commencement. When these conditions apply the



necessary regulations are supplementary to the rules contained in this Competition Manual (and any amending or clarifying bulletins or circulars) and can be referred to as Supplementary Rules. These Supplementary Rules are issued by bulletin/circular under the LSA constitution and are binding on all persons who seek to enter or compete in or otherwise participate in the relevant competition or event.

3. Each event Organising Committee must make available all of the necessary information to enable a competitor or club to properly assess their or its ability to enter a competition. Also for a competitor or club to determine what is expected of them or it by virtue of that entry.

4. Supplementary Rules may contain (in so far as may be appropriate to the event to which they relate) the following information:

a) The name and nature of the competition. b) The name and address of the organising Life Saving Authority, i.e. club/Branch/Province

or LSA. c) The names and addresses of the Organising Committee with specific notation of the

Competition Organiser. d) A statement to the effect that the competition is "held under the authority and regulations

of LSA” together with an appropriate waiver and disclosure. e) The venue and date of the competition and the dates, times and other details regarding

briefings, reporting for competition marshalling, competition start, closure of competition, etc. The dates for opening and closing of entries, how (and where) they will be made, and respective entry fees.

f) A full description of the proposed competitions. In the case of special events or multi-discipline events, it may also be necessary to include the "legs" and total length of course and other appropriate details.

g) Details of any arrangements for different divisions or grades of competition to be conducted in certain age groups of events including the eligibility requirements and the status of such divisions or grades of events.

Note: Unless otherwise specified composite teams shall not be eligible for awards, medals, trophies, prize money or placing points.

h) Details of any arrangements for entry of non-members into LSA competition for participation purposes.

Note: Unless otherwise specified non-members shall not be eligible for awards, medals, trophies, prize money or placing points.

i) Any conditions under which entries may be refused and details of age limits. j) Such information regarding insurance as may be required by LSA and/or is appropriate to

the competition in terms of responsibility for private property, public liability and personal accident insurance.

k) Details of specification requirements for craft, special equipment (if any), etc., and the time and place of scrutineering.

l) A detailed list of prizes and/or awards allocated and the manner in which results will be determined and prizes awarded.

m) Details of any special procedures or fees for appeals. n) Provisions regarding postponement, abandonment and/or cancellation of the competition

and/or the capacity to alter any, or all of the events. o) A reminder of the obligations on clubs and competitors to secure the written endorsement

from their Branch, Province (or LSA in the case of international competitors). p) The maximum number of competitors/teams in a competition or event and how numbers

are to be controlled. q) If appropriate, how equipment may be changed or substituted during an event. r) Details of competition sponsors’ expectations with regard to decals to be placed on craft,

sponsor identified clothing to be worn by competitors and restrictions (if any) on the display of other sponsor logos or messages on competitors’ equipment or clothing.

s) Whether (and which) facts are to be judged by appointed officials. t) The scale of penalties applicable to the competition.



u) Water temperatures: average for the date of competition. Air temperature and humidity: average for the date of competition. Unusual course hazards or requirements of special equipment (i.e. wetsuit) or assistance (i.e. handlers). Clear directions to the race venue and check-in site (e.g. clubhouse).

v) All such other requirements and information as may be necessary, in LSA's view, for the proper conduct of the competition.

12.5 COMPETITION CALENDAR

a) LSA, Province and Branches shall establish from time to time the procedure for the calling and determination of competition dates, nature of competition venues, and other details. The national competition calendar is the sole property and the responsibility of LSA. LSA reserves the right to vary the national competition calendar in its sole discretion. Similarly Province and Branch competition calendars are the property and responsibility of Province and Branches respectively.

b) Internal competition conducted by a specific club or group will normally be a subject for determination by that body.

c) Any competition that involves members from more than one club must be endorsed by the appropriate Life Saving Authority.

d) Competitions, or other events, which have "national significance", (i.e. major TV coverage, overseas competitors, a major sponsorship, winner’s prize, etc.) must also be sanctioned and/or licensed by LSA.

e) It is not in the best interests of LSA or sponsors of LSA for major competitions to clash. LSA, each Province and each Branch should use their best endeavours to resolve between themselves and within their appropriate authorities a competition calendar that is compatible to the majority.

12.6 ADMINISTRATION

12.6.1 Organising Committee The organising committee shall be responsible for the planning and development of the safety, logistical, and operational organisation of the competition and non-competition aspects of the event. The Competition Committee takes responsibility for the delivery of the actual competition and the Organising Committee supports this delivery as required. The key personnel of the Organising Committee may comprise the following:

• Competition Organiser (chair) • Chief Referee • Event Director • Safety and Emergency Management Coordinator (chair of the Safety and Emergency

Committee) • Competition Committee Chair • Director of Competition • Secretary • Treasurer • Technical Adviser(s) • Local Organising Body Representative • Local Lifesaving/Lifeguarding Authority representative personnel responsible for Logistics,

Administration • Arena • Catering • Equipment/Gear • Patrols • Accommodation • Functions and Transport, etc.

Note: The responsibilities of an Event Director (if appointed) shall be determined for the particular competition.



If necessary, assistants may be provided for any of the above personnel, or any of the positions may be amalgamated. It is the responsibility of the Organising Committee to cooperate with the relevant Life Saving Authority and the Competition Committee in every way. Formal records of any meetings of the Organising Committee must be taken and kept.

12.6.2 Competition Committee A Competition Committee shall be appointed which shall direct all matters relating to the actual delivery of the event and conduct of the competition. This Committee may, subject to the rules in this Manual, postpone and/or cancel and/or alter any or all events, and/or to alter the venue of the competition. This Committee shall, as appropriate, seek and receive advice from the Chief Referee, Safety and Emergency Committee lifesaving/lifeguarding personnel and the Safety and Emergency Management Coordinator on safety issues. The Competition Committee shall also consult the Chief Referee, appropriate officials, recognised subject matter experts and the Organising Committee when required on any matter relating to the organisation and conduct of the competition. The composition of the Competition Committee will be determined by LSA or the relevant Organising Committee and may include:

• Competition Committee Chair • Organising Committee Organiser • Chief Referee • Safety and Emergency Management Coordinator • Competition Director • Deputy Chief Referee(s) • Event Director • Logistics Officer • Technical Adviser(s) • Athlete Representative(s) • Local Organising Body Representative • Local Lifesaving/lifeguarding Authority Representative (where appropriate) • Area/Sectional Referee(s) • Communications Coordinator • Medical/First Aid Coordinator

Formal records of any meetings of the Competition Committee must be taken and kept.

12.6.3 Safety and Emergency Committee A Safety and Emergency Committee shall be appointed which must consider and advise the Competition Committee on all matters relating to competition and non-competition safety and emergency services. The chair of the Committee shall be the Safety and Emergency Management Coordinator who shall also be a member of the Organising Committee and the Competition Committee. The composition of the Safety and Emergency Committee will be determined by LSA or the relevant Organising Committee and may include the following:

• Safety Officer (chair) • Referee or Deputy Referee (dependant on size of event) • Medical/First Aid Coordinator • Power Craft Coordinator • Work Health and Safety Advisor • Area Risk and Response Coordinator/Officers • Water Safety Coordinator • Local Organising Body Representative • Local Lifesaving/Lifeguarding Authority Representative (where appropriate) • Local Police/Emergency Service Organisations



Formal records of any meetings of the Safety and Emergency Committee must be taken and kept.

12.6.4 Competition Officials The Chief Referee, other Officials, the Appeals Committee, Disciplinary Committee, Boat Panel and other specialist groups as required for a particular event or competition will be appointed by the relevant Life Saving Authority. Note: LSA may from time to time stipulate qualifications necessary for officials to carry out specified duties. LSA Officials’ Accreditation or approved equivalent is regarded as being the minimum qualification for appointment. Probationary or on the job training officials may be appointed alongside Accredited Officials to gain further experience. In addition other personnel with suitable qualifications may be appointed to undertake specialist roles at competitions.

12.6.5 General

a) Area Allocation – In conjunction with the Safety and Emergency Committee, the Chief Referee is empowered to define the respective competition and marshalling areas of all events.

b) Marshalling Areas – club competition organisers should pay particular attention to marshalling areas and shading, as correct positioning will prevent encroachment on the competition areas, with beneficial results to the competitors and spectators and competition officials. For a suggested layout of competition areas refer to the diagram at the end of this Section.

c) Laying of Buoys – The laying and positioning of all buoys, shall be under the direction of the Chief Referee or Sectional Referee. For setting up of buoys, ropes and anchors refer to the diagram at the end of this Section

d) Duty Boats – The relevant Life Saving Authority conducting the competition and/or the club conducting a competition shall arrange for sufficient fully equipped IRB’s, Personal Water Craft, or other suitable craft as required by the Organising Committee. These craft must maintain their rescue capability.

e) Equipment Scrutineering – Where scrutineering is taking place the Competition Organiser is to ensure that all necessary equipment is available for LSA officials to use.

f) In planning for competitions the Organising Committee must take into account any Government Authority, and LSA requirements, and safety considerations to ensure appropriate event management.

12.6.6 Team Events In all events designated as team events (e.g. Relays etc.), the "team" shall consist of members of the same Life Saving Authority (i.e. club, Branch, Province, or LSA) who must fulfil all LSA entry requirements into competition.

12.6.7 LSA Permission to enter Competitions The following LSA requirements are to be observed for competitions that involve international/Inter-Province/inter-Branch/Inter-District Competitors

a) The organising club should confer with their respective Branch/Province or, as appropriate, LSA to discuss any plans to invite competing crews, teams, or members from another Branch, Province or from overseas.

b) All literature, or discussions with invited competitors, must bear a warning that members, crews, teams, etc., must have their entry endorsed by way of suitable notation on the entry form, or may be by way of correspondence. In special circumstances, the relevant Life Saving Authority may process the matter by telephone, but that is a subject for each relevant Life Saving Authority to determine.

c) Without proper endorsements competitors shall not be allowed to take part in any competition conducted under the authority of LSA. Further detailed regulations on this matter are available from Branches, Province and/or LSA.



12.6.8 Competitions and/or displays conducted by other organisations No member of LSA shall compete or take part, nor shall an affiliated club, Branch or Province be involved in any way, in any lifesaving competition, event and/or related display involving LSA owned equipment or intellectual property, unless that competition, event or display is licensed or sanctioned by LSA and prior written permission to compete or take part has been obtained from LSA.

Participation without LSA permission in an unlicensed or non- sanctioned competition, event or display may be a breach of these rules and the LSA constitution and regulations and members and clubs may be subject to disciplinary action in accordance with these rules and/or LSA regulations. LSA's “special events” and related policies provide processes for LSA support or involvement in competitions conducted by other organisations. Further information is available from LSA. 12.6.9 Late Entries/Additional Entries Late and/or additional entries after the closing date shall only be accepted as decided and published by the organising authority and may be subject to additional fees.

12.7 TROPHIES, PRIZES AND ELIGIBILITY

In relation to trophies, prizes whether cash or kind, and the eligibility of individual member/s representing a section of LSA to compete for, or accept such trophies or prizes, the following shall apply:

a) LSA solely reserves the authority to determine from time to time, conditions relative to the acceptability of trophies or prizes, reimbursement of accommodation, travel and other expenses, and eligibility to compete for trophies or prizes.

b) Gambling by LSA members on authorised LSA competition events in which they are participating as a competitor, official, manager or organiser is strictly prohibited. Members found to have gambled on an LSA competition or event whilst a competitor, official, manager or organiser of that competition will be subject to disciplinary action in accordance with LSA regulations.

c) LSA is the authority to approve competitions involving "cash prizes" and therefore any club or other section of LSA, wishing to allocate any "cash prizes" for competition events shall seek the approval of their respective Branch, Province Centre or in the case of competitions involving international or Inter-Province competitors, from LSA.

d) Cash prizes shall not be awarded for any event at a LSA championship competition. e) Cash prizes shall not be made available from club general funds, however, sponsor income

may be distributed utilising the club banking account. f) Where cash prizes are presented they shall be portrayed as coming direct from event

sponsors (i.e. cash prizes should not be sourced or appear to be sourced from club lifesaving funds).

12.8 COMPETITION SANCTIONING 12.8.1 Preamble All competitions organised under the patronage of LSA should be sanctioned. All organisers shall comply with this Competition Manual Section 2.1 and any Technical Bulletins published. World Records can only be broken in competitions that are sanctioned and in compliance with the LSA Competition Manual, Section 2.5, World Records and Section 9, Facility and Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures. The LSA Record Application Form is included Competition Manual or available on the LSA web site to download. Written application for such licence or sanction must be made at least 40 working days prior to any scheduled LSA National Council meeting or Regional Council meeting.



The words/terms "ILS", “International Life Saving”, “Lifesaving World Championships”, “LWC”, “Oceanman”, Ocean M”, “Ocean M Lifesaver Relay”, “Oceanwoman”, "World" “Lifesaving”, “Life Saving”, “Rescue Series”, “World Lifesaving Championships” and “World Water Safety”, may not be used in connection with any lifesaving competition without the consent of LSA and ILS. 12.8.2 Definition Competition – A competition is defined as the actual events that make the competition collectively. Example: National Lifesaving Championships. Event – An event is defined as one of the race/tests of skill and abilities of a lifesaver that go make up a competition. Example: 200m Obstacles race. 12.8.3 Introduction LSA is committed to a high standard of competition presentation through a process of Competition Sanctioning. To assist prospective hosting organisations and/or competition directors, the following guidelines have been developed along with these resources: 12.8.4 Sanction Procedure Step by Step 1. Application The host organisation wishing to conduct the competition forward the following documents to LSA (Submit the Sanctioning Application Form 28 days’ in advance of competition date to allow for the processing and approval of the application details):

• Sanctioning Application Form.

• Facility and Equipment Inspection Report

• Certificate of Insurance

• Safety and Emergency Plan.

2. Verification The National Federation is responsible to verify the Sanctioning Form, insurances and all related documents

3. Site Visit If necessary a sanctioning site visit can be organised (if required) by an appointed LSA Sport Committee’s representative. 4. LSA Event Calendar The Headquarters include the event in the official LSA Calendar under sanctioned competitions. This serves as an official notification. Post-Event – Record Application Form if applicable. Notes:

1. A Sanctioning Form must be submitted for each competition on an individual basis.

2. Series Competitions that are identical in venue, course design and distance can be treated as one application in terms of the Sanction Forms. Fees are applicable and payable for each competition in the Series.

3. ILS World Records can only be achieved at ILS Sanctioned Competitions.

4. Only sanctioned events can appear on the official ILS Calendar.

5. Technical Support Technical support to conduct the event in accordance with the “LSA Competition Manual” may be required by LSA. The number of Technical Officials will be dependent upon the competition status and the number of competitors and will be determined in consultation with the LSA Sport Commissioner.



6. Entry Forms, Official correspondence and other Promotional material Entry forms must carry the following expression: “Sanctioned by the LSA” and must carry the LSA logo. 7. Change to Competition Should the grounds upon which sanctioning was granted changes at any time prior to the competition, notification must be given to LSA, whereby the sanctioning will be immediately reviewed. Should the review result in the competition not meeting sanctioning standards, LSA reserves the right to advertise withdrawal of sanctioning. 8. Competition Rules All competitions must be conducted in accordance with “LSA Competition Manual” that pertains to the pool and equipment utilized and the actual individual events. Other rules pertaining to the conduct of activities associated with the competition such as the establishment and conduct of a judicial system to be utilized when required, during the competition (appeals committee, etc.) do not need to comply in terms of structure to the LSA Competition Manual but rather in purpose and intent. 9. Permits and Approvals Hosting organisations are responsible for obtaining all required permits and approvals such as; the Local Government (Council), the Police, the approval for use of private property and other facility user group considerations. 10. Insurance / Safety and Emergency Plan

• All competitions must have public liability insurance. • A copy of the insurance “Certificate of Currency” must be forwarded to LSA prior to the

commencement of competition. • A Safety and Emergency Plan for the competition must be submitted to LSA as an

attachment to the application. 11. Equipment All equipment to be used for a competition must comply with LSA specifications. 12. Facilities Standard All facilities used for competition (pool, beach, ocean, lake, etc.) must meet and comply with LSA specifications.

13. Anti-Doping

All sanctioned events must comply in process and adhere to the LSA anti-doping policy. This policy can be found on the ILS website: www.ilsf.org. 14. Duty of Disclosure Before the hosting organiser enters into a sanction with LSA all matters requested pertaining to the competition will be disclosed to LSA through this sanctioning process. If an organiser fails to comply with their duty of disclosure, LSA may withdraw its sanction without prior notice. 15. Date If the date of mailing does not appear on the Sanctioning Form the National Federation as well as LSA will use the e-mail date as the application date. 16. Sanctioning Agreement By signing the Sanctioning Form and its declaration, the Host Organiser declares that he/she has read and understood the LSA sanctioning guidelines and recognises that it is their responsibility to conduct a fair and safe competition. The Organiser further understands that the guidelines are



minimal and special conditions require further cautions and actions. The Organiser agrees also that LSA has the authority to request the cancellation of the competition or withdrawal of the LSA sanctioning if minimum safety requirements are not in place and that LSA may announce publicly before the commencement of the competition the withdrawal of LSA sanctioning and insurance cover if applicable. The Organiser understands that the information supplied on the Sanctioning Form will be relied upon by LSA in sanctioning this event, and any changes made must be notified in writing to LSA as soon as practicable. It is further agreed that the LSA will be included in any waiver or release from liability. In consideration of LSA considering any event sanction application, the Organiser and LSA (through its National Federation) agree as follows:

a) Sanction is neither automatic nor irrevocable. LSA at its absolute discretion may conditional or unconditionally sanction, refuse to sanction, or withdraw its sanction of the competition. For example, LSA might withhold or withdraw a sanction if it considers the competition to risk competitor or public safety, to be unprofessionally organised, to be financially under-resourced, to breach LSA’s rules or policies, or to be detrimental to the promotional or regulatory interests of LSA. Organiser has no claim against LSA in respect of any determination made by it.

b) LSA reserves the right to change or amend its sanctioning policies, procedures and requirements from time to time.

c) If sanctioned, the Organiser must comply with all rules and directions made by LSA in respect of the conduct of this competition and all conditions of any sanction conferred by LSA. Failure to comply with any of these rules, directions or conditions entitles LSA to (amongst other things) withdraw any sanction at any time.

d) If LSA declines to sanction the competition or, having sanctioned the competition, elects to withdraw its sanction for any reason, the Organiser irrevocably authorises LSA to publish the fact, nature and reasons for its decision to decline or withdraw sanction to any person LSA thinks fit, including (but not limited to) prospective competitors, sponsors and the general public.

e) It is the Organiser’s responsibility to conduct a safe and fair competition. Any standards and conditions imposed by LSA for this event and events generally are minimal standards only. The Organiser acknowledges that: • A competition is not necessarily safe or viable because it is sanctioned by LSA. • Special or unusual conditions may require further precautions and actions in the

interests of competitor or spectator safety. • Public liability insurance cover and/or competitor permit insurance cover arranged

by LSA or required by LSA as a condition of sanction, although negotiated and arranged in good faith by LSA, might not cover all risks to the Organiser or competitors associated with the competition. LSA does not warrant that the terms and coverage of any such insurance are adequate for the purposes of the Organiser or competitors and the Organiser must satisfy itself that it is adequately insured.

f) The Organiser must not advertise the competition as sanctioned unless and until LSA has sanctioned it and all conditions of sanction have been complied with. If LSA withdraws any sanction, the Organiser must:

g) Prior to the competition, advise all competitors and prospective competitors of withdrawal of the sanction.

h) Remove any references to LSA’s sanction from advertising or promotional material for the competition.



Annexure 1

LIFESAVING SOUTH AFRICA

SANCTIONING APPLICATION FORM

To be filled in by the applicant organisation and e-mailed to the National Federation for verification and approval. Once approved, the National Federation e-mails it to the LSA Headquarters with a copy to the applicant organisation.

COMPETITION ORGANISER

Contact Name

Address - Street

Address – City & Postal Code

Address – Country

Telephone

Telefax

E-mail

COMPETITION DETAILS

Competition Name

Competition Dates

If the competition includes pool events, please indicate what events are to be covered by the sanction. If the pool does not meet all of the technical specifications/criteria for all events.

COMPETITION TYPE (please tick)

Pool Beach-Surf Lake/Open Water Combination

Youth

Open

Masters

Other

VENUE DETAILS

Pool Venue Name and Place

Beach-Surf-Open Water Venue Name

PARTICIPATION DETAILS

Expected No. of Competitors

Field Limit

Has this competition been sanctioned before? YES/NO

Are there any variations to the previous sanctioning details? YES/NO



SANCTIONING REQUEST BY HOST ORGANISER

We have read the LSA Sanctioning Guidelines and agree to comply to and abide by all conditions set out in the Competition Sanctioning Guidelines.

Printed Name: ....................................................................... Telephone: ............................................ Date: ...................................................................................... E-mail: ...................................................

SANCTIONING APPROVAL BY PROVINCIAL FEDERATION

We have analysed the Sanctioning Application Form and all related and necessary documents and confirm that they comply with the LSA Competition Sanctioning Guidelines.

Name of National Federation: ................................................................................................................. Printed Name: ......................................................................... Telephone: ............................................. Date: ....................................................................................... E-mail: ....................................................

SANCTIONING APPROVED AND NOTED BY LSA LSA Sport Committee Chairman LSA Designate Date………………………………….

CONDITIONS APPLIED - IF ANY (example: need for site visit, the actual events to be covered by the sanction detailed in the section – COMPETITION DETAILS)

……………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… ……………………………………………………………………………………………………… …………………………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………………………

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………

…………………………………………………………………………………………………………

………………………………………………………………………………………………………..



Annexure 2

LIFESAVING SOUTH AFRICA

FACILITY AND EQUIPMENT INSPECTION REPORT

Reference: Current LSA Competition Manual, Section 9: Facility and Equipment Standards and Scrutineering Procedures.

Please include the completed inspection report with the Sanctioning Application Form.

COMPETITION HOST

Host Organisation/Member: _____________________________________________________________

Address: street & number: ______________________________________________________________

Postal Code & City ___________________________________________________________________

Phone: _____________________________________________ Email: __________________________

Host Contact: _______________________________________________________________________

Position/Title: ________________________________________________________________

Meet Manager: _______________________________________________________________

Phone: ______________________ _________________Email: _________________________________

Chief Referee: ________________________________________________________________

Phone: ________________________________________________Email: ________________________

FACILITY

Date of Inspection: ____________________________________________________________________

The Facility and Equipment complies with the specifications indicated in the LSA Competition Manual.

Meet Manager’s name: _________________________________________________________________

Meet Manager’s signature: ______________________________________________________________



Facility Features (include copy of certified surveyor if available):

Name of Pool Facility: ________________________________________________________

Deck or overhead Obstructions (describe): _______________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Deck fittings (location from deep-end wall i.e. false start): ____________________________

__________________________________________________________________________

Starting platforms style: ____________________ Height of platform above water: ________

Lane ropes style: __________________________

Bulkhead width: ___________________________

Water Temperature: _________ Warm up / cool down pool availability: _________________

Electronic timing system brand: single ended □, double ended □,

EQUIPMENT COMPLIANCE (Meet Manger verifies compliance):

Manikins Brand: ___________________ Initial: __________

Rescue Tubes Brand: ___________________ Initial: __________

Obstacles Brand: ___________________ Initial: __________

Throw Lines Brand: ___________________ Initial: __________

Pool Tank Measurements in meters:

Length: __________ Width: _________ # of Lanes: __________ Width of lanes: _________

Width from outside wall to lane: __________ Gutter style: ___________________________

POOL DEPTHS – all depths are measured in meters, from the deep end wall

Dive Start:

0.0 m __________ 1.0 m _________ 6.0 m _________ and/or 44.0 m __________

48.0 m __________ 49.0 m __________ 50.0 m __________ Minimum depth 1.35 m.

Obstacle Swim* - 200 m, 100 m, Initial : __________

10.5 m_________ 12.5 m ________ 14.5 m ________25.5 m _______ 37.5 m ________

39.5 m _________Minimum depth is 1.8 m.

Manikin Carry* - 50 m, Initial: __________

24.0 m ________ 26.0 m ________ Minimum depth is 1.8 m.

Rescue Medley* - 100 m, Initial: __________

16.5 m ______ 18.5 m ______ and/or 31.5 _______33.5 m ______ Minimum depth is 1.8 m.

Manikin Carry with Fins* – 100m, Initial: __________

2.0 m __________ and/or 48.0 m __________ Minimum depth is 1.8 m.



Manikin Tow with Fins* – 100 m, Initial: __________

2.0 m __________ and/or 48.0 m __________ Minimum depth is 1.8 m.

Super Lifesaver* – 200 m, Initial: __________

2.0 m ______ 24.0 m ______ and/or 26.0 m_______ 48.0 m_______ Minimum depth is 1.8 m.

Line Throw - 12.5 m, Initial: __________

10.0 m ______ 12.5 m _______and/or 37.5 m _______40.0 m ______ Minimum depth is 1.8 m.

Manikin Relay – 4 x 25 m, Initial: __________

0.0 m________ 1.0 m_ ______ 2.0 m_______ 23.0 m _______25.0 m ______ 27.0 m ________ and/or 48.0 m __________ 49.0 m __________ 50.0 m __________ Minimum depth is 1.0 m at the start wall and 1.8 m in the middle and the turning wall.

Obstacle Relay* – 4 x 50 m, Initial : __________

10.5 m ________ 12.5 m ________ 14.5 m ________25.5 m________ 37.5 m_________

39.5 m __________ Minimum depth is 1.8 m.

Lifesaving Medley* – 4 x 50 m, Initial: __________

0.0 m ________ 1.0 m ________ 2.0 m ________6.0 m ________ and/or 44.0 m _________

48.0 m ________ 49.0 m ________ 50.0 m ________ Minimum depth 1.35 m at the starting wall and 1.8 m at the turning wall.

Note: Events beginning with a dive start are required to adhere to those depths indicated for dive starts.

Appendixes

Appendixes: Page 1 (2020 Manual - DRAFT)

APPENDIXES - INDEX

Appendix 1 PROTEST AND APPEAL FORM …………………………………………. 2

Appendix 2 RANDOM DRAW FOR 8 OR LESS ………………………………………. 4

Appendix 3 RANDOM DRAW FOR 16 OR LESS …………………………………….. 5

Appendix 4 RANDOM DRAW FOR 20 OR LESS …………………………………..… 6

Appendix 5 DRAW SHEET – 8 (MAXIMUM 9) PER HEAT OR FINAL …………….. 7

Appendix 6 DRAW SHEET - MAXIMUM 16 PER HEAT OR FINAL ………………… 9

Appendix 7 MASTERS SURF SUMMARY SHEET …………………………………… 12

Appendix 8 JUNIORS AND SENIORS SURF SUMMARY SHEET .......................... 13

Appendix 9 NIPPERS SURF SUMMARY SHEET ……………………………………. 14

Appendix 10 MASTERS OPEN WATER SUMMARY SHEET ………………………… 15

Appendix 11 JUNIORS AND SENIORS OPEN WATER SUMMARY SHEET ............ 15

Appendix 12 NIPPERS OPEN WATER SUMMARY SHEET ……………………….…. 16

Appendix 13 THERAPEUTIC USE EXEMPTION (TUE) APPLICATION FORM ........ 17

Appendix 14 TRANSFER/ CLEARANCE APPLICATION FORM …………………….. 21

Appendix 15 COMPETITIVE TRANSFER/ CLEARANCE APPLICATION FORM ….. 22

Appendix 16 CLUB CODES ……………………………………………………………….. 23

Appendixes


APPENDIX 1: PROTEST AND APPEAL FORM

Protest/Appeal Form

Part 1: Protests must be lodged in accordance with the 2020 Competition Manual (16th Edition) and/or LSA Circulars. Protests may arise from entry procedures or entry eligibility; from scrutineering or equipment eligibility; or during participation in the competition and/or breach of rules.

Competitor(s)/Team lodging protest (please print): _________________________________________

Event: __________________________________ Arena: _________________________________

Heat: ____________________________ Date/Time: ______________________________________

I/We formally protest against:

___________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

Competitor (signature): ___________________ Team Manager (signature): ____________________

For Official Use Only Results of event announced at (determine exact time): _______________________________________

Verbal protest received by: ___________ Position of Official: _______________ Time: _____________

Protest form received by: _______________Position of Official: _____________ Time: ______________

Referee name (print): _________________________________________________________________

Decision: □ Upheld □ Dismissed □ Referred to Appeals □ Referred to Disciplinary

Remarks: ___________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

Referee (signature): __________________________________________________________________

Time protest decision advised to Competitor or Manager: _____________________________________

Protestor signature acknowledges receipt of decision: ________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Part 2: Appeals must be lodged in accordance with the 2020 Competition Manual. Decisions of the Appeals Committee are final. Basis or explanation for appeal:

___________________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________

For Official Use Only

Appeal form received by: _____________ Position of Official: _______________ Time: _____________

Appeal Chair name: ___________________________________________________________________

Appeal fee received by: R ____________ Appeal fee returned (if applicable): R __________________

Decision: □ Upheld □ Dismissed

Appendixes


Remarks:

___________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

Appeal Chair (signature): ______________________________________________________________

Time appeal decision advised to Competitor or Manager: _____________________________________

Appellant’s signature acknowledges receipt of decision: ______________________________________

Appendixes


APPENDIX 2: RANDOM DRAW FOR 8 OR LESS

In an event were only 6 or 7 teams compete, the Recorders place the Teams according to their finish positions already described in section 2.17, the Chief Judge for example Draws “Column 2” the Team in finish position 3 will be allocated buoy 6 because the 6th buoy was allocated to 9th finish spot and the Team in finish position 5 will be allocated buoy 5 and Team in 7th finish position on buoy 4 and so on. The Numbers 1 to 8 refer to the swim colour buoys numbered from 1 being on the left being red/yellow and the 8th buoy on the right being the black/red buoy.

Draw 1 Draw 2 Draw 3 Draw 4 Draw 5 Draw 6 Draw 7 Draw 8

Fin

ish

ing

positio

n

Dra

w P

ositio

n

Fin

ish

ing

positio

n

Dra

w P

ositio

n

Fin

ish

ing

positio

n

Dra

w P

ositio

n

Fin

ish

ing

positio

n

Dra

w P

ositio

n

Fin

ish

ing

positio

n

Dra

w P

ositio

n

Fin

ish

ing

positio

n

Dra

w P

ositio

n

Fin

ish

ing

positio

n

Dra

w P

ositio

n

Fin

ish

ing

positio

n

Dra

w P

ositio

n

1 2 1 1 1 7 1 8 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 5

2 5 2 8 2 4 2 1 2 6 2 1 2 5 2 2

3 7 3 7 3 2 3 2 3 2 3 4 3 4 3 4

4 1 4 2 4 5 4 6 4 4 4 8 4 1 4 7

5 8 5 5 5 1 5 3 5 8 5 3 5 8 5 6

6 3 6 6 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 7 6 7 6 1

7 6 7 3 7 6 7 5 7 7 7 6 7 6 7 8

8 4 8 4 8 5 8 7 8 3 8 5 8 3 8 3

Appendixes



In event where less than 16 but more than 10 Teams compete, for example only 14 Teams are recorded the Recorder places the Teams according to their finish positions already described in Section 2.17 the Chief Judge for example Draws “Column 2” the Team in finish position 6 will be allocated position 2 because the 15th position was allocated to 2nd finish spot and the Team in finish position 8 will be allocated position 12. The Numbers 1 to 16 refer to the starting positions from 1 being on the left facing the water and the 16th position being on the right.


Fin

ish

ing

positio

n

Dra

w P

ositio

n

Fin

ish

ing

positio

n

Dra

w P

ositio

n

Fin

ish

ing

positio

n

Dra

w P

ositio

n

Fin

ish

ing

positio

n

Dra

w P

ositio

n

Fin

ish

ing

positio

n

Dra

w P

ositio

n

Fin

ish

ing

positio

n

Dra

w P

ositio

n

Fin

ish

ing

positio

n

Dra

w P

ositio

n

Fin

ish

ing

positio

n

Dra

w P

ositio

n

1 3 1 15 1 12 1 9 1 10 1 15 1 2 1 13

2 5 2 10 2 11 2 7 2 11 2 12 2 8 2 2

3 16 3 5 3 8 3 13 3 6 3 9 3 10 3 6

4 1 4 11 4 4 4 1 4 8 4 10 4 4 4 5

5 7 5 6 5 14 5 15 5 15 5 14 5 12 5 12

6 2 6 2 6 15 6 6 6 7 6 1 6 1 6 4

7 15 7 16 7 2 7 3 7 3 7 5 7 16 7 8

8 9 8 13 8 10 8 4 8 2 8 13 8 9 8 3

9 14 9 4 9 7 9 10 9 12 9 16 9 7 9 7

10 10 10 9 10 1 10 16 10 16 10 11 10 14 10 10

11 11 11 7 11 9 11 2 11 5 11 2 11 13 11 16

12 12 12 1 12 16 12 14 12 1 12 3 12 11 12 9

13 4 13 3 13 5 13 12 13 14 13 7 13 3 13 1

14 6 14 12 14 13 14 8 14 9 14 8 14 5 14 11

15 8 15 14 15 3 15 5 15 13 15 4 15 15 15 15

16 13 16 8 16 6 16 11 16 4 16 6 16 6 16 14

Appendixes




Fin

ish

ing

positio

n

Dra

w P

ositio

n

Fin

ish

ing

positio

n

Dra

w P

ositio

n

Fin

ish

ing

positio

n

Dra

w P

ositio

n

Fin

ish

ing

positio

n

Dra

w P

ositio

n

Fin

ish

ing

positio

n

Dra

w P

ositio

n

Fin

ish

ing

positio

n

Dra

w P

ositio

n

Fin

ish

ing

positio

n

Dra

w P

ositio

n

Fin

ish

ing

positio

n

Dra

w P

ositio

n

1 14 1 8 1 4 1 8 1 1 1 9 1 10 1 4

2 13 2 2 2 10 2 5 2 11 2 7 2 9 2 10

3 11 3 1 3 15 3 15 3 5 3 10 3 17 3 17

4 18 4 17 4 5 4 13 4 19 4 5 4 12 4 15

5 7 5 12 5 18 5 1 5 6 5 11 5 19 5 14

6 3 6 16 6 3 6 14 6 2 6 1 6 13 6 9

7 9 7 7 7 20 7 17 7 15 7 13 7 3 7 12

8 4 8 18 8 8 8 11 8 16 8 3 8 7 8 6

9 6 9 4 9 6 9 7 9 18 9 12 9 15 9 19

10 19 10 6 10 13 10 19 10 10 10 4 10 1 10 11

11 5 11 5 11 7 11 20 11 8 11 15 11 2 11 2

12 12 12 10 12 12 12 6 12 9 12 6 12 5 12 8

13 16 13 15 13 14 13 10 13 14 13 2 13 14 13 16

14 20 14 13 14 17 14 4 14 12 14 8 14 20 14 3

15 17 15 9 15 2 15 18 15 3 15 14 15 18 15 13

16 10 16 3 16 16 16 12 16 4 16 16 16 11 16 5

17 15 17 20 17 1 17 3 17 20 17 20 17 8 17 20

18 2 18 11 18 11 18 16 18 13 18 18 18 4 18 7

19 1 19 14 19 9 19 9 19 7 19 19 19 16 19 18

20 8 20 19 20 19 20 2 20 17 20 17 20 6 20 1

Appendixes


APPENDIX 5: DRAW SHEET – 8 (MAXIMUM 9) PER HEAT OR FINAL

8 (9 MAXIMUM) PER HEAT OR FINAL

No. Starters

No. Heats

Type Competitors per Heat Competitors

to next round

No. Competitors per heat

1 1 Final 1 x 1 2 1 Final 1 x 2 3 1 Final 1 x 3 4 1 Final 1 x 4 5 1 Final 1 x 5 6 1 Final 1 x 6 7 1 Final 1 x 7 8 1 Final 1 x 8 9 1 Final 1 x 9

10 1 Semi-Final 2 x 5 4 8

11 2 Semi-Final 1 x 5 1 x 6 4 8


13 2 Semi-Final 1 x 6 1 x 7 4 8


15 2 Semi-Final 1 x 7 1 x 8 4 8


17 2 Semi-Final 1 x 8 1 x 9 4 8

18 2 Semi-Final 2 x 18 4 8

19 2 Heats 1 x 7 2 x 6 4 12

20 2 Heats 2 x 7 1 x 6 4 12

21 3 Heats 3 x 7 4 12

22 3 Heats 2 x 7 1 x 8 4 12

23 3 Heats 1 x 7 2 x 8 4 12

24 3 Heats 3 x 8 4 12

25 3 Heats 2 x 8 1 x 9 4 12

26 3 Heats 1 x 8 2 x 9 4 12

27 3 Heats 3 x 9 4 12

28 4 Heats 4 x 7 4 16

29 4 Heats 3 x 7 1 x 8 4 16

30 4 Heats 2 x 7 2 x 8 4 16

31 4 Heats 1 x 7 3 x 8 4 16

32 4 Heats 4 x 8 4 16

33 4 Heats 3 x 8 1 x 9 4 16

34 4 Heats 2 x 8 2 x 9 4 16

35 4 Heats 1 x 8 3 x 9 4 16

36 4 Heats 4 x 9 4 16

37 5 Heats 2 x 8 3 x 7 4 20

38 5 Heats 23 x 8 2 x 7 4 20

39 5 Heats 4 x 8 1 x 7 4 20

40 5 Heats 5 x 8 4 20

41 5 Heats 4 x 8 1 x 9 4 20

42 5 Heats 3 x 8 2 x 9 4 20

43 5 Heats 2 x 8 3 x 9 4 20

44 5 Heats 1 x 8 4 x 9 4 20

45 5 Heats 5 x 9 4 20

46 6 Heats 4 x 8 2 x 7 4 24

47 6 Heats 5 x 8 1 x 7 4 24

48 6 Heats 6 x 8 4 24

49 6 Heats 7 x 7 4 28

50 6 Heats 1 x 8 6 x 7 4 28

Appendixes


8 (9 MAXIMUM) PER HEAT OR FINAL

No. Starters

No. Heats

Type Competitors per Heat Competitors

to next round

No. Competitors per heat

51 6 Heats 2 x 8 5 x 7 4 28

52 6 Heats 3 x 8 4 x 7 4 28

53 6 Heats 4 x 8 3 x 7 4 28

54 6 Heats 5 x 8 2 x 7 4 28

55 7 Heats 6 x 8 1 x 7 4 28

56 7 Heats 7 x 8 4 28

57 7 Heats 6 x 8 1 x 9 4 28

58 7 Heats 5 x 8 2 x 9 4 28

59 7 Heats 4 x 8 3 x 9 4 28

60 7 Heats 3 x 8 4 x 9 4 28

61 7 Heats 2 x 8 5 x 9 4 28

62 7 Heats 1 x 8 6 x 9 4 28

63 7 Heats 7 x 9 4 28

64 8 Heats 8 x 8 4 32

65 8 Heats 7 x 8 1 x 9 4 32

66 8 Heats 6 x 8 2 x 9 4 32

67 8 Heats 5 x 5 3 x 9 4 32

68 8 Heats 4 x 8 4 x 9 4 32

69 8 Heats 3 x 8 5 x 9 4 32

70 8 Heats 2 x 8 6 x 9 4 32

71 8 Heats 1 x 8 7 x 9 4 32

72 8 Heats 9 x 8 4 36

73 9 Heats 8 x 8 1 x 9 4 36

74 9 Heats 7 x 8 2 x 9 4 36

75 9 Heats 6 x 8 3 x 9 4 36

76 9 Heats 5 x 8 4 x 9 4 36

77 9 Heats 4 x 8 5 x 9 4 36

78 9 Heats 3 x 8 6 x 9 4 36

79 9 Heats 2 x 8 7 x 9 4 36

80 9 Heats 1 x 8 8 x 9 4 36

81 9 Heats 9 x 9 4 36

82 10 Heats 8 x 8 2 x 9 4 40

83 10 Heats 7 x 8 3 x 9 4 40

84 10 Heats 6 x 8 4 x 9 4 40

85 10 Heats 5 x 8 5 x 9 4 40

86 10 Heats 4 x 8 6 x 9 4 40

87 10 Heats 3 x 8 7 x 9 4 40

88 10 Heats 2 x 8 8 x 9 4 40

89 10 Heats 1 x 8 9 x 9 4 40

90 10 Heats 10 x 9 4 40

91 11 Heats 3 x 9 8 x 8 4 44

92 11 Heats 4 x 9 7 x 8 4 44

93 11 Heats 5 x 9 6 x 8 4 44

94 11 Heats 6 x 9 5 x 8 4 44

95 11 Heats 7 x 9 4 x 8 4 44

96 11 Heats 8 x 9 3 x 8 4 44

97 11 Heats 9 x 9 2 x 8 4 44

98 11 Heats 10 x 9 1 x 8 4 44

99 11 Heats 11 x 9 4 44

100 12 Heats 8 x 8 4 x 9 4 48

Appendixes


APPENDIX 5: DRAW SHEET - MAXIMUM 16 PER HEAT OR FINAL

16 PER HEAT OR FINAL

No. of Starte

rs

No of Heat

Heats Competitors/Heat

Competitors to Next Round

per Heat

Next Round

Competitors

1 1 Final 1 x 1 2 1 Final 1 x 2 3 1 Final 1 x 3 4 1 Final 1 x 4 5 1 Final 1 x 5 6 1 Final 1 x 6 7 1 Final 1 x 7 8 1 Final 1 x 8 9 1 Final 1 x 9

10 1 Final 1 x 10 11 1 Final 1 x 11 12 1 Final 1 x 12 13 1 Final 1 x 13 14 1 Final 1 x 14 15 1 Final 1 x 15 16 1 Final 1 x 16 17 2 Semi Final 1 x 8

1 x 9 6 12

18 2 Semi Final 2 x 9 6 12

19 2 Semi Final 1 x 9 1 x 10 6 12

20 2 Semi Final 2 x 10 6 12

21 2 Semi Final 1 x 10 1 x 11 7 14

22 2 Semi Final 2 x 11 7 14

23 2 Semi Final 1 x 11 1 x 12 7 14

24 2 Semi Final 2 x 12 7 14

25 2 Semi Final 1 x 12 1 x 13 7 14

26 2 Semi Final 2 x 13 7 14

27 2 Semi Final 1 x 13 1 x 14 8 16

28 2 Semi Final 2 x 14 8 16

29 2 Semi Final 1 x 14 1 x 15 8 16

30 2 Semi Final 2 x 15 8 16

31 2 Semi Final 1 x 15 1 x 16 8 16

32 2 Semi Final 2 x 16 8 16

33 3 Heats 3 x 11 5 15

34 3 Heats 2 x 11 1 x 12 5 15

35 3 Heats 1 x 11 2 x 12 5 15

36 3 Heats 3 x 12 6 18

37 3 Heats 2 x 12 1 x 13 6 18

38 3 Heats 1 x 12 2 x 13 6 18

39 3 Heats 3 x 13 6 18

40 3 Heats 2 x 13 1 x 14 6 18

41 3 Heats 1 x 13 2 x 14 6 18

42 3 Heats 3 x 14 6 18

43 3 Heats 2 x 14 1 x 15 6 18

44 3 Heats 1 x 14 2 x 15 6 18

45 3 Heats 3 x 15 6 18

46 3 Heats 2 x 15 1 x 16 6 18

47 3 Heats 1 x 15 2 x 16 6 18

48 3 Heats 3 x 16 6 18

49 4 Heats 3 x 12 1 x 13 8 32

50 4 Heats 2 x 12 2 x 13 8 32

Appendixes



No. of Starte

rs

No of Heat



per Heat

Next Round

Competitors

51 4 Heats 1 x 12 3 x 13 8 32

52 4 Heats 4 x 13 8 32

53 4 Heats 3 x 13 1 x 14 8 32

54 4 Heats 2 x 13 2 x 14 8 32

55 4 Heats 1 x 13 3 x 14 8 32

56 4 Heats 4 x 14 8 32

57 4 Heats 3 x 14 1 x 15 8 32

58 4 Heats 2 x 14 2 x 15 8 32

59 4 Heats 1 x 14 3 x 15 8 32

60 4 Heats 4 x 15 8 32

61 4 Heats 3 x 15 1 x 16 8 32

62 4 Heats 2 x 15 2 x 16 8 32

63 4 Heats 1 x 15 3 x 16 8 32

64 4 Heats 4 x 16 8 32

65 5 Heats 5 x 13 6 30

66 5 Heats 4 x 13 1 x 14 6 30

67 5 Heats 3 x 13 2 x 14 6 30

68 5 Heats 2 x 13 3 x 14 6 30

69 5 Heats 1 x 13 4 x 14 6 30

70 5 Heats 5 x 14 6 30

71 5 Heats 4 x 14 1 x 15 6 30

72 5 Heats 3 x 14 2 x 15 6 30

73 5 Heats 2 x 14 3 x 15 6 30

74 5 Heats 1 x 14 4 x 15 6 30

75 5 Heats 5 x 15 6 30

76 5 Heats 4 x 15 1 x 16 6 30

77 5 Heats 3 x 15 2 x 16 6 30

78 5 Heats 2 x 15 3 x 16 6 30

79 5 Heats 1 x 15 4 x 16 6 30

80 5 Heats 5 x 16 6 30

81 6 Heats 3 x 13 3 x 14 8 48

82 6 Heats 2 x 13 4 x 14 8 48

83 6 Heats 1 x 13 5 x 14 8 48

84 6 Heats 6 x 14 8 48

85 6 Heats 5 x 14 1 x 15 8 48

86 6 Heats 4 x 14 2 x 15 8 48

87 6 Heats 3 x 14 3 x 15 8 48

88 6 Heats 2 x 14 4 x 15 8 48

89 6 Heats 1 x 14 5 x 15 8 48

90 6 Heats 6 x 15 8 48

91 6 Heats 5 x 15 1 x 16 8 48

92 6 Heats 4 x 15 2 x 16 8 48

93 6 Heats 3 x 15 3 x 16 8 48

94 6 Heats 2 x 15 4 x 16 8 48

95 6 Heats 1 x 15 5 x 16 8 48

96 6 Heats 6 x 16 8 48

97 7 Heats 6 x 14 1 x 13 8 56

98 7 Heats 7 x 14 8 56

99 7 Heats 6 x 14 1 x 15 8 56

100 7 Heats 5 x 14 2 x 15 8 56

101 7 Heats 4 x 14 3 x 15 8 56

102 7 Heats 3 x 14 4 x 15 8 56

Appendixes



No. of Starte

rs

No of Heat



per Heat

Next Round

Competitors

103 7 Heats 2 x 14 5 x 15 8 56

104 7 Heats 1 x 14 6 x 15 8 56

105 7 Heats 7 x 15 8 56

106 7 Heats 6 x 15 1 x 16 8 56

107 7 Heats 5 x 15 2 x 16 8 56

108 7 Heats 4 x 15 3 x 16 8 56

109 7 Heats 3 x 15 4 x 16 8 56

110 7 Heats 2 x 15 5 x 16 8 56

111 7 Heats 1 x 15 6 x 16 8 56

112 7 Heats 7 x 16 8 56

113 8 Heats 7 x 14 1 x 15 8 64

114 8 Heats 6 x 14 2 x 15 8 64

115 8 Heats 5 x 14 3 x 15 8 64

116 8 Heats 4 x 14 4 x 15 8 64

117 8 Heats 3 x 14 5 x 15 8 64

118 8 Heats 2 x 14 6 x 15 8 64

119 8 Heats 1 x 14 7 x 15 8 64

120 8 Heats 8 x 15 8 64

121 8 Heats 7 x 15 1 x 16 8 64

122 8 Heats 6 x 15 2 x 16 8 64

123 8 Heats 5 x 15 3 x 16 8 64

124 8 Heats 4 x 15 4 x 16 8 64

125 8 Heats 3 x 15 5 x 16 8 64

126 8 Heats 2 x 15 6 x 16 8 64

127 8 Heats 1 x 15 7 x 16 8 64

128 8 Heats 8 x 16 8 64

129 9 Heats 6 x 14 3 x 15 7 63

130 9 Heats 5 x 14 4 x 15 7 63

131 9 Heats 4 x 14 5 x 15 7 63

132 9 Heats 3 x 14 6 x 15 7 63

133 9 Heats 2 x 14 7 x 15 7 63

134 9 Heats 1 x 14 8 x 15 7 63

135 9 Heats 9 x 15 7 63

136 9 Heats 8 x 15 1 x 16 7 63

137 9 Heats 7 x 15 2 x 16 7 63

138 9 Heats 6 x 15 3 x 16 7 63

139 9 Heats 5 x 15 4 x 16 7 63

140 9 Heats 4 x 15 5 x 16 7 63

141 9 Heats 3 x 15 6 x 16 7 63

142 9 Heats 2 x 15 7 x 16 7 63

143 9 Heats 1 x 15 8 x 16 7 63

144 9 Heats 9 x 16 7 63

145 10 Heats 5 x 14 5 x 15 8 80

146 10 Heats 4 x 14 6 x 15 8 80

147 10 Heats 3 x 14 7 x 15 8 80

148 10 Heats 2 x 14 8 x 15 8 80

149 10 Heats 1 x 14 9 x 15 8 80

150 10 Heats 10 x 15 8 80

Appendixes


APPENDIX 7: MASTERS SURF SUMMARY SHEET

EVENT LIMITATION TIME LIMIT (May extend

by 5 min)

DISTANCE/ COURSE

TEAM

Beach Relay 10/ heat 8/ final

Nil 70 m/leg Team of 3

Beach Sprint 10/ heat 8/ final

Nil 70 m Individual event

Beach Run Numbers condition

dependent 15 Minutes

All age groups: 2000 m

Male: 60+ 1000 m Female: 55+ 1000 m

Individual event

3 x 1 km Beach Run

Relay

Numbers condition dependent

15 Minutes 1 km per leg Team of 3

Board Race 16 Competitors 10 Minutes Board Buoys Individual event

Double Ski 16 teams 10 Minutes Ski buoys Team of 2

Beach Flags 16 heat/ 8 final

Nil 15 m Individual event

Iron Man & Iron Woman

16 Competitors 20 Minutes

Swim: Swim buoys; Board: Board Buoys; Ski: Ski buoys; Finish

with a run

Individual event

Run/Swim/Run 32 Competitors 15 Minutes Swim buoys

2 x 100 m run leg Individual event

Surf Ski 16 Competitors 10 Minutes Ski buoys Individual event

Surf Swim 32 Competitors 15 Minutes Swim buoys Individual event

COMPOSITION OF TEAM EVENTS

No. Competitors

Events Categories: Determined by aggregate age of Competitors

3 Competitors Beach Relay 110+, 130+, 150+, 170+, years

2 Competitors Board Rescue,

Double Ski Age determined by the youngest Competitor

AGE GROUPS

30-34 = A, 35-39 = B, 40-44 = C, 45-49 = D, 50-54 = E, 55-59 = F, 60-64 = G, 65-70 = H, 70-74=I 75 years + =J

Buoy Colours: Red/Yellow, Black, Green/White, Red, Blue/White, Yellow, White/Black , Orange, Black/Red

Appendixes


APPENDIX 8: JUNIORS AND SENIORS SURF SUMMARY SHEET

EVENT LIMITATION

TIME LIMIT (May

extend by 5 min)

DISTANCE COURSE

TEAM

Beach Relay 10 heat/ 8 final

Nil 90 m/leg Team of 4.

Beach Sprint 10 in heat/ in 8

final Nil 90 m Individual event

Beach Run Numbers condition

dependent 15 Minutes

U/15 – 1400 m U/17 – 1600 m U/19 – 1800 m

Senior/Open – 2000 m

Individual event

3 x 1 km Beach Run Relay

Numbers condition dependent

15 Minutes 1 km per leg Team of 3

Board Relay 16 teams 20 Minutes Around board buoys and finish with a run

Team of 3

Board Rescue 9 heat/ 8 in final 15 Minutes Use swim buoys Patient also race

Team of 2

Board Race 16 Competitors 10 Minutes Board Buoys Individual Event

Double Ski 16 teams 10 Minutes Ski buoys Team of 2

Beach Flags 16 in heat/ in

8 final Nil 20 m Individual event


16 Competitors 20 Minutes

Swim: Swim buoys Board: Board Buoys

Ski: Ski Buoys Finish with a run

Individual event Junior U/15, U/17 &

U/19

Surf Ski 16 Competitors 10 Minutes Ski Buoys Individual event

Taplin Relay 16 teams 20 Minutes

Swim: Swim Buoys Board: Board Buoys

Ski: Ski Buoys Finish with a run

Team of 4 nominated

Ski Relay 16 teams 20 Minutes Ski buoys Team of 3

Rescue Tube Rescue

9 heat/ 8 final 15 Minutes Use swim buoys Patient also race

Team of 4 nominated

Surf Swim 32 Competitors 15 Minutes Swim Buoys Individual event

Surf Boat 6 boats 15 Minutes Surf Boat Buoys Team of 5

Run/Swim/Run 32 Competitors 15 Minutes Swim Buoys


Swim Buoys:: Red/Yellow, Black, Green/White, Red, Blue/White, Yellow, White/Black , Orange, Black/Red – 120 m Board Buoys: Black/White – 200 m Ski Buoys: Orange – Turning buoy: 250m, Apex buoy: 300 m for single ski and 350 m for double ski

Appendixes


APPENDIX 9: NIPPERS SURF SUMMARY SHEET

EVENT AGE

GROUP LIMITATION

TIME LIMIT (May extend

by 5 min) DISTANCES/ COURSE REMARK

Beach Flags

U/9 & U/10 16/heat 8/final

Nil 15 m Individual

event U/11 & U/12

U/13 & U/14

Beach Sprint

U/9 & U/10 10/ heat 8/final

Nil

50 m Individual

event U/11 & U/12 60 m

U/13 & U/14 70 m

Beach Relay

U/9 + U/10 10/heat 8/final

Nil

50 m/ leg

Team/ 4 U/11 + U/12 60 m/ leg

U/13 + U/14 70 m/ leg

Board Relay

U/10 + U/11 Not for Under 10 &11

U/12 + U/13 16 teams 20

60 m buoys Team/ 3

U/14 + U/15 80 m buoys

Board Race

U/9 & U/10 Not for Under 10 & 11

U/11 & U/12 16 10

60 m buoys Individual event

U/13 & U/14 80 m buoys

Body board

U/9 & U/10 3/ heats 6/ final

15 60 m buoys Individual

event U/12 & U/13

U/13 & U/14 Not for Under 13 & 14

Body-board Relay

U/9 + U/10 32/heats 16/final

20 60 m buoys Team/ 3

U/11 + U/12 Not for Under 11, 12, 13 & 14

U/13 + U/14

Iron Nipper

U/9 & U/10 Not for Under 9, 10, 11 and 12

U/11 & U/12

U/13 & U/14 16 20 80 m buoys Individual

event

Beach Run

U/9 & U/10

60 15

800 m Individual

event U/11 & U/12 1 000 m

U/13 & U/14 1 200m

Surf Swim

U/9 & U/10

32 15

60 m swim buoys Individual

event U/11 & U/12 60 m swim buoys

U/13 & U/14 80 m swim buoys

Run/Swim/Run

U/9 + U/10

32 15

60 m buoys & 2 x 50 m run

Individual event

U/11 + U/12 60 m buoys & 2 x 60 m

run

U/13 + U/14 80 m buoys & 2 x 70 m

run

Taplin Relay

U/9 + U/10

16 teams 20

400m run, 60 m buoys. Team/ 4: Run/ Swim/B/Board

U/11 + U/12 400m run, 60 m buoys Team/ 4: Run/ Swim/Board U/13 + U/14 400m run, 80 m buoys.

Buoy Colours: Colours to be determined by the Chief Referee

Appendixes


APPENDIX 10: MASTERS OPEN WATER SUMMARY SHEET

EVENT LIMITATION TIME LIMIT (May extend

by 5 min)

DISTANCE/ COURSE

TEAM


Open Water Swim 32 Competitors 15 Minutes Swim buoys Individual event

AGE GROUPS

30-34 = A, 35-39 = B, 40-44 = C, 45-49 = D, 50-54 = E, 55-59 = F, 60-64 = G, 65-70 = H, 70-74=I 75 years + =J

Buoy Colours: Red/Yellow, Black, Green/White, Red, Blue/White, Yellow, White/Black , Orange, Black/Red

APPENDIX 11: JUNIORS AND SENIORS OPEN WATER SUMMARY SHEET

EVENT LIMITATION TIME LIMIT

(May extend by 5 min)

DISTANCE COURSE

TEAM


Taplin Relay 16 teams 20 Minutes Swim: Swim Buoys Board: Board Buoys

Finish with a run

Team of 4 nominated


16 Competitors 20 Minutes Swim: Swim buoys

Board: Board Buoys Finish with a run

Swim: Swim buoys

Board: Board Buoys

Finish with a run

Rescue Tube Rescue Race

9 heat/ 8 final 15 Minutes Use swim buoys Patient also race

Team of 4 nominated

Run/Swim/Run 32 Competitors 15 Minutes Swim Buoys


Open Water Swim

32 Competitors 15 Minutes Swim Buoys Individual event

Swim Buoys:: Red/Yellow, Black, Green/White, Red, Blue/White, Yellow, White/Black , Orange, Black/Red – 120 m Board Buoys: Black/White – 200m

Appendixes


APPENDIX 12: NIPPERS OPEN WATER SUMMARY SHEET

EVENT AGE GROUP LIMITAT

ION

TIME LIMIT (May extend

by 5 min) DISTANCES/ COURSE REMARK

Board Relay

U/10 + U/11 16 teams 20

60 m buoys Team/ 3 U/12 + U/13 60 m buoys

U/14 + U/15 80 m buoys

Board Race

U/9 & U/10

16 10

60 m buoys Individual event

U/11 & U/12 60 m buoys

U/13 & U/14 80 m buoys

Iron Nipper

U/9 & U/10 Not for U/9, U/10, U/11 and U/12

U/11 & U/12

U/13 & U/14 16 20 80 m swim buoys Individual event

Open Water Swim

U/9 & U/10

32 15

60 m swim buoys

Individual event U/11 & U/12 60 m swim buoys

U/13 & U/14 80 m swim buoys

Run/Swim/Run

U/9 & U/10 Not for U/9 & U/10

U/11 & U/12 60 m buoys & 2 x 60 m

run Individual event

U/13 & U/14 80 m buoys & 2 x 70 m


Run/Swim/Run Relay

U/9 & U/10 32 15 60 m buoys & 2 x 50 m


U/11 & U/12 Not for U/11, U/12, U/13 & U/14

U/13 & U/14

Taplin Relay

U/9 & U/10

16 teams 20

400 m run, 60 m buoys. Team/ 4: Run/ Swim/Board

U/11 & U/12 400 m run, 60 m buoys

U/13 & U/14 400 m run, 80 m buoys.

Buoy Colours: Colours to be determined by the Chief Referee

Appendixes


APPENDIX 13: THERAPEUTIC USE EXEMPTION (TUE) APPLICATION FORM

Therapeutic Use Exemptions (TUE) APPLICATION FORM

Please complete all sections in capital letters or typing. Athlete to complete sections 1, 5, 6 and 7 and Physician to complete sections 2, 3 and 4. Illegible or incomplete applications will be returned and will need to be re-submitted in legible and complete form. 1. Athlete Information

Surname: ____________________________ Given Names: ______________________________ Female: _________ Male: _________ Date of Birth (dd/mm/yyyy): __________________________

Address: ______________________________________ City: ____________________________

Province: __________________________ Postal Code: _________________________________

Tel: Code: _______ Number: ____________________ E-Mail: _____________________________

If you are an Athlete with an impairment, please indicate the impairment:

________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________

2. Medical information (continue on separate sheet if necessary)

Diagnosis:

________________________________________________________________________________

If a permitted medication can be used to treat the medical condition, please provide clinical justification for the requested use of the prohibited medication: ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________ ________________________________________________________________________________

Appendixes


Note Diagnosis

Evidence confirming the diagnosis shall be attached and forwarded with this application. The medical evidence must include a comprehensive medical history and the results of all relevant examinations, laboratory investigations and imaging studies. Copies of the original reports or letters should be included when possible. Evidence should be as objective as possible in the clinical circumstances. In the case of non-demonstrable conditions, independent supporting medical opinion will assist this application.

3. Medication details

Prohibited Substance(s): Generic name

Dose Route of

Administration Frequency Duration of Treatment

1.

2.

3.

4. Medical practitioner's declaration

I certify that the information at sections 2 and 3 above is accurate, and that the above-mentioned treatment is medically appropriate. Name: ___________________________________________________________________________

Medical specialty: __________________________________________________________________

Address: _________________________________________________________________________

Tel.: __________________________________ Fax: ___________________________________

E-mail: ________________________________

Signature of Medical Practitioner: Date: _______________________________

Appendixes


5. Retroactive applications

Is this a retroactive application? Yes: □ No: □ If yes, on what date was treatment started?

Please indicate reason: Emergency treatment or treatment of an acute medical condition was necessary □ Due to other exceptional circumstances, there was insufficient time or opportunity to submit an application prior to sample collection □ Advance application not required under applicable rules □ Other □ Please explain: ___________________________________________________

___________________________________________________

___________________________________________________

6. Previous applications

Have you submitted any previous TUE application(s)? Yes: □ No: □ For which substance or method? ________________________________________________________________________________ To whom? _______________________________ When? __________________________________ Decision: Approved □ not approved □

Appendixes


7. Athlete's Declaration

I, ___________________________________, certify that the information set out at sections 1, 5 and 6 is accurate. I authorize the release of personal medical information to Drug Free Sport South Africa, the Anti-Doping Organization (ADO) as well as to WADA authorized staff, to the WADA TUEC (Therapeutic Use Exemption Committee) and to other ADO TUECs and authorized staff that may have a right to this information under the World Anti-Doping Code (“Code”) and/or the International Standard for Therapeutic Use Exemptions. I consent to my physician(s) releasing to the above persons any health information that they deem necessary in order to consider and determine my application. I understand that my information will only be used for evaluating my TUE request and in the context of potential anti-doping rule violation investigations and procedures. I understand that if I ever wish to (1) obtain more information about the use of my health information; (2) exercise my right of access and correction; or (3) revoke the right of these organizations to obtain my health information, I must notify my medical practitioner and my ADO in writing of that fact. I understand and agree that it may be necessary for TUE-related information submitted prior to revoking my consent to be retained for the sole purpose of establishing a possible anti-doping rule violation, where this is required by the Code. I consent to the decision on this application being made available to all ADOs, or other organizations, with Testing authority and/or results management authority over me. I understand and accept that the recipients of my information and of the decision on this application may be located outside the country where I reside. In some of these countries data protection and privacy laws may not be equivalent to those in my country of residence. I understand that if I believe that my Personal Information is not used in conformity with this consent and the International Standard for the Protection of Privacy and Personal Information, I can file a complaint to WADA or CAS. Athlete's signature: ___________________________________ Date: ________________________ Parent's/Guardian's signature: __________________________ Date: ________________________ (If the Athlete is a Minor or has an impairment preventing him/her signing this form, a Parent or Guardian shall sign on behalf of the Athlete)

Please submit the completed form to Lifesaving South Africa (LSA) by the following means (keeping a copy for your records): By mail: LIFESAVING SOUTH AFRICA 35 LIVINGSTONE ROAD DURBAN, 4001. By email: [email protected] By fax to: +32/ (0)16 89 60 60


Appendixes


APPENDIX 14: TRANSFER/ CLEARANCE APPLICATION FORM

LIFESAVING SOUTH AFRICA: CLUB TRANSFER APPLICATION FORM

APPLICANT (member leaving one club and desiring a transfer to another) - to complete this application for transfer of all membership rights and privileges in DUPLICATE; enter all relevant Member details, then submit original to the losing club, and forward duplicate to LSA.

Duplicate

To: LIFESAVING SOUTH AFRICA

35 LIVINGSTONE ROAD

DURBAN, 4001.

By email: [email protected]

MEMBER’S DETAILS

Name of member requesting a transfer/ clearance: __________________________________________

Award: (JLA or LA) _________ Date of Award: ____________________________________________

Name of “losing” Club: ____________________ Date of last JLA/ LA Retest: _____________________

Name of new Club: _________________ Region: _______________________________________

Date of submission of original form to “losing” Club: _________________________________________

Handed to: _________________________________________________________________________

Original to: “LOSING” CLUB

- to complete this section,

- then send signed original form to L.S.A. ([email protected])

- and send copy signed original form to Regional Association

Name of Club: ______________________________ Date of receipt of form: _____________________

Club’s decision: Refused/Granted

If applicable, reason for refusal: _________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________

Date of decision by club: ________________________ Decision taken by: ______________________

Signed: _____ _______________________Position: ___________________ Date: ________________

FOR OFFICIAL USE

Date of receipt of duplicate by LSA: ____________________________________________________

Date of receipt of signed ‘original’ form from “losing” club: ___________________________________


Appendixes


APPENDIX 15: COMPETITIVE TRANSFER/ CLEARANCE APPLICATION FORM

LIFESAVING SOUTH AFRICA COMPETITIVE TRANSFER/ CLEARANCE APPLICATION FORM

APPLICANT (member desiring competitive transfer, may hold dual membership) - to complete this application for transfer/ clearance in DUPLICATE; enter all relevant Member details, then submit original to the losing club, and forward duplicate to L.S.A.

Duplicate

To: LIFESAVING SOUTH AFRICA

35 LIVINGSTONE ROAD

DURBAN, 4001.

By email: [email protected]

MEMBER’S DETAILS

Name of member requesting a competitive transfer/ clearance: ________________________________

Award: (JLA or LA) ________________ Date of Award: _____________________________________

Name of present competitive club: ___________________ Region: ____________________________

Date of last LA Retest: ________________________________________________________________

Name of new competitive club: __________________ ___Region: ____________________________

Date of submission of original form to “present competitive club: _______________________________

Handed to: _________________________________________________________________________

Original to: “PRESENT” CLUB

- to complete this section,

- then send signed original form to L.S.A. ([email protected])

- and send copy signed original form to Regional Association

Name of Club: ____________________ Date of receipt of form: ________________________________

Club’s decision: Refused/Granted

If applicable, reason for refusal: _________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

Date of decision by club: _____________________ Decision taken by: _________________________

Signed: ____ _______________________Position: ___________________ Date: ________________

FOR OFFICIAL USE

Date of receipt of duplicate by LSA: ____________________________________________________

Date of receipt of signed ‘original’ form from “losing” club: ___________________________________


Appendixes


APPENDIX 16: CLUB CODES

AMZ Amanzimtoti Surf Lifesaving Club

AST Ansteys Surf Lifesaving Club

AMR Aqua Martina Lifesaving Club

AFL Aquafin Ladysmith Lifesaving Club

ALC Aquamix Lifesaving Club

ASC Arena Surf Lifesaving Club

BLV Belville Lifesaving Club

BNH Benoni High Lifesaving Club

BIG Big Bay Surf Lifesaving Club

BFL Blackfin Lifesaving Club

BMF Bloemfontein Lifesaving Club

BOB Blouberg Surf Lifesaving Club

BLB Bluewater Bay Surf Lifesaving Club

BKH Boksburg High School

BKB Boksburg Lifesaving Club

BKP Brakpan Swimming Club

CPT City of Cape Town Lifeguard Club

JOL City of Johannesburg Lifesaving Club

CLF Clifton Surf Lifesaving Club

DOL Dolphins Surf Life Saving Club

DUC Durban Central Lifesaving Club

DUF Durban Freshwater Lifesaving Club

DUL Durban Lifeguards

DUR Durban Surf Life Saving Club

ELN East London Surf Lifesaving Club

ETV East Transvaal

EBL Eastern Beach Surf Lifesaving Club

EEN Edenvale LSC

EIL Ellispark Lifesaving Club

EML Empangeni Lifesaving Club

FLB False Bay Surf Lifesaving Club

FTL Fast Track Surf Lifesaving Club

FHK Fish Hoek Surf Lifesaving Club

FRQ Flash ResQ Lifesaving Club

FER Forever Resorts Lifesaving Club

FLC Fossil Surf Lifesaving Club

GRD Gered Life Saving Club

GRM Germiston Life Saving Club

GBL Great Brak Surf Lifesaving Club

HLD Hardy's Llandudno Surf Life Saving Club

HLC Harties Reflections Lifesaving Club

HSL Hessequa Surf Lifesaving Club

HBL Hobie Surf Lifesaving Club

JBL Jeffreys Bay Surf Lifesaving Club

JFL JF Life Saving Club

JPT JPTSR Lifesaving Club

KWH Killer Whales Lifesaving Club

KBC Kings Beach Surf Lifesaving Club

KSC Knysna Surf Lifesaving Club

KGB Kogelbay Surf Lifesaving Club

KRA Kroonstad Aqua Lifesaving Club

LDN Linden Lifesaving Club

LAD Llandudno Surf Lifesaving Club

MSC Macassar Surf Lifesaving Club

MAQ Mantas Aquatic Lifesaving Club

MNG Manuang Lifesaving Club

MRG Margate Saints Surf Lifesaving Club

MAR Marine Surf Lifesaving Club

MNL Marlin Surf Lifesaving Club

MBO Mbotyi Surf Lifesaving Club

MLE Milnerton Surf Lifesaving Club

MND Mnandi Surf Lifesaving Club

MWB Monwabisi Surf Lifesaving Club

MOS Mosselbay Surf Lifesaving Club

MSK Msikaba Surf Lifesaving Club

MZB Mzamba Surf Lifesaving Club

NBR New Brighton Surf Lifesaving Club

NWC Newcastle Life Saving Club

NWC Newcastle Swimming and Life Saving

NML Nine Miles Surf Lifesaving Club

NYL Nyandi Surf Lifesaving Club

OLC Outeniqua Surf Lifesaving Club

PRL Park Rynie Surf Lifesaving Club

PEL Pellsrus Surf Lifesaving Club

PLT Plett Surf Lifesaving Club

POJ Port St. Johns Surf Lifesaving Club

PRG Pretoria Girls High School Lifesaving Club

PRE Pretoria Lifesaving Club

PST Professional Swim Teachers and Coaches

RRS Rapid Rescue Lifesaving Club

RLC Reunion Aquatic Surf Lifesaving Club

RCB Richards Bay Surf Lifesaving Club

SNT Saints Surf Life Saving Club

SBL Sardinia Bay Surf Lifesaving Club

SCB Scottburgh Surf Lifesaving Club

SGL Seagulls Surf Lifesaving Club

SEN Senathla Lifesaving Club

SIM Simo Acedemy Life Saving Club

PVR Sir Pierre Van Ryneveld Lifesaving Club

SCR Southern Cross Surf Lifesaving Club

SOT Soweto Sharks Lifesaving Club

Appendixes


SRG Springs Aquatics

SGG St-Georges Surf Life Saving Club

STN Strand Surf Lifesaving Club

STF Strandfontein Surf Life Saving Club

SMS Summerstrand Surf Lifesaving Club

SUN Sun City Lifesaving Club

PIR Suncoast Pirates Surf Lifesaving Club

SNK Sunkist Surf Lifesaving Club

TKW Thekwini Surf Lifesaving Club

TUX Tuks Lifesaving Club

UMG Umgazi Dolphin Surf Lifesaving Club

ROX Umhlanga Rocks Surf Lifesaving Club

UTV Umtavuma Surf Lifesaving Club

UMZ Umzimvubu Lifesaving Club

WDN Warnerdoone Surf Lifesaving Club

WKM Welkom Life Saving Club

WPV Western Province Lifesaving

WLS Winkelspruit Surf Lifesaving Club

WRC Woodridge Surf Lifesaving Club

XLC X-Stream Surf Lifesaving Club

As per the ILS Register of Clubs around the World

COMPETITION MANUAL 16th EDITION

Documents